You don’t have permission to access “http://food.ndtv.com/health/believe-it-or-not-this-fruit-has-more-vitamin-c-than-lemons-and-oranges-3939021” on this server.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-09-16/Dozens-killed-as-Israel-mounts-major-ground-offensive-in-Gaza-City-1GIEDjngPWo/img/a5ff8c9abb3a451b874c126e7abd01a4/a5ff8c9abb3a451b874c126e7abd01a4.png' alt='Displaced Palestinians flee northern Gaza along the coastal road toward the south after Israel's military says its expanded operation has begun, Gaza Strip, September 16, 2025. /VCG'
The Israel Defense Forces (IDF) said on Tuesday it launched a “large-scale ground operation” in Gaza City on the night of September 15, as local officials reported heavy strikes in the biggest urban center that left dozens dead or missing.
The army said it had urged civilians to leave in recent days, but hundreds of thousands of the city’s roughly one million residents – many already displaced multiple times – are believed to remain. Many residents indicated that the high cost of moving, the perilous journey, and immobility caused by illness or disability were the main reasons they remained in the city instead of fleeing.
WAFA, the official Palestinian news agency, said at least 53 Palestinians were killed by Israeli gunfire and airstrikes across the Gaza Strip since dawn, most of them in Gaza City.
According to an IDF spokesperson, troops advanced “gradually, with heavy fire to support the forces.” Around 10 p.m., units from the 98th and 162nd Armored Divisions entered Gaza City under the cover of extensive airstrikes, with the 36th Division expected to join in the coming days to “encircle Gaza City from all sides.”
The military said about 130,000 reservists are being mobilized, a process due to be completed within days.
Israel’s Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu, speaking at the opening of his corruption trial in Tel Aviv, called the operation “intense” and said, “The state of Israel is at a critical stage in this struggle, and there are consequences.” His plan to seize control of Gaza City, announced last month, has drawn international criticism.
Israel has massed forces for weeks in preparation for what Netanyahu and other officials have described as a major ground and air offensive to “conquer” Gaza City.
Military spokesman Avichay Adraee on social media platform X called Gaza City “a dangerous combat zone,” warning civilians that staying “puts you at risk.” He said the IDF had begun dismantling Hamas infrastructure and noted that more than 40 percent of residents had fled in recent weeks.
Defense Minister Israel Katz added on Tuesday, “Gaza is burning,” vowing that the military would strike Hamas “with an iron fist. We will not relent, and we will not turn back until the mission is completed.”
U.S. offers support, EU plans new sanctions
In launching the assault, Israel’s government defied European leaders threatening sanctions and ignored warnings from some of its own military commanders that the operation could be a costly mistake. Meanwhile, Washington appeared to offer its backing, conveyed by U.S. Secretary of State Marco Rubio.
Hours before the escalation, Rubio offered backing at a press conference alongside Netanyahu. While the U.S. wished for a diplomatic end to the war, “we have to be prepared for the possibility that’s not going to happen”, he said.
In Brussels, a spokesperson for the European Commission said the EU would agree on Wednesday to impose new sanctions on Israel, including the suspension of certain trade provisions.
“The EU has consistently urged Israel not to intensify its operation in Gaza City,” EU spokesperson Anouar El Anouni said. “A military intervention will lead to more destruction, more death and more displacement, and we have been clear that this will also aggravate the already catastrophic humanitarian situation and also endangers the lives of hostages,” he said.
British Foreign Secretary Yvette Cooper called the assault “reckless and appalling” and called for an immediate ceasefire. Britain and France are expected this month to become the first major Western powers to recognize Palestinian independence.
The United Nations High Commissioner for Human Rights Volker Türk on Tuesday condemned Israel’s ground assault on Gaza City as “totally and utterly unacceptable” and demanded an end to the “carnage.”
Israeli opposition leader Yair Lapid criticized Netanyahu’s decision to launch the invasion, calling his conduct “amateurish and sloppy.” In an interview with Ynet, Lapid questioned the lack of a clear plan for Gaza’s future, the fate of Israeli hostages, and an exit strategy from the war.
Separately, the Palestinian Islamic Resistance Movement (Hamas) on Tuesday criticized U.S. President Donald Trump’s remarks on the situation in Gaza and Israeli hostages, calling them “blatant bias toward Israeli propaganda” and “double standards.”
The mechanism has five steps
| Photo Credit:
iStockphoto
7
Central Board of Direct Taxes, the apex policy making body for Personal Income Tax and Corporate Tax has urged field formations to follow ‘Kolkata Model’ for assessing Capital Gains on Joint Development Agreements (JDAs).
This issue is critical because post implementation of the Finance Act 2017, a new section (45-5A) has been added to the Income Tax Act. Accordingly, capital gains are now chargeable to tax as income of the previous year in which the certificate of completion for the whole or part of the project is issued by the competent authority. The full value of consideration is deemed to be the stamp duty value of the landowner’s share in the project on the date the completion certificate is issued, along with any monetary consideration received.
Kolkata Model for joint development agreements
In an office memorandum, the board has highlighted the best practices adopted by Kollkata charge. The systematic and effective methodology aims to identify potential cases under Section 45(5A) of the Income Tax Act. The process leverages publicly available information from regulatory bodies and cross-references it with tax returns.
Five-Step process
The mechanism has five steps. The first step involves accessing the websites of the Real Estate Regulatory Authority (RERA) or the Housing Industry Regulation Act (HIRA) for their respective states or any other relevant sources of information. These websites contain a wealth of information, including lists of registered and approved projects.
Second step is related with identifying relevant projects under JDA where the landowners are individuals or HUFs. This is done by scrutinizing the project details and related documents ( e.g., IDA/Development Agreements) available on the regulatory websites. Third step is about cross-referencing with tax returns. Once a potential case is identified, the next step is to download the copy of the tax return from the official portal for the year in which the completion certificate was issued.
Fourth step deals with verifying capital gains disclosure. Here the Schedule-CG (Capital Gains) in the tax return is then checked to ensure the landowner has disclosed the required capital gains as per the provisions of Section 45(5A). Finally, under the fifth step, if the landowner has not disclosed the capital gains, a summon is issued to seek their version and gather supporting documentary evidence.
Towards a Pan-India system
“The above method allowed the investigation directorate to proactively identify cases of non- compliance rather than relying on chance or third-party information. The successful model implemented in the Kolkata Charge can be adopted as a standard operating procedure on a pan- India level to effectively monitor and assess capital gains under Section 45(5A),” CBDT said.
Earlier, last year, the Investigation Division of CBDT requested field formations for identification of the competent authority responsible for issuing occupancy-cum-completion certificates within each jurisdiction and collection of data for the last three financial years (FY 2021-22, 2022-23, and 2023-24). It was also requested obtaining details on the number of completion certificates issued during this period, reviewing the format in which such data is maintained by the competent authority, and assessing the feasibility of integrating this data with the Income Tax Department’s systems. Following this, the Kolkata charge conducted the required investigation and submitted its report which the board called as best practice.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
SAMA pomisao na ljubičastu sofu kod mnogih će izazvati nelagodu, što je razumljivo nakon duge vladavine bež, sive i bijele boje u interijerima. Ipak, čini se da se trendovi mijenjaju jer sve veći broj dizajnera i vlasnika domova prihvaća upravo ovu boju, piše Livingetc. Ljubičasta je proglašena jednim od najvećih trendova boja za sofe ove sezone.
Prema dizajneru interijera Gregu Nataleu, razlog je dvostruk: “Porast neutralnih pozadina koje zahtijevaju odvažnu žarišnu točku i povratak udobnih formi inspiriranih 70-ima”, kaže on. “Vidjeli smo pomak od šarenih tepiha uparenih s krem ili sivim sjedećim garniturama prema neutralnim podovima i tepisima sa sofama kao nositeljem boje”.
Zašto su ljubičaste sofe u trendu?
Prema dizajneru Gregu Nataleu, povratak ljubičaste u dnevne boravke dugo se očekivao. “Ljubičasta je godinama bila u teškoj kategoriji, često zanemarena jer je bila nezgodna ili nelaskava”, dijeli on. “Sada vidimo ove prekrasne, sofisticirane nijanse ljubičaste poput boje sljeza, šljive i lavande koje djeluju elegantno i slojevito”.
Nekoliko godina nakon pandemije, kada su naši domovi morali biti ogoljena i gotovo klinički čista utočišta, trendovi su se okrenuli prema nečemu puno zaigranijem. Današnji domovi odišu karakterom, šarmom i, što je najvažnije, bojom.
“Posljednjih godina bilježimo ogroman porast upotrebe boje lavande, sljeza i dubokih tonova šljive u domu”, potvrđuje Nicky Emlick, kreativna direktorica u tvrtki sofa.com. “Ove nijanse nude dramu i bezvremenski glamur ljubičaste bez preopterećenja prostora”.
Tu je, naravno, i utjecaj paleta boja iz 70-ih, vjerojatno najdominantnijeg trenda godine. “Određene nijanse ljubičaste, poput boje patlidžana, kvintesencija su tog doba”, napominje Greg. No, možda je pravi razlog popularnosti ljubičastih sofa jednostavniji – njezina svestranost.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
“Ljubičasta je dobar izbor jer ima rijetku sposobnost premošćivanja i toplih i hladnih paleta”, dodaje Greg. “Prekrasno se slaže sa zemljanim tonovima poput terakote i maslinaste, ali također izgleda nevjerojatno uz sive, plave i metalik boje”.
Kako pravilno stilizirati ljubičastu sofu?
Niste sigurni kako ljubičasti sofu savršeno uklopiti u svoj prostor? Ovo su četiri ključna elementa koja biste prema Gregu i Nicky trebali uzeti u obzir.
1. Rasvjeta
Ljubičaste sofe osjetljivije su na svjetlost.
“Pri jakom dnevnom svjetlu, ljubičasta djeluje sjajno i dimenzionalno, ali u tamnijim uvjetima može djelovati teško ili ravno”, kaže Greg. “Moj savjet svima koji razmišljaju o ljubičastoj sofi je da se pobrinu da soba ima puno prirodnog svjetla i da odaberu tkaninu koja pojačava boju. Preporučujem rezani baršun za dubinu ili teksturirane bukle tkanine za mekoću”.
2. Presvlake
Ključ za dojam sofe bez napora leži u presvlakama.
“Duboki, dramatični tonovi poput patlidžana i šljive prekrasno su naglašeni plišanim baršunom, koji pojačava njihovu bogatstvo i dodaje raskošan, draguljasti sjaj”, kaže Nicky. Za moderniji pristup, predlaže lan umjesto baršuna.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
“Suptilna tekstura i organsko tkanje donose profinjenu, nenametljivu eleganciju. Za razliku od sjajnijih tkanina, mat završna obrada lana daje ovim nijansama mekan, suvremen rub”.
3. Oblik
Oblik je presudan kada su u pitanju ljubičaste sofe.
“Odaberite organsku, suvremenu siluetu sofe koja je niska ili nježno zaobljena kako bi boja djelovala aktualno”, savjetuje Greg. “Glomazan ili tradicionalan okvir u ljubičastoj boji može djelovati pretjerano kičasto.”
4. Ravnoteža
“Uparite sofu sa svijetlim, prozračnim elementima kako boja ne bi dominirala prostorijom”, kaže Greg. “Neutralni zidovi, prirodne teksture, metalni akcenti i zrcalne površine pomažu ljubičastoj da diše u prostoru, djelujući namjerno, a ne da strši”.
“Ljudi ponovno prihvaćaju slojevite, zagasite interijere, a boja je veliki dio toga”, zaključuje Greg. “Sofe postaju manje siguran, neutralan izbor, a više izjava koja može postaviti ton cijeloj prostoriji”.
Naravno, ne morate mijenjati cijelu sofu da biste se priključili ovom trendu. Ljubičasta navlaka za sofu napravit će jednako dobar posao.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
If only it hadn’t come with such disastrous consequences.
In the middle of the fifth inning Tuesday night, Shohei Ohtani returned to the Dodgers’ dugout after a clean inning of work on the mound. Waiting for him at the top step was manager Dave Roberts, wanting to ask how he felt after only his second five-inning start of the season.
With any other pitcher, what happened next would have been simple.
Over his five innings against the Philadelphia Phillies, Ohtani had not given up a hit. He had thrown only 68 pitches. And he was flashing the kind of dominance that would have made a no-hitter feel like a real possibility.
With any other pitcher, Roberts would have extended the leash.
Ohtani, however, is not like any other pitcher.
He is a two-way star, coming off a second career Tommy John surgery, who has been managed with kid gloves and bubblewrap in his return to pitching duties this year. He started his comeback by pitching one inning, then two, then so on until he built up to five. Weeks ago, the team — in consultation with team doctors, Ohtani’s agent and the reigning MVP himself — decided to avoid pushing him past the five-inning mark until at least October.
His health, both on the bump and at the plate, remains the priority.
Thus, while Ohtani told Roberts he still felt good, Roberts said he never had any thought of sending him out for the sixth. His question, he later explained, was only to ascertain information for future decision-making over Ohtani’s workload. As far as Tuesday was concerned?
“He wasn’t gonna go back out,” Roberts said.
By not sending Ohtani back out, of course, the Dodgers rolled the dice with their ever-faulty bullpen. And in one of the group’s worst performances this year, they yielded nine runs over the next four innings in a gut-punch of a 9-6 defeat.
“We’ve been very steadfast in every situation as far as innings for [Ohtani’s] usage — from one inning to two innings to three to four to five. We haven’t deviated from that,” Roberts said.
“I was trying to get his pulse for going forward, where he’s at, continuing to go to the sixth inning. And he says, ‘Feel OK.’ So that was good. But I’m not gonna have a plan for five innings, and then he pitches well and say, ‘Hey, now you’re gonna go six innings.’ He’s too important. And if something happens, then that’s on me for changing it, and we haven’t done that all year.”
After pulling Ohtani with a four-run lead, the Dodgers watched their relief corps melt down in predictable, reminiscent fashion. Justin Wrobleski gave up five consecutive hits with one out in the sixth, including a three-run home run to Brandon Marsh that broke open the inning. Edgardo Henriquez made matters worse, replacing Wrobleski — amid a chorus of boos directed at Roberts — later in the inning only to give up another long ball to Max Kepler.
By the time it was over, the Phillies had scored six runs to take the lead. And though the Dodgers would battle back to tie the score in the eighth, the bullpen faltered again in the ninth, when Blake Treinen gave up a decisive three-run, two-out home run to Rafael Marchán in the Phillies’ eventual 9-6 win.
For the five innings Tuesday, Ohtani displayed utter dominance against the only team to have already clinched a division title.
His fastball was playing up, eclipsing 100 mph seven times and topping out at 101.7 mph. His secondary stuff was electric, a mix of sliders and sweepers and curveballs and splitters that kept the Phillies off balance and able to make only benign contact.
After a two-out walk to Bryce Harper in the first inning, Ohtani retired the final 13 he faced. He got only six total whiffs, but was more pitch-efficient because of it, with his 68 throws coming in 19 shy of his previous season-high (he threw 87 pitches in his only other full five-inning start on Aug. 27).
That’s why, once Ohtani raced back toward the dugout to transition from pitcher to hitter in the middle of the fifth, his removal wasn’t a foregone conclusion. Why, after Roberts conversed with Ohtani from the top step, he found first baseman Freddie Freeman laughing at him back on the bench, sensing the stressfulness of his manager’s decision (which represented the ninth time in Roberts’ Dodgers tenure he had pulled a pitcher from a no-hitter in the fifth inning or later).
By that point, of course, the game shouldn’t have been in danger either way.
The Dodgers had scored three runs in the second inning on home runs from Alex Call and Kiké Hernández. They added another in the fourth off Phillies left-hander Cristopher Sánchez, handing the Cy Young contender just his fourth start this season of more than three earned runs.
But then, a bullpen that had been burned repeatedly in recent weeks (including in a 10-inning loss in the opening game of this series Monday night) played with fire again.
Wrobleski, a rookie left-hander who had been one of the Dodgers’ better relievers of late, had Rafael Marchán break up the no-no with a one-out single, Harrison Bader and Kyle Schwarber to load the bases with two more hits after that, Harper to gap a double that brought two runs across, and Marsh to go deep on a hanging 0-2 slider for a go-ahead three-run shot.
Henriquez, another rookie who had been sharp in limited action this year, yielded another home run to Kepler two batters later.
Just like that, it was 6-4 Phillies.
Ohtani helped the Dodgers get back in the game with his bat. In the eighth, he clobbered a leadoff home run deep to right field for his 50th long ball of the season, making him just the sixth player in MLB history with consecutive 50-homer campaigns.
The Dodgers kept the rally going after that, loading the bases for Call to hit a tying sacrifice fly.
Alas, the Dodgers’ bullpen did what it does best once more in the ninth, coming unglued at the worst possible moment.
After getting two quick outs to start the inning, Treinen gave up a double to Weston Wilson (the No. 7 hitter who entered with a .202 average). He fell behind 3-and-0 to Bryson Stott (the No. 8 hitter) to trigger an intentional walk. Then, in a 3-and-1 count to Marchán (the No. 9 hitter and backup catcher for the Phillies), he served up an inside cutter that Marchán pulled down the line, getting just enough behind it to send it bouncing off the top of the short right-field wall.
Nine painful runs, in four miserable innings of Dodgers relief.
Another loss, that wasted Ohtani’s no-hit (but short-lived) masterpiece.
Xiaomi Smart QLED TV G32 Review: Recently, Xiaomi has added a new television to its 32-inch category with the launch of Smart QLED TV G32 in the Indian market. Priced under Rs 14,000, the company touts an impressive list of features — including quantum clarity, true cinematic colours, vivid picture quality, eye care mode, Dolby audio, a quad-core processor for peak performance, 8GB of storage, 1GB of RAM, and much more. But are these features just good on paper, or does the TV actually stand out in real-world usage? Let’s find out in this review.
Xiaomi Smart QLED TV G32 Review: Design
The Xiaomi Smart QLED TV G32 2025 has a similar kind of design to the company’s high-end X Pro QLED series, but it comes in a 32-inch size. It is compact, lightweight, and easy to handle, making it simple for one person to mount it on a wall or carry it between rooms. If you prefer a tabletop setup, the plastic stands (which are included in the box) are sturdy enough, keeping the TV stable without any wobble.
In terms of connectivity, the TV includes all the essentials for a budget-friendly setup: two HDMI ports, two USB 2.0 ports, AV input, Ethernet, a 3.5mm headphone jack, and an antenna input.
Add Zee Business as a Preferred Source
Xiaomi Smart QLED TV G32 Review: Remote
Xiaomi has also taken the remote from its X Pro series. This means you get a full number pad, a dedicated Google Assistant button, and six hotkeys for quick access to popular streaming platforms like Netflix, Prime Video, Disney+ Hotstar, YouTube, SonyLIV, and live TV. It also includes shortcuts for Xiaomi TV+ and PatchWall.
Xiaomi Smart QLED TV G32 Review: Display
The Xiaomi Smart QLED TV G32 may only offer a 1366×768 HD-ready resolution, but for a 32-inch screen, the lack of Full HD isn’t a major drawback—especially at typical viewing distances. Its VA-type LCD panel with a quantum dot layer delivers solid performance for the price, with deep blacks, decent contrast, and vibrant colours. HDR playback is handled surprisingly well, with good control over highlights and shadow details. Xiaomi claims 90% DCI-P3 colour gamut coverage, and the results show—especially in ‘Movie’ mode—though out-of-the-box tuning can push skin tones toward a reddish hue.
As expected from a VA panel, viewing angles are a bit limited, with some colour washout when viewed from the sides. Still, the display remains visually punchy for everyday use. The standard 60Hz refresh rate is adequate for streaming and casual gaming, and the TV handles both 24fps movies and higher frame-rate gameplay smoothly, without noticeable motion issues.
Xiaomi Smart QLED TV G32 Review: Audio Performance
The Xiaomi Smart QLED TV G32 has a 20W speaker system that delivers decent sound for its segment, but doesn’t offer anything special beyond the basic features. For everyday content consumption in small to medium-sized spaces, the audio is adequately balanced, and dialogue remains clear for the most part. For general use like streaming shows, watching YouTube, or watching movies, the built-in speakers will satisfy most users. But if you want a more immersive or cinematic sound experience, pairing the TV with a basic soundbar or external speaker system is definitely recommended. All in all, the audio performance is near average.
Xiaomi Smart QLED TV G32 Review: Performance
Powering the Xiaomi Smart QLED TV G32 is a quad-core Cortex-A53 processor, coupled with a Mali-G31 MP2 GPU, 1GB of RAM, and 8GB of internal storage. In practice, around half of that storage is occupied by the system, leaving just enough room for the core apps and a few extras.
For everyday use, performance is generally reliable. App load times are moderate, and the interface runs smoothly as long as you’re not pushing it too hard with multitasking. It’s not the fastest TV in its class, but it handles casual streaming, browsing, and general navigation without any major hiccups.
Xiaomi Smart QLED TV G32 Review: Things That We Feel Could Have Been Better
To sum up, here are a few things that we feel could have been better:
HD-ready resolution limits sharpness compared to Full HD.
VA panel offers limited viewing angles with colour washout from the sides.
20W speakers deliver average sound with limited bass.
Only ~4GB usable storage restricts app space.
The PatchWall interface feels cluttered and lacks polish.
Ever thought of planning a trip just to watch the stars? A few years ago, my son and I set up our telescope under a dark sky, and it felt like the universe had rolled out a welcome mat just for us. In the city, stars hide behind lights and smog, but in a remote spot, the Milky Way stretches like spilt silver across the sky, and meteors streak past like cosmic fireworks. Stargazing has become a way to travel, camp, and explore the cosmos all at once. Pachmarhi in August shows the Milky Way like nothing else, and the Rann of Kutch in winter turns into a meteor shower stage where the sky feels endless.
Nishant Gor enjoys the endless skies of Rann of Kutch, where the Milky Way and meteor showers light up winter nights.(Nishant Gor (Stargazing India))
The lure of dark skies
Light pollution blurs the stars in most cities and makes the sky feel flat. Step into a dark-sky location and suddenly every star pops and constellations snap into focus. It is like switching from a blurry photograph to a high-definition image. Stargazing has become a travel trend because it slows you down. You lie on a blanket, point a telescope at Saturn or distant nebulae and just breathe. Watching meteors streak across the sky feels like the universe is giving you a wink.
India’s celestial hotspots for astro tourism
Rann of Kutch, Gujarat.
HT Lifestyle asked Nishant Gor from Stargazing India about his favourite stargazing spot. He said, “The white salt flats stretch forever, and the sky opens wide above you. Kutch is my number one spot for stargazing. I love how there is endless space to set up my gear and no obstructions to block the view. The Milky Way arcs over the horizon and meteor showers streak past in winter. Telescopes reveal rings, moons, and craters like never before.”
Pachmarhi, Madhya Pradesh.
August brings the clearest skies over this plateau. It is quiet, it is calm, and the Milky Way feels close enough to touch. Families and amateur astronomers can set up telescopes and watch the universe put on a show.
Spiti Valley, Himachal Pradesh.
Remote villages sit high in the mountains, and city lights cannot reach them. The night sky is crisp and clear. You can see the Milky Way glow and nebulae shimmer. Each night feels like an invitation to explore the deep sky.
Coorg, Karnataka.
In the south, Coorg has clear skies at the right seasons. Hilltops and coffee plantations make for peaceful stargazing spots. Binoculars or small telescopes uncover planets and constellations in a calm, cosy setting.
Uttarakhand, Himalayas.
With its high altitude and crisp mountain air, Uttarakhand opens up some of the clearest skies in India. Pruthu Vanara, a 23-year-old astro-photographer, told HT Lifestyle, “At higher altitudes, the clarity is breathtaking. You can see deep-sky objects like the Andromeda Galaxy and the Orion Nebula with exceptional detail.” Warm clothing is essential as the temperature drops quickly at night. A star chart or stargazing apps make the experience easier to follow, and telescopes or binoculars take you deeper into the cosmos.
Phases of the moon captured at Haldwani, Uttarakhand(Harshwardhan Pathak)
Essential tips for the first-time stargazer
Plan your trip around a new moon. A full moon makes the sky too bright and washes out faint stars and the Milky Way. Apps like SkyView or Star Walk can show moon phases well in advance.
Even in warm regions, nights under open skies can get chilly. Bring a jacket, hat, and warm socks. Sitting still for hours can feel colder than expected.
Lie down on a blanket or sit on a camping chair. It makes long stargazing sessions comfortable and keeps your eyes steady on the sky.
Red light preserves night vision while still helping you move around safely. White light can ruin your dark adaptation in seconds.
Binoculars are your friend
You don’t need an expensive telescope to enjoy the sky. Even small binoculars reveal craters, moons, and brighter nebulae.
Start with constellations
Learn a few key constellations first. Orion, Ursa Major, and the Southern Cross are easy to find and will help orient you.
Stargazing can take a few hours. Having some light snacks and water keeps you comfortable without disturbing your night.
Clear skies are everything. Check local forecasts and avoid nights with clouds or high humidity.
Stargazing is not just looking at stars. It is stepping into awe, exploring planets, and wandering across the Milky Way. With the right location, a telescope, or even just a blanket, the universe opens up. Next time you plan a getaway, pack your curiosity along with some warm clothes and a flashlight because the cosmos is ready for you.
Similar articles for you
Andaman’s untouched charms: A guide to your mindful island escape
Forget safaris: At Kolkata’s hidden zoo gem, watch exotic wildlife up close!
Tropic of Cancer, one of Bhopal’s underrated gems: Scenic drive you cannot miss
Disney Cruise is coming to Asia! A deep dive to help you get on board!
Chasing the Monsoon: Five Epic Indian Train Journeys Through the Rain-Kissed Countryside
One of the best films of a generation that left theatre goers in tears as they left the cinema is available to watch in the comfort of your home.
While some war films like 1917 or Hacksaw Ridge keep you on the edge of your seat with cinematic depictions of the trenches, with each bullet and mortar making your nerves twitch, others take a look at what was happening far from the front line.
Taking a look at just as devastating a story, 2002’s The Pianist stars two-time Academy Award winner Adrian Brody in his first Oscar-winning performance as Władysław Szpilman.
The film is based on Szpilman’s autobiographical book of the same name, released in 1946.
His memoir follows his life as a Polish-Jewish pianist and composer in Warsaw during the Nazi occupation of Poland. From being forced into a Jewish Ghetto to being separated from his family, who are sent to Treblinka concentration camp, he then hides around various places in Warsaw, slowly starving until the Soviet offensive reaches Poland in 1945.
A truly moving piece of cinema, the film was extremely well-received upon its release. At the 2003 Oscars, it scooped three wins for Best Director, Best Actor and Best Adapted Screenplay, while being nominated for four more categories, including Best Picture.
For the role, Brody pushed himself to the limit, committing to method acting, he began a near-starvation diet, losing 30lbs and dropping his body weight to just over nine stone.
To keep his starving physique well filmed, he wouldn’t eat and “barely drank water”. To give him time to prepare, the film was shot backwards, allowing him to gain weight throughout the filming.
For the role, Brody took on a near-starvation diet and lost 30 lbs., dropping his weight to 129 lbs. The actor was said to be “barely drinking water” when they started filming the movie, which was shot in reverse, showing Szpilman at his most depleted.
Directed by Roman Polanski, alongside Brody, the cast includes strong performances from Thomas Kretschmann, Maureen Lipman and Emilia Fox.
The film was a hit with audiences too, on Rotten Tomatoes it earned a “Certified Fresh” score of 95% and 96% on its popcornmeter while also being rated as the 45th best film ever according to IMDB scores.
On the website, one reviewer wrote: “A master work on humanity vs. inhumanity, on the resilience and mercy of art, and on the personal horrors brought on by one of the world’s darkest events.”
While another added: “Deserves its place in the annals of the great historical movies. Movies that offer us a fleeting glance into a different time, a different community, and at its core, an individual’s incredible experience.”
The film is available to stream with a subscription to Studio Canal Presents or is available to rent on Amazon Prime or Apple TV.
Geely Auto Australia has finally released pricing for its new Starray EM-i plug-in hybrid (PHEV) SUV, which is one of the most affordable PHEVs on sales in Australia.
The 2026 Geely Starrary EM-i will commence deliveries from October 1, 2025, with prices starting from just $37,490 before on-road costs for the entry-level Complete grade. That makes the Starray $3500-$4000 cheaper than the equivalent EX5 EV.
Further, the Chinese company is launching with a ‘Premium Offer’, giving buyers the choice of either a 3.88 per cent comparison rate or a three-year (or 45,000km) free scheduled servicing pack; plus a Mode 2 home charging cable and complimentary premium paint.
Customers who place their order before September 30 and take delivery by November 30 can additionally receive a discount matching their deposit contribution up to $1000.
CarExpert can save you thousands on a new car. Click here to get a great deal.
All versions of the Starray EM-i are powered by what Geely calls a ‘Super Hybrid’ system, combining a 1.5-litre petrol engine with an electric motor and lithium iron phosphate (LFP) battery pack.
Specifications
Geely Starray EM-i
Engine
1.5L 4cyl petrol
Engine outputs
73kW + 125Nm
Electric motor outputs
160kW + 262Nm
System outputs
193kW
Battery
18.4kWh LFP
Max AC charge rate
6.6kW
Max DC charge rate
30kW
Transmission
1-speed Dedicated Hybrid Transmission
Drive type
Front-wheel drive
0-100km/h time
8.0 seconds
Fuel economy (claimed)
2.4L/100km
Energy consumption
14.7kWh/100km
Electric driving range (WLTP)
83km
Combined range (WLTP)
943km
Fuel tank capacity
51L
Fuel requirement
95 octane premium unleaded
CO2 emissions
54g/km
Emissions standard
Euro 6e
Tare mass
1699-1739kg
Additionally, the Starray EM-i offers vehicle-to-load (V2L) and vehicle-to-vehicle capability with an output of 6kW.
Recent data shows across 60 Tier 2 & 3 cities, housing sales rose 20% y-o-y, with value of sales jumping. These cities now account for half of all land acquisitions by developers
Even in Tier 2 cities, rapid price rises mean affordability is shifting upward. Entry-level homes may still be affordable now, but continuous gains will push them out of reach for many.
India’s real estate landscape is undergoing a tectonic shift. Metro cities, which were once the go-to option for housing investment, are increasingly being outshone by Tier 2 and Tier 3 cities. Places like Lucknow, Indore, Jaipur, Bhubaneswar, Coimbatore, Patna, and Kanpur are seeing dramatic growth in property values.
The primary drivers are affordability, better infrastructure, increasing connectivity, and rising demand from homebuyers and investors searching for better living standards without metro-level costs.
Recent data shows that across 60 Tier 2 & 3 cities, housing sales rose 20% year-on-year, with value of sales jumping dramatically. These cities now account for nearly half of all land acquisitions by developers—an indicator that market sentiment and capital are actively shifting beyond traditional metros. (Land acquisitions by developers in non-metro cities now make up about 44% of the total in many reports.)
In another report, average capital appreciation in Tier-II cities is pegged at 17.6% year-on-year, significantly higher than many metro markets. Cities like Lucknow (23–24%), Indore (22–23%), Jaipur (21%), and Bhubaneswar (19.5%) are often cited as outperforming metro peers in terms of property price gains. Meanwhile, metros like Delhi, Mumbai and Chennai are registering lower rates of appreciation in many comparisons.
Why Is This Surge Happening?
Multiple interlocked reasons explain why property is booming in Tier 2 and 3 cities:
Infrastructure & Connectivity
New roads, highways, better rail networks, and improved air connectivity are shrinking the travel and time gap between smaller cities and metros. Government schemes for urban planning and connectivity—such as expressways, Smart Cities, metro corridors—are enhancing liveability and driving demand. When a city gains a modern airport or better civic infrastructure, it becomes more attractive for both end-users and investors.
Cost And Affordability
It is expensive to live in metros—not only in terms of property cost, but also the cost of commuting, maintenance, and daily expenses. In contrast, Tier 2 cities offer a much lower entry price per square foot. For the same money, buyers can get larger flats or nicer amenities in smaller cities. Even more, many people who once rented in metros are now able to buy in Tier 2 due to lower overall costs.
Remote Work And Lifestyle Shifts
The work-from-home trend and hybrid models have reduced the necessity of being physically present in metros. Buyers now value space, quality of life (less pollution, less crowding), and access to nature. This is prompting migration of demand away from large metro hubs to smaller cities with better environment and lower stress.
Developer Strategy & Investment Flow
With land in metros becoming scarce and expensive, developers are planting new projects in Tier 2 and 3 cities. Institutional and private investors are following. Data shows large rises in land acquisition and in new project launches in these cities. Also, housing projects in these regions have seen rapid growth in value even when volumes have increased more modestly—suggesting strong price appreciation.
Changing Buyer Aspirations
As incomes rise in non-metro cities, aspirations change. Middle-class buyers want modern amenities: gated societies, malls, good schools, and hospitals. They want a standard of living similar to metros but priced within reach. That shifts demand upward in these smaller cities. Investors, too, are more willing to bet on long-term gains in such cities.
How Tier 2 Cities Compare To Metros With Data
Here are some key comparisons to illustrate the scale of the shift:
Capital Appreciation: Tier-II cities average 17.6% year-on-year property appreciation, versus 11% in many metro markets.
Cities Outperforming: Lucknow (approximately 23.7%), Kanpur (19–20%), Jaipur (21.3%), Indore (22.8%), and Bhubaneswar (near 19.5%) are leading Tier 2 gains. In metros, gains are more modest in many cases.
Prices Per Square Foot: In Tier II cities, rates vary but are substantially lower than metros. For example, Kanpur properties may be around Rs 7,000 per sq ft in top micro-areas, while similarly sized homes in more central metro locations cost much more.
Sales Volume & Value Growth: In Top 15 Tier 2 cities, housing sales value increased to Rs 1.52 lakh crore in 2024 from around Rs 1.27 lakh crore in 2023, though the number of units sold rose modestly. Cities like Coimbatore saw value growth of 36%. Bhubaneswar recorded 47% jump in sales value year-on-year.
These facts show that while metros are still vital and dominant for premium segments, much of the growth momentum and new capital is coming from beyond.
A Closer Look At Bhubaneswar’s Housing Surge
Bhubaneswar offers a striking case study. Once known primarily as a city of temples and a hub for public administration, it is now being rebranded as a smart city. The Smart City Mission has pumped in funds for urban renewal, while IT-SEZs and educational institutions such as IIT Bhubaneswar have added to the city’s profile.
Property prices here average between Rs 4,500 and Rs 6,000 per sq ft in premium localities like Patia, Jaydev Vihar, and Khandagiri. Just five years ago, similar properties could be bought for 30–40% less. High demand from professionals, investors, and even NRIs from Odisha is sustaining the momentum.
Though Pune is often described as a Tier 1.5 city, it epitomises the growth trajectory of smaller markets. Once primarily an educational hub, Pune now houses IT parks, automobile plants, and start-ups. Its proximity to Mumbai and relatively lower costs gave it an edge.
Today, property rates in Pune’s prime locations like Kalyani Nagar, Baner, and Viman Nagar range between Rs 7,500 and Rs 10,500 per sq ft, comparable to some pockets of Mumbai suburbs. Demand is robust not only from locals but also from a steady influx of IT professionals.
Lucknow: Prices in Gomti Nagar and Shaheed Path have risen by over 20% in three years, driven by infrastructure upgrades and government jobs.
Indore: Known for its cleanliness and industrial base, Indore has seen property rates rise steadily, averaging Rs 4,500–Rs 5,500 per sq ft in prime areas.
Coimbatore: With its textile base and growing IT presence, Coimbatore has emerged as a strong residential market with property prices crossing Rs 6,000 per sq ft in hotspots.
Jaipur: Tourism, education, and proximity to Delhi have made Jaipur a magnet for real estate. Prime properties range from Rs 4,000 to Rs 6,000 per sq ft.
What This Means For The Future Of Housing?
This shift has implications for both buyers and the policy environment:
More Balanced Urban Growth
India’s growing population puts pressure on metros—traffic, pollution, and infrastructural strain. Growth in Tier 2 cities helps spread urbanisation more evenly. Over time, this might ease some of the affordability and liveability issues in big cities.
Rising Investor Interest and Speculation
As returns in Tier 2 cities outpace metros, investors are flocking in. That is good for development, but also could fuel speculative bubbles if supply (infrastructure, jobs) does not follow demand. Projects could overpromise, locations may become congested, and developers may face delays—leading to risk for buyers.
Housing Affordability Will Remain a Central Question
Even in Tier 2 cities, rapid price rises mean affordability is shifting upward. Entry-level homes may still be affordable now, but continuous gains will push them out of reach for many. So, housing policy, subsidies, and regulatory checks will need to work to ensure housing remains accessible, not just profitable.
Infrastructure Needs To Keep Pace
Connectivity, reliable utilities (water, power), good roads, schools, and health services will determine which Tier 2 cities succeed long-term. Without these, price gains may stagnate or reverse. Cities that fail to deliver infrastructure may see speculative bubbles burst.
Commercial Real Estate Growth Also Follows
It is not just residential demand. Office leasing in Tier 2 cities is growing too. As companies distribute their operations, setting up satellite offices and remote/hybrid workspaces, demand for Grade A office space is increasing in smaller cities. This further supports residential demand.
Role Of Government Policies
Policies like land use regulation, RERA enforcement, approval timelines, taxation, and infrastructural funding (roads, public transit, airports) will heavily influence how sustainable this growth is. Cities with strong governance will likely outperform poorly regulated ones.
What Prospective Homeowners And Investors Should Consider?
If you are considering buying property or investing in Tier 2 cities, here are key parameters:
Check location & connectivity: How far from transport hubs, highways, or upcoming infrastructure?
Track infrastructure projects: A new highway, airport expansion, or connectivity corridor can boost values.
Developer reputation & legal clearances: Crucial in newer cities. Delays or approvals can make or break returns.
Price trends over time: Look not just at last 6 months, but 2-3 years to understand the trajectory.
Lifestyle amenities: Schools, hospitals, malls, and green spaces are increasingly important to buyers and impact resale value.
Risk of oversupply/speculation: Ensure demand is real, not just investors. Some cities may flood with new units without demand to match.
What This Means for India’s Housing Landscape
The future of India’s real estate market is moving from being metro-centric to more decentralised. Tier 2 and 3 cities are no longer fringe or fallback; they are at the heart of India’s real estate growth story.
Metro cities will still have premium, luxury segments and remain valuable for many buyers and urban professionals. But for mass housing, mid-segment properties, and long-term investors, Tier 2 cities offer higher growth potential and better affordability today.
As more government investment goes into infrastructure and connectivity, remote work remains in some form, and incomes rise in non-metro areas, the trend is likely to sustain. The challenge for policymakers will be to ensure that infrastructure, governance, and housing regulation keep up so growth is sustainable and inclusive.
Shilpy Bisht, Deputy News Editor at News18, writes and edits national, world and business stories. She started off as a print journalist, and then transitioned to online, in her 12 years of experience. Her prev… Read More
First Published:
September 17, 2025, 10:21 IST
News explainers Why Tier 2 Cities Like Bhubaneswar & Lucknow Are Driving India’s Property Boom And Housing Future
Disclaimer: Comments reflect users’ views, not News18’s. Please keep discussions respectful and constructive. Abusive, defamatory, or illegal comments will be removed. News18 may disable any comment at its discretion. By posting, you agree to our Terms of Use and Privacy Policy.
Recent data shows that across 60 Tier 2 & 3 cities, housing sales rose 20% year-on-year, with value of sales jumping dramatically. These cities now account for nearly half of all land acquisitions by developers—an indicator that market sentiment and capital are actively shifting beyond traditional metros. (Land acquisitions by developers in non-metro cities now make up about 44% of the total in many reports.)
In another report, average capital appreciation in Tier-II cities is pegged at 17.6% year-on-year, significantly higher than many metro markets. Cities like Lucknow (23–24%), Indore (22–23%), Jaipur (21%), and Bhubaneswar (19.5%) are often cited as outperforming metro peers in terms of property price gains. Meanwhile, metros like Delhi, Mumbai and Chennai are registering lower rates of appreciation in many comparisons.
Why Is This Surge Happening?
Multiple interlocked reasons explain why property is booming in Tier 2 and 3 cities:
Infrastructure & Connectivity
New roads, highways, better rail networks, and improved air connectivity are shrinking the travel and time gap between smaller cities and metros. Government schemes for urban planning and connectivity—such as expressways, Smart Cities, metro corridors—are enhancing liveability and driving demand. When a city gains a modern airport or better civic infrastructure, it becomes more attractive for both end-users and investors.
Cost And Affordability
It is expensive to live in metros—not only in terms of property cost, but also the cost of commuting, maintenance, and daily expenses. In contrast, Tier 2 cities offer a much lower entry price per square foot. For the same money, buyers can get larger flats or nicer amenities in smaller cities. Even more, many people who once rented in metros are now able to buy in Tier 2 due to lower overall costs.
Remote Work And Lifestyle Shifts
The work-from-home trend and hybrid models have reduced the necessity of being physically present in metros. Buyers now value space, quality of life (less pollution, less crowding), and access to nature. This is prompting migration of demand away from large metro hubs to smaller cities with better environment and lower stress.
Developer Strategy & Investment Flow
With land in metros becoming scarce and expensive, developers are planting new projects in Tier 2 and 3 cities. Institutional and private investors are following. Data shows large rises in land acquisition and in new project launches in these cities. Also, housing projects in these regions have seen rapid growth in value even when volumes have increased more modestly—suggesting strong price appreciation.
Changing Buyer Aspirations
As incomes rise in non-metro cities, aspirations change. Middle-class buyers want modern amenities: gated societies, malls, good schools, and hospitals. They want a standard of living similar to metros but priced within reach. That shifts demand upward in these smaller cities. Investors, too, are more willing to bet on long-term gains in such cities.
How Tier 2 Cities Compare To Metros With Data
Here are some key comparisons to illustrate the scale of the shift:
Capital Appreciation: Tier-II cities average 17.6% year-on-year property appreciation, versus 11% in many metro markets.
Cities Outperforming: Lucknow (approximately 23.7%), Kanpur (19–20%), Jaipur (21.3%), Indore (22.8%), and Bhubaneswar (near 19.5%) are leading Tier 2 gains. In metros, gains are more modest in many cases.
Prices Per Square Foot: In Tier II cities, rates vary but are substantially lower than metros. For example, Kanpur properties may be around Rs 7,000 per sq ft in top micro-areas, while similarly sized homes in more central metro locations cost much more.
Sales Volume & Value Growth: In Top 15 Tier 2 cities, housing sales value increased to Rs 1.52 lakh crore in 2024 from around Rs 1.27 lakh crore in 2023, though the number of units sold rose modestly. Cities like Coimbatore saw value growth of 36%. Bhubaneswar recorded 47% jump in sales value year-on-year.
These facts show that while metros are still vital and dominant for premium segments, much of the growth momentum and new capital is coming from beyond.
A Closer Look At Bhubaneswar’s Housing Surge
Bhubaneswar offers a striking case study. Once known primarily as a city of temples and a hub for public administration, it is now being rebranded as a smart city. The Smart City Mission has pumped in funds for urban renewal, while IT-SEZs and educational institutions such as IIT Bhubaneswar have added to the city’s profile.
Property prices here average between Rs 4,500 and Rs 6,000 per sq ft in premium localities like Patia, Jaydev Vihar, and Khandagiri. Just five years ago, similar properties could be bought for 30–40% less. High demand from professionals, investors, and even NRIs from Odisha is sustaining the momentum.
Though Pune is often described as a Tier 1.5 city, it epitomises the growth trajectory of smaller markets. Once primarily an educational hub, Pune now houses IT parks, automobile plants, and start-ups. Its proximity to Mumbai and relatively lower costs gave it an edge.
Today, property rates in Pune’s prime locations like Kalyani Nagar, Baner, and Viman Nagar range between Rs 7,500 and Rs 10,500 per sq ft, comparable to some pockets of Mumbai suburbs. Demand is robust not only from locals but also from a steady influx of IT professionals.
Lucknow: Prices in Gomti Nagar and Shaheed Path have risen by over 20% in three years, driven by infrastructure upgrades and government jobs.
Indore: Known for its cleanliness and industrial base, Indore has seen property rates rise steadily, averaging Rs 4,500–Rs 5,500 per sq ft in prime areas.
Coimbatore: With its textile base and growing IT presence, Coimbatore has emerged as a strong residential market with property prices crossing Rs 6,000 per sq ft in hotspots.
Jaipur: Tourism, education, and proximity to Delhi have made Jaipur a magnet for real estate. Prime properties range from Rs 4,000 to Rs 6,000 per sq ft.
What This Means For The Future Of Housing?
This shift has implications for both buyers and the policy environment:
More Balanced Urban Growth
India’s growing population puts pressure on metros—traffic, pollution, and infrastructural strain. Growth in Tier 2 cities helps spread urbanisation more evenly. Over time, this might ease some of the affordability and liveability issues in big cities.
Rising Investor Interest and Speculation
As returns in Tier 2 cities outpace metros, investors are flocking in. That is good for development, but also could fuel speculative bubbles if supply (infrastructure, jobs) does not follow demand. Projects could overpromise, locations may become congested, and developers may face delays—leading to risk for buyers.
Housing Affordability Will Remain a Central Question
Even in Tier 2 cities, rapid price rises mean affordability is shifting upward. Entry-level homes may still be affordable now, but continuous gains will push them out of reach for many. So, housing policy, subsidies, and regulatory checks will need to work to ensure housing remains accessible, not just profitable.
Infrastructure Needs To Keep Pace
Connectivity, reliable utilities (water, power), good roads, schools, and health services will determine which Tier 2 cities succeed long-term. Without these, price gains may stagnate or reverse. Cities that fail to deliver infrastructure may see speculative bubbles burst.
Commercial Real Estate Growth Also Follows
It is not just residential demand. Office leasing in Tier 2 cities is growing too. As companies distribute their operations, setting up satellite offices and remote/hybrid workspaces, demand for Grade A office space is increasing in smaller cities. This further supports residential demand.
Role Of Government Policies
Policies like land use regulation, RERA enforcement, approval timelines, taxation, and infrastructural funding (roads, public transit, airports) will heavily influence how sustainable this growth is. Cities with strong governance will likely outperform poorly regulated ones.
What Prospective Homeowners And Investors Should Consider?
If you are considering buying property or investing in Tier 2 cities, here are key parameters:
Check location & connectivity: How far from transport hubs, highways, or upcoming infrastructure?
Track infrastructure projects: A new highway, airport expansion, or connectivity corridor can boost values.
Developer reputation & legal clearances: Crucial in newer cities. Delays or approvals can make or break returns.
Price trends over time: Look not just at last 6 months, but 2-3 years to understand the trajectory.
Lifestyle amenities: Schools, hospitals, malls, and green spaces are increasingly important to buyers and impact resale value.
Risk of oversupply/speculation: Ensure demand is real, not just investors. Some cities may flood with new units without demand to match.
What This Means for India’s Housing Landscape
The future of India’s real estate market is moving from being metro-centric to more decentralised. Tier 2 and 3 cities are no longer fringe or fallback; they are at the heart of India’s real estate growth story.
Metro cities will still have premium, luxury segments and remain valuable for many buyers and urban professionals. But for mass housing, mid-segment properties, and long-term investors, Tier 2 cities offer higher growth potential and better affordability today.
As more government investment goes into infrastructure and connectivity, remote work remains in some form, and incomes rise in non-metro areas, the trend is likely to sustain. The challenge for policymakers will be to ensure that infrastructure, governance, and housing regulation keep up so growth is sustainable and inclusive.
Scan the QR code to download the News18 app and enjoy a seamless news experience anytime, anywhere
Changpeng Zhao, known as CZ, has raised speculation about a possible return to Binance after changing his X profile. He removed the “ex-@binance” label and updated it back to “@binance.” The move has caught attention across the crypto industry and raised questions about his role in the company going forward.
Background on His Exit
CZ resigned as Binance CEO in November 2023 as part of a settlement with the U.S. Department of Justice. He pleaded guilty to violations of the Bank Secrecy Act and agreed to pay a $50 million fine. Binance itself paid $4.3 billion in penalties.
In April 2024, CZ was sentenced to four months in prison for failing to prevent money laundering on the exchange. He served his term in California and was released earlier this year.
Leadership Since Then
After his resignation, Binance appointed Richard Teng as CEO. Teng, a former regulator, has focused on compliance and restoring trust with both regulators and users. Binance remains the largest crypto exchange by trading volume but still faces legal challenges in the United States.
What the Change May Mean
CZ had previously said he planned to step back from daily operations and focus on investments in Web3 and DeFi. His return to the “@binance” tag could be symbolic, or it could mean something more. Neither Binance nor CZ has given an explanation.
The profile change also comes amid new all-time highs for BNB and a surge in trading volume. At the same time, reports of a possible DOJ settlement are adding to the positive mood. Some wonder if CZ is preparing for a bigger role again, while others see it as a symbolic step. For now, crypto circles are waiting to see what comes next .
Kiran Bir Sethi, an Ahmedabad-based educationist — who won the BL Changemaker Award for social transformation in 2024 for her ‘Design for Change’ initiative — is currently focussed on not only expanding the global reach of her ingenious concept, but is also looking to host the first ever ‘I CAN Teachers’ Summit’ this November.
Design for Change works on a simple formula where children are asked to talk about an issue plaguing them or their surroundings, imagine a solution to that problem, act in a way to bring about a change and share this story of change with the world.
In this way, every idea or solution that the child brings to life not only breaks down barriers of conventional education but also proves that age is not a bar to usher in change.
Expanding network
Having floated an initiative in 2009 that goes beyond teaching and encouraging school-going students to solve everyday problems they face, the visionary founder of Riverside School in Ahmedabad, is now looking to expand the network of Design For Change (DFC) to 74 countries this year, thus reaching new communities and creating more young changemakers.
“This year, we are hosting the very first ‘I CAN Teachers’ Summit — a unique celebration of how teachers are using the FIDS (Feel, Imagine, Do and Share) process not just for service projects, but as a powerful pedagogical tool to foster critical thinking, agency, and active learning in classrooms. We are proud to collaborate with our Japan team as they lead preparations for the annual global Be The Change Celebration this November — a beautiful moment to showcase changemaker journeys from across the world and celebrate the impact of the DFC movement. These strategic areas reflect our shared vision of a world where every child believes in their ability to make a difference,” says Sethi.
Today, this concept has spread to more than 30,000 schools in 70-odd countries where 1.11 lakh teachers and 20 lakh children have participated.
“We have also compiled 15 innovations as our DFC Innovation playbook — practical, proven methods that expand the ways DFC is implemented across different contexts. We are redesigning our global resource platform to be a vibrant space where our partner educators can share the rich resources they have created, learn from one another, and collaborate to co-create new tools that deepen the DFC experience,” she added.
High Potential — the ABC show about a single mom with an exceptional mind who winds up working as a consultant for the Los Angeles Police Department — debuted its first season a year ago. Now, Kaitlin Olson’s fashionable crime-solver Morgan Gillory is tackling new crimes in season 2.
The second season of High Potential will debut much like last season — episodes of the crime drama will air on ABC first before streaming on Hulu. In addition to Olson, the show stars Javicia Leslie as Daphne, Deniz Akdeniz as Lev “Oz” Ozdil, Amirah J as Ava, Matthew Lamb as Elliot and Judy Reyes as Selena. Daniel Sunjata plays Morgan’s by-the-book partner Karadec, and Steve Howey joins the cast in season 2 as new precinct captain Nick Wagner.
High Potential is based on the French series Haut Potentiel Intellectuel. According to official descriptions, the first few episodes of season 2 will again pit Morgan against the Game Maker and continue the storyline with Ava’s missing dad, Roman.
When to watch High Potential’s season 2 premiere on Hulu
Season 2 of the Kaitlin Olson-starring series will air on ABC on Tuesday and stream the following day on Hulu. Here are the release details for the first three episodes.
Episode 1, Pawns: Premieres on ABC on Sept. 16 at 10 p.m. ET/10 p.m. PT/9 p.m. CT. Streams on Hulu on Sept. 17.
Episode 2, Checkmate: Premieres on ABC on Sept. 23 at 10 p.m. ET/10 p.m. PT/9 p.m. CT. Streams on Hulu on Sept. 24.
Episode 3, Eleven Minutes: Premieres on ABC on Sept. 30 at 10 p.m. ET/10 p.m. PT/9 p.m. CT. Streams on Hulu on Oct. 1.
James Martin/CNET
Hulu has two plans: a basic, ad-supported option for $10 a month, or $100 a year, and a mostly ad-free option for $19 a month. You can also get Hulu in a bundle with Disney Plus and HBO Max, Disney Plus and ESPN Unlimited, Disney Plus and ESPN Select (formerly ESPN Plus) or just Disney Plus.
Adults who consume cannabis are nearly four times more likely to develop type 2 diabetes than those who don’t, according to a new study.
Researchers led by Dr. Ibrahim Kamel from the Boston Medical Center in Massachusetts analyzed medical records from 54 healthcare organizations across the U.S. and Europe using the TriNetX Research Network.
They compared about 96,800 people with cannabis-related diagnoses, from casual users to those with dependency, to more than 4.16 million individuals who had no record of drug use or chronic illness.
DIABETES STUDY REVEALS DIAGNOSIS GAP AFFECTING MILLIONS OF PEOPLE
Over a five-year period, 2.2% of cannabis users developed type 2 diabetes, compared to just 0.6% of non-users.
Even after adjusting for other health risks like high blood pressure, cholesterol, heart disease and alcohol or cocaine use, marijuana users still faced a higher risk.
Over five years, nearly quadruple the number of cannabis users developed type 2 diabetes compared to the control group.(iStock)
Experts say a possible explanation is that marijuana affects appetite, metabolism and insulin resistance. Cannabis use is often associated with poor eating habits, which may contribute to rising blood sugar levels over time.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
Given the increasing legalization of marijuana, it is often seen as an alternative to alcohol or tobacco, but the research suggests that its long-term risks could be more serious than many realize.
“As cannabis becomes more widely available and socially accepted and legalized in various jurisdictions, it is essential to understand its potential health risks,” Kamel stated in a press release.
Researchers say that clinicians should be talking to patients about cannabis use so they can understand the potential need for metabolic monitoring.(iStock)
The study does have some limitations, the researchers acknowledged. Its design is retrospective, meaning it looked back at patient records rather than tracking new cases over time. That makes it difficult to prove marijuana directly causes diabetes.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
Additionally, someone who uses it occasionally may not face the same risks as someone who consumes it daily.
As the researchers pointed out, the study has the potential for bias, as it relied on people to self-report their cannabis use — even in places where it was illegal — and didn’t measure exactly how much they used.
A possible explanation of the results is marijuana’s effects on appetite, metabolism and insulin resistance.(iStock)
Physicians may soon need to “routinely talk to patients about cannabis use so they can understand their overall diabetes risk and potential need for metabolic monitoring,” according to Kamel.
MORE IN HEALTH NEWS
“These new sights from reliable, real-world evidence highlight the importance of integrating diabetes risk awareness into substance-use disorder treatment and counseling,” he added.
Fox News Digital reached out to cannabis industry organizations requesting comment.
Khloe Quill is a lifestyle production assistant with Fox News Digital. She and the lifestyle team cover a range of story topics including food and drink, travel, and health.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-09-16/China-urges-U-S-Japan-to-withdraw-Typhon-missile-system-deployment-1GIIC8AKuis/img/e95c770e30c8468c818365fffef873a7/e95c770e30c8468c818365fffef873a7.png' alt='China's Foreign Ministry spokesperson Lin Jian at a regular news briefing in Beijing, China, September 16, 2025. /VCG'
China urges the United States and Japan to withdraw the Typhon missile system deployed in Japan as soon as possible as the deployment poses a substantive threat to regional strategic security, a spokesperson for China’s Ministry of Foreign Affairs said on Tuesday.
Spokesperson Lin Jian said at a regular press briefing that, despite China’s grave concerns, the U.S. and Japan went ahead with deploying an intermediate-range missile system in Japan under the pretext of joint exercises and training.
“China is strongly dissatisfied with and firmly opposes this,” Lin said.
He stressed that the U.S. deployment of such a system in Asia undermines the legitimate security interests of other countries, increases the risk of an arms race and military confrontation in the region, and poses a substantive threat to regional strategic security.
Lin urged the U.S. and Japan to respect the security concerns of other countries, heed the voices of regional countries, and correct their wrongful actions.
Due to its history of militarist aggression, Japan’s military and security moves have always been viewed with great vigilance by its Asian neighbors and the international community, the spokesperson added.
China urges Japan to reflect deeply on its history of aggression as this year marks the 80th anniversary of victory of the Chinese People’s War of Resistance Against Japanese Aggression and the World Anti-Fascist War, Lin said.
Japan should be cautious in its words and deeds in the military and security arenas, avoid assisting villainous acts, and refrain from doing anything that would break the trust of its Asian neighbors or undermine regional peace and stability, he said.
Rams coach Sean McVay is not expected to appear on the team’s injury report this week as they prepare for Sunday’s game against the defending Super Bowl-champion Philadelphia Eagles.
But McVay sustained a foot injury during last week’s victory over the Tennessee Titans in Nashville.
During the Rams’ produced “Sean McVay Show,” McVay said he suffered a torn plantar fascia.
“I was being dramatic limping around toward the end of the game,” McVay said, adding, “The good news is I’m not playing, so I’m just on the sidelines watching. So if I have a little cool limp to add some swag, then you’ll know why.”
McVay, 39, is in his ninth season with the Rams, who opened the season with victories over the Houston Texans and the Titans.
The Eagles are also 2-0 after victories over the Dallas Cowboys and Kansas City Chiefs.
Rams sign cornerback Tre Brown
Tre Brown warms up before a preseason game between the San Francisco 49ers and Denver Broncos in August.
(Kelley L Cox / Associated Press)
With starting cornerback Ahkello Witherspoon on injured reserve, the Rams added depth to the secondary on Tuesday by signing cornerback Tre Brown.
Brown, who will turn 28 next week, played four seasons for the Seattle Seahawks before signing with the San Francisco 49ers last March. But Brown suffered a heel injury during training camp, was placed on injured reserve and was ultimately released.
Brown, 5 feet, 10 inches and 185 pounds, played in 39 games for the Seahawks, starting 13. He intercepted two passes.
Brown joins a cornerback group that includes Cobie Durant, Emmanuel Forbes Jr. and Darious Williams. Witherspoon, who suffered a broken clavicle during the Rams’ victory over the Tennessee Titans last Sunday, is expected to be sidelined for 12 weeks, McVay said.
The Rams play the defending Super Bowl-champion Philadelphia Eagles on Sunday at Lincoln Financial Field in Philadelphia.
Unix has launched the Voltro Power Bank and what’s special about it is that it is a half palm sized powerhouse designed for users who are constantly on the go. It has a 10,000mAh capacity with 22.5W fast charging, offers multiple ports and built-in cables for charging devices simultaneously.
Available in two color options — Grey and Black, Voltro is priced at Rs 2,499 and comes with a 1-year hassle-free exchange warranty. The product is available to purchase on Unix’s official website and leading retail and e-commerce platforms across India.
Commenting on the launch, Imran Kagalwala, Co-Founder, Unix India, said: “Voltro is proof that great things come in small packages. We wanted to build a power bank that feels like an accessory, not a gadget. This ultra-compact design is minimal, portable, and built for the way young people live, work, and play today.”
Add Zee Business as a Preferred Source
Made from high-density Li-ion cells, the Voltro power bank weighs just 165 grams. The company claims that it easily fits into a pocket, travel pouch, or small handbag—offering the perfect balance of portability and style. Also, its detachable cable comes attached with a sturdy string, allowing users to plug in when needed or use it as a handy carry loop, whether as a finger grip, bag clip, or keychain attachment, eliminating the need for additional accessories, it added.
With dual output options (USB and Type-C), the Voltro can charge two devices simultaneously, the company said. Providing up to 4.5A output and 22.5W fast charging, the power bank is capable of fully charging a smartphone in just 60 minutes.
Safety is built in with 12 layers of protection against short circuits, overvoltage, overheating, and electrostatic discharge.
The Voltro Power Bank is manufactured at Unix’s state-of-the-art manufacturing facility located in Umbergaon, Gujarat, reinforcing the brand’s alignment with the country’s Made in India initiative.
Price Compared
Unix Voltro Power Bank Price: Rs 2,499 (10,000mAh)
If a jungle safari is on your travel wishlist soon enough, make sure you follow this planning checklist for a memorable journey.
Planning a wildlife safari is thrilling, as you see the animals in their natural surroundings. It is a heart-pounding moment when a majestic animal, like a member of the cat family, such as a leopard or tiger, walks by the jeep, or a massive herd of elephants trumpeting in unison. The wild animals that you have only seen on screens or in zoos become truly goosebump-worthy when you see them in their natural habitats, up close.
Make sure you follow the dos and don’ts of jungle safari. (Representational image: AI generated picture from Freepik)
ALSO READ: Wildlife photographer Hardik Shelat shares stories behind his most iconic shots: ‘Waited 8 hours for rare lion photo’
This is why your wildlife safari preparation needs to be top-notch, so that the moments leading up to the animal spotting, and even during national park landscape exploration by car, you stay calm and collected. If you don’t plan and prepare beforehand, you may face unnecessary hassles, such as a last-minute booking rush or long check-post wait, and risk missing peak sighting times.
Gajendra Singh Rathore, managing director at Jungle Camps India, shared with HT Lifestyle the value of proper planning for a wildlife safari visit. According to him, the experience for those who plan well in advance is very ‘rewarding.’
He said, “A wildlife safari in India can be a very rewarding experience for travellers who are prepared, patient and respectful to the natural rhythm of life in forests. Taking the time to plan adds more to the experience as India’s ancient and beautiful forests and indigenous fauna are closely linked to the country’s myths, epics and folklores.”
As he said, if you make your itinerary detailed and take care of all the essentials, the journey becomes far more immersive because you are not distracted.
Here are the top tips Gajendra shared, which cover all the essentials, from time to visit to what to wear:
1. Best time to plan a visit
National parks and wildlife sanctuaries in India are generally off-limits during the monsoon season, so avoid planning your trip from July to September.
From October to March, the weather is generally pleasant with sunny days and is ideal for exploring the lush wilderness.
The summer months between April and June are the most opportune for animal sightings, especially in and around the watering holes.
2. Safari timing
Parks are open from sunrise to sunset and have fixed departures and set routes.
Opt for an open jeep or canter bus safari, depending on your preference and be prepared for some waiting time at the check-post.
To maximise sighting of animals like tigers, it is advised to take both safaris – morning and evening, because of better spotting chances of big cats.
3. What to wear
Footwear: Always wear comfortable shoes and sandals suited to the activity. Closed-toe shoes and sturdy boots are not necessary as you won’t be walking much.
Clothes:Light cotton clothes in summer and extra woollen layers, including caps, scarves and gloves for winter, are recommended.
Colour of outfit: Pick neutral coloured clothes to blend in with the surroundings.
Additional precautions: Riding an open jeep in the morning and evening can get chilly, so prepare accordingly. For occasional rains, carry a raincoat/windbreaker. Use of sunscreen, sunglasses, and a wide-brimmed hat is advisable, especially during the summer months. Carry a mask and insect repellent as they can come in handy, especially during the summer to retreating monsoon months.
4. Equipment to carry
To make the most of your safari, carry binoculars for better viewing and cameras with telephoto lens in case you would like to document the experience. The drives are usually 3-4 hours long and may have one stop for using restrooms and drinking water.
Carry a power bank if needed.
Avoid: Flash photography and stepping out of the vehicle are strictly not allowed. Using loudspeakers in the forest is prohibited. Loud music in the vicinity of the forest, in camps or lodges, is also strongly discouraged.
6. Essential documents
Travellers, including children, should always carry photo identity cards with them as per government regulations.
7. Booking
Always pre-book your stays during peak seasons or during long weekends.
Safaris can be booked the night before.
8. Transport
Jeep safaris are most common and suitable for small groups. Canter/bus safaris are available in some parks for larger groups.
But, jeeps offer a truly immersive experience even though they are costlier than group tours.
9. Where to stay
India’s national parks and wildlife sanctuaries have a sufficient number of lodges, resorts and camps that offer a peaceful and immersive stay.
Whether located within the forest or in the buffer zones, these unique retreats will make your holiday a memorable experience.
When not on a jungle safari, visitors can explore nearby villages or spend the day partaking in the number of activities that are usually offered at the accommodations.
Catch every big hit, every wicket with Crick-it, a one stop destination for Live Scores, Match Stats, Quizzes, Polls & much more. Explore now!.
Catch your daily dose of Fashion, Taylor Swift, Health, Festivals, Travel, Relationship, Recipe and all the other Latest Lifestyle News on Hindustan Times Website and APPs.
Catch every big hit, every wicket with Crick-it, a one stop destination for Live Scores, Match Stats, Quizzes, Polls & much more. Explore now!.
Catch your daily dose of Fashion, Taylor Swift, Health, Festivals, Travel, Relationship, Recipe and all the other Latest Lifestyle News on Hindustan Times Website and APPs.
News / Lifestyle / Travel / Planning a jungle safari? 8 tips you should know: What to wear, when to visit and more
Netflix’s Top 10 has become the go-to guide for subscribers when deciding what to watch next, but this means they could be missing out on some of the best and biggest blockbusters.
When it comes to choosing a film, Netflix’s Top 10 is an excellent resource to discover what’s currently trending, with many of its latest releases being highly recommended.
However, there are numerous films that may not have made it onto this exclusive list, despite receiving high praise from critics.
So, here’s a rundown of all the hidden gems you should be watching instead of just sticking to Netflix’s Top 10.
Underrated Netflix films
The Outrun
Actress Saoirse Ronan in The Outrun. (Image: BROCK MEDIA)
Starring Little Women’s Saoirse Ronan as a recovering alcoholic who returns to her isolated island home in Orkney to heal, The Outrun has been lauded for its emotionally raw scenes and honest portrayal of addiction.
Alongside Ronan, The Outrun features Slow Horses’ Saskia Reeves, I May Destroy You actor Paapa Essiedu and Outlander’s Lauren Lyle.
READ MORE: The top ten most-watched films on Netflix right now – two from the same franc…
READ MORE: Luke Littler’s request emerges immediately after winning £500,000 darts title
His House
The 2020 horror film His House. (Image: BBC FILM)
This unique horror film, released five years ago, follows a refugee couple from South Sudan who are haunted by an evil entity in their new home.
Not only does the story star Sinners actress Wunmi Mosaku, it also features House of the Dragon and Doctor Who legend Matt Smith.
The Forty-Year-Old Version
Comedy-drama The Forty-Year-Old Version. (Image: HILLMAN GRAD)
This hit film was a sensation at the Sundance Film Festival and was equally well received by fans, earning an almost perfect Rotten Tomatoes score of 99%.
The clever and touching indie comedy-drama follows a playwright who chooses to transform herself into a rapper on her 40th birthday, exploring the challenges of pursuing an artistic career.
The Night Comes For Us
The film The Night Comes For Us. (Image: XYZ FILMS)
Another massive hit on Rotten Tomatoes with 92% is this vicious yet stylish Indonesian action thriller from 2018.
Celebrated for its lightning-fast and creative choreography, the synopsis simply states: “Ito, a gangland enforcer, is caught amidst a treacherous and violent insurrection within his Triad crime family”.
We Live In Time
Actress Florence Pugh and actor Andrew Garfield in We Live In Time. (Image: FILM4)
One of the most recent hidden treasures to land on Netflix is the romantic drama We Live In Time, featuring Spider-Man’s Andrew Garfield and Oppenheimer’s Florence Pugh.
We Live In Time chronicles the emotional, amusing and chaotic love story of two individuals who meet following an unexpected encounter, with the stars praised for their sizzling chemistry.
Okja
South Korean film Okja. (Image: PLAN B ENTERTAINMENT)
This action adventure sci-fi picture chronicles a young girl’s mission to rescue her enormous “super pig” from a mighty corporation, with critics calling it inventive, devastating and thought-provoking.
Okja was created in 2017 by director Bong Joon-ho who masterminded the multiple award-winning film Parasite.
Gerald’s Game
Gerald’s Game is based on the Stephen King novel of the same name. (Image: INTREPID PICTURES)
Adapted from Stephen King’s novel of the same title and helmed by The Haunting franchise’s Mike Flanagan, Gerald’s Game is a psychological thriller as well as a claustrophobic tale of survival.
The film features Carla Gugino, known for her roles in The Haunting of Hill House, This Boy’s Life, Son in Law and Troop Beverly Hills.
Apostle
Horror film Apostle stars Downton Abbey actor Dan Stevens. (Image: XYZ FILMS)
This 2018 gothic folk horror film has been lauded for its eerie tone. It tells the story of a man who infiltrates a religious cult on a remote Welsh island to save his sister.
The lead actor, Dan Stevens, is best known for his roles in Downton Abbey and Beauty and the Beast.
The Place Beyond The Pines
Actress Eva Mendes and actor Ryan Gosling in The Place Beyond the Pines. (Image: ELECTRIC CITY ENTERTAINMENT)
This crime drama, The Place Beyond The Pines, is an overlooked masterpiece starring some of Hollywood’s biggest names including Ryan Gosling, Bradley Cooper and Eva Mendes.
The 2012 film narrates a multi-generational tale of fathers, sons and the repercussions of their actions.
Under the Shadow
The 2016 horror film Under the Shadow. (Image: WIGWAM FILMS)
Under the Shadow, a 2016 Iranian horror film, bagged a BAFTA for Outstanding Debut by a British Writer, Director or Producer.
Set in Tehran during the Iran-Iraq War, Under The Shadow is a chilling narrative that combines supernatural horror with the real-life fears of living in a war-torn area.
The Japanese automaker’s entry-level SUV was a hit when it arrived way back in 2015, and it remains the most popular light SUV in the country to this day.
However, the future of this popular model is under a growing cloud. The Mazda 2 and CX-3 will reportedly exit the Japanese market by the end of this year, but Mazda says the pair will continue to be sold in Australia beyond then.
Nevertheless, both models are now 11 years old, and nothing lasts forever…
So, should you race into a Mazda showroom to pick up a CX-3 before it’s too late?
How much does the Mazda CX-3 cost?
CX-3 prices have gradually risen over the course of the past decade, and the range now opens at $30,370 before on-road costs for the G20 Pure. On test here is the G20 Evolve.
Model
Price before on-road costs
2025 Mazda CX-3 G20 Pure
$30,370
2025 Mazda CX-3 G20 Evolve
$32,100
2025 Mazda CX-3 G20 GT SP
$35,330
2025 Mazda CX-3 G20 Akari
$38,890
Fun fact: you could pick up a brand-new manual CX-3 for $19,990 before on-road costs back in 2015 when the model first launched Down Under.
Focusing back on the here and now, the CX-3 Evolve is priced to compete against other light and small SUVs such as the Chery Tiggo 4,MG ZS, GWM Haval Jolion, Kia Stonic, Toyota Yaris Cross, Hyundai Venue, Mahindra XUV 3XO, Suzuki Fronx, Nissan Juke, and Skoda Kamiq.
To see how the Mazda CX-3 stacks up against the competition, check out our comparison tool
Let us help you find your new car
Buy your new car without the stress. It’s fast, simple and completely free.
Great service from Travis and team, second time I have used this business would not hesitate to recommend them to anyone
Craig C.
Purchased a Ford Ranger in Sunshine Coast, QLD
CarExpert helped Craig save $7,224 on his Ford Ranger, now let us save you on your next new car.
Get your BEST price
What is the Mazda CX-3 like on the inside?
While the exterior design of the CX-3 still stacks up against modern rivals, the interior hasn’t held up quite as well.
The small, fuzzy infotainment screen looks almost prehistoric compared to the touchscreens you’ll find in alternatives like the MG ZS, Chery Tiggo 4, Skoda Kamiq, and even the Toyota Yaris Cross, while the instrument cluster in the CX-3 is similarly old-fashioned.
Functionality is sorely lacking across both pieces of tech. For example, the infotainment system only operates as a touchscreen when you’re stationary or travelling at low speeds, and native navigation may be included but it didn’t work at all throughout our test.
The graphics are poor by 2025 standards, and the infotainment system is consistently slow to respond to inputs.
We also struggled to maintain a wireless smartphone connection, although CarPlay is the best way to experience the screen in the Mazda CX-3.
Given our connection issues, we often resorted to plugging in via the USB-A outlets located under the centre stack. Make sure to bring the correct cable, as there are no USB-C outlets.
Important driving data can be found in two places – the instrument cluster and head-up display.
The cluster features a central tachometer, digital speed readout and a pair of digital displays that lack anything in the way of configurability. On a positive note, the layout will be familiar to owners of older vehicles, and the data is clearly presented.
Above you’ll find a rudimentary HUD that projects speed and cruise information onto the windscreen. The Mazda CX-3 feels very yesterday in many regards, but features like this keep it relevant in 2025.
There’s no doubt that the simplicity of the CX-3 also enhances its appeal for certain groups of buyers. Changing the temperature or fan speed is a straightforward task, as is switching between audio outputs.
There’s nothing to be confused about, and that’s surely worth something. With that said, it’s not enough to excuse the downfalls of the CX-3.
Materials don’t age quite as quickly as technology does, so the interior trims in the CX-3 remain competitive today. As is standard for the segment, there’s lots of hard scratchy plastic, but this Evolve gains black leatherette upholstery.
In addition to the seats, the door cards, centre console and dash all feature soft-touch finishes, and the Evolve feels more upmarket because of it. I just wish Mazda kept the ‘White Maztex/Tan Grand Luxe Synthetic Suede’ upholstery option, as the cabin could do with an injection of colour.
Nevertheless, while the CX-3 doesn’t have the showroom appeal of something like a Tiggo 4, it makes up for it with quality materials in high traffic areas.
The ergonomics of the fake leather seats are excellent. There’s plenty of manual adjustment in the front seats and steering wheel, and both pews offer decent lateral support and cushioning.
Cabin storage is another strong suit of the CX-3. The glovebox is deeper than you’d expect for a car of this size, and there are dedicated cubbies throughout the front row for sunglasses, smartphones, and drink bottles.
As for the second row, well that’s a different story altogether.
It’s difficult enough to get people back there, let alone their belongings.
The tight and claustrophobic space is best suited to young children, because I was forced to perform all kinds of unflattering contortions to squeeze behind my driving position. And that’s before considering the lack of headroom, which limits rear passenger height to around five-ten.
Amenities are also sorely lacking. That means no phone charging and no air conditioning. You do, however, get a centre armrest with cupholders and bottle holders in the doors.
You’d be silly to purchase any light SUV as a family car, but it’s still reasonable to ask for a second row that’s somewhat usable. The Tiggo 4 is superior on this front, as is the Mahindra XUV 3XO.
The CX-3 also trails its competitors on boot space, offering just a measly 264 litres. That’s 100L less than the Mahindra, and a whopping 158L less than what you get from a Nissan Juke.
Extra space can be accessed by folding the rear seats, which creates a larger flat load area. Otherwise, there’s a hidden storage compartment under the boot floor.
All variants of the CX-3 come with a space-saver spare tyre.
Dimensions
Mazda CX-3
Length
4275mm
Width
1765mm
Height
1535mm
Wheelbase
2570mm
Boot space
264-1174L
To see how the Mazda CX-3 stacks up against the competition, check out our comparison tool
What’s under the bonnet?
The entire CX-3 range is powered by a 2.0-litre naturally aspirated four-cylinder petrol engine, which is good for 110kW of power and 195Nm of torque.
Model
Mazda CX-3 G20
Engine
2.0L 4cyl petrol
Power
110kW @ 6000rpm
Torque
195Nm @ 2800rpm
Transmission
6-speed automatic
Driven wheels
Front-wheel drive
Weight
1294kg
Fuel economy (claimed)
6.3L/100km
Fuel economy (as tested)
8.6L/100km
Fuel tank size
48L
Fuel requirement
91-octane regular unleaded
CO2 emissions
143g/km
Braked towing capacity
1535kg
Fuel economy is not outstanding for the segment. We saw roughly 9L/100km over a week of urban driving, and that’s something a turbocharger or hybrid assistance could remedy.
To see how the Mazda CX-3 stacks up against the competition, check out our comparison tool
How does the Mazda CX-3 drive?
The CX-3 may be an ageing model, but it’s still full of youthful energy.
Turbochargers and hybrid systems are all the rage in modern motoring, and for the most part both have brought about powertrains that are more powerful and efficient than ever before.
However, the CX-3 proves that naturally aspirated engines still have a place in the automotive landscape.
The 2.0-litre four-cylinder found under the bonnet of this little Mazda is small yet mighty, with enough low-end torque and top-end power to make the lightweight CX-3 feel suitably peppy in most driving situations.
And, like the world’s top athletes, the CX-3 delivers performance in a smooth, controlled manner. With that said, the absence of forced induction or electric assistance means that you have to rev it out to make decent progress, which produces quite a lot of noise.
While a manual transmission was once offered, the CX-3 is now only sold with a six-speed automatic transmission that’s buttery smooth in stop/start traffic, although paddle shifters would make for a nice upgrade.
However, the CX-3 is still more enjoyable to drive than a lot of newer counterparts that feel remote and removed.
The pedals are well-weighted, and the steering wheel actually feels connected to the front wheels. You can throw the CX-3 into corners with confidence, as it demonstrates sporty handling and can turn on a dime.
Better yet, while the CX-3 is on the firmer side for an SUV, the ride is never harsh or crashy. There’s a real sense of composure with this little runaround, especially in the city where common obstacles like road joins and small potholes are dealt with easily.
Excellent outward visibility and the fitment of a reversing camera, albeit grainy in resolution, enhance the appeal for urban buyers.
That’s not to say there’s nothing for rural and regional buyers to get excited about, but the CX-3 is definitely less happy on the highway.
A distinct lack of insulation leads to pronounced road and tyre noise at high speeds, especially on coarse surfaces. Indeed, the little CX-3 just doesn’t feel quite as substantial on the road as other light and small SUVs.
It does, however, feel more grown up than the Mazda 2 that it shares a platform with.
Trusted Reviews, Smarter Choices, Better Prices
Where expert car reviews meet expert car buying – CarExpert gives you trusted advice, personalised service and real savings on your next new car.
As of this year, all variants are equipped with adaptive cruise control as standard – a huge win for those who commute long distances regularly. But be prepared to keep your hands firmly on the wheel, as there’s no form of active lane centring.
One benefit of the CX-3’s age is that it’s bereft of annoying safety nannies that suck the joy out of driving. The forward collision warning system went off once during our test, but distracting chimes were few and far between.
To see how the Mazda CX-3 stacks up against the competition, check out our comparison tool
What do you get?
There are four trim levels in the CX-3 range.
2025 Mazda Pure equipment highlights:
18-inch alloy wheels
Rain-sensing wipers
Automatic LED headlights
Automatic high-beam
LED daytime running lights
LED tail lights
Power-folding exterior mirrors
Head-up display
8.0-inch infotainment screen
Wired Android Auto
Wireless and wired Apple CarPlay
Satellite navigation
Leather-wrapped steering wheel
Climate control air-conditioning
Auto-dimming rear-view mirror
Six-speaker sound system
DAB+ digital radio
Tilt and telescopic steering column adjustment
Cloth upholstery
Electric parking brake with auto hold
Keyless start
The Evolve adds:
18-inch black machined alloy wheels
LED front fog lights
Keyless entry
Black leatherette upholstery, including on centre console and door trims
The GT SP adds:
Heated power-folding exterior mirrors
Heated front seats
Leather/Grand Luxe synthetic suede upholstery
Power driver’s seat with lumbar adjustment
7-speaker Bose sound system
The Akari adds:
Single-pane sunroof
Adaptive LED headlights
Leather upholstery
360-degree camera
To see how the Mazda CX-3 stacks up against the competition, check out our comparison tool
Is the Mazda CX-3 safe?
The Mazda CX-3 is currently unrated by ANCAP, as its five-star rating from 2015 has now expired.
Standard safety equipment includes:
Autonomous emergency braking (AEB)
Pedestrian, cyclist detection
Adaptive cruise control
Blind-spot monitoring
Rear cross-traffic alert
Driver attention alert
Lane departure warning
Front, front-side and curtain airbags
Reversing camera
Rear parking sensors
For 2025, the Pure and Evolve now get the more sophisticated AEB system and adaptive cruise control previously limited to up-spec models.
Evolve variants and above gain front parking sensors, while the GT SP and up receive traffic sign recognition.
To see how the Mazda CX-3 stacks up against the competition, check out our comparison tool
How much does the Mazda CX-3 cost to run?
The Mazda CX-3 is backed by a five-year, unlimited-kilometre warranty.
Servicing and Warranty
Mazda CX-3
Warranty
5 years, unlimited kilometres
Roadside assistance
Up to 5 years
Service intervals
12 months or 15,000km
Average annual service cost (5 years)
$449.40
Total capped-price service cost (5 years)
$2247
To see how the Mazda CX-3 stacks up against the competition, check out our comparison tool
Let us help you find your new car
Buy your new car without the stress. It’s fast, simple and completely free.
Great service from Travis and team, second time I have used this business would not hesitate to recommend them to anyone
Craig C.
Purchased a Ford Ranger in Sunshine Coast, QLD
CarExpert helped Craig save $7,224 on his Ford Ranger, now let us save you on your next new car.
Get your BEST price
CarExpert’s Take on the Mazda CX-3 G20 Evolve
It’s becoming increasingly difficult to recommend the CX-3 given the competition it now faces.
Newcomers including the Chery Tiggo 4 and MG ZS are more practical and better equipped for less money, and the same can be said of familiar nameplates like the Kia Stonic and Skoda Kamiq.
That leaves the superior driving dynamics of the CX-3 to do a lot of heavy lifting, probably too much considering what buyers prioritise when shopping for a little SUV.
As such, we’d be looking elsewhere until Mazda decides to shake things up, whether that’s through discounts, equipment upgrades, or the launch of an all-new model.
CarExpert can save you thousands on a new Mazda CX-3. Click here to get a great deal
CBDT extended ITR filing deadline for AY 2025-26 to September 16 due to portal glitches. Over 7 crore ITRs filed. Condonation requests can help avoid penalties for genuine delays.
News18
ITR Filing 2025 Last Date: The income tax department has granted a one-day relaxation by September 16 to non-audit taxpayers to file their income tax return (ITR) for the financial year 2024-25 (Assessment year 2025-26). The relaxation came after the portal suffered glitches and technical problems and several CAs demanded that the due date be extended for filing the return.
“The due date for filing of income tax returns (ITRs) for AY 2025-26, originally due on July 31, 2025, was extended to September 15, 2025. The CBDT has decided to further extend the due date for filing these ITRs for AY 2025-26 from September 15, 2025, to September 16, 2025,” the Central Board of Direct Taxes (CBDT) said in a late-night circular.
The tax department also updated that over 7 crore ITRs were filed by September 15.
Despite this extension, there may be a possibility that some taxpayers aren’t able to file their returns, given the website glitches and technical problems.
By chance, if taxpayers won’t be able to file their returns once the due date is over, they are required to file the belated return, which comes with a clause of penalty. However, the condonation of delay feature allows taxpayers to avoid the penalty.
In cases of genuine hardship, taxpayers can file a Condonation Request under Section 119(2)(b) of the Income Tax Act. If the competent Income Tax Authority accepts the request, the taxpayer is not required to pay any additional tax, interest, or penalty. This provision acts as a special relief, allowing taxpayers to regularize their delayed Income Tax Return (ITR) filing without facing financial consequences.
Avnish Arora, Executive Director, Direct, Tax, Forvis Mazars India. explains that screenshots that show what issues were associated with the portal can be part of the supporting documentation when requesting condonation of delay in filing the Income Tax Return. “These screenshots help show that the taxpayer was making a genuine effort to file the return on time, but was experiencing technical problems that were beyond their control,” he adds.
He further states that proper documentation of the timeline further supports the case for condonation, thereby increasing the chances of obtaining relief. “The representation for condonation should specifically outline the issue experienced, what attempts were made to correct the issue, and all supporting documentation should be submitted in conjunction with your representation,” he says.
Arora, however, cautions that acceptance of a condonation request is not assured, as it rests entirely with the discretion of the Income Tax Department.
“The Department may allow such requests only if the reasons for delay are found to be genuine and satisfactory. Nevertheless, in certain instances, some Courts have taken a favourable view and condoned the delay, even where the Department had earlier rejected the assessee’s request looking into the facts, circumstances and reasons for delay,” he adds.
CA Sonu Jain, Chief Risk and Compliance Officer, 9Point Capital, also urges taxpayers to document the attempt with screenshots for a stronger case for condonation later if they can’t file today due to technical issues.
Varun Yadav is a Sub Editor at News18 Business Digital. He writes articles on markets, personal finance, technology, and more. He completed his post-graduation diploma in English Journalism from the Indian Inst… Read More
First Published:
September 16, 2025, 18:33 IST
News business tax ITR Filing 2025 Last Day: Facing Portal Glitches Today? Condonation Requests Can Waive Late Fees
Disclaimer: Comments reflect users’ views, not News18’s. Please keep discussions respectful and constructive. Abusive, defamatory, or illegal comments will be removed. News18 may disable any comment at its discretion. By posting, you agree to our Terms of Use and Privacy Policy.
Ethereum’s recent market performance has left many investors uncertain. After weeks of inflows and outflows, concerns about dips around the $4,400 level are weighing on market sentiment.
At the same time, presale crypto projects are attracting fresh capital. Based Eggman ($GGs) is among the new crypto token presales gaining momentum in 2025. Its mix of gaming culture and Web3 integration has drawn interest from both retail investors and larger holders.
This shift shows how token presales are becoming part of broader investment strategies during volatile cycles.
Based Eggman ($GGs): Building Culture into Crypto Presales
Based Eggman ($GGs) is the meme-driven token at the center of a growing Web3 ecosystem on Base, Coinbase’s Layer 2 network. Unlike many crypto coins on presale that offer limited functionality, GGs tokens are designed for liquidity, gaming, minting, payments, and even gas fees within smart contracts.
The project’s cultural roots also make it unique. In gaming, “GGs” stands for “good game,” a phrase instantly recognized across global communities. This gives Based Eggman an advantage, blending familiarity with utility.
The platform aims to connect gaming, streaming, and trading into one hub, while expanding beyond Base into Ethereum, BSC, and Solana networks.
With a presale price of $0.006389, more than 14 million tokens sold, and over $110,000 USDT raised, the $GGs presale has already secured strong traction. By tying token presales to actual cultural relevance, it stands out among the top crypto presales in 2025.
Comparison Table: $GGs vs Ethereum
Feature
$GGs (Based Eggman)
Ethereum (ETH)
Blockchain Base
Base (Layer 2)
Ethereum mainnet
Presale Status
Ongoing
Not available
Current Price
$0.006389
$4,500+
Core Utility
Gaming, Streaming, Culture
Smart Contracts, DeFi
Community Identity
Meme + Gamers
Developers + Institutions
Ethereum: Signs of Recovery but Netflows Lag
Ethereum recently experienced a shift in capital flows after weeks of pressure. Following eight consecutive days of outflows, ETH recorded four straight days of positive inflows, totaling $646 million in a single week. This shows that institutional confidence remains present despite market volatility.
However, the broader picture tells a more cautious story. Netflows for the month remain negative at $265.2 million, reflecting how uncertainty still lingers. While Ethereum continues to benefit from its long-term roadmap and established role in decentralized applications, its sideways trading near $4,400 highlights market hesitation.
This context is part of why presale crypto coins are gaining more attention as alternative positions during uncertain conditions.
Investors Shift Toward Based Eggman $GGs
The latest market narrative points to investors rotating from Ethereum into Based Eggman ($GGs). The presale token has become a focus as Ethereum consolidates below key resistance levels. This move shows how token presales are not only speculative plays but also hedges against uncertain price action in larger assets.
Whales and smaller traders alike are participating in the presale coin, attracted by its cultural recognition and gaming integration. Unlike traditional crypto ICO presale projects, Based Eggman combines utility with a community-driven brand identity.
This dual role helps explain why $GGs is being highlighted on crypto presale lists and why it has quickly become one of the best crypto presales to buy right now in 2025.
Conclusion: Presales Add Depth to Market Strategies
The current market cycle reveals how investors balance between large-cap assets and presale crypto tokens. Ethereum remains a leading asset, supported by institutions and its established ecosystem. Yet concerns about dips near $4,400 are encouraging some to diversify into new crypto presales.
Based Eggman ($GGs) has emerged as a key example of this rotation. Its combination of meme culture, gaming infrastructure, and growing presale traction reflects the evolution of cryptocurrency presales. While Ethereum provides stability, presale crypto projects like $GGs bring cultural depth and fresh energy to the market.
For those exploring the crypto presale list of 2025, Based Eggman demonstrates how token presales can connect financial utility with real community identity.
IT major HCL hosted HCLTech Talks, its campus connect event at Vel Tech Rangarajan Dr. Sagunthala R&D Institute of Science and Technology, Chennai.
The session was conducted by Prakash Chinnusamy, Global Director – Engineering and R&D Services (ERS) at HCLTech, who spoke on ‘Engineering the Future: Innovations in Digital Products and Platforms.’
In his talk, Chinnusamy highlighted the evolving landscape of software-driven products, the impact of AI and cloud technologies in engineering, and how future engineers must embrace continuous innovation to thrive in global markets.
“In today’s rapidly evolving technology landscape, the ability to innovate and adapt is more essential than ever. Bridging the gap between academic learning and industry practice ensures that the next generation of engineers is prepared for the challenges of tomorrow. Initiatives like HCLTech Talks are vital for empowering students with the knowledge, skills and mindset they need to thrive in digital product engineering and drive transformational progress across industries,” he added.
The event saw over 600 engineering students participate in a session exploring the future of product engineering and next-generation digital transformation.
Since its launch in January 2025, HCLTech Talks has reached over 7,000 students across India.
Look to the slow cooker for a sneaky money-saver this fall.
CNET
Slow cooking transforms tough, inexpensive cuts of meat into melt-in-your-mouth dishes that rival upscale restaurants, all while requiring minimal hands-on time. These compact countertop devices consume significantly less electricity than your oven, helping reduce monthly utility costs.
With their straightforward operation, slow cookers shine during the cooler months when hearty meals are most appealing. Whether craving rich beef stew, robust chili, succulent pork shoulder, or perfectly shredded chicken, these versatile appliances work their magic unattended. Simply prep your ingredients in the morning, and return home to the aroma of a fully cooked meal waiting on your table.
To see how much you can save using a slow cooker instead of the oven, I priced out the cooking time and cost for a pork shoulder recipe — a relatively cheap cut of meat — using all three methods. The savings are significant; the more you use your slow cooker or multicooker, the greater they’ll get.
Oven, slow cooker and Instant Pot compared
Appliance
Max wattage pull
Cost per hour of cooking
Total hours (6-lb. pork shoulder)
Total cost
Large oven
3,000
$0.51
7
$3.57
Slow cooker (6-quart)
260
$0.05
8
$0.40
Instant Pot pressure cooker (6-quart)
1,000
$0.17
1.5
$0.26
How I got these numbers
The easiest way to figure out how much a pressure or slow cooker might save you versus the big oven is to calculate the wattage pulled per hour, versus how much an electric stove would use. For this exercise, we’ll compare the energy draw from a full-size electric stove to that of a standard 6-quart slow cooker and a 6-quart Instant Pot pressure cooker.
It’s difficult to prorate the wattage pull for lower temperatures, so I calculated each appliance at its max energy draw, even though you probably won’t generally be cooking on high for these long sessions. The slow cooker and oven totals would likely drop a bit if they were set to lower temperatures, but the Instant Pot would not.
I used one of Food Network’s top-rated recipes for each to calculate the time needed and the total cost to cook a large pork shoulder (classic slow-cooked food) using all three appliances. It’s worth noting that pressure cooking with an Instant Pot takes significantly less time than slow cooking in an oven or a slow cooker.
Ovens are great for cooking low and slow but they use about 90% more energy than a countertop slow cooker.
KitchenAid
How much does an electric oven cost to run?
To determine electric oven consumption, you’ll calculate the wattage pull per hour of cooking. Most electric ovens draw around 3,000 watts, depending on the temperature. Electricity rates also vary widely by state. To find yours, consult this chart with the 2022 prices listed in cents per kilowatt-hour (kWh).
Once you find your oven’s wattage (either on the appliance’s tag, the owner’s manual, or an online product listing), multiply that number by the number of hours you use the oven each day. Then, divide by 1,000 watts (1 kilowatt) to find the kilowatt-hours (kWh) of electricity consumed.
Next, determine the average price per kWh of electricity in your state for the year according to the US Energy Information Administration. Multiply that amount by the number you just calculated (3, in this example) to determine your daily operating cost.
Working with New York’s electricity rate of 17 cents per kilowatt-hour (kWh), a 3,000-watt oven would cost me about 51 cents per hour. Properly slow-cooking a 6-pound boneless pork shoulder in the main oven will cost about $3.57 for the full seven hours.
With a wattage pull of around 300 watts, appliances don’t get much more energy-efficient than the slow cooker.
Colin West McDonald/CNET
How much does a slow cooker cost to run?
Slow cookers are also electric, so you’ll use the same methodology as above to find their cost. The wattage pull for slow cooker models varies; larger ones will use more energy. A standard 6-quart slow cooker has a max output of 260 watts.
Using these figures, we can determine that a slow cooker uses about 9% of the total energy draw of a large oven. Again, factoring in New York’s electricity costs, we can safely say a leading six-quart slow cooker will cost about 5 cents per hour. That’s 91% more energy-efficient than the average full-size electric oven. The pork shoulder recipe calls for eight hours of cooking, costing you about 40 cents using a slow cooker.
Due to a shorter overall cooking time, the Instant Pot (pressure cooker) turns out to be the most energy-efficient way to achieve that tender, slow-cooked result.
Instant Pot
How much does an Instant Pot cost to run?
A similar recipe for pork shoulder cooked in an Instant Pot called for one hour of cooking for a four-pound pork shoulder cut into pieces. Instant Pots will draw different amounts of energy based on the setting. For pressure cooking, a standard 6-quart model will draw about 1,000 watts or one-third the energy draw of a big oven.
Knowing this, we can determine that in New York State, it will cost you about 17 cents per hour to pressure cook. Because this recipe is for a smaller pork shoulder cut into pieces, I’ll add 30 minutes to that cook time. That would net about 26 cents to cook a similar 6-pound cut of meat, not diced into pieces, in an Instant Pot.
You can make delicious pulled pork in an oven, slow cooker or Instant Pot but one will cost you significantly more in overall energy.
Chowhound
How much can a slow cooker or Instant Pot save you?
Of these three methods, the big oven is the most expensive way to cook low and slow by a good margin. While $3 of savings might seem small, expanding it out over a year of long braises and slow cooks could save you some serious dough on your overall energy bill. If you slow cook once weekly, that’s a quick savings of $150 for the year.
Every Instant Pot is also a slow cooker so there’s no real need to buy both.
Alina Bradford/CNET
All is not equal: One significant consideration
One big caveat is that these three cooking methods, while similar in some ways, don’t deliver the same results. Many swear by braising meats and slow cooking in the authentic oven, even if it takes longer and costs more. And they might not be wrong. With pressure cooking, for instance, I’ve never gotten precisely the same result as with slow oven-roasting, but specific recipes come pretty close. People are also critical of slow cookers for their propensity to make food appear mushy, not just tender, when used for long periods.
Bonus: Instant Pots are cheap and slow cookers, even cheaper
If trimming money from your monthly bill has drawn you to the slow cooker or Instant Pot, you likely don’t want to shell out a ton of money to buy one. The good news is you won’t have to: A 6-quart Instant Pot can be had for around $80 (less if you find one on sale) and slow cookers start at around $40. It’s also worth noting that every Instant Pot has a slow cooker function, so there’s no need to stock your kitchen with both.
A healthcare worker at Henry Ford Health in Detroit, Michigan, has been placed on leave after making controversial comments about Charlie Kirk’s death.
The intensive care nurse is one of a growing number of employees who have been terminated or suspended due to violence-supporting reactions to the fatal shooting of the conservative commentator on Wednesday, Sept. 10.
In response to a post about Kirk’s murder, the individual commented, “God he got the day he deserved.”
RESTAURANT IN MAJOR CITY FACES FALLOUT OVER ‘OFFENSIVE’ CHARLIE KIRK POST BY CO-OWNER
A spokesperson provided the following statement to Fox News Digital.
“Henry Ford Health is aware of the social media comment, and the team member has been placed on leave while we internally investigate.”
A healthcare worker at Henry Ford Health in Michigan has been put on leave after making a controversial comment about the death of Charlie Kirk.(Getty Images)
“The views expressed by the individual do not reflect the values of Henry Ford Health. We strongly and unequivocally condemn violence in all its forms,” the statement continued.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
Last week, another healthcare worker — this one from Riverside Health in Virginia — was fired after making her own controversial comments about Charlie Kirk’s death.
Conservative activist Charlie Kirk, 31, was assassinated while speaking to students at a Utah university on Wednesday, Sept. 10.(Phill Magakoe/AFP via Getty Images)
The woman, who was an anesthesiologist at Riverside Walter Reed Hospital, made a social media post that included “highly inappropriate comments supporting violence against a public figure,” according to an email from the hospital sent to Fox News Digital.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
The employee was contracted through North American Partners in Anesthesia (NAPA), an anesthesiology group, the hospital stated.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
“We took prompt action and by mid-morning on Sept. 11, her contract through NAPA was terminated,” the statement read. “The individual is no longer affiliated with Riverside Health.”
Melissa Rudy is senior health editor and a member of the lifestyle team at Fox News Digital. Story tips can be sent to [email protected].
You don’t have permission to access “http://food.ndtv.com/food-drinks/how-to-make-omelettes-without-breaking-them-a-complete-guide-9285825” on this server.
Chinese Premier Li Qiang has signed a State Council order to issue a set of regulations on managing Chinese citizens employed by foreign diplomatic and consular missions in China.
The 12-article regulations, set to take effect on January 1, 2026, aim to facilitate the recruitment of Chinese citizens by foreign diplomatic and consular missions in China while safeguarding the legal rights and interests of Chinese employees.
According to the regulatory document, foreign diplomatic missions hiring Chinese citizens must post job and recruitment information on a platform established by China’s Ministry of Foreign Affairs.
Such missions should also sign service agreements with agencies appointed by local foreign affairs offices and departments, clarifying issues such as the rights and interests of Chinese employees, the regulations state.
To promote affordable housing, CREDAI said there is a need to create land banks.
Land reforms, ease of doing business, faster building plan approvals with lower charges, skilling, and creation of new cities are required to transform the Indian real estate sector, according to the Confederation of Real Estate Developers’ Associations of India (CREDAI).
Realtors’ apex body CREDAI, which represents more than 13,000 developers as members, has come out with a report, ‘The National Real Estate Development Framework ‘Vision 2047’ at its annual conference here.
“The future of Indian real estate is not just about creating buildings, but about building communities, livelihoods, and aspirations,” CREDAI National President Shekhar Patel said.
The report is both a vision document and a call to action, inviting all stakeholders to come together to transform India’s real estate sector and make it globally competitive, he added.
Patel said the real estate sector would play an important role in making India a developed nation by 2047.
To transform this sector, CREDAI has suggested a framework comprising nine pillars.
Seeking land reforms, the body said there is a need to ensure conclusive land titling through the Land Titling Act.
It also stressed the need to create a unified national digital land register to enhance transparency and accessibility.
To promote affordable housing, CREDAI said there is a need to create land banks.
The association also emphasised the development of 100 ‘cities of tomorrow’.
“Ease of doing construction constitutes the third pillar, seeking to transform building plan approvals via digitisation, transparency, and time-bound processing,” CREDAI said.
The realtors’ body also suggested that the Centre and states should rationalise development and approval charges. It should set up dedicated funds for infrastructure financing, including government-backed infrastructure and housing bonds.
The CREDAI report also mentioned that there should be a focus on slum redevelopment and promotion of the construction of green buildings.
There is a need for the adoption of new technologies in all spheres of the real estate sector, right from construction to customer relationship management, it added.
Skill development and labour welfare form the eighth pillar, the report said, and advocated state-led demand assessments and trade-specific training infrastructure.
The association also sought reforms in labour cess utilisation to directly benefit workers.
“The final pillar, ease of living, promotes celebrating cultural uniqueness and heritage in all major urban centres, advancing citizen-driven governance models, and incorporating climate resilience into urban infrastructure,” the report said.
CREDAI sought the establishment of high-level committees at the Prime Minister’s level, state-level war rooms, and a phased implementation plan.
“Together, these pillars chart a path toward a transparent, sustainable, inclusive, and technologically advanced real estate and urban development ecosystem fit for India’s ambitious future,” the association said.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
KUHINJE su često najzahtjevnije prostorije za uređenje. Kao primarno funkcionalan prostor, lako se može dogoditi da dekorativni predmeti na radnim površinama stvore dojam nereda, što je posljednje što želite.
Ipak, dizajneri interijera imaju tajnu za dodavanje karaktera kuhinji bez žrtvovanja dragocjenog prostora – drvene daske za rezanje. Ovaj pristupačan, a efektan detalj njihov je skriveni adut za stiliziranje radnih ploča, polica, pa čak i kuhinjskih otoka, piše Homes & Gardens.
Spoj stila i funkcionalnosti
Svi smo vidjeli savršeno stilizirane kuhinje koje odišu osobnošću, a da pritom nisu pretrpane nepotrebnim detaljima. Ako bolje pogledate, primijetit ćete da su drvene daske za rezanje gotovo uvijek prisutne. Upravo je spoj stila i funkcije ono što ih čini idealnim kuhinjskim dekorom.
“Iako obožavam lijepu kuhinju kao i svaka druga osoba, kuhinje prije svega trebaju biti funkcionalne. Zato volim detalje koji spajaju stil i funkciju, a drvene daske za rezanje savršen su primjer”, ističe dizajnerica interijera Kathy Kuo.
Osim što su praktične i uvijek nadohvat ruke, bogati tonovi drva unose toplinu i karakter u prostor.
Toplina i autentičnost drva
“Drvene daske za rezanje unose takav osjećaj topline i autentičnosti u kuhinju. One su utilitarne, ali također dodaju prirodnu teksturu koja uravnotežuje tvrđe površine poput kamenih radnih ploča ili metalnih elemenata. Posebno volim antikne daske za rezanje koje su još uvijek korisne, a nude prekrasnu patinu”, kaže dizajnerica interijera Marie Flanigan.
“Volim nasloniti veće daske na kuhinjsku pozadinu, gotovo kao pozadinu koja uzemljuje radnu ploču. Odatle se manje daske mogu složiti ispred, stvarajući ležeran, ali promišljen aranžman”, otkrila je.
Kako odabrati i kombinirati daske
Iako je ključno pronaći lijepe komade, jednako je važno i kako ih stilizirate. Ne radi se samo o naslanjanju jedne daske na zid.
“Uvijek me privlače daske s malo karaktera – preveliki okrugli oblici, izduženi pravokutnici ili vintage nalazi s ručno izrezbarenim ručkama. Tamnije drvo donosi bogatstvo, dok svjetliji tonovi održavaju kuhinju svježom i prozračnom”, objašnjava Marie.
Prema njezinim riječima, suptilni kontrasti čine prostor slojevitim i ugodnim za život: “Miješanje nekoliko različitih oblika i završnih obrada stvara interes bez da ikada djeluje previše stilizirano”.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Kreativne ideje za svaki prostor
Ako imate manju kuhinju s ograničenim prostorom na radnoj površini, postoje i druga rješenja.
“Sviđa mi se ideja izlaganja dasaka za rezanje s ručkama kao zidne galerije. Odaberite nekoliko dasaka za rezanje različitih oblika i veličina i objesite ih na različite visine za izgled koji djeluje bezvremenski i sakupljeno”, predlaže Kathy Kuo.
Za one koji žele trajnije rješenje, daske se mogu integrirati i u samu radnu ploču.
“Kada prostor dopušta, te prilagođene daske za radne ploče izgledaju sjajno. Uvijek su spremne za upotrebu i djeluju kao prirodni produžetak dizajna kuhinje”, dodaje Marie Flanigan.
Uređenje drvenim daskama za rezanje jednostavan je i cjenovno pristupačan način da podignete izgled svoje kuhinje. Ovaj šik detalj pretvara obično kuhinjsko pomagalo u dekoraciju koja prostoru daje bezvremenski šarm i karakter. Ako osjećate da vašoj kuhinji nedostaje topline ili zanimljivosti, možda je upravo drvena daska detalj koji ste tražili.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
Philadelphia came to Los Angeles having already clinched a playoff berth. With Monday’s 6–5 extra-inning win over the Dodgers they added a division title to that collection, one they celebrated in the center of the Dodger Stadium infield, then with champagne in the tiny visitors’ clubhouse.
The Dodgers are zeroing in on a playoff berth and division title of their own. So the chances are high the teams will meet again in the postseason, which makes this week’s series a great opportunity to do a little scouting.
“We try to gather as much information as we can,” infielder Miguel Rojas said. “They’re doing the same thing.”
That’s not the main objective though. Because if the Dodgers are closing in the postseason, they aren’t there yet. And they have even more work to do after Monday’s game, which ended with Philadelphia’s J.T. Realmuto’s 10th-inning sacrifice fly scoring ghost runner Harrison Bader from third with the winning run.
Dodgers third base Max Muncy reacts to grounding out in the 10th inning, sealing the Philles’ win Monday at Dodger Stadium.
(Carlin Stiehl/Los Angeles Times)
“With where we’re at, I’m trying to win every game,” said manager Dave Roberts, whose team fought back from deficits three times before losing. “And where it falls out is where it falls out.”
One of the things that both sides surely learned Monday is that the Dodger bullpen is still far from being playoff ready. Because after Emmet Sheehan held the Phillies to one hit over 5⅔ innings, striking out seven, he watched a quartet of relievers combine to give up four runs — three on homer runs — over the next four.
“It’s frustrating, just from a team perspective,” third baseman Max Muncy said of a bullpen that has blown 24 saves and ranks fourth in the National League with 30 losses.
It’s unlikely to cost the Dodgers another trip to the postseason. Even with Monday’s loss, they are two games in front of idle San Diego in the National League West with 12 games to play and their magic number for clinching an 11th division title in 12 seasons is 10.
The magic number to clinch a wild-card berth is six.
The Dodgers have also been eyeing the No. 2 seed in the postseason tournament, however, a spot Philadelphia holds and one that brings with it a bye in the first round. It’s a break Roberts’ battered roster could use, but it’s one that may now be impossible to grasp: Monday’s win pushed the Phillies’ lead to 5½ games in the race for No. 2, a deficit the Dodgers have less than two weeks to make up.
“It’s really hard to not face these games down the stretch like a playoff game,” Rojas said. “We’ve been doing this for almost two weeks now. That’s the way that we have to look at it if we want to be prepared for October.”
Those preparations were uneven at best Monday. At the plate, the Dodgers fought back from deficits three times to send the game to extra innings on Andy Pages’ solo homer with one out in the ninth. But they also went 0 for 8 with runners in scoring position and, after Muncy grounded out with the bases loaded in the 10th, they left nine men on base. That erased a big game from Mookie Betts, who drove in three runs on two sacrifice flies and a game-tying homer in the seventh.
Dodgers shortstop Mookie Betts hits a home run in the bottom of the seventh inning against the Phillies at Dodger Stadium Monday.
(Carlin Stiehl/Los Angeles Times)
That gave him 19 RBIs in September and his 78 for the season, three better than his total from all of last year. But that wasn’t enough to overcome another bullpen meltdown.
Sheehan followed opener Anthony Banda to the mound, taking the ball three batters in the game with the Phillies already leading 1-0 on Kyle Schwarber’s league-leading 53rd home run. Sheehan left with a 3-1 lead after giving up his only hit, a leadoff double to Otto Kemp in the seventh. But three batters later the Phillies had a 4-3 lead after Weston Wilson, the Phillies No. 9 hitter, homered off Jack Dreyer.
The Dodgers rallied to tie the game twice after that but each time the bullpen gave the lead back, the final run coming in the 10th on Realmuto’s game-winning fly ball to right off right-hander Blake Treinen (1-5).
Asked if the series will show the Dodgers anything that can use if they face the Phillies again next month, Muncy shook his head.
“Personally, I don’t necessarily think so,” said Muncy, who third-inning homer, his first since returning from the injured list as week ago, opened the Dodgers’ scoring. “We’ve done that in the past. We’ve played teams right before we’ve seen them in the postseason and usually they do everything complete[ly] opposite.
“Right now, you’re just trying to win a game. You’re not really worried about what’s ahead.”
Notes
Reliever Brock Stewart, the Dodgers’ most-celebrated acquisition at the trade deadline, left Monday to join Oklahoma City for a two-game rehab assignment. Stewart, on the injured list since Aug. 12 with right shoulder inflammation, is expected to pitch Tuesday and Thursday in Triple A before returning to Dodger Stadium.
“If all goes well, then we have a conversation over the weekend,” Roberts said of Stewart’s availability. “We’ve just got to make sure he’s healthy. If he’s right, then it could be very additive.”
For the second straight year Betts has been chosen as the Dodgers’ nominee for the Roberto Clemente Award, baseball’s most prestigious off-the-field prize, in recognition for his wide-ranging charity work.
In January, Betts’ 5050 Foundation donated more than $30,000 of Nike clothing to victims of the Southern California wildfires. A few weeks later, in partnership with the Los Angeles Dodgers Foundation (LADF), he donated more than $160,000 to the Brotherhood Crusade to help fight hunger and homelessness in Los Angeles.
Also this season the 5050 Foundation partnered with the Obama Foundation at Hyde Park Academy to donate youth sports equipment and other supplies while also funding the Mookie Betts Metro Baseball Tournament in Nashville.
Data Centre Stocks: Betting big on India’s data centre capacity, foreign brokerage Jefferies has estimated the country’s footprint in this area to expand significantly over the next five years. According to the brokerage, the country’s data centre capacity is expected to grow by five times to 8 gigawatts (GW) by 2030.
The brokerage has projected capital expenditure (capex) to the tune of $30 billion during this period, with leasing revenues also estimated to jump five times to $ 8 billion.
Key beneficiaries of India’s data centre capacity expansion in 5 years
Jefferies expects Bharti Airtel, Reliance and ADE to form 35-40 per cent of the domestic data centre capacity, with players across areas such as infrastructure, power and cooling solutions also expected to be key beneficiaries of this surge.
Add Zee Business as a Preferred Source
This growth trajectory points to a structural demand shift driven by Cloud adoption, Artificial Intelligence-led workloads, rising Internet penetration, and the Centre’s digitalisation push.
India’s Data Centre Story | Economic Survey expects capacity to expand to $11.6 billion by 2032
The brokerage’s estimates follow a projected expansion from $4.5 billion in 2023 to $11.6 billion by 2032, in the Economic Survey earlier this year, as the country’s data centre market experiences substantial growth. That indicates a CAGR of almost 11 per cent.
In the official document, economists have highlighted factors such as infrastructure expansion and increasing digital service demand behind the projected robust growth in this area.
According to the Economic Survey, the country’s colocation data centre capacity reached 977 MW in 2023, with an additional capacity of 258 MW leading to 105 per cent growth on a year-on-year basis.
The total data centre capacity under construction for the years 2024-2028 is estimated 1.03 GW, with a additional 1.29 GW planned, according to the survey.
The Economic Survey is an annual report presented by the government on the eve of the presentation of the Union Budget in Parliament.
It is prepared by the Economic Division within the Department of Economic Affairs, part of the Ministry of Finance, under the guidance of the Chief Economic Advisor.
Data centre pending seen increasing over 19% this year
According to a forecast by research and advisory firm Gartner, the expenditure on data centre systems in the country is expected to increase 19.1 per cent in 2025, marking nearly double the growth rate recorded the previous year.
The firm expects software and IT services to be major drivers of IT spending growth in the country, rising 16.9 per cent and 11.2 per cent during the year, respectively.
What are data centres and why is it important for economies like India to raise their capacities in this area?
Data centres are specialised facilities housing digital hardware including computer servers, storage systems and networking equipment to store, process and distribute digital data.
These facilities form the very backbone for major web applications, ranging from Cloud platforms to banking to e-commerce to social media and communications services.
Simply put, they enable businesses to manage and store massive volumes of data safely and efficiently, providing critical backup, disaster recovery, and uptime for digital services.
It is crucial for the economy to expand its footprint in this area given its growing digital economy and data generation.
Travel feels a lot easier when your luggage is dependable, and Mokobara has built a name for just that. With its clever designs, smooth wheels, and sturdy build, a Mokobara suitcase is both stylish and practical. Right now, some of the most popular Mokobara luggage sets and cabin suitcases are available at striking prices.
Mokobara suitcases on Amazon deals offer smart travel solutions, combining sleek design with durability for smoother trips at impressive discounts.(AI-generated)
Thanks to Amazon deals and offers, you can pick up a Mokobara trolley bag or suitcase set at up to 60% off. These top 8 picks bring you the best mix of quality and value, making it the right time to upgrade your travel gear.
8 Best deals on Mokobara luggage
The Mokobara Transit Luggage Set in Still Loading Brownray Limited Edition 2.0 brings style and function together for effortless travel. With durable polycarbonate shells, these suitcases protect your belongings while keeping them light to carry. The 8 spinner silent ninja wheels glide smoothly across terminals, while the TSA-approved lock keeps essentials secure. From short trips to long holidays, this three-piece Mokobara luggage set adapts perfectly to your travel needs.
The Mokobara Transit Luggage in We Meet Again Sunray Limited Edition 2.0 is built for frequent travellers who value durability and ease. Its hard polycarbonate shell offers strong protection, while the 8 silent ninja wheels glide effortlessly across airports. With its aviation-grade telescope handle and TSA-approved lock, this large check-in suitcase makes packing secure and travel smooth, combining style with reliable performance for long trips.
The Mokobara Transit Cabin Pro in Black and Yellow is a smart choice for frequent flyers who need compact yet spacious luggage. Crafted from durable polycarbonate, it offers strong protection while remaining lightweight. The 8 Hinomoto wheels glide smoothly, and the TSA-approved lock keeps belongings secure. With a handy front tech compartment for a 14-inch laptop and well-planned interiors, this 40-litre cabin suitcase makes short trips effortless and organised.
The Mokobara Aisle Trunk in Homegrown is designed for long getaways that demand extra space and thoughtful organisation. With a massive 105-litre capacity, it easily fits essentials for more than two weeks of travel. The polycarbonate shell and YKK zippers offer durability, while silent ninja wheels ensure smooth movement. Inside, multiple compartments, compression straps, and a spill-proof pocket make packing smarter, turning this large check-in suitcase into a dependable travel partner.
The Mokobara Transit Cabin Overnighter in We Meet Again Sunray 2.0 is ideal for quick business trips or short stays. Crafted from durable polycarbonate, it ensures belongings stay protected while keeping the case light and easy to carry. The 8 Hinomoto wheels glide silently, and the TSA-approved lock adds extra security. With a front laptop compartment and smart internal organisation, this 44-litre cabin suitcase keeps essentials accessible and neatly packed.
The Mokobara Transit Trunk in We Meet Again Sunray 2.0 is perfect for travellers who like both structure and flexibility. Its tough polycarbonate shell protects your belongings, while detachable shelves let you organise items your way. The front pocket with mesh and spill-proof compartments keeps essentials like toiletries within quick reach. With 8 smooth Hinomoto wheels and an expandable design, this 70 cm suitcase makes travel both practical and stylish.
The Mokobara Aisle Trunk Luggage Set in Shy Blue is built for travellers who want space, structure, and durability. With three sizes covering everything from short flights to extended trips, this set adapts to every plan with ease. The polycarbonate shell offers strength, while silent wheels and a sturdy handle make movement smooth. Inside, multiple compartments and spill-proof pockets keep essentials organised, making this 3-piece set a reliable travel upgrade.
The Mokobara Moko Blocks Kids Luggage in Cotton Candy is playful, sturdy, and perfectly sized for little travellers. Made from tough German Makrolon polycarbonate, it handles rough use with ease while staying lightweight for kids to manage. The adjustable handle fits their height, and smooth wheels keep it easy to roll. With a detachable shoulder strap for parents and a fun sticker pack, this 38 cm trolley makes travel exciting and practical.
Similar articles for you
Get vacation-ready! Up to 80% off on top picks for trolley bags
₹2500″>Travel smarter, not harder: Your guide to affordable trolley bags under ₹2500
Duffles and backpacks at up to 60% off on Amazon; Top picks to buy now!
Beyond basics: Fun and fashionable backpacks for girls; Top 8 picks
How long will the discount on Mokobara luggage last?
The Amazon offers tend to run for a limited time, often during special sale events. Once stock runs low or the sale period ends, prices revert. Best to act fast if you spot something you like.
Are all Mokobara models included in the price drop?
Not every style or size is necessarily discounted. The top 8 picks are highlighted, but some niche colours or limited editions might not be part of the offer. Always check the product page.
Can I return a Mokobara suitcase bought during the discount period?
Yes, you usually can. Amazon’s return policy still applies. If the product is damaged or doesn’t meet expectations, please reach out to us through the order support channel to request a return.
Do the price drops affect shipping cost or delivery speed?
Often, deals include free delivery in certain areas, but shipping speed depends on your location and stock availability. Prime members may see faster dispatch times. Let me know your pin code if you want more precise info.
Disclaimer: At Hindustan Times, we help you stay up-to-date with the latest trends and products. Hindustan Times has an affiliate partnership, so we may get a part of the revenue when you make a purchase. We shall not be liable for any claim under applicable laws, including but not limited to the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, concerning the products. The products listed in this article are in no particular order of priority.
The under-the-radar war thriller boasts a star-studded cast and yet what many film fans don’t know is that it’s the last time one legendary British actor was seen on screen.
With a star-studded cast, it’s no wonder audiences are leaving five-star reviews, as the likes of Helen Mirren and Aaron Paul help bring to life a gripping military story. Eye in the Sky retells the tale of an officer leading a military operation in Kenya to capture terrorists.
Although, things don’t go to plan when Colonel Katherine Powell, played by Mirren, takes an unexpected turn. Their aim to launch a deadly missile against the Al-Shabaab terrorists is interrupted when a young girl innocently wanders into the ‘kill zone’, sparking a worldwide debate on modern warfare.
The iconic ensemble cast is also made up of Iain Glen, Phoebe Fox, Jeremy Northam and British legend Alan Rickman. Eye in the Sky became the star’s last ever film project before his passing in 2016, with the film releasing not even six months prior in September 2015.
While the film itself didn’t go on to have much notable success at the box office, it has since garnered quite the amount of support from movie buffs online. Overall, it boasts an impressive score of 95% on the review site Rotten Tomatoes, as fans praise its suspenseful storyline and A-list casting.
One review said: “Tense, thrilling and thought-provoking, a stellar cast brings vividly to life a believable story.” While someone else chimed in to say it was “slow, intense and thrilling”.
Another review reads: “Excellent film. Alan Rickman and Helen Mirren are brilliant. Well worth watching.” As someone else described the roles in Eye in the Sky to be both “breathtakingly performed” and “unusually genuine”.
Further praise came from a fan who said: “I have to say, this film blows my mind. The combination of the suspense, the back-and-forth, and the frustration exceeds any out-of-the-world action sequences; not to mention Mirren and Rickman being superb as always.
Meanwhile, another rave review added: “Wow. Such a great film. This movie builds tension until the very last scene, which makes for a thrilling and intense ride. Great acting all across the board and great cinematography. After watching this film and Official Secrets, Gavin Hood has proven to be a great director and one of my favourites. Highly recommend this one!
The 2015 film was brought to life by director Gavin Hood, the man behind the likes of X-Men Origins: Wolverine and Ender’s Game, after he was captivated by the script Guy Hibbert wrote. Joining the dream team as a producer also happened to be British actor Colin Firth.
It’s their joint efforts that created what one viewer called an “excellent piece of filming and interpretation”. They claimed it perfectly displays the complicated crossroads between “military, legal and political paths”.
Whether you’re a fan of Rickman looking for another role of his sure to blow you away or simply looking for a thriller to keep you on the edge of your seat, Eye in the Sky is available to stream now on Amazon Prime.
Australia’s national road toll is rising sharply despite more speed camera fines being handed out than ever before, prompting fresh calls for a rethink of the nation’s road safety strategy.
According to the Australian Automobile Association (AAA), 1353 people died on the nation’s roads in the 12 months to 31 August 2025 – the highest annual toll since 2010.
That figure is 4.3 per cent higher than the year prior, and a staggering 18.5 per cent increase since all state and territory governments signed the current National Road Safety Strategy in 2021.
The strategy, which aimed to halve road deaths by 2030, is now tracking in the opposite direction. August 2025 alone saw 118 deaths – 25.8 per cent above the monthly average since 2020.
CarExpert can save you thousands on a new car. Click here to get a great deal.
AAA managing director Michael Bradley said the figures prove Australia’s current approach isn’t working.
“The numbers show Australia’s current approach to road trauma reduction is clearly not working and we can’t expect different results by doing more of the same,” Mr Bradley said.
“Australia’s National Road Safety Strategy is delivering strong increases in road trauma, not the promised reductions and it’s time all governments came to the table to assess what’s gone so wrong, and what corrective steps are now needed.”
The AAA wants the Commonwealth to initiate independent, “no-blame” investigations into emerging crash trends and establish a permanent national body to interrogate safety data, identify causes, and recommend corrective measures.
The increases aren’t uniform. Some states and territories have managed to reduce fatalities, while others are experiencing sharp spikes.
Jurisdiction
Deaths to Aug 2024
Deaths to Aug 2025
Change
% Change
NSW
323
375
+52
+16.1%
VIC
296
290
-6
-2.0%
QLD
290
311
+21
+7.2%
SA
99
89
-10
-10.1%
WA
182
196
+14
+7.7%
TAS
32
42
+10
+31.3%
NT
68
42
-26
-38.2%
ACT
7
8
+1
+14.3%
Australia
1297
1353
+56
+4.3%
Despite recording the nation’s biggest percentage drop, the Northern Territory still has the highest fatality rate at 16 deaths per 100,000 residents – more than three times the national average of 4.9.
One of the most alarming statistics is the sharp rise in pedestrian fatalities. 206 pedestrians were killed in the past 12 months, up nearly 50 per cent since the strategy was adopted. That’s the highest figure for this measure since 2007, with spikes in WA, Queensland, South Australia, Tasmania, and NSW.
Female road deaths also rose sharply – up 18 per cent year-on-year – while male deaths, which still account for the majority, edged up slightly by 0.4 per cent.
The worsening toll comes as Australians are hit with more speeding fines than ever before. Data from state governments show speed camera revenue is at record highs in NSW, Victoria, and Queensland.
For example, Victoria’s road safety camera program issued more than 1.7 million fines in the last financial year, the highest in its history.
Data for 2024 shows New South Wales issued more than 900,000 speeding fines, of which about 80 per cent were from cameras. Queensland tallied almost 800,000 speeding fines in 2024, with a similar high proportion from cameras.
In 2024, nationally:
10.3 million random breath tests were conducted, with 57,801 positive results (0.6 per cent positive rate)
500,683 roadside drug tests were conducted, with 52,411 positive results (10.5 per cent positive rate)
3.3 million speeding fines were issued: 544,087 by police (16.4 per cent) and 2,779,244 by cameras (83.6 per cent)
330,926 mobile phone use fines were issued: 40,931 by police (12.4 per cent) and 289,995 by cameras (87.6 per cent)
183,315 seatbelt non-compliance fines were issued: 22,655 by police (12.4 per cent) and 160,659 by cameras (87.6 per cent)
51,150 fines were issued for unlicensed driving, as well as 56,502 charges (offences which may require appearance in court) and 4351 arrests
Yet despite the unprecedented enforcement, fatalities continue to climb. Road safety advocates say the figures raise questions about whether camera-based enforcement is targeting the right risks.
Critics argue governments have become overly reliant on speed cameras as a safety solution – and as a source of revenue – while neglecting other measures such as road design improvements, targeted enforcement of high-risk behaviours (like distracted and drug-affected driving), and better post-crash care.
As an example, while Queensland saw its road toll increase by more than seven per cent, the police managed to charge motorists $465 million in traffic fines for the financial year 2024, almost three times the $171.2 million it racked up in financial year 2020.
NSW is no better with a 16 per cent increase in the road toll, while according to Revenue NSW, the number of fines (traffic, parking, seatbelt and mobile) has significantly increased.
The AAA says the situation demands urgent action from the Commonwealth.
“The numbers show Australia’s current approach to road trauma reduction is clearly not working and we can’t expect different results by doing more of the same,” Mr Bradley said.
With Australia now recording its deadliest 12-month toll in 15 years, pressure is mounting on policymakers to acknowledge that simply issuing more fines isn’t driving the cultural and behavioural change the National Road Safety Strategy promised.
Dev Accelerator IPO allotment was finalized on September 15, 2025. Shares list soon on BSE and NSE.
News18
Dev Accelerator IPO Allotment Status: The allotment of unlisted shares of Dev Accelerator IPO was finalised on September 15, 2025. Investors who applied for the issue and received the allotment have been already been informed by the registrar. All eyes are now on the listing of shares on the exchanges – Bombay Stock Exchange (BSE) and National Stock Exchange (NSE), likely on September 17, 2025.
Grey market premium is a popular instrument used to gauge the expected listing of the issue’s shares on the exchanges whenever it happens.
Dev Accelerator IPO Details
Dev Accelerator Limited, one of the largest flexible workspace operators in Tier-2 markets, launched its initial public offering (IPO) between September 10, 2025 and September 12, 2025. Investors bid for 49,61,11,320 equity shares against the 1,31,47,075 equity shares on offer, translating to a total subscription of 37.74 times.
The company has fixed the price band at Rs 56–61 per share with a face value of Rs 2. The IPO, entirely a fresh issue of shares worth Rs 143.35 crore, does not include any offer-for-sale (OFS) component.
Investors can bid for a minimum lot size of 235 shares.
Dev Accelerator Issue Objectives
Proceeds from the IPO will be used for:
Capital expenditure for fit-outs in upcoming centers,
Repayment/prepayment of certain borrowings, including redemption of NCDs,
General corporate purposes.
Dev Accelerator Listing Price Prediction
According to market observers, unlisted shares of Dev Accelerator Ltd are currently trading at Rs 67 against the upper IPO price of Rs 61. It means a grey market premium or GMP of Rs 6, which is 9.84% over its issue price, indicating lukewarm listing gains for investors.
The GMP is based on market sentiments and keeps changing. ‘Grey market premium’ indicates investors’ readiness to pay more than the issue price.
About Dev Accelerator
Dev Accelerator operates 28 centers across 11 Indian cities, managing over 14,000 seats across 8.6 lakh sq. ft. of office space. Its offerings include managed office spaces, coworking solutions, design and execution services, payroll and facility management, and IT/ITeS solutions.
The company has a strong presence in both Tier-1 and Tier-2 markets such as Delhi NCR, Mumbai, Pune, Hyderabad, Ahmedabad, Indore, Jaipur, Rajkot, Udaipur, and Vadodara. As of May 2025, it served over 250 clients, including large corporates, MNCs, and SMEs.
How to check Dev Accelerator IPO allotment status — step-by-step
1) Check the registrar (KFin Technologies)
Open the registrar’s IPO-status page (KFin’s iPostStatus / KOSMIC IPO status).
In the Select IPO dropdown choose Dev Accelerator Limited.
Choose one of the ID options: Application No., Demat account (DP ID/Client ID) or PAN.
Enter the corresponding detail and the captcha, then click Submit / Search.
The page will show whether you’ve been Allotted (and how many shares) or Not Allotted.
Registrar portal instructions are the standard first check.
2) Check on BSE (exchange allotment page)
Go to BSE’s IPO allotment / application status page.
Select Issue Type = Equity and choose Dev Accelerator Ltd in the Issue Name dropdown.
Enter Application No. or PAN, complete captcha (“I am not a robot”) and click Search.
BSE will display allotment status.
Dev Accelerator Should You Subscribe?
Anand Rathi in its report:
At the upper end of the price band, the company is valued at 305x FY25 P/E and 3.5x P/S, with a post-issue market capitalization of ₹5,501
million. It has broadened its offerings to include HR, IT, and software
services through Saasjoy to strengthen client retention and address
evolving workplace and technology needs.
Additionally, via its associate Scaleax Advisory Private Limited, it helps GCCs build global teams in India by providing facility and payroll management, as well as recruitment solutions like talent sourcing, AI-based screening, and team augmentation. Considering these factors, the IPO is viewed as fully priced, warranting a “SUBSCRIBE – LONG TERM” recommendation.
Disclaimer: The views and investment tips by experts in this News18.com report are their own and not those of the website or its management. Users are advised to check with certified experts before taking any investment decisions.
Varun Yadav is a Sub Editor at News18 Business Digital. He writes articles on markets, personal finance, technology, and more. He completed his post-graduation diploma in English Journalism from the Indian Inst… Read More
First Published:
September 16, 2025, 10:23 IST
News business ipo Dev Accelerator IPO Listing Price Prediction: 37x Subscription, Check Allotment Status
Disclaimer: Comments reflect users’ views, not News18’s. Please keep discussions respectful and constructive. Abusive, defamatory, or illegal comments will be removed. News18 may disable any comment at its discretion. By posting, you agree to our Terms of Use and Privacy Policy.
On September 17, the Federal Reserve is set to deliver its first historic rate cut since 2024. Investors are split, will this spark a new rally or trigger a sharp pullback?
Meanwhile, Veteran trader Ted believes this decision could be the turning point, outlining two possible scenarios for Bitcoin.
Why the Fed Decision Matters
According to the CME FedWatch tool, there is now a 95% chance of a 25 basis-point cut. Some traders even wish for a deeper 50 bps cut, which would add more fuel to risk assets.
However, a rate cut usually weakens the U.S. dollar and supports assets like gold and Bitcoin.
But Ted warns this might not be a simple “bullish signal” for crypto bulls. He feels the setup looks like a “buy the rumor, sell the news” situation, where markets first dump before making a strong recovery.
Two Bitcoin Key Scenarios
September has turned out differently for Bitcoin than most traders expected. Instead of following its usual bearish pattern, the bitcoin is up nearly by 6% this month.
Last week’s strong performance pushed prices into a tough zone between $115,000 and $117,200, a level where sellers have historically stepped in.
Thus Ted’s chart highlights two possible scenarios for Bitcoin post-Fed decision.
Scenario 1: Bitcoin could drop to around $104,000 before bouncing back and climbing toward new highs.
Scenario 2: A deeper correction takes BTC near $92,000, where a CME futures gap also remains unfilled, before bouncing back and aiming for a new all-time high.
In both scenarios, Ted expects Bitcoin to eventually recover and climb to fresh highs, but the path to get there could test investors’ patience.
Bitcoin: Calm Before the Storm
Adding to the uncertainty, JP Morgan and other major analysts echo Ted’s cautious outlook, expecting a market dump before any recovery. Whales have already been selling heavily, and ETF inflows have slowed, putting extra pressure on Bitcoin’s price.
For now, all eyes remain on the Fed’s announcement.
As the countdown begins, Bitcoin currently stands at $115,391 seeing a slight jump in the last 24 hours with a market cap hitting $2.30 trillion.
The programme aims to train and certify over 250 faculty annually on the SnowPro Associate certification and support more than 1,000 educators to integrate Snowflake concepts into their teaching
Snowflake, the AI Data Cloud company, has collaborated with ICT Academy to scale the Snowflake Academia Program in India, an initiative that will give educators and students direct access to data and AI technologies. Snowflake and ICT Academy aim to train over 1,000 educators and 2,50,000 students by providing hands-on experience and pathways to industry-recognised SnowPro certifications over the next three years.
This initiative builds on Snowflake’s global programme, One Million Minds + One Platform, focused on global AI upskilling. At the core of this initiative is faculty enablement, equipping educators with knowledge, curriculum, and free access to the Snowflake Platform, Snowflake technical foundations, and advanced courses such as data engineering and the latest AI-related programmes to train their students effectively.
ICT Academy, a not-for-profit society, is an initiative backed by the Centre, state governments, and industry leaders, and spans 1,500-plus academic institutions across 27 states. The collaboration with Snowflake is aligned with the ICT Academy’s Public-Private-Partnership (PPP) model, offering participation from higher education institutions, arts and science colleges, and polytechnic institutions across tier-1 and tier-2 cities.
The collaboration focuses on three key areas: building student data literacy through training and certification, empowering faculty via a train-the-trainer model and strengthening industry–academia engagement through events and hackathons.
The programme aims to train and certify over 250 faculty annually on the SnowPro Associate certification and support more than 1,000 educators to integrate Snowflake concepts into their teaching. Snowflake will provide faculty dedicated enablement sessions, a ready-to-teach curriculum, learning materials, tailored hands-on training, and the software required to train students.
Faculty will become proficient in demonstrating Snowflake concepts and embedding them in college courses, such as cloud computing, data warehousing, big data analytics, database management systems, machine learning, AI, and software engineering. They will also be able to access a global community of educators leveraging Snowflake in their curricula, fostering opportunities for connection and collaboration.
Students will gain direct access to the Snowflake AI Data Cloud for hands-on learning and project work, supported by a structured curriculum, official teaching resources, and cost-free platform credits. The Snowflake courses will be available to students enrolled in the third year of Computer Science, Engineering, or Management-related programmes. The new courses will be offered in multiple formats, allowing them to be integrated directly into the college curriculum, included as lessons within existing subjects, or provided as extra-curricular subjects.
“The collaboration with ICT Academy is a major step in shaping India’s data and AI future-ready workforce. By providing access to a relevant, up-to-date curriculum that includes ready-to-use modules, Snowflake is helping bridge the gap between academic theory and practical application. We are proud to work with the ICT Academy to enable educators and students to create a sustainable model for large-scale AI skilling in India. This collaboration will accelerate student career opportunities by allowing them to gain hands-on experience and graduate with a strong portfolio of projects, showcasing the industry-ready skills employers are looking for,” said Vijayant Rai, Managing Director, India, Snowflake.
The collaboration also fosters connections between academia and industry through round-tables, seminars, and industry events, providing students and educators opportunities to engage directly with technology leaders and employers.
Speaking on the collaboration, Srikanth. V, CEO, ICT Academy of Tamil Nadu, added, “Our collaboration with Snowflake is not just about introducing new courses, it’s about transforming the way data and AI are taught in India. By providing faculty with the latest tools and curriculum, we are creating a multiplier effect that will benefit students for years to come. This partnership will help bridge the urban–rural skills divide, enabling institutions across Tier-1 and Tier-2 cities to produce graduates who are industry-ready from Day One.”
Looking for the most recent regular Connections answers? Click here for today’s Connections hints, as well as our daily answers and hints for The New York Times Mini Crossword, Wordle and Strands puzzles.
Today’s Connections: Sports Edition has a really odd green group — simple once you get it, of course. If you’re struggling but still want to solve it, read on for hints and the answers.
Connections: Sports Edition is published by The Athletic, the subscription-based sports journalism site owned by the Times. It doesn’t show up in the NYT Games app but appears in The Athletic’s own app. Or you can play it for free online.
Read more: NYT Connections: Sports Edition Puzzle Comes Out of Beta
Hints for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups
Here are four hints for the groupings in today’s Connections: Sports Edition puzzle, ranked from the easiest yellow group to the tough (and sometimes bizarre) purple group.
Yellow group hint: Fore!
Green group hint: Name of a league.
Blue group hint: Subjective scoring.
Purple group hint: Drinking vessel.
Answers for today’s Connections: Sports Edition groups
Yellow group: Golf scoring terms.
Green group: WNBA.
Blue group: Sports that have judges.
Purple group: ____ cup.
Read more: Wordle Cheat Sheet: Here Are the Most Popular Letters Used in English Words
What are today’s Connections: Sports Edition answers?
The completed NYT Connections: Sports Edition puzzle for Sept. 16, 2025.
NYT/Screenshot by CNET
The yellow words in today’s Connections
The theme is golf scoring terms. The four answers are birdie, bogey, eagle and par.
The green words in today’s Connections
The theme is WNBA. The four answers are Association, Basketball, National and Women’s.
The blue words in today’s Connections
The theme is sports that have judges. The four answers are diving, figure skating, gymnastics and skateboarding.
The purple words in today’s Connections
The theme is ____ cup. The four answers are America’s, Ryder, Stanley and World.
West Nile virus is surging across the U.S. this summer, with infections running about 40% higher than normal, according to new reports.
The virus is most commonly spread to people through the bite of an infected mosquito, although the disease cycle also includes infected birds. When mosquitoes feed on infected birds, they can pick up the virus and transmit it to humans.
There have been roughly 770 human cases in the U.S. as of early September, with nearly 500 classified as severe, according to the latest data from the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, which tracks cases reported by state health departments.
KANSAS TRACKS 5 SERIOUS WEST NILE VIRUS CASES AS MOSQUITO SEASON PEAKS ACROSS THE STATE
That’s about 40% higher than the average number of cases reported by this point in previous years (around 550 total and 350 that qualify as severe), based on CDC data.
Most West Nile cases are reported in August and September.
West Nile virus is often transmitted through infected mosquitoes.(iStock)
The official report emphasized that this data is still preliminary. Many mild infections go unreported, and there’s often a lag before all severe cases are confirmed.
MOSQUITO-BORNE VIRUS SPREADING THROUGH CHINA CAUSES HIGH FEVER, JOINT PAIN
Though a spike is expected during peak season, experts say the intensity of the outbreak and the percentage of mosquitoes testing positive for the virus is unusual.
For most people, West Nile produces mild symptoms — such as fever, aches and rashes — or none at all, according to the CDC.
Experts say the intensity of the outbreak and the percentage of mosquitoes testing positive for the virus is unusual.(iStock)
In rare serious cases, the virus invades the nervous system, causing meningitis, encephalitis (swelling of the brain), paralysis or death.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
It’s the spike in these latter symptoms that is causing concern. People over 50 or those with compromised immune systems are at highest risk, experts caution.
Experts recommend wearing loose, long-sleeved clothing, applying insect repellent and keeping window screens secure to prevent mosquito bites.(iStock)
West Nile virus was first identified in Africa in 1937, with the first European outbreak occurring in 1996. It reached the U.S. in 1999, when an outbreak in New York sent 62 people to the hospital over two months, data shows.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
Avoiding mosquito bites is the first line of defense. Health officials recommend wearing loose, long-sleeved clothing; applying insect repellent (especially at dawn and dusk when mosquitoes are most active); and ensuring that window screens are secure.
MORE IN HEALTH NEWS
Around homes, eliminating standing water (like that found in buckets, tires and gutters) can help keep mosquitoes from breeding.
Khloe Quill is a lifestyle production assistant with Fox News Digital. She and the lifestyle team cover a range of story topics including food and drink, travel, and health.
You don’t have permission to access “http://food.ndtv.com/news/when-i-left-home-in-2000-chef-vikas-khannas-throwback-from-his-early-new-york-days-9282642” on this server.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-09-15/UNHRC-to-hold-urgent-debate-on-Israeli-airstrike-on-Qatar-1GGUmfWBFDi/img/452c26b33cba4d6e89979268e919f57b/452c26b33cba4d6e89979268e919f57b.png' alt='A general view of participants of the 60th session of the Human Rights Council at the UN headquarters in Geneva, September 9, 2025. /VCG '
The United Nations Human Rights Council (UNHRC) will hold an urgent debate in Geneva on Tuesday regarding Israel’s September 9 airstrike targeting Hamas leaders in Qatar, the Council announced on Monday.
Hamas said five of its members were killed in the attack, though its leadership was reportedly unharmed. The strike has prompted U.S.-aligned Gulf Arab states to close ranks, heightening tensions in ties between Israel and the United Arab Emirates, which normalized relations in 2020.
The debate was requested by Pakistan on behalf of the Organization of Islamic Cooperation member states, and by Kuwait on behalf of the Gulf Cooperation Council.
The request came as leaders of Arab and Islamic states were meeting in Doha on Monday, where they were expected to warn that Israel’s attack on Qatar, along with other “hostile acts,” threatens coexistence and efforts to normalize relations, according to a draft resolution from the gathering.
Tuesday’s urgent debate will mark the 10th of its kind at the UNHRC since its establishment in 2006.
Global investment management firm BlackRock Services India has signed a fresh lease with Indiqube Space Ltd for 1.43 lakh sq. ft at KNG Tower 1 (Indiqube Symphony), MG Road, Ashok Nagar, Bengaluru, as per real estate analytics firm Propstack.
The 10-year lease commences on October 1, 2025, with a monthly rental outlay of ₹2.72 crore, with a rent commitment of ₹410 crore over the tenure, and 5 per cent annual escalation.
The lease covers ground plus five floors in the building, with rentals fixed at ₹190 per sq. ft per month. BlackRock will also pay a security deposit of ₹21.75 crore.
The deal comes at a time when Bengaluru continues to lead office space leasing in India. The total Grade A office stock across the top six cities stands at approximately 1,030 msf, with Bengaluru holding the largest share at 26 per cent, followed by Delhi-NCR at 19 per cent and the Mumbai Metropolitan Region (MMR) at 18 per cent, according to the Investment Information and Credit Rating Agency (ICRA).
Recently, TCS signed a 15-year lease for 1.4 million sq. ft. on Neeladri Road, Electronic City, Bengaluru, at a monthly rent of ₹9.31 crore (₹66.50 per sq. ft.), with a 12 per cent escalation every three years. Apple India has also leased approximately 2.7 lakh sq. ft. of office space in Bengaluru for a 10-year period. The agreement, with a starting rent of ₹6.3 crore per month, is expected to cost the company over ₹1,000 crore in rent, parking and maintenance charges over the contract term.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
APPLE je sa serijom iPhone 17, nakon godina istog dizajna još od iPhonea 11, napokon donio vidljivu promjenu – i, čini se, pogodio. Prema izvješću poznatog analitičara Ming-Chi Kua, potražnja za novim modelima u prvom tjednu prednarudžbi značajno je nadmašila prošlogodišnju seriju 16, piše GSMArena.
Ovi podaci predstavljaju značajan oporavak za Apple, s obzirom na to da su prednarudžbe za iPhone 16 prošle godine bile ispod očekivanja. Čini se da su noviteti u dizajnu i funkcijama privukli velik broj kupaca.
Veća proizvodnja, ali i duže čekanje
Kuova analiza temelji se na rokovima isporuke – procijenjenom vremenu čekanja na dostavu novih modela – koji su se brzo produljili na nekoliko tjedana, što se obično događa kada potražnja nadmaši ponudu.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Zanimljivo je da je Appleov proizvodni cilj za ključne modele – iPhone 17, 17 Pro i 17 Pro Max – u trećem kvartalu ove godine bio 25% veći nego prošle godine. Unatoč tome, procijenjeno vrijeme isporuke produljilo se za otprilike tjedan dana, što jasno ukazuje na snažniju potražnju.
Pro Max i dalje zvijezda
Najpoželjniji model i dalje je iPhone 17 Pro Max. Apple je njegovu proizvodnju povećao za čak 60% u odnosu na 16 Pro Max, no unatoč tome, rokovi isporuke ostali su jednako dugi kao i lani, što pokazuje da je potražnja značajno porasla.
S druge strane, novitet u ponudi, iPhone Air, proizveden je u tri puta većem broju primjeraka u usporedbi s prošlogodišnjim iPhoneom 16 Plus. Zasad se čini da je ta količina dovoljna jer nema kašnjenja u isporuci, no Kuo napominje kako će za konačnu ocjenu uspjeha ovog modela trebati pratiti prodaju kroz dulje razdoblje.
Službeni početak prodaje iPhone 17 serije zakazan je za ovaj petak, kada će se vidjeti hoće li se snažan interes iz prednarudžbi nastaviti i u trgovinama.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
LAS VEGAS — Saúl “Canelo” Álvarez walked alongside his wife and one of his daughters to the makeshift stage in a giant tent a few feet from Allegiant Stadium, the venue where he had just lost for the third time in his professional career.
Visibly affected by more than just the marks left on his face, Álvarez acknowledged that Terence Crawford was superior to him. He made no excuses, but he seemed to be signaling that his body was telling him that his time as a boxer was running out.
During the final rounds, Álvarez’s frustration was evident. He lowered his hands, shook his head and on several occasions appeared resigned. Despite having had a great training camp, his 35 years of age, 20 of them as a professional, were evident.
Yes, Crawford is 37, but Álvarez completed 26 more fights than Crawford entering their bout Saturday night.
Terence Crawford punches Canelo Álvarez during an undisputed super middleweight championship boxing match in Las Vegas Saturday.
(David Becker / Associated Press)
“Sometimes you try and your body just can’t take it anymore,” Álvarez said. “That’s my frustration. Maybe I can’t understand Crawford, but my body just can’t take it anymore. I tried, but it just wouldn’t let me continue. And you have to accept that.”
Álvarez lost the super middleweight title bout by unanimous decision, with the judges scoring it 116-112, 115-113 and 115-113 before a record announced crowd of 70,482.
Álvarez acknowledged that he landed blows on his opponent, but none with the cleanliness and power that would have changed the course of the fight.
“I hit Crawford, but I didn’t land any clean blows with all my strength,” lamented Álvarez.
Despite his difficulty, the Guadalajara native reiterated that he never gave up in the ring.
Is this the beginning of the end for Álvarez? Perhaps. But early retirement seems unlikely … especially when he continues to be a box office magnet. The latest proof is in the $47,231,887 in gross revenue generated by ticket sales at Allegiant Stadium, according Live Gate.
The Canelo-Crawford fight became the biggest box office draw in the history of the Las Vegas venue, and with 70,482 fans in attendance, it was the most attended boxing event in U.S. history, surpassing Ali-Spinks II.
Crawford stripped Álvarez of his World Boxing Council (WBC), World Boxing Assn. (WBA), International Boxing Federation (IBF) and World Boxing Organization (WBO) belts.
After the fight, Álvarez raised his right arm in triumph. But he didn’t declare himself the winner as he did following his loss to Dmitry Bivol in 2022.
Álvarez accepted his defeat against a vastly superior opponent who made his win look easy.
Canelo Álvarez punches Terence Crawford during an undisputed super middleweight championship boxing match in Las Vegas Saturday.
(David Becker / Associated Press)
On the other hand, upon hearing the verdict, Crawford knelt in the ring before raising his arms to celebrate the victory.
“I knew I had won when the final bell rang. This is not my plan, it is God’s plan. I am just carrying out his mission,” Crawford said.
Emotional, he remembered his team and the people who have accompanied him.
“When they doubt me, they doubt my team. They thought they couldn’t take me where I wanted to go because they’re not from a big city and they don’t have recognition,” Crawford said. “But here we are, making history. I’m at the forefront, and behind me comes a new generation.”
Although he celebrated intensely, Crawford did not belittle Álvarez, acknowledging the quality of the former champion.
The win is a milestone for Crawford. He is now the first male boxer to be the undisputed champion in three different divisions in the era of four belts. With an undefeated record of 42-0 and 31 knockouts, he stands at the top of his generation.
“It wasn’t easy. It just looked that way, but it wasn’t. He’s definitely the best opponent I’ve ever faced,” Crawford said.
After confirming his third defeat, Álvarez’s gaze was not that of a man who knew he would receive more than $100 million for stepping onto the canvas at Allegiant Stadium. His gaze was that of someone whose body had reminded him that the end of a celebrated career was closer than he thought.
Terence Crawford reacts after the final bell of his fight with Canelo Álvarez, not pictured, in their undisputed super middleweight title fight Saturday in Las Vegas.
(Steve Marcus / Getty Images)
He appeared with the serenity of a man who, although hurt, knew how to recognize the greatness of his opponent.
“I tried everything I could and trained very hard, and he deserves all the credit. Tonight I gave it my all, but I can’t understand his style,” Álvarez said.
Crawford saw Álvarez’s frustration firsthand. Around the sixth round, Crawford knew he had to take another step to completely control the fight because he felt Álvarez adapting to the bout’s rhythm, so he pressed his style harder and overwhelmed Álvarez.
Everything he did was part of the plan he developed during his training camp. Although Crawford wanted to be more active, his coaches reminded him to be disciplined and patient.
Much was said about the difficulties he might face in moving up two weight classes, but the American insisted that he did not feel physically disadvantaged against Álvarez.
“People exaggerated that. He and I are practically the same size,” Crawford said. “I’m a little taller, my arms are longer. The difference is minimal. So when they said, ‘Canelo is huge,’ it seemed disrespectful to me. Tonight you could see that we were evenly matched.”
When asked if what complicated things most for him was Crawford’s speed, movement, or power, Álvarez responded: “Everything. He has it all.”
For the first time since 2018, Álvarez is no longer a world champion.
“I feel like a champion no matter what happens. Win or lose, I still feel like a champion,” Álvarez said. “You have to accept defeat and accept everything. I’m going to keep going.”
When asked whether Floyd Mayweather Jr., who handed him his first professional defeat in 2013, was better than Crawford, Álvarez responded no.
“I think Crawford is much better than Floyd Mayweather,” Álvarez said.
Álvarez recounted gathering his family in the locker room to explain the importance of accepting both victory and defeat.
Canelo Álvarez kisses his wife, Fernanda Gomez, after losing to Terence Crawford (not pictured) in their undisputed super middleweight title fight on Saturday in Las Vegas.
(Steve Marcus / Getty Images)
“My children and my wife were a little sad, but I told them that’s the way it is. It’s not a defeat, it’s a lesson,” Álvarez said. “You have to accept both sides of the coin. That’s what I want to teach them, that you learn as much when you win as when you lose.”
Visibly moved, he spoke of his newborn daughter, just 1 month old, who was waiting for him at their hotel.
Álvarez avoided giving clear details about his next steps and gave himself time to reflect. His future decisions will involve his family, who accompany him in victory and defeat.
The loss to Crawford won’t trigger Álvarez’s immediate retirement, as he has a four-fight contract worth around $400 million with Turki Alalshikh and Riyadh Season, but he could change his strategy in scheduling opponents.
“I want to see what happens in the future. There will definitely be good things,“ Álvarez said. ”I won just by being here.”
Although his legacy is already assured with a career spanning more than 20 years, multiple titles in different divisions and victories over big names, this loss marks a turning point. The question will be how he reacts, whether he will seek immediate revenge or takes another path.
The victory places Crawford on a historic pedestal alongside Mayweather and Manny Pacquiao, becoming the third linear champion in four divisions and the second boxer to achieve undisputed status in three categories, something only Henry Armstrong had achieved in 1938 in a different era of boxing.
“It means a lot because they always said I fought nobodies. Well, what can they say now? I did everything I said I was going to do,” Crawford said. “I moved up two divisions, faced the undisputed champion, and took all his titles. That’s greatness.”
When asked to compare himself to Mayweather, Crawford was respectful.
“Floyd was the best of his era. I am the best of mine. There is no need to compare us,” Crawford said.
The event was attended mostly by Mexican fans who hoped to see Álvarez further cement his legacy. But they left having witnessed a great performance by Álvarez’s opponent.
The fans booed Crawford, who made his walk to the ring dressed in an outfit inspired by the 1995 film “Desperado,” starring Antonio Banderas and Salma Hayek, accompanied by live music and guitar in hand.
At the end of the fight, the same fans applauded him, recognizing his great performance against the defeated champion.
Terence Crawford displays his title belts after defeating Canelo Álvarez (not pictured) in an undisputed super middleweight title fight by unanimous decision.
(Harry How / Getty Images for Netflix)
“It was part of my outfit. The outfit was inspired by the movie ‘Desperado.’ As you can see, I had the guitar and everything,” Crawford said. “My great childhood friend, Jacinto Robles, was the one who performed a song and acted tonight. … As I said, I also have Mexicans and Latinos on my side. It’s been a beautiful night.”
Unlike many other fighters, Crawford says little, is reserved but intense when he goes after his opponent, avoids theatrics and gets straight to the point. Defeating Álvarez in front of his fans, dominating most of the rounds and becoming just the third person to defeat Álvarez is more than enough to shout about with pride, but he didn’t.
Crawford waited until the end of Álvarez’s media appearance in the giant tent to return the Mexican’s belts handed to him in the ring. He could have done this privately in the locker room, but he did it in front of media and the Álvarez family as a sign of respect, extending his hand to his rival.
“When I signed the contract, I already knew I was going to beat him,” Crawford said. “It’s no surprise to me. It’s a surprise to all of you because you don’t believe me. But I always knew I could do it.”
This article first appeared in Spanish via L.A. Times en Español.
Flipkart Big Billion Days 2025: Ahead of the iPhone 17 launch, the e-commerce platform is offering great deals on older models of Apple iPhones. Check out deals and offers
iPhone 16 (128GB), originally priced at Rs 74,900, will be available for just Rs 51,999 during the sale. Image: ANI
Planning your first international trip feels like opening the first page of a brand-new adventure novel. Excitement, nerves, endless to-do lists; it’s all part of the journey. But between the dream of sipping coffee in a new country and actually making it through immigration without panic, there are a few things you absolutely need to know. If you’re a student, a solo traveller, or heading out with friends or family, these tips will help you travel smart, stress-free, and stylish.
Going on your first international trip? Keep these 8 important tips in mind(Pexels)
1. Double-check your passport and visa
The golden rule: your passport should be valid for at least six months beyond your travel date. Many countries won’t let you in otherwise. Visas, too, can be tricky, some require long processing times, while others offer visa-on-arrival or e-visas.
Pro tip: Keep both physical and digital copies of your passport and visa. Store one in your luggage, one in your handbag, and save a copy in your email.
2. Sort out your money game
Don’t rely solely on your debit card from home. Inform your bank that you’re travelling abroad to avoid sudden “fraud” blocks on your card. Carry a mix of cash (in the local currency) and at least one international credit card.
Pro tip: Use prepaid forex cards, they’re safer than cash and often give better exchange rates.
3. Travel insurance isn’t optional
It may feel unnecessary until you lose your luggage or need a doctor in a foreign city. Travel insurance covers medical emergencies, cancellations, theft, and even trip delays. It’s your safety net abroad.
Pro tip: Compare policies online and pick one that balances cost and coverage. Don’t just go for the cheapest.
4. Pack smart, not heavy
You don’t need six pairs of shoes for one week in Europe. Stick to versatile outfits that can be mixed and matched. Always check the baggage rules of your airline, international flights can have stricter weight limits than domestic ones.
Pro tip: Roll clothes instead of folding them, and pack essentials (medicines, documents, chargers) in your cabin bag in case your luggage goes missing.
5. Learn the basics of local etiquette
Every country has unspoken rules, tipping culture in the US, dress codes at temples in Thailand, or silence in Japan’s trains. Researching these small details can save you awkward situations and show respect for the local culture.
Pro tip: Learn a few local phrases like “hello,” “thank you,” and “help.” It’s both polite and practical.
6. Stay connected (But not overcharged)
Roaming charges can be a rude shock. Instead, buy a local SIM card at your destination or get an international roaming pack from your provider. Apps like Google Maps and Google Translate will become your best friends abroad.
Pro tip: Download offline maps before leaving, perfect for no-network areas.
7. Keep your documents safe and handy
Immigration lines, hotel check-ins, and airport security all demand quick access to your documents. Carry them in a secure but easy-to-reach folder. A travel wallet works wonders.
Pro tip: Store your important documents on a cloud drive with password protection.
8. Don’t overplan, and instead leave room for serendipity
It’s tempting to pack your itinerary with every landmark, but over-scheduling can make travel exhausting. Leave space for wandering aimlessly, discovering local cafés, or stumbling into street performances. Those moments often become the best memories.
Pro tip: Limit yourself to two big activities per day, leaving time for spontaneity.
Your first international trip is about learning, exploring, and stepping outside your comfort zone. With the right preparation, you’ll avoid rookie mistakes and travel with confidence. From documents and money to culture and connectivity, these small steps ensure your journey is smooth and memorable. Pack your bags, lace up your shoes, and get ready because the world is waiting, and it’s even better than the social media pictures.
Similar stories for you:
Travelling with your pet? Keep these 8 tips in mind for a smooth journey
Step into the past: Why heritage walks are the best way to explore a city
Disney Cruise is coming to Asia! A deep dive to help you get on board!
Disclaimer: At Hindustan Times, we help you stay up-to-date with the latest trends and products. Hindustan Times has an affiliate partnership, so we may get a part of the revenue when you make a purchase. We shall not be liable for any claim under applicable laws, including but not limited to the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, concerning the products. The products listed in this article are in no particular order of priority.
What makes an incredible film? Any answer to that question is bound to contain a significant element of subjectivity. One person’s masterpiece is another person’s dull.
You can go on at me all you want about the fact that the likes of Casablanca, Citizen Kane or It’s A Wonderful Life are missing from this list despite being widely considered all-time classics. But in reply, I’ll tell you I struggled to get through them without feeling a bit bored and have never felt a burning desire to go back and rewatch them — unlike some films on this list, some of which I could probably recite from start to finish. You can see my pick of the best books I’ve read here.
As those older classics go further and further into the past, there are simply more and more films competing against them for a spot on any list of the best films ever made.
That said, the absence of more modern films on this list can be attributed to the shift in the last 20 years towards creating great television series for streaming platforms instead of great movies for cinema.
But, ultimately, it’s all subjective. While I think it’s unlikely that a better film than the one at the top of this list will ever be made, others will find it so appallingly violent that they’d switch off even before the opening credits have finished rolling.
With this list, I’ve tried to combine the subjective with the objective. For example, I love Pulp Fiction for its relentlessly razor-sharp dialogue, its time-hopping story-telling style and the fact that it’s just a great story. But it also had a massive impact, creating superstars and turning songs few people had ever heard into ones that defined the 1990s.
In a similar vein, special effects like those seen in The Matrix had never been seen before and still appear impressive 26 years later despite all the advances in that area. Lord of The Rings was also unlike anything anyone had ever seen before, and I can still vividly remember sitting in a cinema in Wales as people sat sobbing and glued to their seats as Schindler’s List ended.
So here are my 20 best films ever. They’re my personal picks and I don’t claim to be a scholar of cinema. But like millions of us around the world, I love films. There are of course dozens, if not hundreds, of films for which an excellent case for inclusion could be made. Feel free to make it in the comments!
According to a survey, the average Brit watches more than 4,300 films in a lifetime. Based on my age, and taking into account how much more prominent streaming series is than watching films these days, I’ve conservatively estimated my film consumption at half that number.
ITR Filing Deadline 2025 Extension Live Updates: Today is the ITR filing last date for the assessment year 2025-26. Tax professionals and bodies are urging the income tax department to extend the deadline. However, the income tax department has clarified that the current September 15 deadline remains intact and warned taxpayers against a fake message that is spreading widely on social media and messaging app about the deadline extension.
So far, a total of 6.7 crore ITRs have been filed, as of 12:00 pm today, according to the income tax portal. Out of this, 6.03 crore ITRs have been verified by the taxpayers, and over 4 crore returns have been processed by the income tax department.
Last year, by July 31, 2024, 7.6 crore ITRs had been submitted.
Who Must File ITR Today?
The September 15 deadline is for non-audit taxpayers, including most salaried individuals, pensioners, NRIs, and those whose accounts do not require audit. For audit ITRs, the deadline remains October 31.
Usually, the ITR filing deadline every year is July 31. However, this year, the last date for filing non-audit returns was pushed to September 15 from the usual July 31 deadline, owing to delays in the release of updated ITR forms. The extension came after several tweaks were required following the interim Budget’s changes to the capital gains tax framework.
What Happens If You Miss Today’s Deadline?
Taxpayers filing after September 15 face a penalty of Rs 5,000 under Section 234F, though the fine is capped at Rs 1,000 for those with income below Rs 5 lakh. Late filers also lose the ability to carry forward certain losses, risk refund delays and may attract closer scrutiny from the tax department.
With the clock ticking, the department is urging taxpayers to file early to avoid last-minute issues. Whether the deadline is extended once again remains to be seen.
Base network, the leading layer two scaling solution on the Ethereum (ETH) blockchain, has announced plans to launch its native token. After operating without a native token, the Base network, which is heavily bolstered by Coinbase Global Inc. (NASDAQ: COIN) exchange, will have a token to incentivize its community.
“We’re exploring a Base network token. It could be a great tool for accelerating decentralization and expanding creator and developer growth in the ecosystem. To be clear, there are no definitive plans. We’re just updating our philosophy. As of now, we’re exploring it,” Brian Armstrong, co-founder and CEO at Coinbase, noted.
What to Expect of the Base Network Token
According to the Base team at the BaseCamp 2025 in Stowe, Vermont, the native token will help the network continue building on Ethereum. Furthermore, the Base network token will play a crucial role in incentivizing its global community through the Ethereum blockchain.
The Base network token will also be regulated under the set crypto laws in the United States. The U.S. Senate is currently debating the Clarity Act, which will provide more clarity in the crypto space once passed and enacted by President Donald Trump.
Meanwhile, the Base team noted that it is committed to keep working with its community as its native token will be built in the open.
“Exploring a network token is one path toward making our vision of a global onchain economy real, and a Base network token has the potential to accelerate Base’s decentralization and expand opportunities for builders and creators across the ecosystem,” the announcement noted.
What’s the Expected Market Impact
The strategic launch of the Base network token will attract more organic users in the long term. As such, the Base network will likely continue leading in the Ethereum L2 ecosystem.
At the time of this writing, Base network had a total value locked of about $4.99 billion, a stablecoin market cap of around $4.3 billion, and a total of over 971k in daily active addresses.
TA Pai Management Institute (TAPMI), Manipal, hosted the first CXO Talk Series 2025 in Manipal on Saturday.
Industry leaders interact with student participants, and offer insights into contemporary business challenges, leadership journeys, and emerging trends across sectors in the CXO Talk Series.
The series was opened by Rajeev Kumra, Director of TAPMI, and Gururaj Kidiyoor, Dean – Academics of TAPMI, with Sumit Khandelwal, CEO of Xoxoday and TAPMI alumnus from the 2007-09 batch, as the keynote speaker.
Khandelwal shared the challenges he faced — from early failures in his entrepreneurial ventures to initial struggles in the corporate world — and how these experiences shaped his resilience and discipline. He emphasized that these very setbacks became the foundation for building Xoxoday.
Rajeev Kumra said the CXO Talk series is in line with TAPMI’s vision to develop future-ready students by providing them access to leaders who have travelled this path before them.
“Mr Khandelwal’s journey is a convincing example of resilience, and innovation, and inspires our students to pursue their aspirations with conviction and clarity,” he said.
Battery life is rated for up to 8 hours (up from 6 for AirPods Pro 2)
Cons
They still use the H2 chip found in the AirPods Pro 2
Heart-rate monitoring is buried in fitness apps
While they work with Android, many of their features are exclusive to Apple devices
Some new colors would be nice
One issue with next-gen AirPods such as the AirPods Pro 3 is that they often look very similar to the previous model, leaving many people to question whether the upgrades really matter. However, after using the AirPods Pro 3 for five days, I can say that these buds are significantly improved in four key areas: fit, sound quality, noise cancellation and battery life. The result is that you don’t feel like you’re making any compromises when buying the AirPods Pro 3. Read on to see just how much they’ve improved in each area and how they stack up against other top true-wireless earbuds.
Before I get into all the changes, here’s a quick breakdown of what’s stayed the same.
The AirPods Pro 3’s list price is still $249 (£219, AU$429). That wasn’t a given with all the uncertainty surrounding the Trump administration tariffs, but we’ll see where their street price shakes out on Amazon and other retailers where AirPods models often get discounted.
The AirPods Pro 3 are powered by Apple’s H2 chip — the same one that powers the AirPods Pro 2, AirPods 4 and Beats Powerbeats Pro 2. Rumors pointed to an H3 chip, but that didn’t happen.
Nor did we get any new color options; white is still the only option.
The AirPods Pro 3 stick with Bluetooth 5.3, just like the AirPods Pro 2 (though some true-wireless earbuds have already jumped to Bluetooth 6.0).
The buds still feature a MagSafe charging case with USB-C and wireless charging (no USB-C charging cable is included).
Now for the upgrades: I’ll run through them quickly, then share my take on many of them.
What’s new or upgraded
While they look similar to the previous model, the AirPods Pro 3 have been redesigned and their geometric shape has changed a bit, with the angle of the bud shifted. They’re the same length but are slightly smaller width-wise, slightly larger depth-wise and weigh a touch more (5.55 grams vs. 5.3 grams on the AirPods Pro 2).
They come with new foam-infused silicone ear tips in five sizes, including a new extra-extra small size.
They’re equipped with heart-rate sensors like the Beats Powerbeats Pro 2.
2x better noise cancellation compared to the AirPods Pro 2, according to Apple.
While they have 10.7mm drivers like the AirPods Pro 2, those drivers have been upgraded to take advantage of the buds’ new multiport acoustic architecture, which moves more air through the buds and improves sound quality.
The microphones have been upgraded.
Transparency Mode has been enhanced.
New Live Translation feature (also available for the AirPods Pro 2 and AirPods 4 series, but not the Beats Powerbeats Pro 2).
Their battery life has improved to 8 hours with noise cancellation on and up to 10 hours in Hearing Aid mode with transparency on.
Instead of being IPX4 splash-proof like the AirPods Pro 2, they’ve got an IP57 rating, which means they can withstand a sustained spray of water. (I poured water on them and they survived just fine). They’re also dust-resistant.
The case now includes a U2 chip, boosting Precision Finding range in the Find My app by 1.5x (requires an iPhone 17).
Like with the AirPods 4, there’s no longer a button on the case for Bluetooth pairing. You simply double tap on the front of the case to have the buds go into Bluetooth pairing mode.
Watch this: Apple AirPods Pro 3 Review: The Complete Package
Modified design improved the fit for me
As I mentioned, the AirPods Pro 3 are slightly narrower, but more importantly, their shape and bud angle have been adjusted so the ear tips point more directly into your ear canals.
Additionally, the ear tips have been redesigned. Traditional foam tips tend to feel dense and squishy at the same time, but these new tips are infused with a thin layer of memory foam, particularly toward the front, giving them a firmer and more premium feel.
Enlarge Image
Testing the AirPods Pro 3 in the streets of New York. They look the same in your ears as the AirPods Pro 2 but the fit feels different.
David Carnoy/CNET
The tips now come in five sizes, including a new extra-extra small option. There’s still no extra-large tip (which I was hoping for), but the large size now fits more like XL. Note that the new tips attach differently than before, so they aren’t compatible with the original AirPods Pro or Pro 2.
The buds felt noticeably different in my ears than the AirPods Pro 2 — snugger and more secure. With the Pro 3, Apple put a big emphasis on fit since a tight seal is key to sound quality and noise canceling, and it wants people to notice both have improved.
I think more people will be able to get a better fit with these buds, though I’m sure there will be some folks who were just fine with the fit of the AirPods Pro 2 who will say they prefer their fit.
I haven’t spent much time using the new heart-rate monitoring feature yet, and I don’t consider it a must-have in earbuds, particularly if you already own an Apple Watch or another watch with heart-rate monitoring capabilities. While the heart-rate sensors have been custom-designed for the AirPods Pro 3 (they’re Apple’s smallest heart-rate sensors) and aren’t identical to the ones in the Powerbeats Pro 2, my experience using them was the same as with the Powerbeats Pro 2, which I’ve tested more extensively.
The AirPods Pro 3 have heart-rate sensors like the Powerbeats Pro 2, but they’re custom-designed for the AirPods Pro 3.
Apple
The monitoring is compatible with a number of fitness apps, including Apple Fitness and Fitness Plus, and can work in tandem with the Apple Watch’s heart-rate monitoring feature to get the most accurate measurement between the two devices. You can also use a single bud for heart-rate monitoring — a feature Beats added to the Powerbeats Pro 2, too.
The one drawback of using the heart-rate monitor on the Powerbeats Pro 2 or AirPods Pro 3 is that you need to launch an app to see your heart rate. For example, with the Apple Fitness app, you have to start a workout activity like an outdoor walk, run or cycle. By contrast, with the Apple Watch (and other fitness watches), your heart rate appears as soon as you put the device on, making your heart rate easy to track whether you’re working out or not.
Using the heart-rate monitor does affect the AirPods Pro 3’s battery life — dropping from 8 hours with noise canceling on to 6.5 hours — which is likely why Apple didn’t design it to be always on. Still, I wish there were an option to keep the sensors running at times and have my heart rate show up in a widget on my iPhone’s home screen (or even lock screen), instead of only when I manually start it in a fitness app.
The current list of compatible third-party fitness apps for the heart-rate monitoring feature.
Screenshot by David Carnoy/CNET
Apple ups its noise-canceling game
The two biggest improvements people were hoping for in the AirPods Pro 3 were sound quality and noise-canceling performance, with voice-calling performance coming in a close third.
I tested their noise-cancellation capabilities on a plane against the AirPods Pro 2 and could definitely tell a difference, with the Pro 3s tamping down the cabin noise to a faint hum. The AirPods Pro 2 did a good job, but the Pro 3s took the noise level down even further. I can’t say the Pro 3’s noise canceling is exactly twice as good as the Pro 2’s, which Apple claims, but it’s definitely better.
When I got back to New York City, I put them up against the Bose QuietComfort Ultra Earbuds (2nd Gen), which a lot of people consider to have the best noise-canceling capabilities when it comes to earbuds — or headphones for that matter. (Although Sony’s WH-1000XM6 headphones also offer outstanding noise cancellation — I named them the “new noise-canceling king” in my review).
The AirPodsPro 3 (right) look similar to the AirPods Pro 2 (left) on the surface, but have a slightly different shape and new eartips, along with a heart-rate sensor in each bud.
David Carnoy/CNET
What I can say is that Apple’s noise canceling now matches Bose and Sony, though it’s hard to name a clear winner without a pricey testing rig to provide scientific results. Apple says the AirPods Pro 3 offer the “world’s best in-ear active noise cancellation,” but it’s unclear whether it tested the AirPods Pro 3 against the 2nd Gen Bose QC Ultra Earbuds, which were released on June 28 internationally and on Sept. 10 in the US. In the fine print, Apple says that testing was conducted in July 2025 and comparisons were “made against the best-selling wireless in-ear headphones commercially available at the time of testing.”
I swapped Bose’s QC Ultra Earbuds 2s back and forth with the AirPods Pro 3 while riding the subway and walking the streets. Both have truly impressive noise-canceling capabilities. Compared to the AirPod Pro 2, the Pro 3s are designed to improve noise cancellation across all frequencies, including mids and highs that can be challenging to muffle. I could still hear people’s voices on the streets but they were toned down significantly and, unless they were talking loudly, I had a hard time understanding what they were saying. On the subway, the buds blocked out about 80-85% of the noise around me.
When I took the buds out of my ears or went into Transparency Mode, I was often shocked by just how much external noise there was.
More refined sound with better bass
The sound quality gains may not be quite as big as the noise-canceling gains, but the Pro 3’s sound is definitely improved over the Pro 2’s. The bass has more definition and extension — it hits harder and goes deeper — and the earbuds sound clearer, more natural and open with more sparkle in the treble. I also think they play a little louder.
I ran through the usual tracks I use for testing headphones — it’s an eclectic mix. They included Spoon’s Knock Knock Knock, Athletes of God’s Don’t Wanna Be Normal, Orbital’s Dirty Rat, Bjork’s Hollow, Drake’s Passionfruit, Pixies’ Vault of Heaven, Florence and the Machine’s Choreomania, various Foo Fighters songs, plus David Byrne’s new album Who Is the Sky?
Testing AirPods for sound quality is a bit tricky since Apple’s spatial audio can make tracks sound different — sometimes better, sometimes just different. Most of my testing was done on Apple Music (using an iPhone 17 with near-final iOS 26), which has plenty of tracks optimized for spatial audio. I also tried Spotify and streamed a few movies on the Apple TV app, since the improved audio carries over there as well.
Read more: You can preoder the iPhone 17 today — get it free with these carriers
Enlarge Image
A close-up of the new tips and heart-rate sensors. The pinch and swipe controls (for volume) remain the same.
David Carnoy/CNET
You aren’t going to get quite the same level of sound quality that you’d get from a good pair of wired studio headphones, but that extra bit of clarity and definition puts the AirPods Pro 3 in the same league as some of the best-sounding earbuds, including the Sennheiser Momentum True Wireless 4 and Sony WF-1000XM5. I’d still give audiophile buds like the Noble Fokus Amadeus and Bowers & Wilkins Pi8 the slight edge sound-wise, but those models are larger, more expensive and can’t match the noise-canceling and voice-calling performances of the AirPods Pro 3.
Unlike most high-end earbuds and headphones, Apple doesn’t let you adjust the sound profile with EQ settings. Still, the AirPods deliver all the hallmarks of premium audio — or at least premium Bluetooth audio. Apple has leveled up the listening experience with purer, more accurate sound, tighter bass and a touch more openness. In my AirPods Pro 2 review, I noted how impressive the sound was for such small, lightweight buds — though it still fell a bit short of the very best earbuds out there.
Simply put: The AirPods Pro 3’s sound doesn’t fall short anymore. And while they come at a premium price, these small, lightweight earbuds deliver remarkably good audio for their size.
Voice-calling performance
AirPods have long stood out for voice-calling performance compared to other true-wireless earbuds. Back when the originals launched, I remember Android users buying them just for calls — and every generation since has remained top-tier in that department.
The thing that struck me in my tests with the AirPods Pro 3 was just how much background noise they eliminated. I made calls in the streets of New York City with a lot ambient noise around me, including traffic and ambulance sirens, and callers told me they couldn’t hear any of it. In loud environments, my voice would sometimes warble or sound a bit digitized to callers, but when I shared a recording of what I was actually hearing, they were surprised — even stunned — by how much background noise was removed.
Enlarge Image
The case is ever-so-slightly bigger than the AriPods Pro 2 case. It includes USB-C and wireless charging.
David Carnoy/CNET
While the voice-calling performance of the AirPodsPro 3 seems slightly better, I’ll have to run more comparisons to truly determine how much of a difference there really is. With iOS26, the AirPods Pro 2 and other H2-chip models — including both AirPods 4 versions — are getting an update that adds studio-quality recording and promises better voice-calling performance. As Apple says, “With the H2 chip, beamforming microphones, and computational audio, users will also enjoy more natural vocal texture and clarity across iPhone calls, FaceTime, and CallKit-enabled apps.”
The AirPods Pro 3 do have upgraded microphones, so that’s a plus when it comes to noise reduction and voice pickup. And that upgraded acoustic architecture with more air flow should help with hearing callers even better.
Live translation
Apple’s Live Translation is one of the new features that’s being highlighted with the AirPods Pro 3, but it’s also coming to other AirPods with the H2 chip, including the AirPods Pro 2 and AirPods 4 models, though not the H2-equipped Powerbeats Pro 2 (sorry, Beats owners).
Live translation currently has a limited number of languages.
David Carnoy/CNET
At home, I tested the feature with Spanish-language YouTube videos and TV (you first have to download the language you want). It worked well for the most part, and you also get a text readout of the translation as you hear it in your ears. The only real limitation is that it currently supports just five languages: English, French, German, Portuguese and Spanish.
You can program the action button on the iPhone to quickly launch the Live Translation app or hold both stems of the AirPods to launch it. With the translation done locally on your phone, you don’t need cell coverage to use the feature, so you can take advantage of it in remote places, too.
For live conversations in different languages to work, everyone involved needs to be wearing AirPods with an H2 chip. Also note: Live translation only works on iPhones that support Apple Intelligence — that includes the iPhone 15 Pro, as well as all iPhone 16 and iPhone 17 models.
While companies like Samsung, Google and even some budget Amazon earbuds also offer live translation (with Samsung and Google supporting far more languages), Apple’s version is notably simple to use and access. We’ll have to see how it evolves over time.
Transparency and Hearing Aid modes
One area I expected Apple to improve with the AirPods Pro 3 is Hearing Aid mode. I still need to test it more thoroughly, but the already best-in-class Transparency Mode now sounds even more natural, likely thanks to upgraded microphones, and includes an automatic Conversation Boost “for clearer speech in noisy environments.”
If you’re not familiar, transparency modes let you hear the outside world while still wearing the buds, even though they’re blocking your ear canals. Hearing Aid mode builds on that by using transparency to amplify the sounds around you.
Better battery life through chemistry
As noted, battery life has improved in both noise-canceling and transparency modes: up to 8 hours on a single charge with noise canceling on (7.5 hours with spatial audio and head tracking), and up to 10 hours with transparency and Hearing Aid mode. That number drops to 6.5 hours when heart-rate monitoring is engaged. It’s also worth noting that Apple lists total battery life with the charging case as 24 hours, versus 30 hours for the AirPods Pro 2. Some people, including me, are a bit perplexed as to why the overall battery life time is lower, particularly when the charging case is slightly bigger (my protective OtterBox Core Series case for the AirPods Pro 2 didn’t quite fit on the AirPods Pro 3’s case).
What’s interesting is that the battery in the buds is apparently the same size (with the same capacity) as the battery in the AirPods Pro 2; it’s the battery chemistry that’s changed. That change is largely what’s behind the battery life improvements, along with some energy efficiency gained through new software written for the AirPods Pro 3. You get an additional three charges in the charging case, which is less than the AirPods Pro 2’s four charges.
While certain AirPods Pro 3 features and enhancements are being made available to the AirPods Pro 2 and AirPods 4 through firmware updates, the AirPods Pro 3 have software written exclusively for the earbuds’ hardware upgrades and new acoustic architecture. That unfortunately means the AirPods 2’s battery life, sound quality and noise-canceling capabilities won’t be getting any better.
Upgraded U2 chip in charging case for Find My
While Apple didn’t add a new H3 chip to the buds, it did add a new U2 chip to the charging case. It says the new chip increases the range for Precision Finding in the Find My app by 1.5x (MacRumors reports that it offers 3x the range, but Apple says it’s 1.5x on its site). Whatever the exact number, it means you’ll be able to use Precision Finding to hone in on your case’s location — almost like a metal detector — even from farther away. Note that while the buds and case can both be tracked in Find My, only the case supports Precision Finding, so you’ll want to lose them together if you hope to track them this way.
Enlarge Image
Ah, that’s where I left the AirPods Pro 3.
David Carnoy/CNET
I tested out the feature and the range is extended and it also seemed zippier and more reliable. Like the U1, the U2 uses ultra-wideband technology, delivering improved spatial awareness and location accuracy to Bluetooth. There’s been some speculation about whether Apple could use the technology to deliver other features to the AirPods Pro 3, including lossless audio (via the charging case). But for now it’s only being used to enhance the ability to find the Pro 3’s charging case should you lose it.
While the U2 chip first appeared in the iPhone 15, you’ll need an iPhone 17 model to get the better range for Precision Finding with the AirPods Pro 3 (I tested it with an iPhone 17). I’m still confirming this and will update this section as I get more info and do further testing.
Additional features
The AirPods Pro 3 have all the same features as the AirPods Pro 2, including Conversation Awareness, Adaptive Audio, Hearing Protection head gestures to interact with Siri or manage calls and plenty of others. I won’t rehash every feature from the Pro 2, but here’s a rundown of the new additions coming to both models with iOS 26. I’ll be testing them further in the days ahead.
Studio-quality audio recording: Apple says that “interviewers, podcasters, singers and other creators can record their content with greater sound quality, and even record while on the go or in noisy environments, with Voice Isolation.”
Upgraded voice-calling performance: “Users will enjoy more natural vocal texture and clarity across iPhone calls, FaceTime and CallKit-enabled apps,” it says.
The new Camera Remote feature allows you to “start or stop video recordings from a distance with a simple press of the AirPods stem.”
AirPods models with the H2 chip will also be able to detect when you fall asleep and automatically pause what you’re listening to.
Several new features such as Live Translation will be available for the AirPods Pro 2, so many AirPods Pro 2 owners won’t feel the need to upgrade right away. But if you’ve been using AirPods Pro 2 for a while, it might be worth passing them on to a friend or relative and upgrading to the Pro 3s. They’re about as close as earbuds get to being complete: excellent noise cancellation, strong voice-calling performance and sound quality that rivals the very best. Few buds excel in all three areas — and the Pro 3s manage it while packing in plenty of extra features.
More women are turning to marijuana to treat pregnancy-related illnesses, but experts warn of possible adverse side effects.
Cannabis use is rising among pregnant women — especially during the first trimester, the most critical period of fetal development, according to the National Survey on Drug Use and Health, published annually by the Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration.
Women are turning to marijuana during pregnancy to combat issues such as stress and anxiety, nausea, lack of sleep, vomiting and pain.
USING MARIJUANA TO COPE WITH STRESS OR TRAUMA MAY BACKFIRE, STUDIES WARN
Approximately one in six women admitted to using marijuana or a cannabidiol product while pregnant, but half were not aware of the risks, according to a recent University of Florida study.
Marijuana, derived from the cannabis plant, contains two primary compounds — tetrahydrocannabinol (THC) and cannabidiol (CBD).
More women are turning to marijuana to treat pregnancy-related illnesses, but experts warn of possible adverse side effects.(iStock)
These compounds can be thought of as “siblings” — CBD does not affect the brain or spinal cord, while THC brings on more of a euphoric “high,” according to Dr. Alta DeRoo, chief medical officer of the Hazelden Betty Ford Foundation in St. Paul, Minnesota.
Today’s marijuana contains much higher concentrations of THC and is more potent than it was in the 1970s, health experts say, which means older research into its effects may be outdated.
CANNABIS GUMMY POISONINGS SURGE AMONG VULNERABLE GROUP, EXPERTS WARN
There is also a scarcity of research into how medical issues affect pregnant women, with less than 1% of drug trials enrolling pregnant patients in the past 15 years, according to a public health study.
Is marijuana safe during pregnancy?
Some may assume marijuana is safe for pregnant women because it’s legal in many states and because it’s a natural, plant-based product — but not all natural products are safe during pregnancy.
For example, too much vitamin A can lead to birth defects, according to the American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists (ACOG).
“I advise my patients to consider safer alternatives to treat their symptoms in pregnancy.”
“Parents want to do the right thing for their health and especially for that of their future children,” Dr. Jamie Lo, an associate professor of obstetrics, gynecology and urology at Oregon Health & Science University, told Fox News Digital. Her research focuses on the effects of cannabis on reproductive health.
There is no known safe amount of cannabis to use in pregnancy, she added.
“I advise my patients to consider safer alternatives to treat their symptoms in pregnancy — or for those who cannot abstain, at least try to reduce their frequency of use.”
Today’s marijuana contains much higher concentrations of THC and is more potent than it was in the 1970s, health experts say.(iStock)
Kim Gamez, founder of SOBER(ISH), an online marketplace that sells hemp-derived, micro-dosed options for those wanting a buzz without alcohol, said she is “often surprised” by how many women ask if their products are safe to use during pregnancy or while nursing. (Hemp, like marijuana, is derived from the cannabis plant.)
“If there’s ever a time in life when relaxation and good sleep feel most needed, it’s certainly then,” she told Fox News Digital.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
There is currently no data confirming what amount (potency), frequency or timing of cannabis use in safe during pregnancy, Lo added.
“Thus, the national societies — American College of Obstetricians and Gynecologists, American Society for Reproductive Medicine, American Academy of Pediatrics, etc. — all recommend not using cannabis when pregnant or trying to conceive because of the limited safety data,” she said.
Risks of marijuana in pregnancy
After a pregnant woman uses marijuana in any form, the cannabis crosses into the fetus. There are receptors for cannabis in the baby’s brain starting at the third month of pregnancy, DeRoo told Fox News Digital.
“From there, several studies have shown that this exposure to cannabis decreases fetal weight, head circumference and an increase in neonatal ICU admission,” added DeRoo, who is also a board-certified addiction specialist and OB-GYN and an expert on the maternal and fetal complications of substance use.
Approximately one in six women admitted to using marijuana or a cannabidiol product while pregnant, but half were not aware of the risks.(iStock)
A recent review published this May, which analyzed 51 studies, showed that use of marijuana during pregnancy has been linked to a higher risk of preterm delivery and a 75% higher risk of low birth weight.
Children may also develop a small head size, which correlates to neurological and psychological issues later in life, according to DeRoo.
Use of marijuana during pregnancy has been linked to a higher risk of preterm delivery and low birth weight.
Pregnant women who smoke marijuana can also have breathing problems because the substance lowers the amount of oxygen while smoking, according to the ACOG.
Any amount can impair judgment, cause dizziness and increase the risk of falls and injuries — all of which can become big issues during pregnancy, the above source states.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
Studies over the past several years have also shown that marijuana is associated with problems concentrating, remembering and learning.
It also increases the risk of complications during elective surgery, as well as an increase in emergency visits and hospitalizations.
Experts also warn that cannabis can lead to substance use disorder during pregnancy because of its addictive potential.
There is currently no data confirming what amount (potency), frequency or timing of cannabis use in safe during pregnancy.(iStock)
“Cannabis use disorder is continued cannabis consumption despite negative consequences, such as failing role obligations, impaired relationships, giving up important activities and using [drugs] in physically hazardous situations,” Dr. Tiffany Benjamin, a San Francisco-based psychiatrist who has presented at medical conferences on the clinical considerations of cannabis use, told Fox News Digital.
People who consume too much cannabis may experience side effects of cannabis intoxication, she cautioned.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
These can include conjunctival injection (red eyes), increased appetite, dry mouth, increased heart rate and delayed reaction time, as well as problems with concentration and memory.
“Some individuals may have euphoria, anxiety and paranoia,” Benjamin added.
Melissa Rudy is senior health editor and a member of the lifestyle team at Fox News Digital. Story tips can be sent to [email protected].
You don’t have permission to access “http://food.ndtv.com/news/ex-google-engineer-in-us-discovers-blinkit-for-the-first-time-my-mind-is-blown-9279438” on this server.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-09-14/news-1GFkRBYyB1u/img/9690ead47ccf4168bd621fc4e14567b7/9690ead47ccf4168bd621fc4e14567b7.jpeg' alt='Chinese and U.S. delegations convene for economic and trade talks in Madrid, September 14, 2025. /CMG'
The Chinese and U.S. delegations convened on Sunday for talks on economic and trade issues in the Spanish capital, Madrid.
In the coming days, the two sides will discuss issues such as U.S. unilateral tariff measures, the abuse of export controls and TikTok, a spokesperson with China’s Ministry of Commerce said on Friday.
The Chinese delegation is headed by Vice Premier He Lifeng, also a member of the Political Bureau of the Communist Party of China Central Committee.
China’s position on the TikTok issue is clear and consistent, the spokesperson said. China is firmly committed to safeguarding the legitimate rights and interests of its enterprises and will handle the TikTok issue in accordance with relevant laws and regulations.
India’s logistics and industrial real estate sector recorded double-digit growth in the first half of 2025, with total leasing at 30.7 million square feet (MSF) – a 21.6 per cent increase y-o-y and 12.1 per cent higher than H2 2024, according to Cushman & Wakefield’s latest H1 2025 Logistics & Industrials Marketbeat Report.
The growth is driven by strong demand across warehousing and manufacturing segments, the report added. The performance underlines the sector’s strong fundamentals, with leasing activity surpassing 50 MSF annually for the last three consecutive years. With momentum holding strong, gross leasing is expected to cross 60 MSF by year-end, setting a new benchmark for India’s Logistics & Industrial market. According to the report, warehousing remained the dominant driver, accounting for 21.9 MSF of leasing and representing 71.3 per cent, while industrial space contributed 8.8 MSF, making up 28.7 per cent of the total leasing.
From a sectoral perspective, Engineering & Manufacturing (E&M) led overall leasing with 9.7 MSF, accounting for 32 per cent of total absorption and recording a 37 per cent y-o-y growth.3PL operators leased 7.4 MSF, representing a 24 per cent share and showcasing stable growth, indicating market maturity after earlier expansion waves.
The E-commerce sector recorded the sharpest annual surge, with 158 per cent y-o-y growth to reach 4.6 MSF and capture a 15 per cent share of total leasing, driven by festive season stocking and last-mile network expansion.
Abhishek Bhutani, Managing Director, Logistics & Industrial Services India, Head- Gujarat, Cushman & Wakefield, said, “H1 performance reinforces how India’s logistics and industrial sector has moved beyond cyclical swings to demonstrate structural strength. The consistency of demand across segments highlights that occupiers are no longer only chasing capacity but also efficiency, location, and long-term value.”
City-wise
In terms of cities, Mumbai led the leasing activity in H1 2025 with 7.0 MSF, accounting for a 23 per cent share, recording a remarkable 131.3 per cent y-o-y growth, driven by strong warehousing and industrial demand. Ahmedabad, though smaller in absolute volume at 1.7 MSF, posted the highest y-o-y growth at an impressive 192.2 per cent, making up 5.4 per cent share, underscoring its rising prominence in the logistics and industrial landscape.
Delhi NCR recorded 5.1 MSF with 17 per cent share, and Pune reported 4.5 MSF with 15 per cent share, leading the overall leasing. Chennai registered 4.4 MSF with 14 per cent share, Bengaluru 3.3 MSF with 11 per cent share, Hyderabad 2.7 MSF with 9 per cent share, and Kolkata 2.0 MSF and 7 per cent share, also recorded steady leasing activity.
The report added that a healthy supply pipeline of 25 MSF of Grade-A warehousing is expected over the next 2-3 years, and supportive policy measures, driven by strong demand, are expected to maintain India’s logistics and industrial real estate sector’s upward trajectory throug
h 2025. Growth will be driven by sustained manufacturing expansion, e-commerce penetration into Tier-II and Tier-III cities, and continued adoption of technology in supply chain management, the report added.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
LJUBITELJI retro stila došli su na svoje – Kodak je predstavio Charmeru, prijenosnu mini digitalnu kameru u obliku privjeska koja svojim dizajnom odaje počast kultnom jednokratnom fotoaparatu KODAK Fling iz 80-ih.
Ovaj simpatični gadget, dostupan u sedam različitih dizajna, teži svega 30-ak grama i promjera je 2.2 inča, što ga čini idealnim za nošenje na ključevima ili torbi. Unatoč svojoj maloj veličini, Charmera može snimati i fotografije i videozapise.
Kolekcionarsko izdanje i dostupnost
Za potpuni povratak u prošlost, kamera nudi sedam filtera u vintage stilu, mogućnost dodavanja oznake datuma na fotografije te prilagođene KODAK okvire. Sadržaj se može pregledavati na ugrađenom mini zaslonu, a za pohranu je potrebna micro SD kartica. Prijenos datoteka na druge uređaje obavlja se putem USB-C priključka.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Zanimljivost je da se Charmera prodaje po blind box modelu, što znači da kupci pri kupnji ne znaju koji će od šest dizajna dobiti. Posebno sretni kupci mogu dobiti i rijetko, tajno izdanje koje se ističe prozirnim kućištem koje otkriva unutarnju mehaniku kamere.
Mini digitalna kamera Charmera je već puštena u prodaju putem službene web trgovine, no tamo se već rasprodala.
Na društvenim mrežama ljudi ne kriju svoj interes i pitaje postoje li šanse da dođu do svojeg primjerka: “Hoćete li obnoviti zalihe?”, “Zna li itko hoće li opet biti dostupne?”, “Rasprodalo se prije nego što sam stigla naručiti”, “Nadam se da će uskoro obnoviti zalihe”, “Kad ćete obnoviti zalihe?”
Kodak nije potvrdio hoće li i, ako da, kad će obnoviti zalihe. Cijena kamere je bila 29.99 američkih dolara (oko 25 eura) za komad ili 179.94 američkih dolara (153 eura) za cijeli set.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
SAN FRANCISCO — This is the time to bring on the rivals. The Dodgers are used to taking on challengers down the pennant stretch: the San Francisco Giants and San Diego Padres — and, in a previous version of the National League West, the Atlanta Braves and Cincinnati Reds.
The final two weeks of the regular season are upon us. The Dodgers have one remaining head-to-head matchup that really matters — and that series starts Monday at Dodger Stadium, against the Philadelphia Phillies.
The Phillies?
The Phillies have not been realigned into the NL West. However, although the three division champions automatically qualify for the playoffs, the two with the best records earn a bye into the division series. The division champion with the third-best record — right now, that would be the Dodgers — must play in the first round.
The Milwaukee Brewers, the presumed champions of the NL Central, boast the best record in baseball. The Phillies, the presumed champions of the NL East, lead the Dodgers by 4 ½ games. The Dodgers have 13 games to play.
The Dodgers got a bye and lost in the division series in 2022. They got a bye and lost in the division series in 2023. They got a bye and came within one game of elimination in the division series in 2024. Would they be better off not getting a bye and playing in the first round?
“There is not a question in my mind that that does not make sense,” Andrew Friedman, the Dodgers’ president of baseball operations, told me last week. “It is better for your World Series odds to not play those three games.”
The five days off that come with a bye can disrupt the timing of hitters. They also can allow time for injured and weary players to recover — that could be critical for Dodgers catcher Will Smith, in particular — and for the Dodgers to arrange their starting rotation just the way they might like it. And, of course, you can’t be eliminated in the first round if you don’t play in it.
“We have made our life more difficult to this point,” Friedman said, “but I still think we have a really good run in us, and we’ll make it competitive. So obviously these three games against Philly are really important in that.”
What if the three games against the Phillies go poorly?
Even if they don’t, the Dodgers might not win the division. The Padres are closer to the Dodgers than the Dodgers are to the Phillies.
San Diego trails the Dodgers by 2½ games in the NL West.
If the Padres win the NL West, how much would that hurt the Dodgers’ chances of a lengthy postseason run?
Not much, if at all. Both teams almost certainly would end up in the wild-card round.
The NL West champion would play the last team into the NL field, most likely the Giants or New York Mets and maybe even the Reds or Arizona Diamondbacks, with the chance the opponent exhausted its pitching just to get into the playoffs. The other team would play the Chicago Cubs, and would avoid the possibility of facing the surging Phillies until the NLCS.
If the NL West comes down to the last day or two, the Dodgers would have to determine whether to use their best starters on that final weekend or line them up for the wild-card series.
In that scenario, what might be the decisive factor in the Dodgers’ calculus?
The NL West champion would play all three games of the wild-card round at home; the runner-up likely would play all three games on the road. The Dodgers are 48-26 at home, 36-39 on the road. (The Padres are 47-28 at home, 35-40 on the road.)
Would there be any precedent for the Dodgers not minding if the Padres won the NL West?
In 1996, the Dodgers and Padres were tied for the NL West lead heading into the final day of the regular season, with the two teams facing one another. Both teams were guaranteed a playoff spot.
In Game 162, the Dodgers started Ramon Martinez — undefeated in his previous nine starts — then removed him after one inning.
The Padres won the game, and with it the division. The Dodgers started Martinez in their playoff opener three days later. They lost that game, and they were swept in the series by the Braves. The winning pitchers in that series, in order: John Smoltz, Greg Maddux and Tom Glavine.
How many games are the Dodgers on pace to win?
Ninety-one.
In Friedman’s previous 10 seasons running the Dodgers, what is the fewest number of games they have won?
Ninety-one, in 2016.
How did the Dodgers do that October?
They earned a bye into the division series, in which they beat the Washington Nationals. They lost to the Chicago Cubs in the league championship series.
Apple has launched the AirPods Pro 3, its first major upgrade to the Pro line in three years, at the September 9 event. Priced at $249, the new earbuds will begin shipping from September 19. With a stronger focus on sound quality, fitness tracking and real-time translation, the AirPods Pro 3 arrive as a direct successor to the AirPods Pro 2, which debuted in 2022 and saw only a minor USB-C update last year.
Price and availability
The AirPods Pro 3 launch at the same $249 price point as their predecessor. Apple has removed the AirPods Pro 2 from its official store, though they remain available via third-party retailers at discounted rates, often dropping below $149.
While both models shared the same official retail price at launch, the Pro 2 now stands as the more affordable option for buyers unwilling to stretch to Apple’s latest technology.
Add Zee Business as a Preferred Source
Sound and noise cancellation
Apple has reworked the audio architecture in the AirPods Pro 3 with a multi-port acoustic system and a next-generation Adaptive EQ, designed to expand the soundstage, deepen bass and sharpen mids and highs.
Noise cancellation has also seen a clear jump. The Pro 3 deliver double the active noise cancellation (ANC) performance of the Pro 2, while transparency mode produces a more natural listening experience.
The AirPods Pro 2, while still strong on ANC, fall short of the sharper detail and suppression offered by the newer model.
Fit, design and durability
Both models retain Apple’s stem-based in-ear design, but the AirPods Pro 3 introduce a refined ergonomic shape and five sizes of foam-infused ear tips, including a new XXS option for smaller ears.
Durability has also improved. The Pro 3 carry an IP57 rating, making them more resistant to dust, sweat and water than the Pro 2’s IP54 certification. For fitness and outdoor users, this is a meaningful upgrade.
Battery and charging
Battery life has been extended on the Pro 3, with up to eight hours of playback on a single charge with ANC on and 10 hours in transparency mode. By comparison, the Pro 2 manage six hours with ANC.
Both models ship with a MagSafe charging case that supports USB-C, Qi wireless and Apple Watch charging. However, the Pro 2 still offer longer total case-assisted battery life – up to 30 hours, compared to 24 hours on the Pro 3.
Fitness and health features
The biggest difference lies in fitness tracking. The AirPods Pro 3 introduce Apple’s smallest ever heart-rate sensor, built on PPG technology, enabling users to monitor heart rate and calorie burn across 50 workout types via the Apple Fitness app.
A new Workout Buddy feature, powered by Apple Intelligence, provides live coaching and personalised goals. The AirPods Pro 2, by contrast, do not offer any biometric tracking.
Live translation
Another standout feature of the Pro 3 is Live Translation. At launch, they support English, French, German, Portuguese and Spanish, with more languages including Italian, Japanese, Korean and Simplified Chinese rolling out later this year. This feature allows real-time conversation translation through the earbuds, while transcripts appear on the paired iPhone. The Pro 2 lack this capability.
The AirPods Pro 3 are the most advanced earbuds Apple has built, combining double ANC performance, improved fit, IP57 durability, fitness tracking and live translation. The AirPods Pro 2 remain capable and are now more affordable, making them a strong value choice. But for anyone seeking Apple’s most complete earbuds experience, the Pro 3 stand out as the clear upgrade.
This ‘epic’ film combines the writing of the author behind Planet of the Apes and the directing of one of the most prolific figures in British cinema – and you can stream the entire thing now.
The Bridge on the River Kwai remains one of the greatest war films of all time, 60 years since its release in 1957, and is hailed as a ‘masterpiece’ by fans of the genre. Set against the backdrop of the brutalities of the Second World War, just 12 years after it ended, it’s safe to say its timely production is what’s helped it stay at the forefront of viewers’ minds all these years later.
On the review platform Rotten Tomatoes, the award-winning film has an impressive overall score of 96% based on real reviews. One of those reviews claims: “There will never be another movie that approaches this one in ambition and grand scope. The screenplay, acting, location, and setting – it’s as if designed by providence. Just brilliant.”
Its long-running popularity can be attributed to the combined talents of French author Pierre Boulle and acclaimed British director David Lean CBE, but the real standout of this film is Alec Guinness. Another review says: “Hayakawa, Holden and Hawkins are all superb, but it’s the towering performance of Guinness which elevates this movie to classic status and guarantees its place in movie immortality.”
The actor was in his absolute prime time of cinema when he starred as Colonel Nicholson, leading a contingent of British prisoners of war in The Bridge on the River Kwai. This role, along with a number of his other roles, is listed by the BFI as one of the most important British films of the 20th century, coming in at number 11.
One review says it is “the best war movie I’ve ever watched”, further claiming it is a “true masterpiece”. Meanwhile, a critic wrote: “One of the greatest and most satisfying endings in all film history.”
“Powerful, complex, moving, and a unique narrative make this one of the best war movies of all time,” an impressed viewer shared. They wrote: “Colonel Nicholson is one of my favourite characters of all time. This is truly like watching a Shakespeare play unfold.
“The plot is so complex, and for a 1950s movie, it is so ahead of its time. William Holden is masterful as well. Overall some of the best acting I have ever seen, a wonderful soundtrack, perfect pacing and incredibly ambitious cinematography.”
Set in the year 1943, during World War Two, a group of British prisoners of war are living in ghastly conditions under the strict regime of a Japanese prison camp in Thailand. Led by Colonel Nicholson, the men are tasked with the job of building a bridge, crucial to their captors, helping to serve the Burma-Siam railway.
They have other ideas, with a secret plan to undermine the entire project. As the film goes on, we see the colonel himself withstand severe torture at the hands of the prison guards, but few scenes of the brutalities of war itself.
Many viewers have noted the film’s intelligent choice to show less of the action and more of the men’s stories behind it all. With one person writing: “Extremely well done, especially given this 1957 movie didn’t have the benefits of modern CGI and special effects.
“Great characters and great performances. A war picture without war, instead focusing on the men’s motivations and morality.”
With seven Academy Awards under its belt, it’s no surprise that film buffs are continuing to go back to this 1950s classic. And now you can too, as The Bridge on the River Kwai is available to stream on Amazon Prime, or alternatively on NowTV.
Cupra Australia is advertising a very sharp run-out offer for the plug-in hybridFormentor VZe, which is now priced from $47,990 drive-away while stocks last.
The special offer works out to more than $20,000 in savings over previous recommended retail pricing, given the VZe usually starts from $64,990 before on-road costs. Even better, the $47,990 sticker also includes the Leather and Camera Package ($2800) as well as a panoramic sunroof ($2150) as standard equipment.
Only premium metallic paint ($490) requires extra spend, though the online stock locator is showing Formentor VZe models with no sunroof and leather pack from as little as $43,040 drive-away at the time of writing.
CarExpert can save you thousands on a new car. Click here to get a great deal.
“On 1 April 2025, the federal government’s Fringe Benefits Tax (FBT) exemption came to an end, and in response Cupra has introduced its own Cupra e-Hybrid Subsidy for the Formentor VZe – a nationwide drive-away offer designed to support customers during this transition,” Cupra Australia says in its media release.
“While not a direct replacement for the government’s FBT exemption, this initiative reflects Cupra’s commitment to keeping electrified mobility accessible, especially as PHEVs continue to grow in popularity across the range.”
Cupra’s communications also notes the Formentor’s European design, engineering and manufacturing, likely a reference to this PHEV price segment being dominated by Chinese-branded and -manufactured PHEVs.
According to Cupra Australia’s online stock tool, there are currently over 400 Formentor VZe units available at the time of writing subject to this “while stocks last” offer. It’s also worth noting this is applicable to ‘MY24’ plated vehicles.
The Cupra Formentor VZe – or e-Hybrid in some markets – is powered by a 1.4-litre turbocharged plug-in hybrid (PHEV) system that locally is only available in its highest state of tune (180kW/400Nm).
Driving the front wheels via a six-speed dual-clutch automatic with paddle shifters, the Formentor VZe can accelerate from 0-100km/h in 7.0 seconds, and offers “around 50km” of EV driving range per charge of its 10.9kWh (net) li-ion battery. Fuel consumption is listed at 1.9L/100km on the combined cycle.
Key equipment highlights include LED headlights; a power tailgate; 12-inch touchscreen infotainment system with navigation and wireless Apple CarPlay and Android Auto; DAB radio; and a heated steering wheel. 19-inch alloy wheels and adaptive damping also come standard.
The Leather and Camera Package adds Nappa leather upholstery with a power driver’s seat and heated front seats.
While billed as a response to FBT incentives being cut off to new PHEV buyers, part of Cupra’s campaign will also be to clear stocks of the pre-facelift Formentor ahead of an updated model arriving in 2026.
In addition to the revised looks, the 2026 Cupra Formentor is due to get updated engines, including a more powerful 200kW PHEV model that will offer over 100km of EV range from a larger 25.8kWh (gross) lithium battery pack.
Despite its advancing age, the pre-update Formentor has actually seen a sales increase in 2025, currently up 38.6 per cent year to date to 31 August 2025 with 1013 new units registered.
It remains the top-selling model in Cupra’s Australian lineup, well ahead of the second-placed (and now temporarily sold out) Cupra Born electric hatchback (313 units, up 5.4 per cent).
As of September 13, 6.29 crore returns had been filed for AY 2025–26, compared with 7.28 crore in total for AY 2024–25. Assuming a similar growth pace of 7.5% year-on-year, filings could touch 7.8 crore this year. The compliance trend has been consistent:
AY 2024–25: 7.28 crore returns
AY 2023–24: 6.77 crore returns
AY 2022–23: 5.82 crore returns
AY 2021–22: 5.77 crore returns
This reflects a 25% rise in filings over the past three years, underscoring improved tax compliance and an expanding base of taxpayers.
The extended deadline, pushed from July 31 to September 15, coincides with the due date for paying the second installment of advance tax. This overlap has added to the pressure on individuals and businesses, who are balancing filing obligations with tax payments.
ITR Filing FAQs Answered
What are the different ITR forms?
ITR 1 (Sahaj): For individuals with income up to ₹50 lakh.
ITR 2: For individuals/HUFs not eligible for ITR 1 and without business income.
ITR 3: For individuals/HUFs with income from business or profession.
ITR 4: For resident individuals, HUFs, and firms (other than LLPs) with income up to ₹50 lakh from business/profession and long-term capital gains up to ₹1.25 lakh.
ITR V: The acknowledgment of ITR filing.
What are the different modes of filing ITR?
According to the CBDT, returns can be filed:
On paper
Electronically with a digital signature
Online with an electronic verification code
Electronically followed by submission of ITR-V
Where can I file ITR online?
Taxpayers can file online via the official portal: incometax.gov.in
What is the e-utility facility?
The Income Tax Department provides free Java and Excel-based e-utilities to generate and submit returns, with step-by-step instructions.
Do I need to attach documents with ITR?
No. ITR forms are attachment-free. However, documents like Form 16, investment proofs, or TDS certificates must be kept ready for verification if requested.
Is filing ITR mandatory if the income is negative?
Yes. Losses must be reported before the due date if you wish to carry them forward for set-off in future years.
Can I file ITR after the deadline?
Yes, as a belated return, but late fees under Section 234F apply.
What is the penalty for late filing?
Rs 5,000 if income exceeds Rs 5 lakh
Rs 1,000 if income is below Rs 5 lakh
Will I get a refund if I paid excess tax?
Yes. Refunds are credited directly to your bank account through ECS transfer.
Are there disadvantages to filing ITR?
No. On the contrary, failure to file when taxable income exists may attract penalties and prosecution.
Has the ITR deadline been extended for AY 2025–26?
No. The final deadline is September 15, 2025.
What are the penalties for not filing?
Late fees under Section 234F (₹1,000–₹5,000)
Ineligibility for certain deductions (Sections 10A, 80-IA, etc.)
Prosecution risk (3 months–2 years; up to 7 years if tax evaded exceeds ₹25 lakh)
How can deductions under Section 80G be claimed?
Donations must be reported in Schedule 80G of the ITR form, categorized into four tables depending on the recipient.
What is the Section 87A rebate?
Old Regime: Rebate up to ₹12,500 if income ≤ ₹5 lakh
New Regime: Rebate up to ₹25,000 if income ≤ ₹7 lakh
Can deductions exceed gross total income?
No. Chapter VIA deductions cannot exceed the Gross Total Income, except for exempt categories like capital gains.
Who must file Form 10-IEA to switch tax regimes?
Business/professional taxpayers: File Form 10-IEA to opt for the old regime.
Others: Choose regime directly while filing.
Can salaried employees claim extra rent deductions?
No. Only HRA under Section 10(13A) is allowed (old regime only). Section 80GG does not apply if HRA is part of salary.
What documents are needed to file ITR?
Keep ready:
PAN and Aadhaar
Bank details
Form 16 (for salaried)
Form 26AS and AIS
Capital gains statements
Investment proofs
Rent receipts/home loan details (if applicable)
Timely filing helps avoid penalties, ensures refunds, and keeps financial records clean. With the deadline expiring tonight, taxpayers are urged not to delay further.
Aparna Deb
Aparna Deb is a Subeditor and writes for the business vertical of News18.com. She has a nose for news that matters. She is inquisitive and curious about things. Among other things, financial markets, economy, a…Read More
Aparna Deb is a Subeditor and writes for the business vertical of News18.com. She has a nose for news that matters. She is inquisitive and curious about things. Among other things, financial markets, economy, a… Read More
First Published:
September 15, 2025, 10:26 IST
News business tax ITR Deadline Today: Top FAQs Answered As Taxpayers Rush To File Last-Minute Returns
Disclaimer: Comments reflect users’ views, not News18’s. Please keep discussions respectful and constructive. Abusive, defamatory, or illegal comments will be removed. News18 may disable any comment at its discretion. By posting, you agree to our Terms of Use and Privacy Policy.
The crypto market is presenting huge opportunities in 2025, and Pepeto (PEPETO) is quickly standing out. While Solana (SOL) and Binance Coin (BNB) target new all-time highs, Pepeto is attracting attention as the next major memecoin. Still in presale at only $0.000000152, it offers investors a rare early opportunity before the official launch. With a viral community and real utility through PepetoSwap and cross-chain solutions, Pepeto aims to lead the upcoming meme wave in the next bull run.
Solana: Consistent Growth with Increasing Support
Solana (SOL) is trading near $240, with analysts viewing recent moves as a short-term correction. Technical charts identify $190 as a critical resistance level, while long-term forecasts suggest that if market momentum persists, SOL could reach $1,000.
The fundamentals remain strong. Growing DeFi and NFT activity is boosting on-chain usage and attracting more developers. Confidence from institutions is also rising: Upexi holds about 1.9 million SOL, valued at over $380 million, while the new REXOsprey Solana ETF has already attracted $73 million in inflows. Experts, including JP Morgan, predict spot ETFs could generate between $2.7 and $5.5 billion within one year. Continued adoption could push SOL past $1,000 or more in the coming months. While Solana builds its institutional base, Pepeto is drawing the kind of early buzz that often fuels 100x runs. Many traders see it as the breakout memecoin set to dominate this cycle.
Binance Coin Quietly Approaching $1,500
While Solana grabs headlines, Binance Coin (BNB) continues its steady rise with little fanfare. Trading around $850, its growth is driven by increasing on-chain activity and consistent demand across Binance Smart Chain for DeFi and applications. Experts believe that if this momentum sustains, BNB could near $1,500 by the end of 2025.
BNB’s strength lies in its reliability. As the core of the Binance exchange ecosystem, it has demonstrated long-term growth instead of chasing short-term gains, making it a trusted choice for stable exposure to crypto infrastructure. But unlike BNB, Pepeto is still in presale, giving investors a ground-floor shot at the kind of life-changing gains that defined past bull runs.
Pepeto (PEPETO) Aims to Fill BNB’s Role in the Memecoin Space
Similar to BNB for Binance, Pepeto (PEPETO) is the core token of its own platform, PepetoSwap. It enables zero-fee trading, staking, and ecosystem growth. This inherent demand provides Pepeto with the stability and growth potential that many meme coins miss.
By blending meme popularity with exchange-driven usefulness, Pepeto is positioned to evolve from hype into a lasting leader in the space.
PEPETO: The Meme Coin with 20,000% Growth Potential
Pepeto is emerging in the crowded meme sector by combining viral energy with practical tools. Priced at only $0.000000153, its presale has already raised over $6.6 million and built a community of more than 100,000 members. Early buyers are gaining a strategic advantage before Tier-1 exchange listings launch.
With no-fee PepetoSwap trading and cross-chain solutions already underway, Pepeto is establishing credibility in the market ahead of its official debut. This approach mirrors the success formula that launched previous bull-run winners, now adapted for Ethereum’s next cycle.
What makes Pepeto stand out is its solid infrastructure. It powers PepetoSwap, a zero-fee decentralized exchange, and a cross-chain bridge that allows tokens to move seamlessly across different blockchains. This creates a unique environment where meme and DeFi projects can grow with real liquidity and scalability.
Experts suggest that if Pepeto hits its potential, a 20,000× increase from $0.000000153 could bring it close to $0.00288. This mirrors the explosive gains that turned Shiba Inu and Dogecoin holders into millionaires during past bull markets.
Meme Market: Is It Ending or Just Beginning
Some believe the meme coin boom ended with Dogecoin and Shiba Inu, but the data tells a different story. Ainvest research confirms the trend is still strong. While older tokens like DOGE and BONK are slowing, next-generation projects such as Pepeto are gaining momentum and drawing serious attention.
Today’s investors seek more than hype; they want tokens that blend viral appeal with real blockchain utility. Pepeto meets this demand, positioning itself as one of the most strategic investments in the space. With a solid presale, audited contracts, and live utility, Pepeto provides an early opportunity in a project built for long-term growth. These setups are rarely seen early, and history proves they don’t happen often.
Final Thoughts: Two Major Builders and One Exciting Breakout
Solana continues to demonstrate its long-term strength through technological progress and institutional support. Binance Coin also remains robust as the core of the largest exchange.
However, the breakout story for 2025 is Pepeto (PEPETO), the BNB of memecoins. Similar to BNB, it powers its platform with zero-fee swaps, staking, and cross-chain capabilities, ensuring ongoing demand and growth. Priced at just $0.000000153 and having already raised over $6.7 million, Pepeto combines meme hype with real utility. With this powerful combination, Pepeto is positioned to lead the next meme season and generate the kind of returns that define bull markets.
For more information about PEPETO, visit the links below:
The latest iPhone system, iOS 26, is being released this week, bringing a new Liquid Glass interface and other features. Before you update, make sure iOS 18.6 on your iPhone is in top form to make it feel faster, more private and easier to use.
I tested the latest update and found 10 quick changes that had an immediate impact. Some help cut background battery drain, others boost privacy and a few are just small “quality of life” upgrades that make the iPhone smoother overall. The best part? None of them require advanced know-how — and most take less than a minute to turn on.
So if your iPhone has been dragging a little or you’re just curious about hidden features, these settings are worth checking. They can refresh your phone’s performance, extend its battery life and buy you more time before you even think about upgrading.
For more on what’s new in iOS 18, learn about improvements to the overhauled Calculator app and the Mail app. And don’t forget to consult our iOS 18 upgrade checklist, which includes making sure you have a proper backup before upgrading.
Don’t miss any of our unbiased tech content and lab-based reviews. Add CNET as a preferred Google source.
Watch this: 11 Hidden Features in iOS 18
Turn off categories in the Mail app
With email, everyone has their own way of dealing with the influx of messages. Traditionally, the Mail app has kept a chronological list, but that can get unwieldy if you also get scores of promotions, receipts and other types of email. The new categories feature creates virtual buckets for Primary, Transactions, Updates and Promotions, and guesses how your messages should be sorted.
If that approach doesn’t work for you, here are two things to try.
• In the event that categories are somewhat useful, but you still want a chronological view of your Inbox, swipe all the way to the right of the categories and tap All Mail.
• To turn off categories altogether, tap the three-dot menu (…) in the top-right corner, and then tap List View.
Turn off Mail Categories from within the Inbox. (iOS 18.5 beta shown here.)
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
Change the default buttons on the lock screen
In real estate, location is everything, and the bottom corners of the iPhone lock screen are the prime spots, each an easy thumb press away when your device is still locked. Before iOS 18, those posts were held by the flashlight and camera buttons, with no way to change them.
In iOS 18, you can finally replace them with other buttons — or remove them entirely, a balm for folks who unknowingly activate the flashlight (believe me, there’s a better way to turn it on). You can add buttons to recognize music via Shazam, enable Dark Mode, set an alarm/timer, enable Airplane Mode, open your Wallet, send money via Tap to Cash and more.
Here’s how:
1. On the iPhone’s lock screen, touch and hold anywhere on the display until you see the Customize button. You’ll need to unlock the phone using Face ID, Touch ID or your passcode. If it opens the home screen, swipe down from the center-top of the screen (not the right edge, which brings up Control Center.
2. Tap Customize and then choose Lock Screen.
3. Remove one of the buttons by tapping the – (minus) button on the icon.
4. To replace the button with another function, tap its space (now with a + icon) and then choose the one you want on the next screen. (You can also opt to leave that space empty with no button.)
5. Repeat those steps for the other button if you want to change it.
6. Tap Done when you’re finished.
7. Tap the lock screen again to exit the customize mode.
Remove a lock screen button by tapping the – (minus) button, and then choose a new control to replace it.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
Get important alerts using Prioritize Notifications
For iPhone models that can run Apple Intelligence, a new option in iOS 18.4 is fast becoming one of my favorite AI features. Go to Settings > Notifications, and under Apple Intelligence, tap Prioritize Notifications. As new alerts come in — and some days feel like they arrive in floods — Apple Intelligence determines which ones are more likely to be important to you. For example, texts from people in your contacts could be flagged in favor of random scam messages. On that settings screen, you can enable or disable priority notifications for individual apps.
In iOS 18.4, Apple Intelligence can prioritize notifications to grab your attention.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
Set up some of the new tasks available on the Action button
The Action button on the iPhone 15 Pro, iPhone 16, iPhone 16E and iPhone 16 Pro replaced the dedicated mute switch found on every earlier iPhone model with a configurable control. By default, it serves the same purpose — hold it to turn Silent Mode on or off — but you can configure it for other actions like opening the Camera app, performing multiple actions at once or even ordering coffee. The iOS 18.4 update adds Visual Intelligence as an option for the Action button. That makes the AI technology available on the iPhone 16E, which does not include the novel new Camera Control but is now an option for any iPhone with an Action button.
In iOS 18, the Action button gets new capabilities. You can bypass Control Center and choose a control of your choice, such as opening the Remote interface for navigating Apple TV or using Shazam to identify a song.
To choose a different action for the Action button, go to Settings > Action Button. Swipe sideways to select and activate one of the available actions. For the Controls, Shortcut and Accessibility options, tap the Choose button to pick which specific action to run.
iOS 18 now lets you program the Action Button with your favorite Control Center control.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
Give your home screen a radical new look
You wouldn’t think that putting icons where you want is a radical new feature, but that’s because iOS has always had a locked arrangement. Apps get added from top to bottom, left to right. You could rearrange the order in which icons appear and move them to other screens, but that was about it.
In iOS 18, apps can be positioned nearly anywhere. You no longer need to deal with a wallpaper image of your kids or pets being obscured by icons. They still adhere to a grid — Apple isn’t about to sanction anarchy — but can be placed freely.
Also, Dark mode finally applies to all of the iPhone’s home screen, with options for coloring icons and affecting the brightness of the wallpaper image. Here’s how to customize the looks.
Arrange apps: Touch and hold the home screen to enter “jiggle mode,” and then drag the icons to new positions. It will still slide them around to fill spaces, but with patience, you can move them into the spots you want.
Position app icons where you want so this very good girl isn’t covered.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
You can also quickly turn compatible apps into widgets that display more information. Maps, for instance, can be a map of your current location with shortcut buttons to search for places or bring up a list of nearby places (such as dinner spots). Touch and hold the app icon and look for a row of resize buttons in the menu that appears. Once expanded beyond the standard icon size, you can drag the handle in the bottom-right corner of the new icon. To get it back to its single icon size you need to touch and hold again and choose the single-icon button
Some apps can be expanded into larger icons that act like widgets.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
Set Dark mode: If you’ve ever subjected yourself to the retina blast of black text on a white background late at night in a darkened room, you will appreciate the new Dark mode option for the home and lock screens. iOS has previously included a Dark mode, where light backgrounds switch to black or dark gray, text switches to white or light gray and other interface elements are dimmed to coexist in a dark environment. That’s never been applied to the home and lock screens in any significant way — only the dock and some widgets — until iOS 18.
First, touch and hold the home screen to enter jiggle mode. Tap the Edit button in the top-left corner and choose Customize from the menu. At the bottom of the screen, choose a mode for the icons and background: Automatic, Dark or Light (I’ll get to Tinted in a moment). In Dark mode, the icons gain black backgrounds, and folders and the Dock become dark gray. (Developers have the option of making Dark mode icons for their apps. In the meantime, apps not yet optimized get a generally darker appearance.)
In the home screen’s Dark mode, icons and the background are given a darker treatment.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
In Dark mode, the background image also changes. Apple’s default iOS 18 wallpaper dynamically changes from light to dark as the day progresses, or you can choose colors that offer a light and dark option. If you use a photo, its overall exposure is reduced to dim the light output.
If you want dark icons but aren’t a fan of the dimmed photo treatment, tap the sun icon in the corner of the options sheet at the bottom of the screen to toggle back to Light mode just for the background.
Tinted icons: A new and different option is to tint all of the app icons so they share the same color. In the Customize options at the bottom of the screen, choose Tinted as the icon style. You can then adjust the Hue (the slider with the color spectrum) and Luminosity (the slider with the dark to light range) to choose the color tint you prefer.
Apply a universal tint to all app icons, with controls for adjusting the hue and luminosity.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
What if you want to match a color from a background image? Tap the eyedropper button and then drag the reticle to pinpoint the color you want — the border indicates the selected color.
The tint is applied not only to icons but to widgets as well. For a widget such as Photos, the images it displays show up as duotones to match the theme.
Large icons: Do the labels below each app icon seem redundant to you? Now you can remove the labels and increase the size of the icons with one setting. Open the Customize options as described above and tap the Large button.
Make the home screen icons larger and hide the app labels.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
After making any of these changes, tap anywhere on the screen to apply them and exit the Customize interface.
Change up how the Control Center looks
Control Center was once a convenient place to quickly access controls such as playback volume and Airplane mode but under iOS 18 it’s a configurable playground. You can position controls where you want, resize many to reveal more information and add new controls on multiple screens.
Swipe down from the top-right corner to reveal the Control Center (or swipe up from the bottom on the iPhone SE). To enter edit mode, touch and hold or press the + button at the top-left corner.
Just as with moving apps, drag a control to another slot on the screen to reposition it. Many of the controls also include a bottom-right handle that can resize the control — in most cases, it reveals the name of the control and its current status (such as Flashlight Off).
Rearrange the controls in Control Center and, for some, expand them to reveal more information (or just make the button a larger target for pressing).
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
Control Center also now spans multiple screens. Swipe up to view controls for media currently playing, Home controls for smart lights and appliances and a page dedicated to the communication options that appear when you long-press the Connectivity block containing Airplane Mode, Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, Cellular and others. Look closely and you’ll see that those screens are actually individual controls expanded to occupy the entire Control Center area.
You can rearrange the order of those screens by moving their controls. Suppose you want Home controls to be the first swipe instead of Now Playing: In the editing mode, drag the large Home control up to the previous screen (Now Playing will shift to the right to make room).
Some controls get their own screens, such as Home. Normally it’s on the third screen, but here it’s been moved to the second screen.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
To remove controls, tap the – (minus) button that appears. You can also add other controls: Tap Add a Control and scroll through the available options ranging from starting a Screen Recording to a host of accessibility options.
Read more: All the new controls you can add to Control Center
Lock or hide any of your sensitive apps
Our phones carry some of our most sensitive data and yet it’s not uncommon to hand a phone to a friend to view photos or look up something online. That doesn’t mean they’re going to snoop but it doesn’t not mean they might be more curious than you’re comfortable with. For data you want to ensure stays out of sight or to add a layer of protection in front of sensitive information, iOS 18 adds the ability to lock and hide apps.
For example, let’s say you keep an ongoing set of lists of gift ideas for family members in the Notes app. You can lock individual notes but that requires a separate step. Maybe a few ideas were made as individual quick notes or drawings. Instead of micromanaging access, you can lock the entire Notes app by doing the following:
Touch and hold the app icon you want to lock and choose Require Face ID or Require Touch ID (or Require Passcode if Face ID or Touch ID are not enabled) from the menu that appears. Confirm your choice by tapping Require Face ID (or similar) in the next dialog.
Lock individual apps.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
To remove the authentication step, touch and hold the app and choose Don’t Require Face ID (or similar).
Nothing outwardly indicates that an app is locked — you’ll find out when you try to open it. There’s one more level of app security available, which is to hide apps in a special locked folder. Touch and hold the app and choose Require Face ID and then tap Hide and Require Face ID in the dialog. Confirm the action by tapping Hide App on the next screen.
The app disappears from the home screen and gets slotted into a Hidden folder at the bottom of the App Library (swipe left beyond your last home screen to view the App Library). To access apps there, tap the Hidden folder and authenticate with Face ID.
When you choose Hide and Require Face ID to protect an app, it gets put into the Hidden folder in App Library (top). Tap the folder and authenticate to access the app (bottom).
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
iOS 18 imposes some limitations on hidden apps. Some, such as many of the built-in ones like Notes or Reminders, can only be locked and cannot be hidden at all. Also, the Hidden folder locks itself when you launch an app or swipe away from the App Library.
Turn off Loop Videos in the Photos app
Many apps have implemented a small but annoying (to me) feature, and now Photos under iOS 18.2 has it too: Videos automatically replay when you watch them until you tap the Pause button. That can be fun once or twice, or when viewing short clips. I’m not a fan of having to take action to make them stop each time.
Now I can take action once. Go to Settings > Photos, scroll down until you see Loop Videos and turn the option off. A video will play on its own but then stop at the end as it should.
Turn off Loop Videos to stop every video from replaying automatically.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
If you’d rather the video didn’t play at all until you tap the Play button, also turn off Auto-Play Motion in the same Settings screen.
Adjust the view of your calendar
Big new features like locking and hiding apps are great additions but so are the tiny changes that you encounter every day. The Calendar app includes two new ways to view your schedule.
In iOS 18, when you’re in the Month view in portrait orientation, pinch with two fingers to view more or fewer details. As you “zoom in,” individual events appear as colored bars and then as labeled events with times, all while keeping the monthly grid of days and weeks.
In the Calendar app’s Month view, pinch to zoom in and see more details.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
The Day view, which breaks down your day hour by hour, now has a new Multi Day view that shows two consecutive days to give you context for what’s coming without turning the phone into landscape orientation and viewing the Week view. Tap the View button at the top of the Single Day view and choose Multi Day from the popup menu.
The new Multi Day view in the Calendar shows two days at once (right).
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson/CNET
Improve movie and TV show dialogue in the TV app
Trouble hearing dialogue in movies and television shows isn’t a new problem — for example, Apple TV has had a feature for a while where you can ask Siri, “What did she say?” and it will automatically back up a few seconds, turn on subtitles and replay that section of the video. You can even buy soundbars that can overcome muffled TV speech. There are a lot of reasons it’s harder to hear dialogue but the TV app in iOS 18 includes a high-tech workaround to make dialog easier to discern.
While you’re watching a video in the TV app, tap the More (…) button and then expand the Audio heading in the menu that appears; if the phone is in horizontal orientation, tap the Audio Adjustments button. Tap Enhance Dialogue and choose Enhance or Boost. They each dampen background noise and raise the dialogue’s audio.
Turn on Enhance Dialogue in the TV app to discern characters’ speech better in noisy scenes.
Screenshot by Jeff Carlson/CNET
These are just a few new features and changes in iOS 18. Check out our broader coverage of Apple Intelligence, more impressions of the system after using it for months and how these all work together with the iPhone 16 models.
Apple’s iPhone 16, 16 Plus Show Off Bolder Colors and Buttons
What if there were an activity so light that it sits below even the usual “easy workout” level? Instead of sweating through intense cardio, Zone Zero is about moving just enough to keep your body active without strain.
“It’s the stuff that feels almost too easy,” celebrity personal trainer Kollins Ezekh told Fox News Digital. “Like walking after dinner or stretching when you’ve been sitting too long.”
FITNESS EXPERT REVEALS 6 PILLARS OF STRENGTH TRAINING THAT OLDER ADULTS SHOULD MASTER
For Zone Zero, your heart rate stays below about 50% of your maximum heart rate, according to various reports on the concept. In real life, that looks like gentle walking, casual stretching, standing instead of sitting, or light household chores.
Zone Zero workouts keep your heart below 50% of your maximum heart rate.(iStock)
You should be able to carry on a full conversation without noticing you’re out of breath. Researchers say it can be thought of as “active rest,” or movement that supports recovery and health without stress.
Experts stress that Zone Zero is not yet an official medical category. Organizations like the National Institutes of Health continue to recommend moderate to vigorous activity — such as brisk walking, running, or cycling — as the backbone of good health. The emerging Zone Zero idea, though, may encourage people to move more in everyday life, even if they aren’t ready for traditional workouts.
TWO KEY HEART HEALTH METRICS COULD DETERMINE HOW LONG YOU’LL LIVE
To see where Zone Zero fits, it helps to understand how exercise “zones” work in general. Zones are ways of measuring how hard your heart is working during a fitness routine. Health experts explain that Zone 1 starts at about 50%–60% of your maximum heart rate.
This may feel like slow walking or warming up, although everyone’s experience will be slightly different. A good way to measure it without any gadgets is to see if you can talk easily and your breathing stays relaxed.
You can estimate your maximum heart rate by subtracting your age from 220.(iStock)
In Zone 2, or around 60%–70% of your maximum heart rate, this may look like brisk walking or light jogging. Mayo Clinic notes this level is good for building endurance and burning fat.
Zone 3 pushes into moderate effort, where conversation becomes harder, and Zones 4 and 5 bring you into very hard and maximum intensity, where talking is nearly impossible and effort can only be sustained in short bursts.
TIKTOK’S VIRAL ‘6-6-6’ WALKING ROUTINE BURNS FAT WITHOUT GRUELING WORKOUTS
“The benefits are real. It helps regulate blood sugar, improves circulation, and makes recovery on off days easier. It’s also stress-free, which is why people are more likely to stick with it,” says Ezekh.
Celebrity personal trainer Kollins Ezekh says Zone Zero workouts can help regulate blood sugar and improve circulation.(iStock)
“The only drawback is if you rely on it alone,” says Ezekh. “You won’t build much strength or endurance from Zone Zero by itself.”
MORE IN HEALTH NEWS
However, the steps to begin are straightforward. You can estimate your maximum heart rate by subtracting your age from 220, a method recommended by Johns Hopkins Medicine. Staying under 50% of that number keeps you in Zone Zero.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
If you don’t have a fitness tracker, you can rely on feel — you should be able to breathe comfortably and talk smoothly without effort. That can mean taking a slow walk, standing up to stretch, or moving lightly around the house.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
“I see it as the foundation — sprinkle it throughout the day, then add in strength and cardio to round out your fitness,” Ezekh said.
Khloe Quill is a lifestyle production assistant with Fox News Digital. She and the lifestyle team cover a range of story topics including food and drink, travel, and health.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-09-14/DPRK-condemns-joint-U-S-South-Korea-Japan-military-drills-1GFdCNJKNdm/img/a7112db821434310a29b52ec0a1ea3cf/a7112db821434310a29b52ec0a1ea3cf.png' alt='Members of Japan Ground Self-Defense Force's Amphibious Rapid Deployment Brigade landing during the joint military exercise Iron Fist 23 with U.S. Marines at Manda Beach, Tokunoshima Island, Japan, March 3, 2023. /VCG'
Senior officials of the Democratic People’s Republic of Korea (DPRK) on Saturday condemned upcoming military drills by the United States, South Korea and Japan, the official Korean Central News Agency reported Sunday.
Seoul will launch two simultaneous drills on Monday, including Freedom Edge, a trilateral outdoor multi-domain exercise with the United States and Japan, and Iron Mace, a tabletop drill simulating a nuclear-attack response with the United States, South Korean media reported.
Kim Yo Jong, vice department director of the Central Committee of the Workers’ Party of Korea (WPK), said the “Guidelines for Nuclear Deterrence and Nuclear Operations on the Korean Peninsula” fabricated by the United States and South Korea are a dangerous idea.
She said the DPRK will regard it as an unfiltered demonstration of their anti-DPRK confrontational stance and a “succession” of confrontational policy.
The reckless show of strength made by the three countries in real action near the DPRK will inevitably bring bad results to themselves, she added.
Pak Jong Chon, vice-chairman of the Central Military Commission of the WPK, said Iron Mace is a “nuclear war rehearsal aimed at using nuclear weapons against the DPRK from A to Z,” while Freedom Edge is the most comprehensive and offensive war drill for aggression in its scale, content and nature.
The reckless military moves of the three countries pose a grave challenge to the security interests of our state and a major danger of undermining regional stability and escalating military tension, he said.
Pak stressed that if the hostile forces persist in their muscle-flexing, the DPRK will respond to them with “counteraction in a very clear and intensified way.”
Juggy Marwaha, CEO of Prestige Office Ventures
| Photo Credit:
SOMASHEKARA GRN
The US may dwarf the world with nearly 7 billion sq. ft of office stock, and China follows at 3.6 billion sq. ft. But India, with 1.1 billion sq. ft, has quietly emerged as the powerhouse of Asia-Pacific, commanding nearly 70 per cent of the region’s office demand. Bengaluru is at the heart of this surge.
Juggy Marwaha, CEO of Prestige Office Ventures, says the future will be shaped by transit-oriented, sustainable and future-proof campuses. With GCCs driving growth, developers are stepping in to invest in mobility solutions and new-age assets.
Bengaluru is at the centre of India’s office growth story. How does it compare with other markets?
India today is a 1.1 billion sq. ft office market, 70 per cent of Asia Pacific. Bengaluru, Hyderabad and Gurgaon together account for 60 per cent of India’s office leasing. Chennai has emerged strongly too. South dominates this growth in office leasing market.
Transit-oriented office spaces are gaining traction globally. How do you see this trend playing out in India?
Absolutely. Every new Prestige office project is within 2 km of a metro station. Employees don’t want to commute more than 45 minutes one way. Mobility and last-mile connectivity will decide the future of offices. That’s why we’re building integrated ecosystems where housing, offices and retail sit within the same connected ring.
Developers are increasingly investing in last-mile infrastructure themselves. What has Prestige’s experience been?
We’re building a 300-meter flyover connecting Bellandur metro station to our Lakeshore Drive campus using our own capital. The government has been supportive in granting approvals. This kind of private participation is essential if Indian cities want to stay competitive globally.
What’s your view on the government’s new land tokenisation model?
It’s an excellent step. It allows landowners to earn revenue as equity holders when projects come up, instead of resisting development. This model was pioneered by Satish Magar at Magarpatta City and now governments across India are adopting it. It ensures more hygienic, long-term revenue sharing.
Prestige has expanded across asset classes. What’s next in the pipeline?
Residential remains our core, followed by offices, retail, hospitality and hotels. But we’re also entering data centres, logistics and senior living in a big way. Student housing is inevitable in the long run, it’s a patient business, but the upfront annual payments make it attractive over time.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
POSTOJI nešto zaista posebno u Chanelu, zar ne? Ova kultna modna kuća vjerojatno je najpoznatiji brend na svijetu – Chanelovo odijelo, torbicu ili cipele možete prepoznati s velike udaljenosti. Prepoznatljiv je po oštrim linijama, ekskluzivnom krojenju, zlatnim detaljima i teksturama tvida. No sličan izgled možete postići i s komadima iz popularnih high street trgovinama.
Chanelovi komadi smatraju se izvrsnom investicijom. Iako su skupi, modna matematika ima smisla. Bezvremenska priroda i vrhunska izrada jamče da ćete ih nositi do kraja života, pa se, kada se izračuna trošak po nošenju, investicija itekako isplati, piše Hello! Magazine.
Međutim, ako raspolažete ograničenim budžetom, high-street trgovine nude nevjerojatne komade koji će učiniti da izgledate dotjerano, elegantno i, usudimo se reći, bogato. Nekoliko ključnih komada iz Zare i H&M-a odmah će podići vaš stil i unijeti dašak pariške inspiracije u vašu garderobu.
Balerinke u dvije boje
Chanelove balerinke su klasa za sebe. Cijena im je oko 950 eura po paru, izrađene su od najfinije janjeće kože, a prepoznatljivi dvobojni detalj daje elegantan i klasičan izgled. Gotovo da nema slavne osobe koja ih ne posjeduje, od Meghan Markle do Kate Moss.
H&M nudi gotovo identičan par za samo 19.99 eura. Naravno, izrađene su od mješavine poliestera, ali imaju istu dvobojnu kombinaciju, lijep ukrasni detalj mašne sprijeda i udobnu satensku podstavu.
Tvid sako
Savršen prijelazni komad, sako od tvida ili buklea, zaštitni je znak Chanela, a prvi put ga je dizajnirala sama Coco Chanel još 1950-ih. Obožavala ga je princeza Diana, a danas joj moderan prizvuk daje Margot Robbie. Ovaj se stil može kombinirati s trapericama, hlačama po mjeri ili suknjama. No, cijena mu je oko 4700 eura, čak i za rabljene komade.
H&M je i ovdje ponudio odličnu alternativu. Njihov model po cijeni od 59.99 eura dolazi u elegantnoj crnoj boji s bijelim šavovima i neizostavnim zlatnim gumbima. Može se nositi na brunch, večeru ili čak zabavu uz elegantne cipele. Jakna je bezvremenska i, uz pravilnu njegu, nosit ćete je sljedeća tri desetljeća.
Kardigan
Udobna elegancija – skromni kardigan svestran je komad koji odiše profinjenošću. Ove godine Chanel je svoju kolekciju kardigana predstavio u raznim pastelnim nijansama, no s cijenom od oko 3500 eura, predstavljaju priličnu investiciju.
Srećom, Zara ima nekoliko fantastičnih komada u stilu Chanela. Ovaj model u pastelno ružičastoj boji je sofisticiran i minimalistički, a koštat će vas samo 29.95 eura.
Okrugle sunčane naočale
Chanel sunčane naočale imaju tu filmsku notu i jednostavno odišu holivudskim glamurom. To je onaj tip modnog dodatka koji kupujete jednom, a koji u trenu podigne svaki dan bez šminke i vašem izgledu da dotjeran završni dojam. Zara ima vrlo sličan model za 39.95 eura. Odišu stilom Elizabeth Taylor.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Još high street komada s daškom Chanel stila
U nastavku donosimo još komada iz Zare i H&M-a koji odišu Chanel vibrom.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
Apple, which is stepping up its manufacturing push in India, has spread iPhone 17 production across five local factories, which will be available in the country from September 19. According to analysts on Wednesday, the festive season is set to herald new sales records for the US-based giant.
Apple is also expected to manufacture fewer units of the ‘Pro’ models in India, according to industry sources.
Foxconn has started rolling out iPhone 17 units at its new $2.8 billion facility in Devanahalli, near Bengaluru. The plant, which is Foxconn’s second-largest iPhone factory outside China, is now running alongside its Chennai unit.
Add Zee Business as a Preferred Source
Experts view the Bengaluru factory’s launch and the broader manufacturing shift as a major milestone in Apple’s diversification strategy.
Moreover, despite inflationary and tariff pressures affecting global supply chains, Apple has largely maintained stable US dollar pricing, supported by expanded local manufacturing in India, which mitigates geopolitical risks.
Tarun Pathak, Research Director at Counterpoint Research, told IANS that Apple now has a widest range of iPhone portfolio and is set to garner a major share in the upcoming festive season.
“Around 60-65 per cent of iPhones in India are being purchased on EMIs which would also work well for the new iPhone 17 series. From the form factor point of view, iPhone 17 Air looks stunning and will sure catch more eyeballs in the domestic market, especially with its Pro performance and best of the silicon,” he noted.
“I think the camera remains the best for iPhones in this new lineup, especially on the 17 Pro Series,” Pathak added.
While iPhone 17 (256 GB) starts at Rs 82,900, iPhone 17 Air (256 GB) begins from Rs 119,900; iPhone 17 Pro (256 GB) starts from Rs 134,900 and iPhone 17 Pro Max (256 GB) from Rs 149,900.
iPhone Air features a breakthrough titanium design that is elegant and light yet strong. The back of iPhone Air is now protected with Ceramic Shield, and the front cover uses Ceramic Shield 2, delivering 3x better scratch resistance, making iPhone Air more durable than any previous iPhone.
iPhone Air also features a stunning 6.5-inch Super Retina XDR display with ProMotion up to 120Hz.
According to Prabhu Ram, VP-Industry Research Group (IRG), CMR, with the all-new iPhone 17 series introducing a refreshed design language, Apple is well-positioned for a strong festive season in India.
“The iPhone 17 Air brings notable design innovation, likely driving upgrades from loyalists of older models, while the iPhone 17 Pro lineup features a functional, performance-focused design reminiscent of the Apple Watch Ultra, the largest battery ever in an iPhone, and a major camera leap with an 8x telephoto lens and up to 40x digital zoom. Durability enhancements, including improved drop and scratch resistance, align with growing consumer demand for longer device lifecycles,” Ram told IANS.
Combined with the strong festive-season performance of older iPhone generations, the sizeable under-penetrated upgrade pool in India presents significant growth opportunities, provided Apple can convert consumer interest into sales, he maintained.
Apple’s bet on India has already started to pay off. Between April and July this year, iPhones worth $7.5 billion were exported from India, compared to $17 billion in the entire previous fiscal year. Apple CEO Tim Cook also recently underlined India’s growing role in the company’s supply chain.
Stephen King has revealed his top 10 favourite films – and among the heavy-hitters from Coppola, Scorsese and Spielberg sits a title once dismissed as a box office disaster.
The horror master, who shared his picks “in no particular order,” placed William Friedkin’s 1977 thriller Sorcerer at the top of his list.
The film was released just a month after Star Wars rewrote the rules of Hollywood, and its gritty, fatalistic story about four desperate men hauling nitroglycerine across treacherous terrain couldn’t compete with George Lucas’ sci-fi spectacle. At the time, critics were lukewarm and audiences stayed away.
But in the years since, Sorcerer has been rediscovered and hailed as one of Friedkin’s finest achievements. Even the director himself, best known for The French Connection and The Exorcist, called it his most personal and difficult project.
Sorcerer is a loose remake of Henri-Georges Clouzot’s 1953 classic The Wages of Fear, which in turn was adapted from Georges Arnaud’s novel.
The film follows four fugitives from different backgrounds who find themselves stranded in a remote South American village. Each is offered a shot at survival by driving unstable crates of dynamite through miles of dangerous jungle roads.
Starring Roy Scheider in the lead, it’s a tense, relentless study into human desperation. Friedkin stripped away glamour and comfort, insisting on harsh locations and gruelling stunts to heighten the realism. The result was a film that critics and audiences in 1977 weren’t ready for – but cinephiles and filmmakers have since embraced as ahead of its time.
On Rotten Tomatoes, Sorcerer now holds an 80% rating and reviews from both fans and critics echo King’s enthusiasm. One reviewer called it: “The movie is exceptional. Fantastic action scenes, intriguing theme (almost the inverse of Heart of Darkness). The director does well to wrongfoot the audience. Acting is perfect.”
Another praised its realism: “Just the kind of bleak, realistic adventure you’re anticipating. Delivers on all fronts and gives a great sense of immersion. Technically impressive and doesn’t skimp on the effects. Thrilling, gritty, and a great twist, will leave viewers happy.”
Others marvelled at its intensity: “Really under rated. The first half of this movie has you glued to your seet, the second half has you hanging off the edge of it. A must watch for any movie fan.”
King’s selection of Sorcerer sits alongside some of cinema’s most celebrated works: The Godfather Part II, Casablanca, Jaws and Close Encounters of the Third Kind all made the cut. He also included Mean Streets, Groundhog Day, Double Indemnity, The Treasure of the Sierra Madre and The Getaway.
India aims to expand its footprint in the global banking landscape with strategic reforms, AI-driven growth and international expansion.
State Bank of India, India’s largest public sector bank, is ranked 43rd globally on asset size. (File Photo)
India has set an ambitious target of having at least two public sector banks break into the world’s top 20 banks by asset size as part of the country’s strategic vision for a Viksit Bharat by 2047, according to a report by CNBC-TV18.
A high-level meeting is underway in Delhi between senior Indian bankers and officials from the Department of Financial Services (DFS), with discussions centred on shaping the future growth path of India’s banking sector.
As of now, India’s largest public sector bank, the State Bank of India (SBI), is ranked 43rd globally by asset size. Closing the gap to the top 20 is a significant challenge, but sources confided to CNBC-TV18 that the government is confident that the milestone can be achieved with strategic reforms and international expansion.
Furthermore, India’s bold target of having two public sector banks among the global banking elite reflects the government’s ambition to not only reinforce the domestic financial sector but also enhance India’s standing in the global banking arena.
The push comes against the backdrop of growing global economic uncertainty, with geopolitical tensions and volatile markets bringing the spotlight on Indian banks as essential tools to expand India’s presence in emerging international markets, support cross-border business, and safeguard the economy against external shocks.
Artificial Intelligence (AI) is playing a key role in India’s banking strategy, with the government banking on its role in driving organic growth for banks and helping them enhance customer experience, strengthen risk management, boost operational efficiency, and access underserved customer segments, the sources said.
Moreover, regulatory reforms are reportedly being considered to simplify procedures and remove outdated obstacles that hinder public sector banks from expanding globally, as per CNBC-TV18. These reforms aim to enhance competitiveness, foster innovation, and support quicker decision-making in line with international best practices.
Aveek Banerjee is a Senior Sub Editor at News18. Based in Noida with a Master’s in Global Studies, Aveek has more than three years of experience in digital media and news curation, specialising in international… Read More
First Published:
September 14, 2025, 20:29 IST
News business India Aims To Have At Least Two Public Sector Banks To Join Global Banking Elite By 2047: Report
Disclaimer: Comments reflect users’ views, not News18’s. Please keep discussions respectful and constructive. Abusive, defamatory, or illegal comments will be removed. News18 may disable any comment at its discretion. By posting, you agree to our Terms of Use and Privacy Policy.
Bitcoin is testing an important level. The price has reached the resistance zone between $116,500 and $117,000, but it has not yet broken through. This range has acted as a ceiling in recent sessions.
Resistance Holds Strong
Bitcoin has been consolidating after its rally from $113,000. An ascending triangle breakout earlier this month pointed to $116,500–$117,000 as the first major hurdle. Bitcoin has now reached this zone but is struggling to close decisively above it.
If Bitcoin clears this range with strong confirmation, the next target sits near $120,000, followed by the all-time high around $124,000.
Support Levels to Watch
Despite resistance, the broader trend remains bullish in the short term. The 3-day MACD is nearing a bullish crossover, historically a reliable signal of upward momentum. On the downside, support remains firm at $113,000–$113,500, with additional backing at $106,700–$107,600 if a deeper pullback occurs.
Liquidity clusters are building both above and below the current price. Heatmap data shows heavy liquidation levels around $116,900, hinting another retest of the resistance area in the coming days. Below, liquidity near $110,000 could act as a magnet if selling pressure intensifies, though this appears less likely given the prevailing bullish structure.
What’s Next for Bitcoin?
With the market still trending higher overall, a period of consolidation or retests around $117,000 is likely before a possible breakout. If successful, the move could push Bitcoin toward $120,000, placing it within reach of its record highs.
The Education Ministry’s National Institutional Ranking Framework has come a long way since its inception a decade ago and is offering a credible alternative to rankings by foreign private agencies, said BITS Pilani Group Vice Chancellor V Ramgopal Rao.
He, however, believes the National Institutional Ranking Framework (NIRF) ranking system still faces some challenges that need to be addressed.
“The big win is that NIRF is announced by the Government of India. It has that official sanctity. QS or Times Higher Education rankings are private agencies and keep the perception part so high because that is their business model, and you can hire them for those services,” Rao said.
“NIRF has come a long way in the last 10 years in terms of how it has evolved and how they have been able to strengthen some of these metrics. Having said that, there are still a lot of challenges,” he told PTI in an interview.
The BITS Pilani Group vice chancellor said he feels that with over 14,000 individual institutions participating in NIRF and being ranked by the Government of India, which is used for funding and other things, NIRF needs much more strengthening.
The 10th edition of NIRF was announced on September 4.
Birla Institute of Technology and Science (BITS), Pilani, entered the top 10 universities ranking for the first time, bagging the seventh spot. The institution has also improved its overall ranking from 26 to 23, and the ranking among engineering institutions has seen a big jump from 20th spot to 11th this year.
BITS is also ranked second among pharmacy institutions.
Rao, who was earlier the director of the Indian Institute of Technology (IIT)-Delhi, suggested that the metrics to evaluate research need certain changes to be able to accurately rate the institutions.
“The first thing is about the research… if you look at the research parameters, almost 21 per cent of the rankings are for the research, whether it is the number of papers or the citations.
“I saw very interesting trends recently in a scientific paper… the number of papers and citations, track one on one, meaning if you plot on one axis the number of papers and citations on the other axis, it’s a straight line,” he said.
Elaborating, Rao said it essentially means that those who are writing more papers are essentially citing themselves.
“Either their institutions are citing it or they are citing it themselves. There are a lot of self-checking problems which is happening because of that. And when a metric is tracking one-on-one, the citations, the volume of research, counting it twice, one for one day of publications….I think it is leading to a double-counting event,” he said.
Rao also called for audits if an institution shows a significant jump, as the ranking relies on self-reported data.
A lot of audits are needed. We need to ensure that randomly we audit the institutions which are showing significant improvements…that volatility is actually a big challenge in NIRF. Other than the top 20, there is a huge volatility across the remaining banks.
“If somebody has shown a significant jump, there has to be some data auditing at regular intervals. That will set a fear… The self-reported data, I believe, is a big concern because sometimes the results that come out of it are unexpected and do not reflect the reality on the ground,” he added.
The participation of Higher Education Institutions (HEIs) in the NIRF rankings has grown from 3,565 in 2016 to 14,163 in 2025. Concurrently, the number of categories and subject domains has expanded from four in 2016 to 17 in 2025.
The 10th edition of the rankings evaluated institutions of higher education in nine categories — overall, universities, colleges, research institutions, innovation, open universities, state public universities, skill universities and sustainable development goals (SDGs).
HEIs have also been ranked in eight subject domains — engineering, management, pharmacy, law, medical, architecture and planning, dental, and agriculture and allied Sectors.
A record number of 7,692 unique institutions responded and submitted 14,163 applications across various categories and subject domains, offering themselves for ranking in ‘Overall’, category-specific, or domain-specific rankings.
Watch every Premier League match live in Australia from AU$32 a month
Stan Sport
There’s more than just bragging rights at stake on Sunday as fierce city rivals Man City and Man United go in search of a much-needed win, both teams having made poor starts to the new season.
Below, we’ll outline the best live TV streaming services for watching English Premier League games as they happen, wherever you are in the world, and how to use a VPN if it’s not available where you are.
The hosts come into the match looking to avoid a third successive defeat following back-to-back losses to Spurs and Brighton before the international break. Of key concern to City manager Pep Guardiola will be how unusually vulnerable City have looked defensively, especially when dealing with counterattacks.
While Ruben Amorim’s United won last time out, that 3-2 victory over newly promoted Burnley was far from convincing. Last month’s humiliating Carabao Cup exit to League Two Grimsby Town is still fresh in supporters’ memories, too.
Manchester City takes on Manchester United on Sunday, Sept. 14, at the Etihad Stadium, with kickoff set for 4:30p.m. BST. That makes it a 11:30 a.m. ET or 8:30 a.m. PT start in the US and Canada, and an 1:30 a.m. AEST kickoff in Australia in the early hours of Monday morning.
Man City boss Pep Guardiola has yet to oversee an EPL win over rivals Man United since Ruben Amorim took charge of the Red Devils last November.
Carl Recine/Mike Hewitt/Getty Images
How to watch Man City vs. Man United in the US without cable
The Manchester derby will be broadcast on NBC and streaming service Peacock. To stream the game live, you’ll need a Peacock Premium or Premium Plus account.
Peacock offers two Premium plans, and after recent price increases, the ad-supported Premium plan costs $11 a month, and the ad-free Premium Plus plan costs $17 a month.
How to watch the English Premier League 2025-26 season from anywhere with a VPN
If you’re traveling abroad and want to keep up with all the EPL action while away from home, a VPN can help enhance your privacy and security when streaming.
It encrypts your traffic and prevents your internet service provider from throttling your speeds, and can also be helpful when connecting to public Wi-Fi networks while traveling, adding an extra layer of protection for your devices and logins. VPNs are legal in many countries, including the US and Canada, and can be used for legitimate purposes such as improving online privacy and security.
However, some streaming services may have policies restricting VPN use to access region-specific content. If you’re considering a VPN for streaming, check the platform’s terms of service to ensure compliance.
If you choose to use a VPN, follow the provider’s installation instructions, ensuring you’re connected securely and in compliance with applicable laws and service agreements. Some streaming platforms may block access when a VPN is detected, so verifying if your streaming subscription allows VPN usage is crucial.
James Martin/CNET
Price $13 per month, $75 for the first year or $98 total for the first two years (one- and two-year plans renew at $100 per year)Latest Tests No DNS leaks detected, 18% speed loss in 2025 testsNetwork 3,000 plus servers in 105 countriesJurisdiction British Virgin Islands
ExpressVPN is our current best VPN pick for people who want a reliable and safe VPN, and it works on a variety of devices. Prices start at $3.49 a month on a two-year plan for the service’s Basic tier.
73% off with 2yr plan (+4 free months). Now only $3.49/month
Livestream Man City vs. Man United in the UK
This massive Sunday afternoon clash is exclusive to Sky Sports and will be shown on its Sky Sports Main Event and UHD channels. If you already have Sky Sports as part of your TV package, you can stream the game via its Sky Go app. Cord-cutters will want to set up a Now account and a Now Sports membership to stream the game.
Now TV
Sky’s standalone streaming service Now offers access to Sky Sports channels with a Now Sports membership. You can get a day of access for £15 or sign up to a monthly plan from £35 a month right now.
Livestream Man City vs. Man United in Canada
If you want to livestream EPL games in Canada this season, you’ll need to subscribe to Fubo. The service has exclusive rights to the Premier League once again and is broadcasting all 380 matches live.
Fubo
Fubo is the go-to destination for Canadians looking to watch the EPL, with exclusive streaming rights to every match. It currently costs CA$27 for the first month, then CA$31.50 a month from then on.
Livestream Man City vs. Man United in Australia
Livestreaming rights for the EPL are now with Stan Sport, which is showing all 380 games live, including this match.
Stan
Stan Sport will set you back AU$20 a month (on top of a Stan subscription, which starts at AU$12). It’s also worth noting that the streaming service is currently offering a seven-day free trial.
A subscription will also give you access to Premier League, Champions League and Europa League action, as well as international rugby and Formula E.
Quick tips for streaming the Premier League using a VPN
With four variables at play — your ISP, browser, video streaming provider and VPN — your experience and success when streaming EPL matches may vary.
If you don’t see your desired location as a default option for ExpressVPN, try using the “search for city or country” option.
If you’re having trouble getting the game after you’ve turned on your VPN and set it to the correct viewing area, there are two things you can try for a quick fix. First, log in to your streaming service subscription account and make sure the address registered for the account is an address in the correct viewing area. If not, you may need to change the physical address on file with your account. Second, some smart TVs — like Roku — don’t have VPN apps you can install directly on the device itself. Instead, you’ll have to install the VPN on your router or the mobile hotspot you’re using (like your phone) so that any device on its Wi-Fi network now appears in the correct viewing location.
All of the VPN providers we recommend have helpful instructions on their main site for quickly installing the VPN on your router. In some cases with smart TV services, after you install a cable network’s sports app, you’ll be asked to verify a numeric code or click a link sent to your email address on file for your smart TV. This is where having a VPN on your router will also help, since both devices will appear to be in the correct location.
And remember, browsers can often give away a location despite using a VPN, so be sure you’re using a privacy-first browser to log into your services. We normally recommend Brave.
A healthcare worker in Virginia has been fired after making controversial comments about Charlie Kirk’s death.
The individual is one of a growing number of employees who have been terminated or suspended due to violence-supporting reactions to the conservative commentator’s assassination on Wednesday.
The woman, who was an anesthesiologist at Riverside Walter Reed Hospital, made a social media post that included “highly inappropriate comments supporting violence against a public figure,” according to an email from the hospital sent to Fox News Digital.
RESTAURANT IN MAJOR CITY FACES FALLOUT OVER ‘OFFENSIVE’ CHARLIE KIRK POST BY CO-OWNER
Riverside became aware of the post on Thursday morning.
The employee’s name was not shared in the statement.
A healthcare worker in Virginia (not pictured) has been fired after making controversial comments about the death of Charlie Kirk.(iStock)
The employee was contracted through North American Partners in Anesthesia (NAPA), an anesthesiology group, the hospital stated.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
“We took prompt action and by mid-morning on Sept. 11, her contract through NAPA was terminated,” the statement read.
“The individual is no longer affiliated with Riverside Health.”
Conservative political figure Charlie Kirk, 31, was assassinated while speaking to students at a Utah university on Wednesday.(Phill Magakoe/AFP via Getty Images)
Fox News Digital reached out to North American Partners in Anesthesia requesting comment.
Among the other fallout after Kirk’s assassination, a popular barbecue restaurant in Cincinnati has faced backlash over a co-owner’s social media comments.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
Aaron Sharpe, co-owner of Lucius Q, commented on a Facebook post from someone offering prayers for the husband and father of two.
A co-owner of Lucius Q sparked widespread backlash over an insensitive Facebook comment related to conservative activist Charlie Kirk’s death.(Google Street View)
“Good riddance,” Sharpe wrote in a post that is no longer publicly visible but has been circulated widely online in screenshots. “What a piece of s—,” he added.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
On Thursday, several of Lucius Q’s business partners and vendor sites announced they had cut ties with the restaurant.
Lucius Q later announced it had parted ways with Sharpe.
Melissa Rudy is senior health editor and a member of the lifestyle team at Fox News Digital. Story tips can be sent to [email protected].
You don’t have permission to access “http://food.ndtv.com/news/this-viral-hack-for-oil-free-crispy-puris-is-taking-over-the-internet-9273947” on this server.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-09-13/Yemen-s-Houthis-claim-fresh-missile-strike-on-Israel-in-retaliation-1GDGXwCyoiQ/img/d722772426ff4143980c1b5f1805151b/d722772426ff4143980c1b5f1805151b.png' alt='Houthi soldiers patrol a street in Sanaa, Yemen, September 12, 2025. /VCG'
Yemen’s Houthi armed group launched a hypersonic ballistic missile toward Israel this morning, targeting what it described as “sensitive sites” in the Jaffa area in southern Tel Aviv.
In a statement broadcast on the group’s al-Masirah TV on Saturday, Houthi military spokesperson Yahya Sarea said that the missile had multiple warheads and caused residents to flee to bomb shelters. He also claimed that the strike had “achieved its objectives.”
The Israel Defense Forces (IDF) said that it successfully intercepted a missile launched from Yemen into Israeli territory early Saturday morning.
Israel’s national emergency service, Magen David Adom, said in a statement that there were no reports of hits or casualties.
The IDF issued an alert shortly after the launch, and a few minutes later, air defense sirens were heard in wide areas of central Israel, including the Tel Aviv metropolitan area, waking millions of residents and prompting them to rush to shelters.
Sarea said the group would continue carrying out strikes in support of the Palestinian people in Gaza and pledged resilience against what he called Israeli “aggression” toward Yemen, referring to Wednesday’s airstrikes.
The Houthi-run health ministry said on Thursday that Israeli airstrikes hit two newspapers and a nearby resident’s house in Sanaa, as well as other civilian facilities in the northern province of al-Jawf. The strikes killed at least 46 people and injured 165 others, mostly civilians.
German lifestyle and interior solutions brand Hettich has opened its revamped Experience Centre in Hyderabad, following a similar launch in Bengaluru. (A representative image)
The 137-year-old German lifestyle brand Hettich has opened its revamped Experience Centre in Hyderabad, following the launch of a similar centre in Bengaluru.
The move marks the brand’s mission to bring globally renowned, German-engineered interior solutions comprising furniture fittings, architectural door hardware, furniture lights and built-in kitchen appliances closer to design-conscious Indian consumers.
Immersive experience
The newly revamped Hyderabad Experience Centre has been redesigned to offer a deeply immersive and standardised customer experience. In addition to the in-centre experience, Hettich offers a suite of value-added services that extend beyond the showroom. Customers can benefit from free design services and doorstep consultations, enabling them to receive expert guidance.
In addition, the company has also inaugurated a new warehouse facility in the South to support quicker deliveries and provide better services.
Andre Eckholt, Managing Director, Hettich India, SAARC, Middle East & Africa, said the customer base in South India deeply values design, functionality and premium lifestyle choices.
Future growth
The consistent investments in infrastructure and service by the company will shape the future of furniture fittings and interior solutions for this highly brand-conscious and quality-driven market, he said.
Hettich is one of the world’s largest manufacturers of Furniture Fittings with a global turnover of over 1.5 billion euros. Its product portfolio comprises a repertoire of Furniture Fittings and Door Hardware made with cutting-edge German quality, complemented by Wire Products, Aluminium Profiles, Shelving Systems, Built-in Appliances and Furniture Lights.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
DONOSIMO radna vremena trgovina, šoping-centara, pekarnica i drugih objekata za nedjelju, 14. rujna. U nastavku pogledajte što je otvoreno, a što zatvoreno ove nedjelje.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
Apple Event 2025 iPhone 17 Launch Price: After a long wait, Apple has finally launched the all-new iPhone 17 globally on September 9, at its ‘Awe Dropping’ event held at the Steve Jobs Theater in Cupertino. Priced at $799, it is the standard model in the latest iPhone lineup, powered by a successor to last year’s A18 chipset, and runs on iOS 26.
“iPhone 17 is a big upgrade with powerful features that make iPhone even more useful in your day-to-day life, from the bigger and brighter ProMotion display with 3x better scratch resistance, to all-day battery life with faster charging, the A19 chip for powerful performance, a fantastic 48MP Dual Fusion camera system, and the innovative Center Stage front camera — our best front camera yet,” said Kaiann Drance, Apple’s vice president of Worldwide iPhone Product Marketing.
Add Zee Business as a Preferred Source
iPhone 17: Display
The iPhone 17 features a 6.3-inch Super Retina XDR display with ProMotion technology and an adaptive refresh rate of up to 120Hz. It has thinner borders than the previous generation and a maximum outdoor brightness of 3000 nits – the highest ever on an iPhone – and 2x better outdoor contrast.
The front is protected by the all-new Ceramic Shield 2, offering three times the scratch resistance of the previous generation and significantly reduced glare for enhanced visibility. Apple claims it’s the toughest glass ever used in a smartphone.
iPhone 17: Camera
The newly launched iPhone boasts a powerful new camera system, featuring a 48MP fusion main camera with an optical-quality 2x telephoto, and a new 48MP fusion ultra-wide camera. On the front, it features an 18MP all-new Center Stage front camera, which, according to the company, improves both photo and video capture, keeping you perfectly in the frame in every shot.
What does the Center Stage front camera do?
According to the company, the Center Stage front camera features the first square front camera sensor on iPhone, offering a wider field of view and higher resolution — up to 18MP for photos — to capture more detail. Users no longer have to rotate their iPhone to take a landscape selfie — they can now take photos and videos in portrait or landscape while holding their iPhone vertically, enabling a more comfortable, secure grip and centered gaze.
iPhone 17: Storage/Variant & colour options
iPhone 17 will be available with 256GB of storage as standard – double the entry storage compared to the previous generation – and a 512GB option, in five beautiful colours: black, lavender, mist blue, sage, and white.
iPhone 17: eSIM
The iPhone 17 is a dual-SIM smartphone — with eSIM-only support in Bahrain, Canada, Guam, Japan, Kuwait, Mexico, Oman, Qatar, Saudi Arabia, the UAE, the US, and the US Virgin Islands and Nano SIM + eSIM support globally.
eSIM is a digital SIM that offers greater flexibility, better security, and seamless connectivity compared to traditional physical SIM cards. Furthermore, if the iPhone is lost or stolen, this e-SIM cannot be physically removed, giving it added security.
iPhone 17: Battery and charging
The iPhone 17, according to the company, can charge up to 50 per cent in 20 minutes with an optional high-wattage USB-C power adapter, such as Apple’s new 40W Dynamic Power Adapter with 60W Max. Moreover, it is capable of delivering up to 30 hours of video playback – that’s eight hours more than the previous generation, it added.
iPhone 17: Processor
The iPhone 17 is powered by the A19 chip, built on advanced third-generation 3-nanometer technology. Its 6-core CPU delivers up to 1.5x faster performance compared to the A15 Bionic chip in the iPhone 13, while the 5-core GPU offers more than twice the graphics performance.
iPhone 17: New accessories
In addition to the iPhone 17 clear case with MagSafe, a silicone case with MagSafe will be available in five colors: black, neon yellow, light moss, anchor blue, and purple fog. The silicone case with MagSafe can be paired with the new crossbody strap, giving users a hands-free way to wear the iPhone, said the company.
iPhone 17 Price in India
The base variant of the iPhone 17 with 256GB storage is priced at Rs 82,900. The 512GB variant is priced at Rs 1,02,900.
iPhone 17: Availability
Interested buyers can pre-order the iPhone 17 base model starting Friday, September 12, with availability beginning Friday, September 19.
IMDb has revealed a list of the 10 best UK movies ranging from a spy genre to comedy horror series, with three of them directed by the same person. A 2014-made film, Kingsman: The Secret Service has secured the top spot on the list.
It is a stylish spy action comedy film directed by Matthew Vaughn, marking the beginning of the Kingsman film franchise. Released in 2015, the movie is based on the comic book series The Secret Service, created by Mark Millar and Dave Gibbons and published by Millarworld. The story was born from a concept developed jointly by Millar and Vaughn, blending classic espionage tropes with modern flair and irreverent humour.
The film follows a secret intelligence agency that recruits a street-smart young man into its elite training program, delivering high-octane action, sharp wit, and a fresh twist on the traditional spy genre.
However, one director who stood out among the list was Edgar Wright, whose three movies have made it to the top 10 list.
Born on 18 April 1974, Mr Wright is a celebrated English filmmaker known for his energetic and satirical approach to genre cinema. His signature style includes dynamic editing techniques—such as whip pans, wipes, and rapid transitions—alongside expressive use of popular music and inventive camera work like Steadicam shots and dolly zooms.
Mr Wright began his career making independent short films, eventually directing his first feature, A Fistful of Fingers, in 1995. He later co-created the comedy series Asylum with David Walliams and gained wider recognition with the cult sitcom Spaced (1999–2001), which starred his frequent collaborators Simon Pegg and Nick Frost.
His breakthrough in film came with Shaun of the Dead (2004), a zombie comedy that launched the Three Flavours Cornetto trilogy. Co-written with Pegg, the trilogy continued with Hot Fuzz (2007), a buddy cop satire, and concluded with The World’s End (2013), a sci-fi comedy exploring themes of nostalgia and adulthood—all showcasing Wright’s distinctive blend of humor, genre homage, and visual flair.
Kavin Bharti Mittal announces the shutdown of Hike Messenger after 13 years, citing challenges post India Ban.
Kavin Bharti launched Hike in 2012.
Bharti Airtel group scion Kavin Bharti Mittal has announced to wind down India’s messaging app, a competitor to WhatsApp, after its 13-year journey.
“After regrouping with our investors and the team, I’ve made the difficult decision to wind down Hike completely”, said Kavin Bharti Mittal in his Substack post.
Mittal further said that after India Ban, scaling globally of the messaging platform would require a full recap, which he called “not the best use of capital or time”. “For the first time in 13 years, my answer is no. Not for me, not for my team, and not for our investors,” Mittal added.
He said that US business, which was launched nine months ago, is performing well.
Sharing the 13-year journey in the post, Mittal said Hike Messenger reached 40M MAUs and became the 35th most loved consumer brand in India at its peak.
He said that with Rush, they built a new kind of Casual PvP gaming platform and scaled it to 10M users and $500M+ in gross revenue (CEA) in just 4 years.
Hike was launched in December 2012 by Kavin Bharti Mittal as India’s answer to WhatsApp, with the vision of creating a homegrown messaging platform tailored to Indian users. Backed by Bharti Enterprises and early investors like SoftBank, it quickly gained traction among the youth, crossing 100 million downloads within a few years.
“To everyone who has been part of this journey – our users, our team, our investors, and our community – thank you. As a CEO, you’re only as strong as your team, and I want to give a special shout-out to mine – an incredible group of people who gave this everything (Hike),” Mittal noted.
Hinting at his upcoming plans, Mittal said that he will help build the future, where willpower is infinite, energy is abundant, and intelligence is at our fingerprints. “This is the future I will help build — and it’s where I’ll be contributing in the decades to come. This new chapter will look very different from the last one,” Mittal added.
Varun Yadav is a Sub Editor at News18 Business Digital. He writes articles on markets, personal finance, technology, and more. He completed his post-graduation diploma in English Journalism from the Indian Inst… Read More
First Published:
September 14, 2025, 09:54 IST
News business Bye Bye Hike: Kavin Mittal’s Messaging App Becomes Latest Casualty Of Real-Money Gaming Ban
Disclaimer: Comments reflect users’ views, not News18’s. Please keep discussions respectful and constructive. Abusive, defamatory, or illegal comments will be removed. News18 may disable any comment at its discretion. By posting, you agree to our Terms of Use and Privacy Policy.
President Trump has turned up the heat on NATO allies, saying he is ready to impose major sanctions on Russia, but only if all NATO members act together and stop buying Russian oil.
In a recent Truth Social post, Trump criticized NATO saying “NATO’S commitment to WIN has been far less than 100%, and the purchase of Russian Oil, by some, has been shocking”. He said it significantly weakens their negotiating power with Russia.
Trump Proposes Tariffs on China
Trump also proposed that NATO, as a group, should place 50–100% tariffs on China, to be lifted once the Russia-Ukraine war ends. He claims that this move would pressure China to break its grip on Russia and help bring the conflict to a close.
BREAKING: President Trump says all NATO nations are preparing to “do major sanctions on Russia” and impose 50% to 100% tariffs on China. pic.twitter.com/lhhiV7OIpk
He also said that this war would never have started under his presidency, calling it Biden and Zelenskyy’s conflict.
Trump Warns Patience with Putin is Running Out
In an interview with Fox News on Friday, Trump said that his patience with Russian President Vladimir Putin is running out fast.
“Has your patience run out with Putin?”@POTUS: “It’s sort of running out and running out fast — but it does take two to tango… When Putin wants to do it, Zelensky didn’t. When Zelensky wanted to do it, Putin didn’t… We’re going to have to come down very, very strong.” pic.twitter.com/IunhwDzjcm
And this isn’t the first time either. Trump previously threatened sanctions on Moscow and on countries buying its oil, including major buyers China and India, if the war in Ukraine isn’t resolved. He has slapped a 25% tariff on Indian goods for continuing to import Russian oil, but has not taken a similar action on China.
Russian Action Escalates Tensions
Tensions are spiking. Several Russian drones recently flew into Poland, escalating matters by entering the airspace of a NATO ally. The United States pledged Friday to defend “every inch of NATO territory” after the drones entered Polish airspace, during an attack on Ukraine.
Meanwhile, Peace talks between Russia and Ukraine are currently on “pause,” with President Zelensky warning that Putin still aims to capture all of Ukraine.
Crypto Market Hold Steady
Despite these geopolitical developments, crypto markets remain relatively muted to this development. Bitcoin has held above the $115,000 level, while altcoins are also trading in green – even leading to increased calls for the start of “Altcoin season”.
The global crypto market cap now stands at $4.19 trillion, up 1.9% in the last 24 hours.
Investor Ted notes that the U.S. markets are hitting new highs across the board with gold, stocks and even global money supply (M2) are all at record level, while the national debt continues to climb. Bitcoin is also just 7% away from its all-time high. Yet, the U.S inflation remains at 2.9%, far above the Fed target.
Trump has commanded immense power over the global markets in the past few months and this isn’t an exception. All eyes are on his next policies and the impact they will create.
Saul “Canelo” Álvarez and Terence Crawford step into the ring tonight in a pro boxing matchup that will see Álvarez defending his title as super middleweight champion.
As the crowd descends upon Las Vegas to watch the pair square up, the question lingers in the air of whether Crawford will beef up his weight — and by how much — to meet his opponent’s. While Álvarez is a seasoned super middleweight contender (and current undisputed champion), Crawford has never fought in this weight class and planned to pack on pounds to move up two levels for this fight. However, the Nebraska native is undefeated (41-0 with 31 knockouts) and has earned championship titles in four different weight classes as a lightweight, light middleweight, junior welterweight and welterweight.
Veteran boxer Mike Tyson said he’d like Crawford to win, but he doesn’t believe it’s likely with Álvarez being highly skilled and the weight disparity. But, “There’s been upsets before,” he said.
Like Tyson, viewers are planning to watch the bout to see who wins the title. Scroll down to find out what time to stream the live event on Netflix and who else is on the card.
What time is the Canelo vs. Crawford fight on Netflix?
Fight night kicks off on Saturday, Sept. 13, at 9 p.m. ET (6 p.m. PT),live from Allegiant Stadium in Las Vegas. Regardless of plan type, all Netflix subscribers can watch the event around the globe.
Headlining the main card is the Canelo Álvarez vs. Terence Crawford bout, with a combined purse prize of $200 million. Three other fights are on the main card:
Callum Walsh vs. Fernando Vargas Jr.
Christian Mbilli vs. Lester Martine
Mohammed Alakel vs. John Ornelas
Preliminary fights can also be streamed on Netflix’s Tudum site in Spanish and English beginning at 5:30 p.m. ET.
James Martin/CNET
Netflix offers three plans, ranging from $8 a month for its ad-free version to $18 or $25 per month if you want to stream without ads. You can also watch the docuseries, Countdown: Canelo vs. Crawford, on the service.
For the first time in history, more children are obese than underweight, a shift UNICEF says is putting millions of kids at risk of life-threatening disease.
The UN agency’s analysis, which covered data from more than 190 countries between 2000 and 2022 and projections since, found that one in 10 school-aged kids — about 188 million worldwide — is obese under World Health Organization (WHO) standards.
Meanwhile, one in five children under 19 years old globally – or 391 million – is overweight. Kids are considered overweight if they carry excess weight for their age, sex and height, while obesity is a more severe form that greatly increases the risk of serious health problems later in life.
CUTTING OUT ONE FOOD TYPE COULD NEARLY DOUBLE WEIGHT LOSS, NEW STUDY SUGGESTS
Between 2000 and 2022, global obesity rates among those aged five to 19 more than tripled, jumping from 3% to 9.4%. During the same period, the prevalence of underweight children fell from nearly 13% to 9.2%.
One in 10 children globally is living with obesity, putting them at risk of life-threatening diseases.(iStock)
“When we talk about malnutrition, we are no longer just talking about underweight children,” UNICEF executive director Catherine Russell said in a press release.
“Ultra-processed food is increasingly replacing fruits, vegetables and protein at a time when nutrition plays a critical role in children’s growth, cognitive development and mental health,” she warned.
MAJORITY OF AMERICANS GET MORE THAN HALF OF CALORIES FROM ULTRA-PROCESSED FOODS, CDC FINDS
While undernutrition is still a significant problem, obesity is now more common almost everywhere except South Asia and sub-Saharan Africa.
The report highlights obesity hotspots and found that levels have doubled since the 2000s, especially in low- and middle-income countries, even as they still struggle with undernutrition. In small Pacific Island nations like Niue and the Cook Islands, nearly 40% of young people are obese.
Children still face malnutrition in the form of being both underweight and overweight, according to UNICEF.(iStock)
Meanwhile, in wealthier countries, where ultra-processed foods make up more than half of adolescents’ calories, high levels of obesity persist. Twenty-seven percent of five-to-19-year-olds in Chile are living with obesity, while rates in the U.S. and the United Arab Emirates stand at 21%.
DIABETES STUDY REVEALS DIAGNOSIS GAP AFFECTING MILLIONS OF PEOPLE
In wealthier nations such as the U.S., doctors are increasingly backing the use of new weight-loss drugs in teenagers as a tool to combat the crisis.
“Obesity is not a failure of parents or children. It’s the result of toxic food environments,” author, professor and UNICEF backer Chris Van Tulleken told Reuters.
Obesity leads to a higher risk of developing insulin resistance and high blood pressure, as well as life-threatening diseases later in life, including Type 2 diabetes, cardiovascular disease and certain cancers, according to the report.
Obesity has now surpassed underweight as the most common form of malnutrition among young kids, UNICEF warns.(iStock)
In addition to ultra-processed foods, especially those high in salt, sugar and fat, experts blame the aggressive marketing of junk food.
MORE IN HEALTH NEWS
A survey of 64,000 young people conducted by the agency in 170 countries revealed that 75% had seen ads for sugary drinks, snacks or fast food in the prior week. Even in conflict zones, 68% reported being exposed to this kind of advertising. Sixty-five percent of respondents in low-income countries were exposed to them, too, including at school, on social media, at sporting events and in cartoons.
U.S. Health and Human Services Secretary Robert F. Kennedy, Jr. this week unveiled the “Make America Healthy Again” (MAHA) report on childhood health, which warns that ultra-processed foods, sedentary behavior and a host of environmental and dietary factors are fueling rising obesity and chronic disease in American children.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
It said the administration would explore the development of potential industry guidelines to limit direct advertising of unhealthy foods to children.
UNICEF is urging governments to take swift action on unhealthy food environments.(iStock)
UNICEF is urging governments worldwide to urgently impose restrictions on junk food marketing and ban unhealthy products in schools.
In Mexico, where childhood and adolescent obesity is common and sugary drinks and ultra-processed foods account for 40% of kids’ daily calories, the government recently banned the sale and distribution of ultra-processed foods and items high in salt, sugar and fat in public schools, UNICEF noted.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
The agency warned that without swift action, the trend threatens to fuel a surge in diabetes, heart disease and other serious health problems among the next generation.
Deirdre Bardolf is a lifestyle writer with Fox News Digital.
You don’t have permission to access “http://food.ndtv.com/news/lauki-tori-tinda-gluten-free-toast-soha-ali-khan-s-staple-diet-looks-like-this-9265150” on this server.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-09-13/Upcoming-China-U-S-talks-in-Spain-Tariffs-export-curbs-and-TikTok-1GDnwmJpf56/img/53f7b0c931374760bf2db1e5980fc123/53f7b0c931374760bf2db1e5980fc123.png' alt='Chinese Vice Premier He Lifeng (R), also a member of the Political Bureau of the Communist Party of China Central Committee, shakes hands with U.S. Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent prior to the first meeting of the China-U.S. economic and trade consultation mechanism in London, Britain, June 9, 2025. /Xinhua'
Chinese Vice Premier He Lifeng will travel to Spain for talks with U.S. officials on a range of economic and trade issues, including U.S. unilateral tariffs, abuse of export controls and TikTok, the Ministry of Commerce announced on Friday.
He, who is also a member of the Political Bureau of the Communist Party of China Central Committee, will lead a delegation to Spain from September 14 to 17.
Hours before the Chinese announcement, the U.S. Treasury Department said in a statement that Treasury Secretary Scott Bessent would meet with senior Chinese officials, including He, to discuss economic and trade issues in Madrid.
The meeting will be the fourth round of China-U.S. economic and trade talks in six months.
Tariffs
Negotiations on the U.S. imposition of unilateral tariffs on Chinese products have dominated the last three rounds of talks.
Following the first meeting between He and Bessent – the lead officials for economic and trade affairs for China and the U.S., respectively – in Geneva in May, Beijing and Washington issued a joint statement and agreed to establish a China-U.S. economic and trade consultation mechanism.
The Geneva talks were marked by substantial progress, leading to a significant reduction in bilateral tariffs. The U.S. removed 91 percent of its additional tariffs, and China reciprocated by lifting 91 percent of its retaliatory tariffs. Furthermore, the U.S. suspended 24 percent of its “reciprocal tariffs” for 90 days, with China doing the same for its corresponding countermeasures.
In the subsequent meeting in London in June, the first held under the China-U.S. economic and trade consultation mechanism, the two sides agreed in principle on the framework for implementing the consensus reached by the two heads of state during their phone talks on June 5 and consolidating the outcomes of the Geneva talks.
He and Bessent last met in Sweden in July. According to a joint statement on the meeting, issued on August 12, China and the U.S. agreed to extend the tariff truce for another 90 days, pushing the deadline to early November.
China has long criticized the U.S. for using tariffs as a form of trade protectionism, stressing that it is a self-damaging and unilateral approach that breaks multilateral trade rules and disrupts global supply chains.
Export controls
Compared with the past Chinese statements announcing scheduled talks between He and Bessent, it seems that export controls are being highlighted for the first time as a significant agenda item in a China-U.S. economic and trade meeting.
On Friday, the U.S. Commerce Department’s Bureau of Industry and Security (BIS) added 32 Chinese entities to the so-called Entity List, targeting sectors including semiconductors, biotech, aerospace, and commercial trade and logistics, and subjecting them to strict export controls.
In its response, the Chinese Ministry of Commerce on Saturday questioned the U.S. move’s intent since it comes just as talks are about to start in Spain and vowed to take necessary measures to protect Chinese businesses’ legitimate interests.
The latest sanctions came after the BIS in May released a guidance that, under the pretext of so-called presumed violations of U.S. export control rules, attempts to impose a global ban on advanced Chinese computing chips, including specific Huawei Ascend chips.
Over the past few years, the U.S. has repeatedly broadened its export controls on China’s semiconductor and AI sectors under the pretext of national security. These restrictions have expanded from specific integrated circuits to encompass nearly the entire supply chain, including manufacturing, outsourcing, and software.
By implementing discriminatory export controls on AI models and integrated circuits that provide underlying computing power support, the U.S. is, in essence, creating a tiered structure within the realm of AI, favoring certain entities while depriving the vast number of developing countries, including China, of the right to achieve technological advancement, according to a white paper titled “China’s Position on Some Issues Concerning China-U.S. Economic and Trade Relations,” released in April.
Citing findings of a U.S. think tank, the white paper said entities are added to the U.S. export control Entity List based on confidential, non-transparent information, with opaque and poorly defined criteria. Furthermore, the threshold for removal is so high that entities find it extremely difficult to get delisted, even through judicial means.
Read more:
China slams U.S. for adding Chinese entities to export control list
China launches anti-dumping probe on certain U.S. analog IC chips
Both the Chinese and U.S. statements on the upcoming talks in Madrid explicitly include TikTok on the agenda, treating it as a key topic for discussion alongside traditional economic and trade issues.
Citing unfounded national security concerns and alleged risks to data privacy, Washington has sought to ban TikTok, which is owned by Chinese internet company ByteDance but operated independently, for many years.
In April 2024, then U.S. President Joe Biden signed a law requiring ByteDance to sell TikTok within 270 days or face a ban from U.S. app stores by January 19, 2025. Following his return to office, Donald Trump began a series of extensions. He issued three separate executive orders, on January 20, April 4, and June 19, 2025, each delaying the ban’s enforcement.
The most recent extension pushed the new deadline to September 17, 2025, allowing TikTok to continue operating for its approximately 170 million users in the United States, nearly half the country’s population. American users have consistently voiced opposition to Washington’s actions against TikTok, arguing that a ban would threaten their livelihoods and free speech.
A spokesperson for the Chinese Ministry of Commerce said on Friday that Beijing is firmly committed to safeguarding the legitimate rights and interests of Chinese enterprises and will handle the TikTok issue in accordance with the relevant laws and regulations.
Beijing urges Washington to work with China, resolve concerns through dialogue based on mutual respect and equal consultation, and find solutions that ensure an open, fair, just and non-discriminatory business environment for Chinese companies, including TikTok, to continue operations in the U.S., the spokesperson said.
This will promote the stable, healthy and sustainable development of China-U.S. economic and trade relations, added the spokesperson.
Ms. Kirk has played a key role in her husband’s movement. Speaking at Turning Point USA headquarters and on social media, she pledged his work would continue.
Indian government’s decision to cut GST rates on various products will increase purchasing power of consumers and boost demand for residential properties in the upcoming festive season, according to realtors’ body CREDAI.
The association, which has a 13,000 members from across India, said the construction cost is expected to come down because of reduction in GST rates on cement and few other building materials.
The association, which is organising its annual event CREDAI-NATCON here, asserted that the benefit of GST rationalisation would be passed on to customers, provided cement companies and other manufacturers of building materials bring down their rates.
New GST rates are applicable from September 22. Addressing a press conference on late Thursday, CREDAI Chairman Boman Irani said, “GST rationalisation has generated feel good factor among people. There is a positive sentiment among consumers, which is a good sign ahead of festival season”.
CREDAI President Shekhar Patel said the reduction in GST rates, coupled with tax incentives in Budget 2025 and reduction in repo rates by the RBI, would give a huge filip to housing demand.
He said the housing sales in the first six months of 2025 rose in value terms but there was a decline in terms of number of units sold.
Patel, however, said the strong economic growth in the June quarter of this fiscal and other policy initiatives would enhance housing demand in the coming months.
The President reiterated the industry’s long pending demand that the price cap of ₹45 lakh in the definition of affordable housing should be raised in line with market realities.
The GST on affordable housing is only 1 per cent, while the properties above ₹45 lakh attracts 5 per cent GST.
Patel also pointed out that there is a total 35-45 per cent taxes on real estate sector from both Centre and state governments and said there is a need to reduce this burden.
“If the taxes are reduced, the selling price of properties will come down,” he said.
More than 1,000 members from different states in India is attending this conference.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
GLUMICA Dakota Johnson pojavila se na večeri Kering Caring For Women 2025 u izdanju u kojem je bilo nemoguće ne privući pozornost.
Nosila je crnu Gucci haljinu s čipkom posebno izrađenu za nju, Fleur Du Mal grudnjak i gaćice, crnu Gucci kožnu torbicu i sandale s visokom potpeticom, a od nakita je odabrala Jessica McCormack unikatne naušnice i ogrlicu. Kosa joj je bila podignuta u punđu, a plave oči naglašene sivim sjenilom i obilnim slojem maskare.
Pronašli smo slične haljine
Kako je haljina izrađena posebno za nju, nije dostupna za kupnju, no pronašli smo slične komade.
Naušnice su izrađene posebno za Dakotu, ali na stranici brenda postoji gotovo isti komad.
Što se tiče ostalih odjevnih predmeta i dodataka, uspjeli smo pronaći iste komade. Možete ih pogledat ispod.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
Well, it is starting to appear that we are on the way to another in a series of mediocre football seasons at my alma mater UCLA.
I am now officially in the “I don’t care about UCLA Football anymore” camp. I graduated from UCLA in 1975 and while every once in a while UCLA will have a somewhat successful season, the best they seem to be able to do is be invited to a second-tier bowl game. The College Football Playoff? Forget about it.
Coach DeShaun Foster is very clearly in way over his head. I predict he will be gone after this season.
Bruce Dunklin Thousand Oaks
It has to be painfully obvious that the DeShaun Foster experiment at head coach is a dismal failure. The loss to UNLV was not just embarrassing but shameful. It was once said that Foster was Karl Dorrell 2.0, but that is unfair. Dorrell had a 10-win season and beat USC. Coach “We’re Close” Foster is in way over his head. His team is undisciplined and unprepared. This clueless performance will lead to a completely empty Rose Bowl and eventual desertion of NIL sponsors. What is the athletic department going to do when we lose to New Mexico and go 0-12 for the year?
Thomas Auyong Diamond Bar
DeShaun Foster has to be the worst head coach in UCLA history. If a team is a reflection of their coach, then this is the worst UCLA team every. Does the team have a weight program? They are getting pushed around out there and it’s only going to get uglier. We are going to lose 100-0 to Ohio State.
Ed Villanueva Chino Hills
UCLA fell for the third consecutive game to open the season, with their drubbing at the hands of New Mexico. Maybe it’s time for AD Martin Jarmond to consider dropping the football program to a lower division, or just dropping football completely (the latter might help balance the athletic budget). Either way, coach DeShaun Foster and the Bruins are in for a long season.
Chris Sorce Fountain Valley
My 98-year-old father and I are 25-year UCLA football season-ticket holders. We love our Bruin football, but let’s face facts. When our AD, Martin Jarmond, hired coach DeShaun Foster, he looked at us with a straight face and told us that they had interviewed upward of 40 candidates for the head coaching position and that Foster was the best of the group. A man with no offensive, defensive or head-coaching experience.
It sadly is now painfully obvious that Jarmond and Foster should be replaced with more experienced and qualified candidates.
iPhone 17 Pro vs 16 Pro vs 15 Pro Price Specs: Apple on Tuesday unveiled its latest flagship iPhone 17 Pro and iPhone 17 Pro Max at the much-hyped “Awe Dropping” event, alongside the new iPhone 17 Air, AirPods Pro 3, and Apple Watch Ultra 3.
The new iPhones promise major upgrades in design, performance, cameras, and battery life. Here’s how the iPhone 17 Pro series stacks up against last year’s iPhone 16 Pro and the 2023 iPhone 15 Pro lineup–with a full breakdown of specs, features, and pricing in India.
Also Read: iPhone 17 Price: Apple launches iPhone 17 with next-gen chip and iOS 26 at 2025 event; here’s every detail you need to know
Add Zee Business as a Preferred Source
Display & Durability: Brighter and stronger
iPhone 17 Pro & Pro Max: Same sizes as last year (6.3-inch and 6.9-inch) but brighter, with 3,000 nits peak outdoor brightness and 2x better outdoor contrast.
iPhone 16 Pro & Pro Max: 2,000 nits brightness.
iPhone 15 Pro & Pro Max: Also capped at 2,000 nits.
The new Ceramic Shield 2 offers 3x better scratch resistance, and for the first time, Apple has added Ceramic Shield protection to the back as well.
Also Read: Actual Innovation vs Hype: After iPhone 17’s awe-dropping debut, Samsung mocks Apple with #iCant jab
Performance: A19 Pro chip with vapor chamber
Apple’s A19 Pro chip headlines the performance boost, paired with a new Apple-designed vapor chamber for better cooling. Apple claims up to 40 per cent better sustained performance, especially for gaming, video editing, and AI workloads.
iPhone 17 Pro: A19 Pro with Neural Accelerators.
iPhone 16 Pro: A18 Pro, no Neural Accelerators.
iPhone 15 Pro: A17 Pro, older thermal design.
All three generations retain a 6-core CPU, 6-core GPU, and 16-core Neural Engine.
Cameras: Big leaps with center stage selfies and fusion trio
The front camera gets the biggest shake-up:
iPhone 17 Pro: 18MP Center Stage front camera, captures in portrait or landscape without rotating the phone. AI auto-expands when more people enter the frame.
iPhone 16 Pro & 15 Pro: 12MP front camera, no Center Stage.
On the rear, Apple’s Fusion camera tech expands across all three lenses:
iPhone 17 Pro: Triple 48MP (Main, Ultra Wide, Telephoto). The new Telephoto offers 4x and 8x optical zoom, up from 5x on the 16 Pro, and supports up to 40x digital zoom.
For videographers, iPhone 17 Pro adds ProRes RAW, Log 2, Genlock support, and Dual Capture (recording from front and back simultaneously).
Also Read: Apple AirPods Pro 3 vs AirPods Pro 2: What’s new and should you upgrade?
Design & Colors: Aluminum plateau, no black
This year Apple shifts to a brushed aluminum 7000-series alloy for the Pro models, ditching titanium from the iPhone 16 Pro. The camera bump is replaced by a full-width rear “plateau”, giving space for a bigger battery.
iPhone 17: Colors available
iPhone 17 Pro: Cosmic Orange, Deep Blue, Silver.
iPhone 16 Pro: Titanium finishes, including Black.
iPhone 15 Pro: Black, Silver, Gold, and Blue.
Noticeably, Black and Gold are gone this year—a bold move by Apple.
Battery Life: Longest ever in an iPhone
Apple has taken battery performance up a notch:
iPhone 17 Pro: Up to 33 hours video playback (vs 27 hours on 16 Pro, 23 on 15 Pro).
iPhone 17 Pro Max: Up to 39 hours video playback (vs 33 on 16 Pro Max, 29 on 15 Pro Max).
Streaming times are also higher, with 30 hours on the 17 Pro and 35 hours on the Pro Max.
Storage: 256GB as the new standard
For the first time, Apple has doubled base storage across all models.
iPhone 17 Pro & Pro Max: Start at 256GB.
iPhone 16 Pro: 128GB base (Pro Max at 256GB).
iPhone 15 Pro: 128GB base (Pro Max at 256GB).
iPhone 17 Pro Pricing in India (as per Apple’s website)
iPhone 17 Pro: Rs 1,34,900 (256GB)
iPhone 17 Pro Max: Rs 1,49,900 (256GB)
Comparison
iPhone 16 Pro: Rs 1,19,900 (128GB)
iPhone 16 Pro Max: Rs 1,35,900 (256GB)
iPhone 15 Pro: Rs 1,34,900 (128GB)
iPhone 15 Pro Max: Rs 1,59,900 (256GB)
Interestingly, while the iPhone 17 Pro costs more than the 16 Pro, it matches the price of the older iPhone 15 Pro, despite offering double the base storage. The Pro Max, on the other hand, is cheaper than the iPhone 15 Pro Max at launch.
Apple’s iPhone 17 Pro series offers brighter displays, stronger durability, a massive camera leap, and record-breaking battery life. But the missing black color and higher entry price may divide opinion among Pro users.
Dreaming of a vacation in Italy but not sure where to begin – or how much you need to save? From flights and accommodation to food, sightseeing, and hidden expenses, planning a trip to Europe’s most sought-after destination can feel overwhelming.
Planning your next vacation in Italy? Here’s everything you need to know!(Unsplash)
Also Read | Packing 101: Everything you need to download before a vacay
To make things easier, a travel creator, who goes by the Instagram handle Taking Window Seat (hereby referred to as TWS), has shared his experience of traveling through Italy, complete with a detailed breakdown of expenses. In an Instagram video posted on August 12, he explained accommodation and travel charges, including how much money he spent on food, paid attractions, inter-city travel and much more. He also provided affordable, money-saving tips for those on a budget.
Total expenses
The travel blogger spent two weeks in Italy and according to his estimates, it is an expensive travel destination. He provided a complete cost breakdown of his trip, starting with round trip flights from India to Milan and back from Rome to India, which amounted to a total of ₹46,000. In addition to flight expenses, he also paid ₹13,500 for travel insurance and Schengen visa.
“We explored three cities in Italy: Milan, Florence, and Rome. And while staying in these cities, we also took some day trips, such as to Lake Como, Cinque Terre, and the entire Tuscan region,” said TWS, and added, “For inter-city travel, we paid a total of ₹2,000, and we booked all tickets 2 months in advance from the official websites because train prices here increase with time.”
Based on his experience, accommodation turned out to be the biggest expense. The blogger continued, “We stayed in Airbnbs in every city, with an average price of ₹6,500 per day, except Milan, which was for ₹8,000.” He also pointed out affordable alternatives for those on a tighter budget, recommending hostels that cost around ₹4,000 on average.
The travellers visited some paid attractions in the cities which amounted to a total of ₹15,000, as well as the Champions League semi-finals in San Siro for ₹15,000. Other miscellaneous expenses included, “ ₹3,000 for daily food and drinks, ₹1,000 for an e-SIM, and ₹800 for a travel pass in every city except Florence.”
The overall expenditure for the trip amounted to ₹1,68,100 per person.
Also Read | 30 kg luggage trolleys: Large capacity suitcase to accommodate heavy packing
Budget saving hacks
TWS didn’t just break down expenses – he also shared a few smart money-saving hacks for exploring Italy on a tighter budget.
Staying in a hostel is not only affordable but also provides a chance to socialise with fellow travelers or locals. Some hostels recommended by the travel blogger are:
Milan: Ostello Bello Grande, YellowSquare Milan
Florence: Plus Florence, Ostello Bello Firenze
Rome: The RomeHello, YellowSquare Rome
Cooking at your Airbnb saves quite a bit of money, and it is quite accessible because supermarkets are everywhere.
TWS recommends booking trains directly from Trenitalia or Italo in order to skip extra fees, and avoiding Omio or Trainline.
Buying wines from supermarkets is much cheaper than ordering at bars.
Florence is a walkable city, so spending money on local transport is not required.
In the cities that have metro or trams, using a travel pass is cost-effective.
Avoid taxis since they are very expensive in Italy.
Watch out for Service Charges at dine-in restaurants; takeaway for budget meals is preferable.
Milan and Amalfi are expensive, so TWS recommends planning your days ahead.
He suggests using Zero Markup Cards like Scapia to avoid TCS and conversion charges.
Avoid buying airport SIM cards, instead carry an eSIM like Matrix Cellular.
Visa should be applied six months in advance.
The best months for budget travel are March, April, and October.
Note to readers: This report is based on user-generated content from social media. HT.com has not independently verified the claims and does not endorse them.
This article is for informational purposes only and not a substitute for professional advice.
This article contains affiliate links, we will receive a commission on any sales we generate from it. Learn more
Downton Abbey: The Grand Finale official trailer
Downton Abbey: The Grand Finale is finally here, with the cast of the famous ITV period drama saying an emotional farewell after 15 years.
The final film of the Downton Abbey franchise, directed by Simon Curtis from a screenplay by Julian Fellowes, hit UK cinemas yesterday (September 12).
Fans have been left in tears as the show’s beloved characters waved a final goodbye, with one warning on Rotten Tomatoes: “Take tissues”.
Another wrote: “They wrapped up the whole saga so well. I was crying. Beautiful and triumphant.”
A third added: “Loved this movie. It wrapped up loose ends and answered questions. The ending did make me cry. I’m very sorry to see it over.”
Tom Branson and Lady Mary return for the final Downton Abbey movie (Image: Rory Mulvey/Focus Features)
Read more: Downton Abbey fans in tears over ‘perfect’ end to final film
Read more: Downton Abbey The Grand Finale ending explained as beloved period drama wraps
What is Downton Abbey: The Grand Finale about?
The synopsis for Downton Abbey: The Grand Finale reads: “The cinematic return of the global phenomenon follows the Crawley family and their staff as they enter the 1930s.
“When Mary finds herself at the center of a public scandal and the family faces financial trouble, the entire household grapples with the threat of social disgrace.
“The Crawleys must embrace change as the staff prepares for a new chapter with the next generation leading Downton Abbey into the future.”
How many Downton Abbey movies are there?
There are three Downton Abbey movies in total, with Downton Abbey: The Grand Finale confirmed as the third and final film in the franchise.
The first movie, entitled Downton Abbey, came out in 2019, while second film Downton Abbey: A New Era was released in 2022.
The cast of Downton Abbey are bidding a final farewell (Image: Rory Mulvey/Focus Features)
How long is Downton Abbey: The Grand Finale?
Downton Abbey: The Grand Finale is exactly 125 minutes long, meaning the run time is 2 hours and 5 minutes.
The original 2019 Downton Abbey film had a similar run time of 122 minutes, while sequel film Downton Abbey: A New Era was also exactly 125 minutes long.
The Crawley family return for one last movie (Image: Rory Mulvey/Focus Features)
How many seasons of Downton Abbey are there?
There are six seasons of Downton Abbey in total, with season 1 first airing on ITV in 2010 and the final season airing in 2015, finishing with a Christmas special.
The award-winning show’s incredible popularity meant that it became the most successful British costume drama since ITV’s 1981 TV adaptation of Evelyn Waugh’s Brideshead Revisited.
Downton Abbey is one of the most popular period dramas of all time (Image: Rory Mulvey/Focus Features)
Where can you watch Downton Abbey: The Grand Finale?
Downton Abbey: The Grand Finale is now available to watch in cinemas across the UK and is anticipated to stay in theatres for several weeks.
Where can you watch Downton Abbey?
The original 2010 series of Downton Abbey is available to stream in its entirety on ITVX.
The 2019 film Downton Abbey is also available to stream for free if you have a subscription to Disney Plus or Prime Video, while the 2022 sequel Downton Abbey: A New Era is free to stream on ITVX.
India’s office market is entering a defining decade, marked by both resilience and reinvention, according to CBRE India.
Flex space operators continue to hold a significant share of India’s office leasing, consistently accounting for over 15% of annual absorption.
Office space demand in India is set to get a major boost, with 85% of domestic firms planning to expand their portfolios over the next two years, according to real estate consultancy firm CBRE’s latest India Office Occupier Survey 2025. The intent marks a sharp rise from 73% in 2024, reflecting stronger business sentiment, digital adoption and a shift towards an office-first approach.
The report noted that companies have bounced back strongly since the pandemic years. Leasing by domestic firms during 2023-24 was nearly 86% higher compared to pre-Covid levels in 2018-19. “India’s office market is entering a defining decade, marked by both resilience and reinvention,” said Anshuman Magazine, Chairman & CEO of CBRE for India, South-East Asia, the Middle East & Africa.
Office-First Policies Gaining Ground
The survey found that 94% of firms now prefer employees to work from office at least three days a week. More than half the companies (52%) have already adopted a full return-to-office policy, compared with 36% last year.
Flexible Workspaces On The Rise
Flex space operators continue to hold a significant share of India’s office leasing, consistently accounting for over 15% of annual absorption. The trend is expected to accelerate, with more companies planning to allocate up to half of their office portfolios to flexible workspaces in the coming years. Smaller occupiers, in particular, are leading this shift, 58% of them intend to place more than 10% of their office footprint in flex spaces within two years, according to the CBRE report.
GCCs Fuelling Expansion
Global capability centres (GCCs) remain one of the strongest demand drivers, contributing 35-40% of total annual office absorption. The survey found that 65% of GCCs expect to expand in the next two years, especially in sectors such as banking and financial services, life sciences, and engineering. Average deal sizes by GCCs have also grown, rising to about 108,000 sq. ft. in the first half of 2025 from 91,000 sq. ft. in 2024, it added.
Ram Chandnani, Managing Director-Leasing, CBRE India, said, “GCCs alone account for about 35-40% of absorption, driven by their rapid evolution into high-value innovation hubs. Flexible workspaces are no longer a secondary option; they are becoming integral to occupier strategies.”
ESG and Smaller Cities Gaining Traction
Sustainability has emerged as a key focus, with nearly three-fourths of GCCs already setting ESG targets for their real estate portfolios. At the same time, more occupiers are eyeing tier-II and tier-III cities for growth, citing access to skilled talent, lower costs, and improving infrastructure, CBRE said.
CBRE expects these forces — office-first strategies, flex space adoption, GCC expansion, and sustainability — to shape India’s office market in the years ahead, reinforcing the country’s position as a global office hub.
Haris is Deputy News Editor (Business) at news18.com. He writes on various issues related to personal finance, markets, economy and companies. Having over a decade of experience in financial journalism, Haris h… Read More
First Published:
September 13, 2025, 15:41 IST
News business real-estate India’s Office Space Demand Set To Get A Boost As 85% Firms Eye Expansion In Two Years: Report
Disclaimer: Comments reflect users’ views, not News18’s. Please keep discussions respectful and constructive. Abusive, defamatory, or illegal comments will be removed. News18 may disable any comment at its discretion. By posting, you agree to our Terms of Use and Privacy Policy.
Examining App Store activity is one of the easiest ways to gauge crypto use. Over the past several months, the Coinbase and Phantom Wallet apps have consistently been among the most searched-for finance apps globally. The rising demand for mobile-based trading platforms has been powering this trend.
With booming interest in new wallets and exchanges, Digitap is rising to prominence as a promising altcoin. The $TAP presale has garnered significant attention, having already surpassed $80,000 in investment. Traders and investors are already starting to see Digitap as the best cryptocurrency to invest in 2025. And it is one of the largest app store competitors, which could rival companies like Coinbase and Phantom.
Reasons Why Coinbase and Phantom Wallet Are at the Top of App Store Searches
Coinbase has always been the go-to app for millions of inexperienced crypto users who are looking to invest in crypto because of its name recognition. Fiat ramps, simple design, and wide asset support are just some of the features that make Coinbase feel like a traditional banking app.
Meanwhile, Phantom Wallet has successfully attracted the Web3 community. It has been successful due to its clean interface and its specific targeting of the Solana ecosystem, which has contributed to its widespread use among NFT collectors and DeFi users.
Both these apps have shown that platforms that win prioritize a user-friendly experience. A user needs not only access to the assets but also wants fast transactions, privacy, and low fees. Digitap has leveraged and built upon these aspects to its advantage, creating a model that showcases the best of both Coinbase and Phantom.
Digitap as an Investment: Why $TAP Is Turning Heads
For those eager to know the best crypto to invest in right now, Digitap is gaining the spotlight as the world’s first omni-bank, blurring the distinction between fiat and crypto. And Digitap follows in Bitcoin’s footsteps with a fixed supply of two billion tokens.
Digitap burns 50 percent of the profits from the open market to permanently reduce the supply. This change results in the deflationary mechanism, where the app growth rate will be directly proportional to the token scarcity.
Digitap’s Features are More Than Just Another Wallet
The most attractive feature of Digitap is that it focuses on real-world utility. Fiat banking, crypto, and privacy-first infrastructure all within a single app. By using the app, users can instantly swap their crypto for fiat or vice versa. No third-party platforms are needed. It enables customers to access their money and get into digital currency trading easily.
Cashback promotions, VIP levels with airplane lounge access, and concierge services. $TAP stakers receive all these benefits and more, as well as a passive income flow. This set of features and functions positions Digitap not only as a possible winner of the App Store competition but also as one of the best crypto investments.
Conclusion: Could Digitap Be the Next App Store Star?
While Phantom Wallet and Coinbase are popular today on Apple store searches, Digitap is quickly catching up. With a live app, sustainable tokenomics, and comprehensive crypto services, it is a perfect candidate to become a future leader in mobile finance. With the presale open now and $TAP available for $0.0125, it appears to be one of the best crypto investment opportunities for 2025.
Yara India, Dr Bhimrao Ambedkar University ink pact for farmer awareness programmes.
Yara India, a subsidiary of Yara International, has signed a memorandum of understanding (MoU) with Dr Bhimrao Ambedkar University, Agra. The collaboration aims to launch a comprehensive farmer awareness programme focused on the balanced use of fertilisers, crop nutrition management, soil health and sustainable farming practices.
Through this initiative, Yara and the university seek to educate and empower the farming community via a series of dedicated radio broadcasts on the university’s community radio station.
The 12-month programme, commencing in September 2025 and running through August 2026, will feature 180 episodes, each 30 minutes in length, broadcast on University Community Radio (UCR) 90.4 Agra Ki Awaz.
The content will include scientific talks, interviews, panel discussions, success stories of progressive farmers and outreach segments, all designed to provide valuable information on balanced fertiliser use and good agricultural practices. All broadcasts will be delivered in Hindi.
Quoting Sanjiv Kanwar, Managing Director of Yara South Asia, a media statement said, “Beyond delivering quality products, we are investing in empowering farmers with critical knowledge through this awareness programme. This initiative will directly contribute to enhanced productivity, improved livelihoods, and the long-term well-being of the farming community.”
Ashu Rani, Vice-Chancellor of Dr Bhimrao Ambedkar University, said, “This collaboration will allow us to reach a wider audience of farmers and provide them with the knowledge they need to optimise their agricultural practices and improve their livelihoods.”
In addition to the radio broadcasts, the partnership will include a minimum of 10 outreach programmes, allowing for direct engagement with farmers.
Amid a nationwide rush by AI companies to build data centers to support their feverish growth, and by many locales to attract them, some cities are saying whoa, not so fast.
That’s the case in both St. Louis and St. Charles, Missouri, two cities just 30 minutes apart in the heart of the country.
On Aug. 22, St. Charles imposed, in a unanimous vote by the city council, a one-year moratorium on new data center construction after news broke about a secretive data center project possibly coming to the city, which stirred up protests from local residents.
In St. Louis, the head of that city’s planning agency this week proposed a similar moratorium “while the city develops a full understanding of the issue and develops quality land use, environmental, and other regulations,” according to a memo cited by St. Louis Public Radio. It’s a pause that the mayor supports.
There’s good reason for those cities to be concerned. Data centers, stuffed with thousands of computers to handle basically everything you do online, have a voracious need for electricity and water, and no small amount of land or building space. The arrival of generative AI has dramatically amped up demand for such facilities by companies including OpenAI, Google, Microsoft and Meta.
Two of the biggest concerns regarding data centers include the copious amount of water needed to cool the servers and the strain they cause on the electric grid.
I heard objections to AI data centers from residents of Pennsylvania and Louisiana this summer when I was researching the environmental and energy impacts of those facilities. A retired school principal who had organized community resistance told me: “I worry about the kind of world I’m leaving for my grandchildren. It’s not safer, it’s not better, and we’re selling out to these big corporations. You know, it’s not in their backyard, it’s in my backyard.”
Data center pushback in St. Charles
When St. Charles residents learned about data center plans for their city, hundreds showed up at a town hall meeting to let their opposition be heard. The center, known as Project Cumulus, would sit on about 440 acres.
“The effects of whatever that facility would bring, long term, short term, you name it, our house is going to feel it, whether it be the subsidized cost for building additional infrastructure, for bringing the water in, the electricity,” St. Charles resident Andrew Gardner told St. Louis Magazine at the time.
The residents’ opposition and action worked.
In an August email, shared by St. Louis Public Radio, the developers behind Project Cumulus told the City of St. Charles that they were withdrawing their application for a conditional use permit. They said they would incorporate community feedback and prepare a revised proposal.
Days later, the city enacted its one-year moratorium on new data center construction.
Google didn’t immediately respond to CNET’s request for comment.
A pause on data centers, not a ban
This is a server room at a data center belonging to Meta’s Facebook operations in Lulea, Sweden.
Jonathan Nackstrand/AFP via Getty Images
In St. Louis, Mayor Cara Spencer supports pausing new building permits for data centers while the city develops new regulations rather than banning data center construction entirely.
“While I have concerns about data centers’ effects on the environment, utility prices, vibrancy and urban living,” Spencer said in a statement to CNET, “I also recognize their importance to key industries in St. Louis, including biotech, the geospatial field, agtech and health care, and my office is working closely with the Board of Aldermen and key stakeholders to propose responsible regulations to allow for their appropriate development.”
Currently, Missouri has nearly 50 active data centers with the majority located in Kansas City and St. Louis.
Exercise is widely regarded as an essential component of health for older adults — particularly strength training.
Health agencies recommend that adults get at least 150 minutes per week of moderate-intensity aerobic exercise and at least two days of strength training exercises, which includes lifting weights or performing muscle-building activities.
Marfred Suazo, known online as Fonz the Trainer, was a lifelong athletic competitor before he became a fitness trainer in New York City nearly 10 years ago.
WHY SMALL FITNESS STEPS COULD LEAD TO A LONGER LIFE, ACCORDING TO DR. JEREMY LONDON
In training thousands of people of all ages, Suazo said he coaches older adults with an eye toward “decades of strength.”
“We have our fourth decade, which is crucial. As we turn 40, as we turn 50, 60, 70 and even 80, there are different requirements,” he told Fox News Digital in an on-camera interview. (See the video at the top of the article.)
Marfred Suazo, also known as Fonz the Trainer, is pictured working out. Suazo said he coaches older adults with an eye toward “decades of strength.”(Fonz the Trainer)
“We’re preventing ourselves from declining in our fitness journey and in our ability to do day-to-day things, like carrying groceries and walking up steps.”
Strength training should be the “main priority” for older adults, Suazo said, because skeletal muscle — which he calls the “organ of longevity” — begins to decline over time.
TIKTOK’S VIRAL ‘6-6-6’ WALKING ROUTINE BURNS FAT WITHOUT GRUELING WORKOUTS
“Skeletal muscle is like our body armor,” he said. “It prevents falls, it prevents hip breakage, it helps with all of these things.”
Preserving muscle is particularly important for aging women, Suazo noted, as it helps to prevent osteopenia and osteoporosis.
Suazo was a lifelong athletic competitor before he became a fitness trainer in New York City nearly 10 years ago.(Fonzthetrainer)
6 pillars of strength training
When strength training, Suazo recommends that older adults focus on the following six core pillars of movement for functional fitness.
“You want to have all those pillars in order, and you want to structure your training in that fashion so you can target all of these areas,” he said.
VIRAL 12-3-30 TREADMILL TREND MAY BURN MORE FAT THAN RUNNING, RESEARCHERS SAY
Push
This includes movements where the person pushes weight away from the body, typically working the chest, shoulder and triceps.
Some common examples include push-ups, bench presses, chest presses and dips.
Push movements are those where the person pushes weight away from the body, typically working the chest, shoulder and triceps. (iStock)
Pull
With this type of movement, the weight is pulled toward the body. These exercises target the back muscles and biceps.
Some examples include pull-ups, chin-ups, dumbbell rows, bent-over rows, lat pulldowns and inverted rows.
Pull exercises target the back muscles and biceps.(iStock)
Carry
This entails holding weight while walking, which helps to improve posture and stability, strengthens grip, and works the shoulders, upper back, core and hips.
“You want to be able to carry at least 70% of your body weight,” Suazo advised.
The carry movement entails holding weight while walking, which helps to improve posture and stability, strengthens grip, and works the shoulders, upper back, core and hips.(iStock)
Hinge
“Hinging at the hip is crucial,” Suazo said. “It allows you to bend over and extend the hips.”
These hip-dominant movements — including deadlifts, hip thrusts, kettlebell swings and good mornings — work the muscles along the back of the body, such as the glutes, hamstrings and posterior chain.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
Overhead press
Vertical press movements focus on strengthening the shoulders, triceps and core.
Some examples include the overhead press, shoulder press and push press.
Vertical press movements focus on strengthening the shoulders, triceps and core.(iStock)
Squat
The squat is an essential movement that targets the quads, glutes and core, according to Suazo.
There are several variations, including the front squat, goblet squat (holding a weight or kettle bell), back squat (holding a bar on the shoulders) and the split squat (stationary lunge).
The squat is an essential movement that targets the quads, glutes and core, according to Suazo.(iStock)
Getting started
For true beginners, Suazo said it’s best to “stick to the fundamentals,” like calisthenics, push-ups, pull-ups and squats.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
“If you can’t do pull ups, I’d do inverted rows — I think that’s primal,” he said. “If you can’t do those, resistance band training is a tremendous way to start.”
“And you can do it at home. You don’t have to be in a gym.”
For true beginners, Suazo (pictured) said it’s best to “stick to the fundamentals,” like calisthenics, push-ups, pull-ups and squats. (Fonzthetrainer)
The trainer emphasized the importance of starting slowly and progressively increasing the weight to challenge the body.
Strength training should also be combined with cardiovascular activity and mobility to create what Suazo calls the “tripod effect.”
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
“Those three things, when they come together, they’re able to hold you up a lot better,” he said. “So I think putting focus on all three is super beneficial, especially as we age.”
Those who are considering starting a new exercise program should consult with a doctor for guidance to prevent injury.
Melissa Rudy is senior health editor and a member of the lifestyle team at Fox News Digital. Story tips can be sent to [email protected].
You don’t have permission to access “http://food.ndtv.com/news/travel-vlogger-tries-indian-style-roasted-corn-on-the-cob-his-reaction-is-9269235” on this server.
Chinese President Xi Jinping on Friday signed presidential orders on the enforcement of multiple laws.
According to the presidential orders, a series of key laws, such as the law on public health emergency response, the national park law, a revised Arbitration Law, an atomic energy law, and a law on promoting public education on the rule of law, were adopted by Chinese lawmakers at a session of the Standing Committee of the National People’s Congress on Friday.
The law on public health emergency response put forward the establishment and improvement of a nationwide public health emergency reporting system.
The law specifies the establishment and improvement of an authoritative and efficient monitoring and early warning system featuring multiple sources and rapid response for public health emergencies.
It stipulates that medical and health institutions, as well as their staff performing duties, shall report the occurrence or potential occurrence of public health emergencies through the online direct reporting system within two hours.
The law, consisting of 65 articles in eight chapters, will take effect on November 1, 2025.
The revised Arbitration Law stipulates that arbitration proceedings can be conducted online with the consent of the parties involved.
It also encourages arbitration institutions to strengthen exchanges and cooperation with overseas arbitration bodies and relevant international organizations and to participate actively in the formulation of international arbitration rules.
To meet the evolving needs of arbitration practice and better build China into a preferred venue for international commercial arbitration, the revised law explicitly supports arbitration institutions in establishing branches outside China to conduct arbitration activities.
The revised law, comprising 96 articles in eight chapters, will take effect on March 1, 2026.
The new law dedicated to promoting the high-quality development of national parks will take effect on January 1, 2026.
The atomic energy law and the law on promoting public education on the rule of law will take effect on January 15, 2026, and November 1, 2025 respectively.
The two men had very different politics. But as a fellow star of a new political media class, the left-wing streamer had a personal reaction to Mr. Kirk’s assassination.
Indian Real Estate Investment Trusts (REITs) generate an average yield of 6-7.5 per cent for unitholders, better than many mature markets, including the US, according to a report by CREDAI and Anarock.
CREDAI, the apex body of Indian real estate developers, and property consultant Anarock released a report ‘Indian REITs – A Gateway to Institutional Real Estate’ at an event here.
At present, there are five listed REITs in India – Brookfield India Real Estate Trust, Embassy Office Parks REIT, Mindspace Business Parks REIT, Nexus Select Trust, and Knowledge Realty Trust.
Nexus Select Trust is backed by rent-yielding retail real estate (shopping malls), while the other four are office REITs.
“The average distribution yields of Indian REITs range between 6 per cent and 7.5 per cent, competitive with fixed-income instruments, but with the added potential for capital appreciation,” the joint report said.
Compared to other REIT markets globally, the report found that India still lags mature markets such as the US, Singapore, and Japan in the diversification of REIT asset classes.
However, the risk-adjusted yields in India remain attractive, the consultant said.
Shobhit Agarwal, CEO of Anarock Capital, said, “Indian REITs are late to the party, but now lead the dance. Despite its late entry compared to global peers, India has strong fundamentals.”
The distribution yields are well above many mature markets such as the US and Singapore, he added.
The average yield in the US is 2.5-3.5 per cent, Singapore 5-6 per cent and Japan 4.5-5.5 per cent.
Shekhar Patel, President of CREDAI, said, “Over 60 per cent of India’s REIT market value today rests with a very small set of players, with a strong base in Grade A offices linked to IT and BFSI. The future, however, holds far wider promise. As India’s cities grow, infrastructure strengthens, and the economy diversifies, REITs will expand into retail, logistics, housing, and new-age assets.
This transformation will unlock unprecedented opportunities for investors, he added.
REITs are investment vehicles that own or operate income-generating real estate, enabling investors to earn a share of the income produced without directly purchasing the properties.
CREDAI, which has more than 13,000 members, is to organise its annual event CREDAI-NATCON here. More than 1,000 delegates, including real estate developers and property consultants, are attending this three-day conference that started on September 11.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
NOTHING je potvrdio da će 18. rujna predstaviti Ear (3), svoj novi vodeći model bežičnih slušalica. Uoči službenog lansiranja, brend je nastavio promotivnu kampanju otkrivši dizajn nadolazećeg uređaja na novoj fotografiji.
Prepoznatljiv dizajn s novim detaljima
Ear (3) zadržava prepoznatljiv dizajnerski potpis tvrtke, s kućištem koje ima prozirni poklopac. Drške samih slušalica također imaju karakterističan prozirni izgled.
Gumb za uparivanje nalazi se unutar kućišta u donjem desnom kutu, no posebnu pažnju privlači gumb s oznakom “talk” na vanjskoj strani. Ovaj detalj potaknuo je nagađanja o mogućoj voki-toki funkciji, ali Nothing ništa još nije potvrdio.
Ispod objave je bilo puno komentara, a uz njih i puno pitanja: “Čemu služi ‘talk’ gumb?”, “Talk?”, “Što radi ‘talk?'”, “Hoće li imati prevođenje u stvarnom vremenu?”
Neki su pratitelji pokušali pogoditi cijenu uređaja, a vjeruju da će biti između 150 i 200 eura. No, još jednom, brend ništa nije potvrdio.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Cijena još uvijek nepoznata
Kućište ovih slušalica je izrađeno od 100% anodiziranog recikliranog aluminija. Brend je slušalice opipsao kao ultra-tanke zahvaljujući minimalnom razmaku između komponenti.
Direktor dizajna tvrtke Nothing, Adam Bates, izjavio je: “S Ear (3) smo razvili naš dizajnerski jezik fokusirajući se na osnove: inženjering i iskustvo, što je rezultiralo proizvodom koji izgleda i djeluje drugačije, te funkcionira na posve nove načine. Pristup materijalima i procesima, posebno korištenje anodiziranog aluminija za strukturu kućišta i antenu slušalica, omogućili su proizvod koji je nov, a opet nepogrešivo Nothing”.
Cijena slušalica u ovom trenutku nije poznata, no na službenoj se stranici možete registrirati kako biste primali obavijesti vezano uz lansiranje proizvoda.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
Demare Dezeurn intercepted three passes, returning the last 78 yards for the clinching touchdown as Palisades prevailed 49-34 to snap host Brentwood’s three-game winning streak Friday night in the annual “Sunset Showdown” between the Westside schools located six miles apart.
Dezeurn, one of the fastest sprinters in California, had a career-high four touchdown catches in the Dolphins’ season opener and this time established a career-best for takeaways in a game. He picked off a pass in the first quarter and another in the second that he returned 45 yards for a touchdown but it was called back on a penalty. The last came after a tipped ball with the Eagles (2-2) on the move with 43 seconds left.
“It was a tipped ball, I broke outside and took it all the way,” said the junior transfer from Bishop Alemany, who committed to Oklahoma on Tuesday. “After the first two, I knew I had to get one more.”
In last year’s game, Brentwood quarterback Ben Mikail scrambled nine yards for the winning touchdown in double overtime. This time he tried to run for a tying two-point conversion but was tackled short of the goal line by free safety Tavian Talbert with 2:51 left.
“I saw that it was a broken play and the dude I was supposed to guard wasn’t running a route so I spied on the quarterback and slammed him to the ground,” said Talbert, who recovered the ensuing onside kick. “It feels good to beat them on their home field because last year they beat us on ours.”
Jack Thomas passed for 797 yards and 11 touchdowns in Palisades’ first two games and tossed three more Friday — two to King Demethris and one to Malachi Ross — while Harrison Carter ran for a touchdown and returned a kickoff 85 yards for another score for the Dolphins (3-0), ranked third in the City Section by The Times.
Mikail threw touchdown passes to Dean Pretlow and Kaymon Jackson, Robert Sullivan and Enzo Longhi each ran for a score, and Kruz Jackson scored on a punt return for Brentwood, which leads 4-3 in a rivalry that began in 2018.
Palisades, which reached the City Division I final last season but is vying for the Open Division this fall, led 21-7 at halftime.
Apple Watch Ultra, SE 3 and Series 11 Price: Apple has officially unveiled the Apple Watch Series 11, along with the new Apple Watch SE 3 and Watch Ultra 3, at its 2025 ‘awe-dropping’ launch event. The Series 11 may look familiar on the outside but it introduces some of the most important upgrades Apple’s smartwatch lineup has ever seen.
For the first time, the Apple Watch comes with 5G connectivity, marking a major jump from the 4G LTE support of earlier models and promises faster, more stable connections whether you are streaming music on a run or making calls without your iPhone nearby.
Smarter health monitoring
Apple is also doubling down on health features. The Series 11 can now track hypertension and chronic high blood pressure by analysing data collected over the past 30 days, something no previous Apple Watch could do. It also introduces a new Sleep Score which breaks down how long you slept, your sleep stages, and overall rest quality to help users better understand their nightly health.
Add Zee Business as a Preferred Source
Also Read: iPhone 17 Price: Apple launches iPhone 17 with next-gen chip, iOS 26 at 2025 event
Durability and design updates
Apple has equipped the Series 11 with IonX glass that it claims is twice as scratch-resistant as before, along with a ceramic coating for added strength. The smartwatch will be available in Jet Black, Silver, Rose Gold, Space Gray, and new titanium finishes in Natural Gold and Slate, all made with 100 per cent recycled materials.
watchOS 26 brings smart gestures and Apple intelligence
Launching alongside the Series 11 is watchOS 26, which introduces wrist flick gestures to dismiss calls and notifications, an enhanced Smart Stack, and the Workout Buddy feature powered by Apple Intelligence. Apple’s new Liquid Glass design language also debuts, offering a fresh aesthetic across the interface.
Also Read: Apple to release iOS 26 on September 15 with Liquid Glass design and new features
Apple Watch Series 11, SE 3 and Ultra 3: Battery, features and India pricing
The new Apple Watch Series 11 delivers up to 24 hours of battery life on a single charge, depending on usage. In India, prices start at Rs 46,900 for the 42mm model. Preorders are live, with deliveries beginning September 19.
Apple Watch SE 3: Affordable with 5G
Apple also launched the Watch SE 3, an affordable upgrade powered by the S10 chip. It now includes wrist temperature sensing, ovulation tracking, sleep apnea alerts and 5G connectivity.
Also Read: Apple launches AirPods Pro 3 with heart rate sensor, live translation and stronger noise cancellation
The SE 3 features fast charging, an Always-On display and the same gesture controls as the Series 11, starting at Rs 25,900 for the 40mm model.
Apple Watch Ultra 3: Adventure ready
At the high end, the Watch Ultra 3 is built for explorers and athletes. It introduces satellite communication for emergency messaging off the grid, the largest Apple Watch display, precision GPS and up to 42 hours battery life (72 hours in Low Power Mode). In India, it is priced at Rs 89,900 for the 49mm variant.
Murder mysteries, crime novels and thrillers account for a large proportion of the book industry and are widely recognised as the most popular genre. In this type of story, you can expect a dramatic murder or disappearance to take place, followed by a series of breadcrumbs that lead to revealing the killer. So, if you love trying to work out a whodunnit, look no further. Stylist has compiled a list of the best murder mysteries to keep you guessing. Here, I have highlighted five of the best, and one is Agatha Christie’s And Then There Were None.
The Guest List by Lucy Foley (2020)
The blurb reads: “A wedding celebration turns dark and deadly in this deliciously wicked and atmospheric thriller reminiscent of Agatha Christie from the New York Times bestselling author of The Hunting Party.
“The bride – The plus one – The best man – The wedding planner – The bridesmaid – The body.
“On an island off the coast of Ireland, guests gather to celebrate two people joining their lives together as one. The groom: handsome and charming, a rising television star. The bride: smart and ambitious, a magazine publisher. It’s a wedding for a magazine, or for a celebrity: the designer dress, the remote location, the luxe party favors, the boutique whiskey. The cell phone service may be spotty and the waves may be rough, but every detail has been expertly planned and will be expertly executed.
“But perfection is for plans, and people are all too human. As the champagne is popped and the festivities begin, resentments and petty jealousies begin to mingle with the reminiscences and well wishes. The groomsmen begin the drinking game from their school days. The bridesmaid not-so-accidentally ruins her dress. The bride’s oldest (male) friend gives an uncomfortably caring toast.
“And then someone turns up dead. Who didn’t wish the happy couple well? And perhaps more important, why?”
An Unwanted Guest by Shari Lapena (2018)
The book’s synopsis reads: “A weekend retreat at a cozy mountain lodge is supposed to be the perfect getaway . . . but when the storm hits, no one is getting away
“It’s winter in the Catskills and Mitchell’s Inn, nestled deep in the woods, is the perfect setting for a relaxing–maybe even romantic–weekend away. It boasts spacious old rooms with huge woodburning fireplaces, a well-stocked wine cellar, and opportunities for cross-country skiing, snowshoeing, or just curling up with a good murder mystery.
“So when the weather takes a turn for the worse, and a blizzard cuts off the electricity–and all contact with the outside world–the guests settle in and try to make the best of it.
“Soon, though, one of the guests turns up dead–it looks like an accident. But when a second guest dies, they start to panic.
“Within the snowed-in paradise, something–or someone–is picking off the guests one by one. And there’s nothing they can do but hunker down and hope they can survive the storm–and one another.”
And Then There Were None by Agatha Christie (1939)
The synopsis states: “If you’re one of the few who haven’t experienced the genius of Agatha Christie, this novel is a stellar starting point.” — DAVID BALDACCI, #1 New York Times Bestselling Author.””An exclusive authorized edition of the most famous and beloved stories from the Queen of Mystery. Ten people, each with something to hide and something to fear, are invited to an isolated mansion on Indian Island by a host who, surprisingly, fails to appear. On the island they are cut off from everything but each other and the inescapable shadows of their own past lives. One by one, the guests share the darkest secrets of their wicked pasts. And one by one, they die… Which among them is the killer and will any of them survive? “Agatha Christie is the gateway drug to crime fiction both for readers and for writers. . . . Just one book is never enough.” — VAL MCDERMID, Internationally Bestselling Author.”
Party of Liars by Kelsey Cox (2025)
The blurb reads: “A lavish, Texas-sized Sweet Sixteen turns deadly in this twisty, pulse-pounding new novel — serving up a fresh take on a classic locked-room whodunnit. Let the festivities begin…
“Today is Sophie Matthews’s sixteenth birthday party, an exclusive black-tie bash in the heart of the Texas Hill Country, where secrets are as deep-rooted as the sprawling live oaks. Sophie’s dad has spared no expense, and his renovated cliffside mansion—once thought haunted—is now hosting the event of the season. Then, just before the candles on the three-tiered red velvet cake are blown out, a body falls from the balcony onto the starlit dance floor below.
“It’s a killer guest list . . .
“DANI: Sophie’s new stepmother who’s been plagued by self-doubt ever since the birth of her own baby girl
“ÓRLAITH: the superstitious Irish nanny who senses a looming danger in this cavernous house
“MIKAYLA: the birthday girl’s best friend who is not nearly as meek as the popular kids assume
“KIM: the cunning ex-wife who has a grudge she can’t let go of . . .
“Everyone is invited in. Not everyone will get out alive.”
They All Fall Down by Rachel Howzell Hall (2019)
The book’s synopsis reads: “It was supposed to be the trip of a lifetime.
“Delighted by a surprise invitation, Miriam Macy sails off to a luxurious private island off the coast of Mexico, with six strangers—an ex-cop, a chef, a financial advisor, a nurse, a lawyer, a young widow.
“Surrounded by miles of open water in the gloriously green Sea of Cortez, Miriam is shocked to discover that she and the rest of her companions have been brought to the remote island under false pretenses—and all seven strangers harbor a secret.
“Danger lurks in the lush forest and in the halls and bedrooms of the lonely mansion. Sporadic cell-phone coverage and miles of ocean keeps the group trapped in paradise. And strange accidents keep them suspicious of each other, as one by one . . .
LDV is tapping into Australia’s love of the outdoors by offering a factory-built campervan based on the Deliver 9 commercial van.
Priced from $89,990 drive-away, the 2026 LDV Deliver 9 campervan is the lowest-priced fully-fitted campervan offered by an automaker – and one of the best-value turn-key campervans now available anywhere in the market.
Under the bonnet is a 2.0-litre four-cylinder turbo-diesel engine that sends 108kW of power and 375Nm of torque to the rear wheels through a six-speed automatic transmission, and is fed by an 80-litre fuel tank.
The Deliver 9 campervan features four leather-trimmed seats (with seatbelts), a double bed, a 240-volt air-conditioner unit mounted to the roof (in addition to the vehicle’s climate control), and an electric side step which extends when the sliding door is opened.
CarExpert can save you thousands on a new car. Click here to get a great deal.
The vehicle comes with a toilet incorporating a 16-litre removable cartridge, plus a microwave, induction cooktop, sink, 96-litre fridge with 20-litre freezer, and two showers – one inside and one which can be set up outside.
LDV says the campervan also comes standard with a large retractable awning to provide quick protection from the sun and rain.
When the vehicle is parked, the front seats can swivel to face the rear to create a lounge area, while the Deliver 9 camper also features a stowable dining table, window shades, and a fly screen for the sliding door.
There’s a 100-litre fresh water tank and a separate 100-litre grey water tank, plus a 2.56kWh lithium-ion battery pack fed by a 190-Watt solar panel, a 2000W inverter, and USB-A, USB-C, and 240-volt power outlets in the cabin.
“Campervans have grown in popularity over the past decade as an increasing number of Australians choose to explore the great outdoors on their own terms, their own timetable – and in their own vehicle,” LDV Australia general manager Dinesh Chinnappa said.
“This factory-built campervan is decked out with everything you need for a getaway – ready to go, straight off the showroom floor.”
While LDV offers a three-year/160,000km warranty for the vehicle itself, buyers are also provided with a two-year/unlimited-km warranty on the campervan bodywork, furniture, and cabinetry – while a one-year/unlimited-km warranty covers electrical appliances.
The 2026 LDV Deliver 9 campervan is available to order from selected LDV dealers now, ahead of first customer deliveries from October 2025.
MORE: Explore the LDV showroom
MORE: Which Chinese car brands offer the best warranty?
In today’s fast-changing economy, more individuals are turning toward entrepreneurship rather than traditional jobs. If you’re one of them and looking for a low-risk, high-demand business opportunity, partnering with Mother Dairy could be a game-changer. (File Photo)
Mother Dairy, a leading name in India’s dairy and agro-industry, is offering franchise opportunities through its Fruit and Vegetable Private Limited division. With dairy products being a daily essential in every household — from morning tea to children’s nutrition — the demand never dips. That’s what makes this business model so reliable and recession-proof. (File Photo)
Mother Dairy is a diversified brand offering a wide range of products including fruits, vegetables, edible oils, pickles, juices, jams, and now even bakery items. With over 2,500 retail outlets across India and plans for further expansion, the brand offers a strong foundation for new entrepreneurs. (File Photo)
Starting a Mother Dairy franchise requires an investment of Rs 5-10 lakh, depending on your location and store size. This includes a brand fee of ₹50,000, which is a one-time payment. (File Photo)
The best news? No royalty charges apply, making the model more profitable for franchisees. The investment covers store setup, interiors, and equipment. The exact cost may vary based on the area and local market conditions. (File Photo)
One of the biggest advantages of this franchise is that income begins from day one. With consistent demand for dairy and food products, franchise owners can expect a monthly profit of around Rs 44,000. The company estimates a 30% return on investment in the first year, with full recovery of the initial investment within two years. (File Photo)
Interested individuals can apply for a franchise directly through Mother Dairy’s official website or via Franchise India. These platforms provide detailed information on space requirements, investment breakdown, and application procedures. The franchise fee typically starts at ₹50,000 and varies depending on the format and location. (File Photo)
To apply, you’ll need the following: ID Proof: Aadhaar, PAN card, or Voter ID | Address Proof: Ration card or electricity bill | Other Documents: Bank account details, passport-size photo, email ID, phone number, property documents, and a No Objection Certificate (NOC). (File Photo)
XRP is set to welcome its first-ever spot exchange-traded fund (ETF) in the United States. The product, managed by Rex Shares and Osprey Funds, is called the Rex-Osprey Spot XRP ETF. According to experts, trading will officially begin on September 18, 2025, after a short delay from the original September 12 launch date.
The U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) gave the green light after finishing its 75-day review with no objections. The fund operates under the Investment Company Act of 1940, the same law that governs most traditional ETFs and mutual funds.
Unlike futures-based products, this ETF will hold XRP directly, giving investors simple, regulated access through their brokerage accounts. That means no crypto wallets, no exchanges, and fewer technical hurdles for everyday buyers and large institutions alike.
Cayman Subsidiary Structure
To stay in line with U.S. tax and regulatory rules, the ETF gains exposure through a wholly-owned Cayman Islands subsidiary called the REX-Osprey XRP (Cayman) Portfolio S.P.. By law, no more than 25% of total assets can be invested in this subsidiary. This structure is commonly used by other crypto-related funds.
Part of a Larger ETF Lineup
The XRP ETF is one of several crypto products rolling out from Rex-Osprey. Other funds linked to Bitcoin ($BTC), Dogecoin ($DOGE), Bonk ($BONK), and Trump Token ($TRUMP) are also scheduled to start trading next week.
Why It Matters for XRP
For XRP holders and the wider market, this is the kind of breakthrough that’s been years in the making. The ETF gives institutions a straightforward way to buy into XRP, and it offers retail investors a regulated product without the friction of crypto exchanges. Analysts say this could bring steady inflows, more liquidity, and stronger market stability.
The arrival of a spot XRP ETF is a turning point. Whether it drives the price higher or simply expands the asset’s reach, the launch ensures XRP now has a place in the same investment toolkit that already includes spot Bitcoin ETFs. The official launch now lands on September 18, 2025, opening the door for both retail and institutional investors. For XRP backers, it’s the kind of catalyst they’ve been waiting on for years.
SRM College of Agricultural Sciences, a unit of the SRM Institute of Science and Technology, plans to introduce seven Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D) courses from the next academic year, said college dean M Jawaharlal.
This academic year, the college has launched Ph.D courses in agronomy, genetics and plant breeding, and fruit science. Next academic year, it will launch the doctoral courses in soil science, plant pathology, entomology, agricultural economics, agricultural extension education, vegetable science, and floriculture and landscaping.
“The Indian Council of Agricultural Research has given accreditation to our college. We provide hands-on training to the students. We also have tie-ups with universities abroad. All these help our students,” said the college dean.
SRM College of Agricultural Sciences Dean M Jawaharlal
Offering honours course
Set up in 2018, the college introduced post-graduate courses in these 10 courses a couple of years ago. The Ph.D is timed in a way that once the students finish their post-graduation, they can look at the option of taking the Ph.D courses, said Jawaharlal.
The college, which is operating on a 400-acre campus at Baburayanpettai in Chengalpattu district – about 115 km from Chennai – since March 2021, offers graduate honours courses in agriculture and horticulture.
The college offers on-farm training to its students enrolled in graduate and postgraduate courses. In the graduate course, the students spend their last semester learning to manage farms or become entrepreneurs.
“We educate the students through hands-on training on field preparation, micro irrigation system, organic farming, integrated farming systems, dryland agriculture, smart farming and agro-meteorological observatory for experiential learning with a multi-disciplinary approach for a well-rounded education in the field of agriculture,” said Jawaharlal.
Research opportunities
Post-graduate students are offered opportunities to do research in specialised fields. The college has units to conduct practical classes and well-equipped laboratories to expose students on various aspects of agriculture.
For example, in agroforestry, students get training in identifying important tree species along with their seeds and seedlings, demonstrating the production of saplings and silviculture and agri-silviculture techniques.
Two batches of students travelled to Kenya to learn about tulips and cut flowers. The College of Agriculture Sciences has a collaboration with the agricultural college of Kansas State University and UK’s Cranfield University for students’ exchange.
The university has over 800 students enrolled from Tamil Nadu, Kerala, Andhra Pradesh and Nepal. The other feature of the college’s graduate courses is that students have to undertake travel in their last semester and learn about crops in other parts of the country, said the dean.
The College of Agricultural Sciences has now begun to train people in urban farming at its headquarters in Kattankulathur, about 50 km from Chennai. “There has been a good response to this. We are even looking to enlighten children on farming,” said Jawaharlal.
(The writer was at the campus on the invitation of the SRM College of Agricultural Sciences)
Uber is being sued for the second time in four years by the Department of Justice over complaints about its ridesharing service’s treatment of customers with disabilities.
According to the suit, a copy of which was posted online by the website TechCrunch, the company is alleged to “routinely refuse to serve individuals with disabilities, including individuals who travel with service animals or who use stowable wheelchairs.”
The lawsuit also accuses Uber of imposing cleaning surcharges related to service animals and charging cancellation fees to disabled riders who’ve been denied service.
“And Uber’s drivers insult and demean people with disabilities or ask them inappropriate questions,” the suit states.
Don’t miss any of our unbiased tech content and lab-based reviews. Add CNET as a preferred Google source.
In a statement provided to CNET, Uber said: “Riders who use guide dogs or other assistive devices deserve a safe, respectful, and welcoming experience on Uber — full stop. We have a clear zero-tolerance policy for confirmed service denials, and we fundamentally disagree with the DOJ’s allegations.”
The company pointed to the US Service Animal policy, which all drivers are required to agree to, and says it takes “decisive action, including permanent account deactivation” when that policy is violated.
“We continue to invest in technology, training, and dedicated reporting channels — such as a 24/7 service animal denial hotline — to ensure riders can quickly alert us so we can investigate and address issues,” the statement said. “We remain deeply committed to expanding access and continuously improving the experience for riders with disabilities.”
The company also pointed to a page it provides where passengers can file a complaint.
In 2021, Uber was sued by the DOJ for charging wait-time fees to disabled customers who needed more time to get to their rides. That suit was settled in 2022.
While a company like Uber may have plenty of money to settle a case like this, the DOJ’s aim may be to create awareness of violations of the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
“On-the-ground enforcement of the ADA by DOJ and private parties is critically important both with regards to the specific cases at issue but also more broadly as a message that disability discrimination is prohibited by federal law and will not be tolerated,” said Shira Wakschlag, general counsel at The Arc of the United States, a nonprofit that advocates for people with intellectual and developmental disabilities.
“Enforcing the ADA in cases like these is critical to ensuring that the law’s promise of creating a more accessible and inclusive world for people with disabilities is realized,” she said.
In addition to the web pages and app options Uber offers to report instances of bad customer service or discrimination, Wakschlag said customers can also report discrimination directly to the DOJ via its website or work with organizations such as The Arc that can field complaints.
“The media can also play an important role in bringing these stories out of the courtroom in a way that the general public understands what is at issue and how it impacts people in the real world,” she says.
Separately, Uber is also facing a suit from the Federal Trade Commission from earlier this year, when the agency accused the company of deceptive pricing practices related to its Uber One subscription service.
Levels of iron in the brain could be a warning sign of future Alzheimer’s disease, a new study suggests.
High levels of the chemical element have been shown to increase brain toxins and trigger neurodegeneration, resulting in cognitive decline — especially when they interact with the abnormal amyloid and tau proteins that are the hallmark pathologies of Alzheimer’s disease.
Researchers at Johns Hopkins University found that a special MRI technique called quantitative susceptibility mapping (QSM) can measure levels of brain iron.
EARLY ALZHEIMER’S SIGNS DETECTED IN 3 MINUTES WITH NEW BRAINWAVE TEST
“QSM is an advanced MRI technique developed over the last decade to measure tissue magnetic susceptibility with good precision,” the study’s senior author, Xu Li, associate professor of radiology at Johns Hopkins University in Baltimore, said in a press release.
“QSM can detect small differences in iron levels across different brain regions, providing a reliable and non-invasive way to map and quantify iron in patients, which is not possible with conventional MR approaches.”
Levels of iron in the brain could be a warning sign of future Alzheimer’s disease, a new study suggests.(iStock)
Compared to traditional imaging options for Alzheimer’s diagnosis, including PET scans, QSM MRI is “non-invasive and much more affordable,” according to the researchers.
This measurement could help predict the likelihood of mild cognitive impairment (MCI) and cognitive decline, even if the person has shown no symptoms.
DEMENTIA RISK SLASHED WITH ONE COMMON HEALTH INTERVENTION, STUDY FINDS
In the study, which was published in the journal Radiology, the researchers tested the MRI technique on 158 cognitively unimpaired participants from a previous research project.
After a follow-up period of 7½ years, the team concluded that higher iron levels in two key parts of the brain were linked to a higher risk of mild cognitive impairment, which is typically a precursor to the development of Alzheimer’s dementia.
“Brain iron changes may be measured years before memory loss, when the participants are still cognitively normal.”
“The key takeaway of our study is that higher brain iron levels, especially in some critical brain regions related to memory and learning (entorhinal cortex and putamen, as shown in our study), are linked to a two to four times higher risk of developing MCI and faster cognitive decline,” Li told Fox News Digital.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
“And such brain iron changes may be measured years before memory loss, when the participants are still cognitively normal.
“Using QSM, we found higher brain iron in some memory-related regions that are linked to a higher risk of developing cognitive impairment and faster cognitive decline,” Li said. “This risk is even higher when the participants have higher levels of amyloid pathologies.”
High levels of the chemical element have been shown to increase brain toxins and trigger neurodegeneration.(iStock)
The study did have some limitations, Li noted, including the smaller group of participants.
“The study population is from a specialized cohort consisting of mainly White, highly educated participants with a strong family history of Alzheimer’s disease,” the researcher noted.
If larger, more diverse studies confirm these findings, it could support the use of this MRI technique for patients at a higher risk of dementia, the release stated.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
“I think we should be hopeful,” Li said. “We can use this kind of tool to help identify patients at higher risk of developing Alzheimer’s disease and potentially guide early interventions as new treatments become available. Also, besides serving as a biomarker, brain iron may become a future therapeutic target.”
The researchers also hope to make the QSM technology more standardized, faster and more widely accessible in clinical practice, he added.
While brain iron is associated with neurodegeneration and could lead to faster cognitive decline, it is also an important element for cognitive health, the researcher said.(iStock)
Li noted that while brain iron is associated with neurodegeneration and could lead to faster cognitive decline, it is also an important element for cognitive health and neurodevelopment at a young age.
“While iron chelation therapies (to remove iron) for Alzheimer’s are currently explored, their effect is still not very clear and much more research is needed,” he said.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
The study was supported by the National Institute of Biomedical Imaging and Bioengineering, National Institute on Aging and the National Institutes of Health.
Melissa Rudy is senior health editor and a member of the lifestyle team at Fox News Digital. Story tips can be sent to [email protected].
Here are our 17 best Italian recipes that include Italian veg dishes, Italian pasta recipes, Italian pizza recipes, Italian salad, Italian desserts and Italian bread recipes. Go on and try, you know you can’t resist!
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-09-12/Poland-rejects-Trump-s-claim-on-alleged-Russian-drone-incursions-1GBZReJB46k/img/f4c766ac01914e0eb15635648d782ac0/f4c766ac01914e0eb15635648d782ac0.png' alt='U.S. President Donald Trump boards Air Force One in Maryland, U.S., September 11, 2025. /VCG'
Poland rejected on Friday a suggestion made by U.S. President Donald Trump that the alleged Russian drone incursions into its airspace could have been a mistake, a rare contradiction of the U.S. president from one of Washington’s closest European allies.
Polish Prime Minister Donald Tusk responded on X: “We would also wish that the drone attack on Poland was a mistake. But it wasn’t. And we know it.”
Trump on Thursday said that the alleged incursion into Poland’s airspace “could have been a mistake,” while expressing frustration with the incident.
His remarks so far stand in contrast to the strong statements from European leaders, some of whom accused Russia of carrying out a deliberate drone incursion to test the readiness of the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO).
Russia has rejected the accusation made by Poland, the EU, and NATO that it launched the drones. The Russian Defense Ministry said that none of its strike targets were in Poland, while Kremlin spokesman Dmitry Peskov said the EU and NATO “accuse Russia of provocations on a daily basis” without evidence.
The Polish military shot down drones over Poland after its airspace was repeatedly violated overnight from Tuesday to Wednesday, according to a statement from the Polish Armed Forces Operational Command.
Tusk had invoked Article 4 of the North Atlantic Treaty, seeking consultations with NATO allies over a threat to national security.
NATO Secretary General Mark Rutte said on Wednesday that NATO will continue to closely monitor the situation in the east, with its air defense systems kept on standby.
Despite REIT guidelines being introduced in 2014 and the first listing only in 2019, Indian REIT market accounts for just 20% of institutional real estate, far below the USA (96%) or even Asian peers like Singapore (55%) and Japan (51%).
Indian REITs deliver about 6-7 per cent yields, surpassing global benchmarks, according to a joint report by ANAROCK-CREDAI. Since the 1st REIT listing in 2019, the sector has reached a market capitalisation of approximately $18 billion as of August 2025.
With three more REITs expected over the next four years, India is projected to cross $25 billion in market capitalisation, the joint report has asserted.
The report ‘Indian REITS: A Gateway to Institutional Real Estate’ by official knowledge partner ANAROCK Capital and CREDAI, unveiled today at the CREDAI NATCON in Singapore, examines the Indian REIT landscape in fine detail.
As per the definition, REITs, or real estate investment trusts, can be described as a company that owns and operates real estate to generate income. Shobhit Agarwal, CEO – ANAROCK Capital, said, “Indian REITs are late to the party, but now lead the dance. Despite its late entry compared to global peers, India has strong fundamentals. The distribution yields, currently averaging at 6-7 per cent, are well above many mature markets such as the US and Singapore, among others.”
Shekhar Patel, President, CREDAI, noted that over 60 per cent of India’s REIT market value today rests with very small set of players, with a strong base in Grade A offices linked to IT and BFSI.
“The future, however, holds far wider promise. As India’s cities grow, infrastructure strengthens, and the economy diversifies, REITs will expand into retail, logistics, housing, and new-age assets. This transformation will unlock unprecedented opportunities for investors and firmly place India among the most dynamic REIT markets in the world,” Patel added.
Despite REIT guidelines being introduced in 2014 and the first listing only in 2019, Indian REIT market accounts for just 20 per cent of institutional real estate, far below the USA (96 per cent) or even Asian peers like Singapore (55 per cent) and Japan (51 per cent). In developed markets like the USA and Singapore, dividends from REITs are generally taxed at lower rates, making them more attractive for retail investors compared to India, it opined.
This limited penetration is largely because Indian REITs are so far concentrated in Grade A commercial office assets, which offer scale, transparency and stable cash flows.
As the market matures, diversification is expected through data centres and logistics REITs, supported by rising digital demand and e-commerce growth, while retail mall REITs may follow with ongoing consolidation, the report noted.
With more asset classes becoming REITable, India’s penetration could potentially rise to 25-30 per cent of institutional real estate by 2030, positioning it as one of the fastest-growing REIT markets globally, it added.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
ELLA Dvornik još jednom je pokazala kako ima smisla za humor. Kako i sama često kaže, ljudi joj redovito govore da je poznata bez ikakvih talenata, a u skladu s time odlučila se i obući.
Misteriozni muškarac iz njezinog života kojeg zove Meštar nedavno joj je poklonio majicu na kojoj piše Untalented (netalentirana), a Ella je u opisu fotografije na kojoj je nosi napisala: “Meštar je vidio ovu majicu i pomislio “To je baš za nju”. Pa vam u toj temi stavljam i dump. Bez truda”.
“Baš si ekstra”
Plavu majicu kratkih rukava s natpisom kombinirala je s kratkom sivom suknjicom, bijelim čarapama, crnim cipelama s remenčićima, velikim naočalama i srebrnim nakitom, a cijelo je izdanje izgledalo zaigrano i ležerno.
“Odakle je majica? Treba mi jako”, “Majica je top”, “Super kombinacija sa suknjicom”, “Baš si ekstra”, “Lajkamo Meštra”, “Predobro izgledaš”, ” pisali su joj pratitelji.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Ella je i sama otkrila da je majica s About You, a riječ je o španjolskom brendu Pompeii. U pitanju je muška majica od organski uzgojenog pamuka. Trenutačno je dostupna na sniženju.
O brendu
Pompeii je španjolski modni brend osnovan 2014. godine, poznat po casual i urbanim komadima. Postali su popularni zahvaljujući tenisicama s prepoznatljivim, jednostavnim dizajnom i pristupačnim cijenama, no s vremenom su proširili ponudu na odjeću i modne dodatke, zadržavajući naglasak na minimalizmu, udobnosti i svakodnevnoj nosivosti.
Brend često surađuje s umjetnicima i dizajnerima, a ističe se i održivim pristupom proizvodnji te jakom prisutnošću na društvenim mrežama.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
To Andrew Friedman, something like this was a virtual impossibility.
“If you had said that we would have a six-week stretch where our offense would rank 30th in baseball, I would have said there was a zero percent chance,” the Dodgers president of baseball operations said last month.
“I would have been wrong,” he quickly added.
Over a five-week stretch from July 4 to Aug. 4, the Dodgers inexplicably ranked 30th (out of 30 clubs) in scoring. And though they’ve been slightly better in the five weeks since, questions about their supposed juggernaut lineup still abound.
In the first half of the season, the Dodgers boasted the best offense in the majors, leading the majors in scoring (5.61 runs per game), batting average (.262), OPS (.796) and hitting with runners in scoring position (.300) and went 56-32 over their first 88 games.
Since then, however, everything has flipped.
It started with a July slump that was as stunning as it was unforeseen, with the Dodgers averaging just 3.36 runs in a 25-game stretch commencing with Independence Day. Since then, there have been only marginal improvements, with the Dodgers entering Friday ranked 24th in scoring (4.21 runs per game), 25th in batting average (.237), 18th in OPS (.718) and 22nd in hitting with runners in scoring position (.245) over their last 58 games — a stretch in which they’ve gone 26-32.
“Not scoring runs,” first baseman Freddie Freeman said last week, “it’s just not who we are.”
On the surface, the root causes seemed rather obvious. Much of their lineup was either on the injured list or scuffling in the wake of previous, nagging injuries. Healthy superstars were grinding through flaws with their swings. What little depth they had failed to compensate.
To that end, the team is hopeful it has turned the page.
Shohei Ohtani, after a midseason lull, is back to his MVP-caliber norms. Mookie Betts is back to looking like himself at the end of an otherwise career-worst season. Max Muncy and Tommy Edman have returned from injuries, providing the batting order with much-needed length. Significant playing time is no longer going to the likes of Buddy Kennedy, Alex Freeland, Estuery Ruiz or any of the other anonymous faces that populated the clubhouse during the campaign’s darkest days.
“Our lineup, our team, looks more whole,” manager Dave Roberts said this week. “I think that we’ve all been waiting for our guys to come back to health, and see what we look like as the ballclub that we had all envisioned.”
Still, when asked whether the Dodgers’ second-half slump could just be pinned on personnel issues, Roberts and his players said it wasn’t that simple.
The Dodgers might not have been whole. But they weren’t doing fundamental things — like stressing opposing pitchers, driving up pitch counts, or executing in leverage situations — either.
“We’d lost sight of playing the game the way we’re capable of playing,” Roberts acknowledged.
“For a little while,” Betts added, “we were having just some bad at-bats.”
This is the dynamic the Dodgers have honed in on fixing, hoping to turn their summer-long frustrations into a valuable learning experience as October nears.
In recent days, a renewed and deliberate emphasis has been placed on the importance of competitiveness at the plate. Daily hitters’ meetings have included film sessions reviewing situational at-bats from the previous night. In-game dugout conversations have centered on a more basic message.
“It’s more about your approach, your plan,” Freeman said. “That’s been the focus.”
This week, the team took what it hopes are important first steps, ambushing the Rockies with seven- and nine-run performances in which they advanced baserunners, capitalized on scoring opportunities and built the kind of big innings that been missing over the two months beforehand.
“We said a few games ago, ‘This needs to be like how we focus for the playoffs,’” Freeman said. “Focus on the little things that help win games.”
The Dodgers, of course, have seen what a broken offense looks like before.
And they know what happens when it doesn’t get rectified before the playoffs.
Late in 2022, as co-hitting coach Aaron Bates recalled this week, the team slipped into bad habits while nursing a massive National League West lead: “It felt like that whole month of September was swing camp, or spring training,” he said, “in the sense of guys working on their swings individually too much, as opposed to playing the game in front of them.”
The results then were costly: A four-game NL Division Series elimination to the San Diego Padres in which the Dodgers repeatedly failed with runners in scoring position.
The next year was more of the same: The team losing its identity while coasting down the stretch, before being swept by the Arizona Diamondbacks in three listless games.
Last season, the Dodgers finally avoided such pitfalls. They batted .278 with runners in scoring position during their postseason run to the World Series. Their tying and go-ahead runs in the Fall Classic clincher came on a pair of productive at-bats in the form of sacrifice flies.
The Dodgers’ Shohei Ohtani has showed his MVP form in recent games, homering twice in Sunday’s win against the Baltimore Orioles.
(Eric Thayer / For The Times)
But this summer, after a first-half outburst that met every lofty expectation of their $400-million roster, more troubling patterns began to resurface again.
Betts’ slow start devolved into a career-worst slump, bottoming out with a .205 average during July. Freeman began to fade right alongside him, with his .374 season average at the end of May plummeting to .292 less than two months later. Edman and Teoscar Hernández struggled after returning from first-half injuries. Michael Conforto never found his footing while Andy Pages endured an extended sophomore slide.
When coupled with Muncy’s prolonged absence — he missed 48 of 56 games because of a knee injury and oblique strain — the Dodgers suddenly had a lineup of players either grinding to rediscover their swing, or struggling to make up for the firepower they were missing.
And as easy scoring dried up, their inability to work consistent “team at-bats” quickly became magnified.
“It happened incrementally, every day, little by little,” Bates said. “Where it’s like, you’re a little off, you want to see what’s wrong with your swing, and you don’t realize that it snowballs. Before you know it, you’re thinking so much about your swing, you’re off of the situations out there.”
It was a problem, Bates insisted, borne of good intentions. Most of the roster was battling swing flaws. Too much daily energy was spent on players trying to individually get their mechanics right.
It led to mindless swings that were wasted on bad pitches. It caused scoring opportunities to carelessly, and repeatedly, go frustatingly by the wayside.
“Guys just got so internal with their mechanics,” Bates said, “they weren’t able to shift their focus once the game starts to just competing in the box.”
Bates started sensing the trend while watching the team from afar, gaining a different perspective during a two-week medical absence in early August to address blood clots in his leg.
In the clubhouse, players began voicing similar observations after particularly puzzling offensive performances in recent weeks.
“I feel like a lot of swings that we took today weren’t really good swings to get on base,” veteran infielder Miguel Rojas said after the Dodgers managed only one hit in six innings against Padres left-hander Nestor Cortes on Aug. 23. “We know we’re more than capable of putting up better at-bats and more hits together to create some traffic.”
“We individually are trying to find ways on our own to make sure that we’re just hitting better than we are,” Ohtani echoed, through an interpreter, after the Dodgers’ one-run performance in a series-opener in Baltimore last weekend. “But I think the side effect of that is, we’re a little too eager, and putting too much pressure on ourselves.”
Thus, this week, the team endeavored to make changes.
In their daily pregame hitters’ meetings, the club has started holding what fellow co-hitting coach Robert Van Scoyoc described to SportsNet LA as “NFL-style” film sessions; in which players were asked to review situational at-bats from the night before, and analyze their ability to execute their plan of attack.
“The game rewards you for having those ‘team at-bats,’ ” Bates said. “So you just preach to them by holding each other accountable, talking about them after the fact, not shying away from it.”
Freeman added that, in the dugout, players have also made an effort to emphasize that message among themselves.
“Don’t get upset because your swing didn’t feel good,” he said. “Like, if you go 0-for-four but move a runner over four times, that’s a great game for us. It might not be for your stats. But you gotta throw that out the window. That’s what we’ve been trying to clean up.”
The hope is that this renewed focus will naturally help hitters sync up their swings.
On Monday night, for example, Betts moved a runner to third base with a fly ball in the sixth inning, before coming back to the plate and roping a tie-breaking two-run single with two outs in the eighth.
“He said it in the hitter’s meeting [the next day],” Freeman relayed, “how that little positive thing of moving [a runner] over helped him build confidence going into his next at-bat.”
Little moments like that, the Dodgers hope, will help kick-start their offense as they come up on the playoffs. They might not have been able to envision the struggles of the last two months. But now, between better health and improving at-bat quality, they finally see a way to fix their ailing offense.
“Now, we’re at least having good at-bats, getting a walk, extending innings, finding ways to manufacture runs,” Betts said.
“I do think that presently, the guys are engaged,” Roberts added. “Guys are playing as one right now.”
US tech giant Apple’s iPhone shipments in India are projected to grow by up to 25 per cent to reach a record 14-15 million units in 2025, according to industry estimates. The surge in shipments is driven by heavy discounts on older models and strategic pricing of the newly launched iPhone 17 series.
Research firm International Data Corporation (IDC) India expects dispatches to reach 15 million units in 2025, up from 12 million in 2024, while Canalys projects 14.20 million and Counterpoint Research estimates 18-19 per cent growth, targeting 8 per cent market share in the Indian smartphone market.
Industry experts noted that India, Apple’s fastest-growing global market, is expected to remain central to its sales trajectory over the next two years, with festive demand playing a key role.
Add Zee Business as a Preferred Source
The newly-launched iPhone 17 is priced at Rs. 82,900 ($940.54), slightly higher than the iPhone 16. The base model offering 128 GB storage has been discontinued, with all new variants now offering 256GB storage at a lower price compared to the previous generation’s Rs. 89,900 ($1,019) for the same capacity.
Research firm Canalys forecasted the company’s domestic wholesale revenue to grow to Rs. 1,08,412 crore ($12.30 billion) in 2025 from Rs. 98,717 crore ($11.20 billion) last year, supported by upgrades to Pro models and sales of the new iPhone Air model.
The rising attach rates of ecosystem products will also boost revenue growth, the firm said.
Analysts noted that the iPhone 16 was India’s highest-selling model in H1 2025, driving 96.50 per cent growth in the premium smartphone segment. With EMI schemes and expanding flagship retail stores in Mumbai, New Delhi, Bengaluru, and Pune, Apple is expected to broaden its consumer base and strengthen its ecosystem presence in India.
Apple has recently opened two new stores in Bengaluru and Pune as part of its retail expansion in India, anticipating it to be the next key market. In Apple’s largest overseas market, China, sales grew by only 4.4 per cent in the June quarter following two years of declines.
India is also becoming central to Apple’s manufacturing plans, with one in every five iPhones now being produced in the country.
Directed by David Lean from a screenplay by Noël Coward, based on his 1936 one-act play Still Life, Brief Encounter is considered one of the greatest films of all time.
The 1945 romantic drama starring Celia Johnson (who was Oscar-nominated for her role) and Trevor Howard was ranked second in the BFI’s 1999 ranking of best British films.
Meanwhile, in 2017 Time Out polled 150 actors, writers, producers and directors who voted the film the 12th greatest British movie ever.
The 87 minute picture follows an extramarital relationship during a chance “brief encounter” at a railway station shortly before World War II.
The film holds an impressive Rotten Tomatoes score of 93 per cent positive reviews.
Brief Encounter’s Critics Consensus reads: “Brief Encounter adds a small but valuable gem to the Lean filmography, depicting a doomed couple’s illicit connection with affecting sensitivity and a pair of powerful performance.”
The movie classic is on BBC Two at 3:15pm this Sunday.
Directed by David Lean from a screenplay by Noël Coward, based on his 1936 one-act play Still Life, Brief Encounter is considered one of the greatest films of all time.
The 1945 romantic drama starring Celia Johnson (who was Oscar-nominated for her role) and Trevor Howard was ranked second in the BFI’s 1999 ranking of best British films.
Meanwhile, in 2017 Time Out polled 150 actors, writers, producers and directors who voted the film the 12th greatest British movie ever.
The 87 minute picture follows an extramarital relationship during a chance “brief encounter” at a railway station shortly before World War II.
The film holds an impressive Rotten Tomatoes score of 93 per cent positive reviews.
Brief Encounter’s Critics Consensus reads: “Brief Encounter adds a small but valuable gem to the Lean filmography, depicting a doomed couple’s illicit connection with affecting sensitivity and a pair of powerful performance.”
The movie classic is on BBC Two at 3:15pm this Sunday.
Binod Chaudhary, chairman of Chaudhary Group (CG Corp Global), has built a formidable empire of 136 companies.
In the heart of the Himalayas, Nepal’s only billionaire, has built a fortune of $1.8 billion (around Rs 15,000 crore), showcasing a remarkable journey of entrepreneurship. At 69, Binod Chaudhary, chairman of Chaudhary Group (CG Corp Global), has built a formidable empire of 136 companies, from ‘Wai Wai’ noodles to Taj Hotels, spanning sectors like banking, hotels, FMCG, energy, education, and health. (Image: File Pic)
Born into a Marwari family in Kathmandu, Chaudhary’s roots trace back to Rajasthan, India. His grandfather migrated to Nepal and laid the foundation of their business legacy. His father then opened Nepal’s first departmental store, a significant achievement at the time. (Image: File Pic)
Although Chaudhary was expected to take over the family business, he initially aspired to become a chartered accountant and began his studies in India. However, he had to return home at the age of 18 due to his father’s illness, leaving his academic pursuits behind and entering the business world. (Image: Instagram)
Chaudhary’s journey into entrepreneurship began with opening Nepal‘s most famous disco in Kathmandu in 1973, which quickly became a youth hotspot. (Image: Instagram)
In 1984, Chaudhary launched ‘Wai Wai’ noodles, now a staple in kitchens across India and Nepal, especially loved by children and adults in North and Northeast India. (Image: Instagram)
His business acumen led him to partner with global brands like Suzuki and Panasonic, further bolstering his ventures. (Image: Instagram)
In 1995, Binod Chaudhary made a strategic move by acquiring a controlling stake in Nabil Bank from the Dubai government, which has since become Nepal’s leading bank. (Image: Instagram)
His most successful endeavour, however, lies in the hospitality sector. Chaudhary Group boasts 143 hotels, including several 5-star establishments in collaboration with India’s renowned Taj Hotels, spread across Nepal, India, and Sri Lanka, epitomising luxury. (Image: Instagram)
According to Forbes, Binod Chaudhary’s wealth in 2023 was $1.8 billion. Although this is modest compared to giants like Elon Musk ($247 billion) or Mukesh Ambani ($107.1 billion), it is a significant achievement for a small country like Nepal. (Image: Instagram)
A Bollywood enthusiast, Chaudhary is particularly fond of Amitabh Bachchan. His inspirations include Indian businessman JRD Tata and South African President Nelson Mandela. (Image: Instagram)
After the latest breakout above the pivotal resistance around $220, the Solana price seems to be poised to keep up the bullish trend. Currently, the token is consolidating within a tight range, signalling a potential breakout as volatility compresses. The crypto is forming a symmetrical pattern near key resistance, with rising on-chain activity and strong network fundamentals supporting bullish momentum. If SOL breaks above the $245–$250 zone with volume confirmation, it could trigger a parabolic rally.
Will SOL Price Mark a New ATH This Month?
Solana’s market cap has just smashed a new ATH of over $130 billion, surpassing the previous highs of around $127 billion. With this, $61 million in short positions were liquidated in the past 24 hours, which helped the price to rise above the pivotal barrier at $235. On the other hand, some reports suggest that Galaxy Digital bought $510 million worth of SOL this week, hinting at big money entering the ecosystem.
On the other hand, FTX & Alameda have just unstaked $45 million worth of SOL from staking. Since November 2023, they have redeemed 9.98M SOL worth around $1.2B by following the same monthly liquidation schedule. This could raise some concerns, but the chart pattern suggests that the token is primed for a major breakout.
As seen in the above weekly chart, the SOL price appears to be extremely bullish as the price has broken the final barrier ahead of the highs. This marks a successful recovery from the loss since the start of the year. On the other hand, it also marks the beginning of a fresh rise after rebounding from the lows within a cup & handle pattern. The SOL price has broken the corrective phase and has led to a strong upswing. The RSI is in incremental and above to reach the upper threshold.
Hence, the Solana price is believed to reach $245 in the next few days, after which, a new ATH above $300 can be expected. The token’s trajectory appears optimistic as the weekly supertrend has just turned bullish after being bearish since the start of the year. However, in the wider perspective, reaching $1000 is completely dependent on the market conditions and the institutional interest.
SRM College of Agricultural Sciences, a unit of the SRM Institute of Science and Technology, plans to introduce seven Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D) courses from the next academic year, said college dean M Jawaharlal.
This academic year, the college has launched Ph.D courses in agronomy, genetics and plant breeding, and fruit science. Next academic year, it will launch the doctoral courses in soil science, plant pathology, entomology, agricultural economics, agricultural extension education, vegetable science, and floriculture and landscaping.
“The Indian Council of Agricultural Research has given accreditation to our college. We provide hands-on training to the students. We also have tie-ups with universities abroad. All these help our students,” said the college dean.
Offering honours course
Set up in 2018, the college introduced post-graduate courses in these 10 courses a couple of years ago. The Ph.D is timed in a way that once the students finish their post-graduation, they can look at the option of taking the Ph.D courses, said Jawaharlal.
The college, which is operating on a 400-acre campus at Baburayanpettai in Chengalpattu district – about 115 km from Chennai – since March 2021, offers graduate honours courses in agriculture and horticulture.
The college offers on-farm training to its students enrolled in graduate and postgraduate courses. In the graduate course, the students spend their last semester learning to manage farms or become entrepreneurs.
“We educate the students through hands-on training on field preparation, micro irrigation system, organic farming, integrated farming systems, dryland agriculture, smart farming and agro-meteorological observatory for experiential learning with a multi-disciplinary approach for a well-rounded education in the field of agriculture,” said Jawaharlal.
Research opportunities
Post-graduate students are offered opportunities to do research in specialised fields. The college has units to conduct practical classes and well-equipped laboratories to expose students on various aspects of agriculture.
For example, in agroforestry, students get training in identifying important tree species along with their seeds and seedlings, demonstrating the production of saplings and silviculture and agri-silviculture techniques.
Two batches of students travelled to Kenya to learn about tulips and cut flowers. The College of Agriculture Sciences has a collaboration with the agricultural college of Kansas State University and UK’s Cranfield University for students’ exchange.
The university has over 800 students enrolled from Tamil Nadu, Kerala, Andhra Pradesh and Nepal. The other feature of the college’s graduate courses is that students have to undertake travel in their last semester and learn about crops in other parts of the country, said the dean.
The College of Agricultural Sciences has now begun to train people in urban farming at its headquarters in Kattankulathur, about 50 km from Chennai. “There has been a good response to this. We are even looking to enlighten children on farming,” said Jawaharlal.
(The writer was at the campus on the invitation of the SRM College of Agricultural Sciences)
It’s here. You can preorder the new iPhone lineup right now to ensure you get Apple’s new flagship in your hand at launch. We’re all buzzing with excitement over Apple’s iPhone 17 lineup, which was announced at the company’s Apple Event 2025 Sept. 9. It includes the base iPhone 17, the new iPhone Air and the 17 Pro, as well as the larger 17 Pro Max. But don’t forget to grab something to protect you nifty new device. Tons of your favorite brands, like Casetify, have already released new cases for the upcoming iPhone 17 models. Even Apple has dropped its new line of cases, with some fun new accessories, too.
We will continue to update this list as more iPhone 17 cases become available. In the meantime, here are the cases you can currently grab to outfit your new iPhone.
Watch this: The New iPhone Air Changes the Game for Preorders
iPhone 17 cases available now
Apple is known for its traditional silicone cases. And don’t worry, those are making a return for the new iPhone 17 series — even the new iPhone Air. But there’s an added feature this time, the crossbody strap. This strap can help you bring your phone around like a bag, no hands or pockets needed. You’ll also get 3% cash back if you purchase with your Apple Card.*
Beats iPhone 17 series cases are available at its Amazon storefront in a variety of styles and colors, including rugged and kickstand options.
The Spigen storefront on Amazon has plenty of new MagSafe cases for the iPhone 17 lineup with a large selection of styles and colors. You’ll also find discounted screen and camera lens protects at a discount.
Prefer an ultra thin case? Pitaka has some stylish and slim options on its Amazon storefront.
Otterbox has iPhone 17 cases available on its Amazon storefront right now. Whether you’re looking for MagSafe cases, leather options or something rugged, there are plenty of options for everyone.
ESR has released tons of different cases for the new iPhone 17 lineup. Plus, no matter which one you pick, they’re all MagSafe. And best of all, these are already discounted up to 28%. You can also shop via the brand’s Amazon storefront.
Popular Smartish cases, including the Gripmunk and Gripzilla, are joining the iPhone 17 crew along with the new Case Clinger and Wallflower models. And we’re already seeing some eye-catching discounts on these cases.
If you’re looking for a more minimalistic look for your phone, take a look at the iPhone 17 series case collection at Nomad. You’ll find high-end cases made with Horween leather, as well as sleek, modern options that won’t be distracting.
Encased has plenty of iPhone 17 series cases available on its Amazon storefront right now, starting at just $14. Whether you’re looking for a case with a belt clip, a wallet case or even a waterproof case, you’ll find a plethora of options here.
Native Union is also offering phone cases for the iPhone 17 series in a variety of colors for those looking for eco-friendly options.
For a variety of rugged case options, be sure to shop the Urban Armor Gear collection of iPhone 17 series cases.
Arc has released tons of different cases for the new iPhone 17 lineup in colors that match the phones. There are a variety of styles available, including Titanium models — though those are considerably more expensive.
Casetify has a vast array of iPhone 17 series case options. If you want something for your new device that stands out from the crowd, don’t skip browsing Casetify’s wares.
Torras has iPhone 17 series cases on its Amazon storefront, with multiple styles available — including several with 360-dregree spin stand ring for added convenience.
From kickstand cases to bundles with screen protectors, there are tons of options to chose from for the whole lineup.
You can shop Mkeke iPhone 17 series cases at its Amazon storefront now. If you’re looking for a bargain buy, these low-cost cases can still help you protect your phone from drops and other accidents. Just note that while these cases do support wireless charging, they are not designed for MagSafe accessories.
Aohi released a new Magarmor case for the new iPhone 17 lineup. This case uses next-gen materials to give you max protection but no bulk. And it’s already $20 off.
If you’re looking for a luxury case with storage for your new iPhone 17 series phone, look no further. Burton Goods has some great full-grain leather options for you.
Get hand-picked deals from CNET shopping experts straight to your phone.
Don’t miss any of our unbiased tech content and lab-based reviews. Add CNET as a preferred Google source on Chrome.
Can I use my iPhone 16 case with my iPhone 17?
Unfortunately, no. The dimensions of the iPhone 16 and iPhone 17 do not line up. If you try to use your old case for your iPhone 17, it will not fit. The good news is that there are many new cases you can choose from.
How do I preorder the iPhone 17?
You can preorder the iPhone 17 series at select online retailers and carriers.
First, decide which model iPhone you want to buy: iPhone Air, iPhone 17, iPhone 17 Pro or iPhone 17 Pro Max. Then, select your preferred color and storage capacity. You also need to decide if you’ll trade in an older iPhone, which could get you up to $700 back from Apple.
Once you make those decisions, you’ll need to choose an optional carrier and AppleCare Plus coverage (or forgo it) and click the blue Add to Bag button. You can then include any accessories you want and enter your payment information to complete your purchase.
How do iPhone 17 trade-in offers work?
Multiple carriers offer trade-in savings, some valued at up to $1,100 on eligible trade-ins, which could net you a free iPhone 17 Pro. Note, however, that most trade-in deals from carriers require you to become a customer, and the terms often require you to choose some of the priciest plan options.
Not a fan of contracts? Some retailers also offer trade-in programs, which could offer gift cards toward future purchases instead. This can be a great way to take advantage of savings without necessarily being locked into a contract. Retail offers may not provide as much of a deal as traditional trade-in offers from carriers, though, so keep that in mind as you shop.
*All information about theApple Card has been collected independently by CNET and has not been reviewed by the issuer.
Watch this: The iPhone 17 Is Here! Watch the Announcement at the Apple iPhone 17 Event
Beta blockers are quickly becoming the hot new drug to combat anxiety.
The medication, also known as propranolol, was approved by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration in 1967 for the treatment of cardiovascular disease, and is commonly used to treat high blood pressure.
Prescriptions for propranolol have risen 28% from 2020, according to global IQVIA data cited by The Wall Street Journal.
‘I’M A PSYCHIATRIST – HERE’S HOW TO REDUCE ANXIETY IN JUST 15 SECONDS’
Celebrities have recently touted beta blockers’ anti-anxiety capabilities.
At this year’s Academy Awards, actress Rachel Sennott shared this advice on the red carpet: “Take that beta blocker, girl. Swallow it down and lock in … Numb is in.”
Prescriptions for propranolol have risen 28% from 2020, according to global IQVIA data.(iStock)
TV personality and “Giggly Squad” podcast co-host Paige DeSorbo has also been upfront about her experience with the drug, speaking openly about using beta blockers to cope with panic attacks on tour.
“I had my first real, legit panic attack,” DeSorbo said in a September 2024 episode. “When I took a beta blocker and went out and did the show, I was completely fine.”
What are beta blockers?
Dr. Daniel Amen, a psychiatrist, brain imaging specialist and founder of Amen Clinics in California, said in an interview with Fox News Digital that beta blockers are medications that “calm the body’s stress response.”
In his own practice, Amen said he always starts with “natural techniques” to relieve stress and anxiety. This can include diaphragmatic breathing, meditation, hypnosis and mindfulness.
(L-R) Paige DeSorbo and Hannah Berner are pictured at a Giggly Squad show on Sept. 22, 2024, in Los Angeles, California. DeSorbo has been upfront about her use of the drug to cope with panic attacks on tour.(Jon Kopaloff/Getty Images for Uber)
“But sometimes, your nervous system still overrides your best coping strategies,” he noted. “That’s where beta blockers can be incredibly helpful.”
The pill works by blocking the effects of adrenaline, which then lowers heart rate, steadies breathing and reduces physical anxiety symptoms, including racing thoughts, shaky hands and a pounding heart.
“Used responsibly, beta blockers are an effective, low-risk tool that helps many people live calmer, more confident lives.”
“When your body thinks you’re under attack, beta blockers help quiet the ‘false alarms’ going off in your nervous system,” Amen said.
“They don’t sedate you or cloud your thinking,” he said. “Instead, they give you back control over your body, so your mind can catch up.”
Beta blockers are most commonly used to treat high blood pressure and other heart-related conditions.(iStock)
“For many people, they’re like hitting the ‘pause’ button on the fight-or-flight response, so you can think more clearly and perform at your best.”
The psychiatrist added that beta blockers are also commonly used for migraines, tremors, heart rhythm issues and to protect the heart after a cardiovascular event.
PSYCHEDELIC DRUG POPULAR IN 1960S COULD EASE ANXIETY AS DOCTORS SHARE WARNINGS
Potential side effects
Amen pointed out that beta blockers do not cause cravings or withdrawals like other anti-anxiety medications.
Amen emphasized that some people may feel more tired at first, but this side effect usually abates.
When treating anxiety, Amen said he first practices “natural techniques,” such as breathing and meditation.(iStock)
People with asthma, diabetes or certain heart conditions should consult their doctor before trying this medication, as different types of beta blockers may be better suited for certain individuals.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
“You shouldn’t stop them suddenly if you’ve been taking them daily,” Amen cautioned. “Tapering is safest.”
Beta blockers are considered “very safe, well-tolerated and non-addictive” for most people when prescribed “thoughtfully,” according to the doctor.
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
“Used responsibly, beta blockers are an effective, low-risk tool that helps many people live calmer, more confident lives.”
Amen often prescribes beta blockers as a “first-line medication” for those with performance anxiety, public speaking fears or other circumstances that involve physical anxiety.
“Beta blockers are finally getting credit as a simple, safe option that can make a big difference,” the doctor said.(iStock)
“For the right person, beta blockers can be life-changing,” he noted. “I’ve seen them help people give TED talks, pass board exams, sing on stage and walk into big life moments with confidence … When you quiet the body, you free the brain to work at its best.”
The doctor said he welcomes the recent celebrity endorsements for beta blockers, as anxiety is “one of the most common mental health challenges today.”
For more Health articles, visit foxnews.com/health.
“Beta blockers are finally getting credit as a simple, safe option that can make a big difference,” he said.
Amen stressed, however, that beta blockers are not “magic pills,” and that they work best when combined with healthy coping strategies, like using breathing techniques, changing toxic thought patterns and eating a brain-healthy diet.
Angelica Stabile is a lifestyle reporter for Fox News Digital.
You don’t have permission to access “http://food.ndtv.com/news/malaika-arora-kickstarts-her-day-with-retinol-juice-check-out-its-benefits-9263296” on this server.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-09-11/Who-was-Charlie-Kirk-What-we-know-about-the-shooting-and-the-suspect-1GAhdM0bOAo/img/135580987b174277b855b76cb1e19999/135580987b174277b855b76cb1e19999.png' alt='People attend a vigil for youth activist and influencer Charlie Kirk, who was shot at a public event at Utah Valley University, in Orem City Center Park, Orem, Utah, September 10, 2025. /CFP'
U.S. right-wing political activist Charlie Kirk was credited with building President Donald Trump’s base among younger voters, galvanizing conservative youth and rising to international prominence through a group he founded at age 18.
Kirk, an Illinois native who founded the conservative student group Turning Point USA rose to prominence in the Republican Party during Trump’s presidency. He had just returned from an overseas speaking tour when he was killed while addressing a large outdoor crowd on the Utah Valley University Campus in Orem, Utah, on Wednesday. He was 31 years old.
The Utah governor described Kirk’s death as a “political assassination.” Authorities said the motive is unknown and it was not immediately clear whether a suspect had been arrested.
On Sunday, Kirk headlined an event in Tokyo organized by the far-right Sanseito party, which made big gains in Japan’s upper house election in July. He also recently spoke in South Korea before returning to the U.S.
Kirk had 5.3 million followers on his X account and drew an audience of more than 500,000 monthly listeners to podcasts of his radio program, “The Charlie Kirk Show.” He also authored or contributed to several books, including “Time for a Turning Point” and “The College Scam.”
Influence built on campuses
In addition to founding Turning Point USA in 2012 with conservative activist Bill Montgomery, Kirk also launched Turning Point Action in 2019 as a non-profit advocacy group backing conservative candidates for office.
Turning Point USA, an organization dedicated to advancing conservative causes on college campuses, was instrumental in driving youth support for Trump in the November 2024 election.
“No one understood or had the Heart of the Youth in the United States of America better than Charlie,” Trump wrote on his online platform Truth Social in announcing Kirk’s death. “He was loved and admired by ALL, especially me, and now, he is no longer with us.”
Trump ordered flags flown at half-staff in Kirk’s honor.
Kirk, the son of a counselor at a mental-health clinic and an architect, launched his political career after a 2012 op-ed he wrote for the conservative media outlet Breitbart that led to appearances on Fox News, according to the New York Times.
Fox then booked Kirk to discuss the national debt. That appearance led to a speech at Benedictine University, where he met Montgomery, a Tea Party activist. Montgomery encouraged Kirk to spread his message to college campuses, and registered the name Turning Point USA for Kirk in July 2012.
Kirk is survived by his wife Erika, a former Miss Arizona USA beauty pageant winner, and their two children.
‘Threat to democracy’: World reacts to Kirk’s killing
World leaders condemned the killing, warning of the dangers of political violence.
“I am appalled by the murder of Charlie Kirk. There is no justification for political violence and every act of it threatens democracy,” Canadian Prime Minister Mark Carney wrote on X.
“We must all be free to debate openly and freely without fear – there can be no justification for political violence,” British Prime Minister Keir Starmer wrote on X.
“An atrocious murder, a deep wound for democracy and for those who believe in freedom. My condolences to his family, to his loved ones, and to the American conservative community,” said Italian Prime Minister Giorgia Meloni.
“Charlie Kirk was murdered for speaking truth and defending freedom. A lion-hearted friend of Israel, he fought the lies and stood tall for Judeo-Christian civilization,” said Israel’s Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu.
“Charlie Kirk’s death is the result of the international hate campaign waged by the progressive-liberal left,” Hungarian Prime Minister Viktor Orban said on X.
“This is what led to the attacks on (Slovak Prime Minister) Robert Fico, on (Czech former premier) Andrej Babis, and now on Charlie Kirk. We must stop the hatred! We must stop the hate-mongering left!”
India’s real estate sector is set for a significant scale-up, with office and industrial assets projected to surpass 2 billion sq. ft. by 2047. The sector is expected to reach $5-10 trillion, a growth that could contribute nearly one-fifth of the country’s GDP, according to a report by Colliers in association with CREDAI.
Released at the CREDAI NATCON event in Singapore, the report highlights five structural forces that will shape the sector’s trajectory: urban expansion, infrastructure development, demographic shifts, digital transformation, and sustainability imperatives.
Housing sales are expected to nearly double to 1 million units annually by 2047, driven by a rising median age of 30–40 years, higher income levels, and progressive housing policies. “By 2047, Indian real estate will not just be measured in square feet or asset values, it will be defined by the quality of life we create for millions of citizens,” said Shekhar Patel, President, CREDAI.
The report also underlined the role of Real Estate Investment Trusts (REITs) in this expansion. Their share in the sector’s market capitalisation is projected to rise to 40–50 per cent by 2047, compared with around 10 per cent at present. Within the REIT space, the office segment is expected to remain dominant, with penetration rising from 16 per cent in 2025 to more than 60 per cent by 2047.
Colliers and CREDAI noted that the expansion of Grade-A office and industrial stock beyond 2 billion sq. ft., coupled with doubling residential demand, will be complemented by growth in newer asset classes such as data centres, senior living facilities, retail malls, and hotels.
“Overall, the Indian real estate sector is set to remain a vital catalyst for inclusive urbanisation and sustainable community development as the nation advances toward global economic leadership,” said Badal Yagnik, CEO, Colliers India.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
HIBRIDNI modeli obuće jedan su od najvećih trendova ove godine. Prepoznali su ih gotovo svi vodeći brendovi i ponudili svoje verzije – od mokasinki s debelim potplatom kakvi se obično viđaju na trkaćim tenisicama do spojeva balerinki i tenisica. Posebno se ističe kombinacija niskih tenisica i Mary Jane siluete, jedne od najpopularnijih u posljednjim sezonama.
U toj kategoriji adidas trenutačno ima pravi hit. Njihova verzija spaja ultra popularne Samba tenisice i Mary Jane gornji dio, a ubrzo nakon predstavljanja ovog proljeća osvojila je društvene mreže. U prodaji se pojavila nedugo potom, a kako dolazi jesensko razdoblje, sve se više nameće kao model koji ćemo ove sezone viđati posvuda.
Ako već nemate primjerak, bit će ga teško nabaviti
Silueta zadržava prepoznatljive detalje Samba modela koje obožavaju brojne it djevojke, među njima i Kendall Jenner i Hailey Bieber, ali umjesto jezika i vezica ima remen na čičak. Otvoreniji dizajn unosi dašak Mary Jane estetike, dok logotipi s tri crte na bočnim stranama jasno pokazuju da dolaze iz adidasove radionice.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Potplat je u klasičnoj svijetlo smeđoj gum varijanti, onoj kakva se često viđa na sportskim modelima adidasa i koja daje suptilan retro dojam. Model je već dostupan u prodaji, uniseks je i prodaje se po cijeni od 90 eura.
Koliko su tražene? Dovoljno da je bijeli model na hrvatskoj adidas stranici gotovo potpuno rasprodan, dok je crni ostao samo u nekoliko, uglavnom većih brojeva. U mnogim drugim trgovinama planule su jednako brzo. Čini se da je pred nama novi Samba hit koji će biti teško uhvatiti.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
Oppo F31 series: Oppo India is all set to launch its upcoming mid-range smartphone series — the F31 series — in India. The series includes three phones: F31 Pro +, F31 Pro, and F31, which will be launched on Monday, September 15. Designed to operate smoothly even in temperatures as high as 43°C, these devices are built for traders, gig-economy workers, shoppers, and young professionals who require reliable performance, long battery life, and robust durability, according to the company.
What’s so special about the Oppo F31 series?
A recent Counterpoint Research survey shows that the most common smartphone issues are overheating (41%), battery problems (32%), and accidental damage (32%).
The Oppo F31 Series addresses these directly with
Add Zee Business as a Preferred Source
enlarged vapour chambers and thermal management to control heat,
a 7,000 mAh battery with 80W SuperVOOC fast charging for all-day power, and
a 360° Armour Body with multi-layer shock absorption and IP69/IP68/IP66 ratings for protection against drops, dust, and water.
Oppo F31 Pro +, F31 Pro, and F31: Performance and thermal design
The F31 Pro+ is powered by Qualcomm’s Snapdragon 7 Gen 3. It uses an octa-core Kryo CPU with a 2.63GHz Cortex-A715 Prime core, three 2.4GHz Cortex-A715 performance cores and four 1.8GHz Cortex-A510 efficiency cores, manufactured on TSMC’s 4 nm process. The phone supports up to 24 GB RAM (12 GB physical + 12 GB virtual) and UFS 3.1 storage. A 5,219 mm² vapour chamber—856 mm² larger than the previous generation—increases thermal dissipation on both sides of the device and slows down heat build-up during sustained workloads.
The F31 Pro runs on MediaTek’s 4nm Dimensity 7300-Energy, an octa-core processor with four 2.5GHz Cortex-A78 cores and four efficiency Cortex-A55 cores. It packs the Mali-G615 MC2 GPU, up to 24GB RAM and UFS 3.1 storage. A 4,363 mm² vapour chamber and expanded graphite sheets improve heat dissipation during long sessions.
The F31 runs the 6nm Dimensity 6300 SoC with two 2.4GHz Cortex-A76 cores and six 2GHz Cortex-A55 cores, paired with the Mali-G57 MC2 GPU. It uses a 4,300 mm² vapour chamber with extended graphite coverage that improves thermal efficiency by 21% over the previous generation.
Oppo F31 Pro +, F31 Pro, and F31: Software
All three phones run ColorOS 15 with OPPO’s Dual-Engine Smoothness System that combines the Trinity Engine and the Luminous Rendering Engine.
OPPO F31 Series: AI features
The F31 Series will host a lot of AI tools, including:
AI VoiceScribe: It records meetings or calls, adding real-time translation, subtitles and summaries in over 29 languages including Hindi, English, Kannada, Marathi, Gujarati, Tamil, Malayalam, Telugu, Punjabi, Bengali, Chinese, Spanish and others.
AI Call Assistant: It translates both sides of calls in real time using Google’s Gemini model, with subtitles or text-to-speech output.
OPPO Docs: It applies AI-generated content tools to summarise, translate or rewrite documents.
AI Assistant for Notes: The AI Assistant for Notes restructures unorganised text, corrects errors, expands or shortens drafts, and adjusts tone across languages.
Scan Document tool: A Scan Document tool turns images into editable text with perspective correction and PDF export.
OPPO F31 Series: Camera systems
The F31 Pro+ will feature a 32MP front camera and a rear camera with a 50MP main camera, paired with a 2MP monochrome sensor with two-axis OIS. The F31 has a 50MP main sensor and two 2MP portrait lenses, along with a 16MP front camera (IMX480 sensor).
OPPO F31 Series: Battery and charging
All three models of this series will be equipped with a 7000mAh battery. The company said that with 80W SuperVOOC, the battery gets charged 58 percent in 30 minutes and gets fully charged in less than an hour. Wired reverse charging will also be available, which will turn the phone into a power bank.
Travelling for weeks at a stretch often means packing far more than just clothes. From shoes and accessories to personal essentials and gifts, everything demands its place. A 30 kg luggage trolley makes this process smooth, ensuring you do not struggle with multiple smaller bags. Its large capacity suitcase keeps your belongings organised while giving you the comfort of rolling it through airports without hassle.
Spacious 30 kg suitcase set designed for long vacations, making heavy packing easy with sturdy wheels and smart travel-friendly design.(AI-generated)
Families heading abroad, professionals relocating, or anyone preparing for long vacations will find it practical. Unlike cramped carry-ons, it allows thoughtful packing with extra room for last-minute additions. The best suitcase is the one that balances strength, space, and effortless mobility, and a 30 kg trolley suitcase does just that.
8 best 30 kg trolley bags to explore
The Safari Pentagon Pro 8 Wheels 75cm Check-in Trolley Bag blends style with strength, crafted from lightweight polypropylene that can handle the demands of frequent travel. Its sleek black finish makes it versatile for both business trips and holidays. The smooth 360º wheel design ensures effortless movement across airports and city streets. With ample space for extended packing, this large-sized suitcase keeps belongings secure and organised, making long journeys far more convenient.
Travellers who like carrying extra without the hassle of multiple bags will appreciate the generous packing room in this sleek black suitcase. With its sturdy build and effortless wheel movement, it keeps up on busy airport floors and long commutes. The KAMILIANT by American Tourister Savvy 80 cm Check-in Trolley Bag balances durability with smart organisation, offering cross ribbons, a U-shaped pocket, and a lock for added peace of mind.
A spacious blue trolley that blends practicality with a touch of style, this soft-sided case is perfect for long getaways and extended packing needs. The lightweight polyester casing ensures flexibility while still keeping your belongings well-protected. Easy rolling wheels make travel smooth through airports or city streets. The Skybags Rubik Polyester 78 cm Check-in Luggage offers generous space while keeping movement effortless, making it a dependable choice for frequent travellers.
Long trips call for luggage that can take both weight and wear with ease, and this dark green trolley bag does exactly that. Built from resilient polypropylene, it remains lightweight while still keeping belongings safe inside. Smooth spinner wheels glide effortlessly across terminals, moving stress-free even when fully packed. The Nasher Miles Polypropylene 360 Degree Paris Check-in Luggage 75 cm offers ample space, thoughtful compartments, and reliable security for extended travels.
Travellers who prefer luggage that balances strength with a refined look will find this gold suitcase practical yet stylish. Its hard polycarbonate shell offers reliable protection while keeping weight manageable, and the smooth double spinner wheels make moving through airports effortless. With generous packing space and an expandable design, the DELSEY PARIS Margot 78 cm Check-in Trolley Bag provides both security and convenience, making it a trusted choice for longer trips.
Extended trips demand luggage that can handle both capacity and constant movement with ease, and this sleek black case rises to the task. The tough polycarbonate shell shields belongings from knocks, while the aviation-grade handle and Japanese-engineered wheels keep every glide smooth and quiet. With striking detailing and a modern gloss finish, the MOKOBARA Transit Luggage Check-in Large 100 Litres offers generous space and refined functionality for travellers who pack big.
A teal blue suitcase that brings both style and smart design to long trips, this case balances strength with thoughtful detailing. The tough polycarbonate shell keeps belongings safe, while the eight-wheel system ensures smooth mobility across airports and city streets. With in-built laundry compartments for better organisation and a secure lock system, the uppercase Polycarbonate JFK 76 cm Check-in Trolley Bag is built for travellers who want space, durability, and convenience in one.
Clean white luggage with a modern edge, this case combines durability with refined functionality for travellers who like to pack generously. The wide handle design offers better balance, while the noise-free spinner wheels glide smoothly across busy spaces. Crafted from strong polycarbonate, it keeps belongings safe and protected throughout the trip. The Assembly Polycarbonate Hard-Sided 75 cm Check-in Trolley Bag offers 110 litres of space, making it ideal for long stays and extended travel.
Similar articles for you
Get vacation-ready! Up to 80% off on top picks for trolley bags
₹2500″>Travel smarter, not harder: Your guide to affordable trolley bags under ₹2500
Duffles and backpacks at up to 60% off on Amazon; Top picks to buy now!
Beyond basics: Fun and fashionable backpacks for girls; Top 8 picks
Are 30 kg trolley bags suitable for international flights?
Yes, most airlines allow a 30 kg luggage option for international check-ins, making these bags a practical choice for long trips abroad.
What makes a 30 kg suitcase useful for long vacations?
A 30 kg suitcase offers ample space to pack clothing, accessories, and essentials for extended stays, reducing the need for multiple smaller bags.
Do 30 kg luggage trolley sets come with wheels for easy movement?
Most 30 kg luggage trolley sets feature smooth 360-degree spinner wheels, allowing effortless handling through airports, train stations, and busy travel spaces.
How durable are large-capacity 30 kg trolley bags?
These bags are usually made from materials like polycarbonate or strong polyester, offering durability and reliability while keeping belongings safe during travel.
Disclaimer: At Hindustan Times, we help you stay up-to-date with the latest trends and products. Hindustan Times has an affiliate partnership, so we may get a part of the revenue when you make a purchase. We shall not be liable for any claim under applicable laws, including but not limited to the Consumer Protection Act, 2019, concerning the products. The products listed in this article are in no particular order of priority.
The forthcoming TV adaptation of The Conjuring is taking shape as HBO Max ropes in three writers with impressive track records.
The horror series, based on the popular franchise, has been under development since 2023.
Things are now falling into place for the streaming giant as Deadline confirms that Nancy Won will be steering the ship as showrunner.
Won boasts an impressive resume, having penned scripts for acclaimed dramas such as Little Fires Everywhere, Tiny Beautiful Things and Sunny.
She won’t be flying solo, however, as Peter Cameron and Cameron Squires have also come aboard as writers, reports the Mirror.
They’ve earned their stripes writing episodes for Marvel hits WandaVision and Agatha All Along, while Squires contributed to the successful Star Wars series The Acolyte, all for Disney+.
News of a Conjuring series first surfaced two years ago.
Billed as a continuation of the narrative set out in the films, Warner Bros Television is developing the series based on the New Line Cinema franchise.
James Wan, director of the first two Conjuring films, is producing through his company Atomic Monster, alongside Peter Safran.
It remains to be seen whether Patrick Wilson and Vera Farmiga will reprise their roles as Ed and Lorraine Warren for the new series. As of now, no cast members have been announced.
This news comes hot on the heels of a significant vote of confidence for the franchise.
The newest chapter in what is now a nine-film series, The Conjuring: Last Rites, debuted this past weekend and smashed records with the largest horror film opening of all time.
The film has also garnered glowing praise from devoted franchise followers. One ecstatic horror enthusiast awarded it five stars on Google, declaring: “The Conjuring: Last Rites is more than just a film-it is a masterful conclusion to one of the most beloved horror franchises of our time.
“Without a doubt, this chapter stands as the most gripping, terrifying, and emotionally profound entry in the series.
“It is rare for a horror movie to strike such a perfect balance between bone-chilling scares and heartfelt human drama, but Last Rites achieves this effortlessly.”
The New South Wales Government has introduced legislation to remove temporary speed limits in road work zones when outside of construction times.
Rather than forcing drivers to always slow down through road works – regardless of whether workers are on site or not – the new proposal will allow speeds to be raised when construction isn’t taking place.
However, in some cases, reduced speed limits will remain to ensure driver safety.
The NSW Government says it expects the change to be implemented next year following consultation with stakeholders this year.
CarExpert can save you thousands on a new car. Click here to get a great deal.
In late 2018, the Victorian Government announced it would push forward with similar legislation, designed to restore speed limits through “empty” road works zones.
While the Victorian proposal was never put forward as legislation, under 2010 laws, crews are required to restore speed limits to be “no more than 20km/h below the permanent speed limit, unless the hazard assessment of the worksite indicates otherwise”.
But despite the rule, road work zones in Victoria typically remain at a significantly reduced speed at all hours – and sometimes for months at a time.
Under the latest move, the NSW Government has plans to introduce standards for contractors to abide by, which are designed to ensure speed limits in construction zones are restored when workers are absent.
“Protecting workers and road users around worksites is critical and we will never weaken rules around safety,” NSW Minister for Roads, Jenny Aitchison, said in a written statement.
“However, leaving speed restrictions in place outside construction hours often needlessly slows down traffic movement.”
In Mumbai, the price of 24-carat gold stands at Rs 1,11,280 per 10 grams, while 22k gold is available at Rs 1,02,000 per 10 grams.
Gold Prices Today, September 12.
Gold & Silver Prices Today, September 12: Gold prices saw an appreciation on Friday, supported by persistent expectations of looser US monetary policy, as inflation remained steady in line with forecasts, producer prices unexpectedly fell, and jobless claims hit a four-year peak, highlighting labour market weakness.
In Mumbai, the price of 24-carat gold stood at Rs 1,11,280 per 10 grams, while 22k gold was available at Rs 1,02,000 per 10 grams. Silver was available at Rs 1,32,900 per kg.
On the MCX, the price of gold rose 0.48% to trade at Rs 1,09,500 per 10 grams, while silver was also up by 1.14% to Rs 1,28,383 per kg in the futures market in the early trade.
Rahul Kalantri, vice-president (commodities) of Mehta Equities, said, “Bullion prices remained firm this morning with gold climbing toward $3,650, approaching its all-time high. Silver saw a sharp rally, crossing $42 in the spot market for the first time since 2011. Both precious metals are on track to post a fourth straight week of gains. The rally was supported by persistent expectations of looser US monetary policy, as inflation remained steady in line with forecasts, producer prices unexpectedly fell, and jobless claims hit a four-year peak, highlighting labour market weakness.”
Markets already priced in a 25 basis point Federal Reserve rate cut, with speculation growing over a potential larger reduction. Safe-haven demand was further bolstered by geopolitical uncertainties, including US efforts to push G7 allies to impose higher tariffs on India and China over Russian crude purchases, intensified Middle East conflict, and Poland intercepting Russian drones amid attacks in western Ukraine, he added.
What Is The Price Of 22kt, 24kt Gold Rates Today In India Across Key Cities On September 12?
City
22K Gold (per 10gm)
24K Gold (per 10gm)
Delhi
Rs 1,02,150
Rs 1,11,430
Jaipur
Rs 1,02,150
Rs 1,11,430
Ahmedabad
Rs 1,01,360
Rs 1,11,330
Patna
Rs 1,02,050
Rs 1,11,330
Mumbai
Rs 1,02,050
Rs 1,11,280
Hyderabad
Rs 1,02,000
Rs 1,11,280
Chennai
Rs 1,02,000
Rs 1,11,280
Bengaluru
Rs 1,02,000
Rs 1,11,280
Kolkata
Rs 1,02,000
Rs 1,11,280
What Factors Affect Gold Prices In India?
International market rates, import duties, taxes, and fluctuations in exchange rates primarily influence gold prices in India. Together, these factors determine the daily gold rates across the country.
In India, gold is deeply cultural and financial. It is a preferred investment option and is key to celebrations, particularly weddings and festivals.
With constantly changing market conditions, investors and traders monitor fluctuations closely. Staying updated is crucial for effectively navigating dynamic trends.
Mohammad Haris
Haris is Deputy News Editor (Business) at news18.com. He writes on various issues related to personal finance, markets, economy and companies. Having over a decade of experience in financial journalism, Haris h…Read More
Haris is Deputy News Editor (Business) at news18.com. He writes on various issues related to personal finance, markets, economy and companies. Having over a decade of experience in financial journalism, Haris h… Read More
Click here to add News18 as your preferred news source on Google, Stay updated with all the latest business news, including market trends, stock updates, tax, IPO, banking finance, real estate, savings and investments. Get in-depth analysis, expert opinions, and real-time updates. Also Download the News18 App to stay updated!
First Published:
September 12, 2025, 09:41 IST
Disclaimer: Comments reflect users’ views, not News18’s. Please keep discussions respectful and constructive. Abusive, defamatory, or illegal comments will be removed. News18 may disable any comment at its discretion. By posting, you agree to our Terms of Use and Privacy Policy.
Questions around timing continue to dominate crypto discussions, especially for XRP. In a recent session, popular XRP investor and YouTuber Oscar Ramos was asked if it is too late to buy. His response was clear: under $3 remains a buying zone.
Ramos said that XRP recently traded at $2.73 before moving toward $2.90. He said that any price under $3 is where he personally goes “all in,” pointing to this level as a potential last opportunity before higher valuations.
XRP Army Shows Resilience
When asked to describe the XRP community in one word, Ramos chose “resilience.” He opened up about the group’s ability to hold firm during years of legal battles, market downturns, and constant uncertainty. The XRP Army, he said, has grown into one of the most consistent and determined crypto communities.
Portfolio Allocation and Risk
On portfolio strategy, Ramos suggested that XRP could make up around 30% of a beginner’s allocation, provided the rest is balanced between Bitcoin and other altcoins. He explained that while XRP has strong growth upside, no single asset should dominate a portfolio. This balance allows investors to capture upside without taking on extreme risk.
Why XRP Stands Out
Ramos shared his personal journey with XRP, admitting that he once avoided it due to the complexity of the project and its ongoing lawsuit with the SEC. His view changed after Ripple’s legal victories, which drew more attention to the token’s long-term prospects.
He pointed to Ripple’s expansion moves, including stablecoin plans, acquisitions of billion-dollar firms, and growing institutional interest, as signs that the project is positioning itself for wider adoption. In his view, these developments make XRP one of the few altcoins capable of competing with larger players over the next market cycle.
Looking Ahead
For Ramos, the $3 price level is not just a number. It represents a turning point where XRP could break out of its long consolidation phase. He stressed that while challenges remain, the combination of community resilience, corporate growth, and potential ETF approvals sets the stage for strong upside in the coming years.
At the time of writing, XRP is trading at $2.99 and is up by more than 1% in the last 24 hours.
A view of Cochin University of Science and Technology (CUSAT) in Kochi, Kerala.
| Photo Credit:
VIPIN CHANDRAN
The Cochin University of Science and Technology (CUSAT) has received an Indian patent for development in energy harvesting technology.
According to a CUSAT official, the patent covers a triboelectric nanogenerator (TENG) based on a polydimethylsiloxane (PDMS), a composite that incorporates a graphene oxide–conducting polymer nanohybrid.
The patent application was facilitated by the IPR Facilitation Cell at the Inter University Centre for IPR Studies (IUCIPRS), CUSAT, a CUSAT statement said.
This breakthrough innovation is the result of research led by Dr Honey John, Director of the Inter University Centre for Nanomaterials and Devices (IUCND) and Professor at the Department of Polymer Science and Rubber Technology (PS&RT), CUSAT.
The research team includes Dr Divya Jose, former PhD scholar, PS&RT, Dr Saji Joseph K J, associate professor, International School of Photonics – ISP, Dr Jelmy EJ, post-doctoral fellow, IUCND, Dr Vijoy K V former PhD scholar, ISP, and Dr Manoj N Department of Applied Chemistry.
The patented technology introduces a novel material composition combining conducting polymer, graphene oxide, and PDMS, enabling highly efficient energy harvesting from ambient mechanical sources such as vibrations, wind, and human motion, a CUSAT official said.
This advancement is particularly significant for powering nanoelectronic devices by converting otherwise wasted mechanical energy into usable electrical power.
Applications of this technology include self-powered sensors, wearable electronics, smart textiles, health monitoring devices, and motion-sensing systems, making it a promising solution for sustainable and energy-efficient innovations in the field of flexible electronics, the statement added.
Now that the iPhone 17, iPhone 17 Pro and iPhone Air have been announced, iOS 26 is set to hit older iPhone devices soon. The latest version of the OS brings several new features to iPhones, as well as Apple’s updated design language, Liquid Glass.
Liquid Glass adds a combination of translucency and shiny, glass-like accents throughout the user interface, giving the operating system a new look in more than one way. And despite all of the differences between it and what’s found on current iPhones right now, iOS 18, Liquid Glass isn’t nearly as dramatic as it looks upon first glance. That’s a good thing, since there’s no real learning curve, so anyone familiar with iOS will feel right at home.
Watch this: The New iPhone Air Changes the Game for Preorders
If you want a glimpse of just how Liquid Glass changes the look of your iPhone compared to iOS 18, I’ve highlighted some of the changes below. And if you’re looking to get one of the new iPhones, don’t miss the best iPhone 17 and iPhone Air pre-order deals.
Home screen
Apple kept the new Liquid Glass minimal on the home screen (left), with only minor changes to the default home screen appearance versus iOS 18’s.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson, Nelson Aguilar/CNET
Looking at the home screens, the primary difference you’ll find is that in iOS 26, the dock background and the search option that sits between the dock and the home screen icons are more transparent and have a sheen to the edges, whereas in iOS 18, these are slightly darker.
Other smaller changes are that the icons on iOS 26 look slightly larger, and some app icons seem to have been more influenced by the redesign than others, most notably (from the screenshots) Settings, Camera and Mail.
For Liquid Glass to really shine on the home screen, you’ll want to opt for the “All Clear” mode, which will create the most dramatic change to your icons and widgets. Going this route could potentially introduce some viewability issues, but the “reduce transparency” setting remedies this quite well.
Control Center
Things here are largely unchanged. Outside of the new glassy look in iOS 26 (left), the 1×2 and 2×1 controls are more rounded than those of iOS 18.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson, Nelson Aguilar/CNET
Things here are largely unchanged. Outside of the new glassy look in iOS 26, the 1×2 and 2×1 controls are more rounded than those of iOS 18.
Lock screen
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson, Nelson Aguilar/CNET
It’s easy to see the differences that Liquid Glass brings to the iPhone lock screen. The digital clock in iOS 26 dynamically resizes depending on the wallpaper and the number of notifications you have at any given moment, which is pretty cool. The clock itself on iOS 18 can be changed, but it won’t change in size in response to content displayed on the lock screen.
The background on notifications is clearly different between the two OS versions, with iOS 18 providing more opacity and black text versus iOS 26’s near-transparent background on white text. The controls at the bottom in iOS 26 also appear more like physical buttons with depth and more of a see-through background.
The new unlock effect in iOS 26 is that the motion of unlocking your iPhone will appear as though you’re lifting a sheet of glass, highlighted by a shiny edge to give it form when you begin to slide your finger up.
Menus and dynamic tab bars
iOS 26’s new Dynamic Tab (top) gives you a cleaner look and more space to view your content.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson, Nelson Aguilar/CNET
A new addition in iOS 26 is the introduction of dynamic tab bars in apps that will change depending on whether you’re scrolling or trying to perform a specific action. Apple says this will create a more intuitive experience while freeing up space for your content. If you were to replace the glass effect with heavily saturated colors, no one would blame you for mistaking this new tab bar with what Google’s doing in Android 16 in some of its apps — they look a lot alike. But compared to iOS 18, this new dynamic tab bar should not only reduce sifting through multiple menus, but it looks pretty good in the process.
iOS 26 will dynamically adapt to light and dark backgrounds
In iOS 26, the color of menu icons and icon text will adapt depending on the background.
Apple/GIF by CNET
While it’s harder to compare Liquid Glass to iOS 18 here, an upcoming feature is that buttons and menus will adapt depending on the content’s background color. For instance, when you’re scrolling through an app with a light background, the floating menu options will appear with black text for easier viewing and will automatically change to white upon scrolling to a dark background.
In iOS 18 (top), some aspects of the user interface would appear darker depending on the color of the background. Take a look at the top and middle examples to see how it compares to Liquid Glass at the bottom.
Screenshots by Jeff Carlson, Nelson Aguilar/CNET
iOS has had this type of feature show up in a less dramatic fashion before, as you can tell from the photos app screenshots above. Comparing these to what’s on the horizon, it’s hard not to get excited about the small tweaks Liquid Glass has in store, too.
Those are just a few of our initial findings, and we’ll likely add more once we surface them. If you want more about iOS 26, check out three upcoming features that are a bigger deal than Liquid Glass.
Watch this: iPhone Air Is a Wild Card – and Starts a Big Change for Apple
On the 24th anniversary of the Sept. 11th attacks, Fox News correspondent Eric Shawn reported live on “Fox & Friends” from Lower Manhattan, where survivors, families, first responders and public officials gathered to honor the nearly 3,000 lives lost.
During the segment, Shawn revealed that he himself suffers from 9/11-related cancer.
“I have two different diagnoses under the World Trade Center Program,” he said, referencing the federal program that provides monitoring and treatment for survivors, responders and others directly affected in New York, at the Pentagon and in Shanksville, Pennsylvania.
TUNNEL TO TOWERS COMMEMORATES 9/11 WITH MORTGAGES FOR HEROES, NATIONAL STEEL JOURNEY
“It is hard to believe that it has been nearly a quarter of a century since that day, when radical Islamic terrorism attacked the very heart of our city and our country,” Shawn said.
“It is a philosophy that basically hates our principles, our freedoms, what our nation stands for. That has not diminished — and today, again, we all gather here to remember what was lost.”
Fox News’ Eric Shawn disclosed his cancer diagnosis and bronchitis issues related to 9/11 toxic dust exposure.(Getty Images; Fox News)
The tragedy extends far beyond that day, he emphasized.
“While 2,977 people were murdered here that day, the number who have died from 9/11-related illnesses has increased from the toxic dust that was released,” Shawn said.
“We’re all in this together.”
The CDC indicates that 48,000 people have now reported 9/11-related cancers, with nearly 10,000 diagnoses in just the past year.
ON THIS DAY IN HISTORY, SEPTEMBER 11, 2001, US EXPERIENCES THE WORST TERRORIST ATTACK IN AMERICAN HISTORY
More than 3,700 first responders have died since 9/11, including 2,300 who had cancer.
The Fire Department of the City of New York has been hit especially hard, with 409 of its members lost to post-9/11 illnesses.
“While 2,977 people were murdered here that day, the number who have died from 9/11 related illnesses has increased from the toxic dust that was released,” Shawn said.(Robert Giroux/Getty Images)
For Shawn, the statistics are deeply personal, as he suffers from both respiratory issues and cancer directly related to the attacks. But he said he is one of the lucky ones.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
“I think of all those who were killed that day and those who continue to suffer because of that philosophy — that is not diminished,” he said. “We have to condemn it. We have to despise it. You will never forget.”
“If you were below Canal Street, basically, you were exposed to the dust,” Shawn said.(iStock)
The health impact reaches far beyond first responders, Shawn said.
“If you were below Canal Street, basically, you were exposed to the dust. I was here reporting on it. That’s what happened with me. I mean, I’m very, very lucky. I think of all those who are suffering much greater … I’ve lost a few friends from this, of course.”
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
Shawn’s own diagnosis came decades later, in the form of a bronchitis-related respiratory issue and then a cancer diagnosis just this year.
“Back then, I remember thinking, maybe in 20, 30 years later I’ll get something. Well, here it is, 24 years.”
MORE IN HEALTH NEWS
Shawn emphasized the importance of coming together as a nation. “We’re all in this together. I mean, we are,” he said. “We are all in it together.”
Khloe Quill is a lifestyle production assistant with Fox News Digital. She and the lifestyle team cover a range of story topics including food and drink, travel, and health.
You don’t have permission to access “http://food.ndtv.com/news/food-festivals-and-exciting-events-happening-in-september-october-2025-that-are-not-to-be-missed-9209243” on this server.
Some say Xinjiang is nothing but dust and desert, with no blue skies. But stand by the shores of Sayram Lake, watch the deep blue waters ripple in the breeze, and you’ll realize Xinjiang is far more than what you’ve been told. Here, you’ll see people deeply connected to their land, with cultures blending naturally into everyday life. No filters. No retouching. Just raw, honest beauty, captured as it truly is. Along the way, CGTN digital reporter Wang Tao spoke with travelers visiting Xinjiang for the first time. Let’s hear their impressions and see if their stories sound different from the ones you’ve heard before.
A year after the Maharashtra government approved the Green Integrated Data Centre Parks in the Mumbai Metropolitan Region, it has signed a Memorandum of Understanding with Lodha Developers for setting up a data centre park in Palava.
In 2019, the state government declared Integrated Data Centres as a ‘Thrust Area’ for industrial growth in the state. Now, with the rising demand for data centres and the growth of cloud computing, artificial intelligence (AI), and digital services the government has outlined a total proposed investment of ₹30,000 crore, claiming the same to create 6,000 direct and indirect jobs. The park, spread over 370 acres, with a planned capacity of 2 gigawatts, is designed to host multiple leading international and domestic players.
To begin with, three parks will be set up under the programme in the MMR region. Combined investments are anticipated from Lodha and various data centre players in this park.
Green energy policy to power data centres, reduce carbon footprint
The Maharashtra government introduced the Green Integrated Data Centre Parks policy last year in October. Under this policy, data centres, which are significant consumers of electricity, will be powered by green and alternative energy sources.
“The Green Integrated Data Centre Parks policy will not only create employment opportunities, boost Maharashtra’s & Indian economy, but will also operate on clean and green energy sources benefiting generations. We look forward to many such partnerships with the government, all of which enable India to become a global leader by 2047,” said Abhishek Lodha, MD & CEO of Lodha Developers.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
PEPCO je u ponudu uveo novitet koji je privukao veliku pažnju na društvenim mrežama. Riječ je o sklopivim kolicima koja se najčešće koriste za kupovinu. Dizajnirana su za olakšano prenošenje stvari poput namirnica, opreme ili drugih težih tereta, a kada se ne koriste, mogu se jednostavno sklopiti i spremiti.
Za sada su se pojavila u Pepco trgovinama u Poljskoj. Prema objavi u jednoj lokalnoj Facebook grupi, kolica su izdržljiva – mogu podnijeti teret do 25 kilograma, imaju izvlačnu ručku i kotačiće, a dolaze i s poklopcem. Cijena im je 17 eura.
Postala su viralna na TikToku
Na TikToku su također postala viralna nakon što je korisnica Agnes objavila video u kojem ih prikazuje i demonstrira kako se rasklapaju i sklapaju. Njezin je video u kratkom roku prikupio 1.4 milijuna pregleda i mnoštvo komentara.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Mnogi su istaknuli kako se slična kolica mogu pronaći i u drugim trgovinama, poput Lidla, dok su drugi napisali da bi im takva kolica odlično poslužila za kupovinu. “Lidl. Već otprilike 5 godina svake godine u ponudi”, “Kupio bih ih za nošenje kupovine iz supermarketa”, “O moj Bože, stvarno ih moram nabaviti”, “Imam i super su”, “Treba mi”, bili su neki od komentara.
Za sada ova kolica nismo uočili u našim Pepco trgovinama, ali nadamo se da će uskoro stići i kod nas. Ako vam se čine praktična i mislite da bi vam dobro došla, slični modeli dostupni su online, primjerice na Amazonu i Temuu, pa ih je moguće nabaviti i tako ako vam se ne čeka da stigne Pepcova verzija.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
Thursday marks the 24th anniversary of the Sept. 11, 2001 terrorist attacks that saw two planes flown into the Twin Towers in New York, killing nearly 3,000.
Kevin Danni was there. The St. Francis High graduate and father of Golden Knights linebacker Luke Danni reflects back every anniversary on how he escaped from the 61st floor of the South Tower.
“I’m so lucky there were so many who sacrificed to save me,” he said.
Danni told his story to a rapt audience earlier this week at a meeting of the YMCA of the Foothills QB Club, where he is president.
He was 22 years old, a recent graduate of Occidental College and had been sent to Morgan Stanley in New York to begin training at the Twin Towers on Sept. 10, 2001. The next morning, a training meeting ended up being 15 minutes late because a speaker went too long, so during a break, he decided not to go to the observation deck on the 107th floor.
Instead, he looked out a window and saw what he thought was confetti flying around, It was papers from the aftermath of a plane running into the North Tower. Soon he saw a fire. At first, evacuation from the South Tower was not recommended. But Danni said the head of security, Rick Rescorla, overrode orders and told everyone to leave.
When Danni reached the 55th floor walking down the stairs, he heard an explosion. “The walls cracked,” he said.
It was a plane hitting the South Tower.
“I knew it was a terrorist attack,” he said. “I started to descend and passed firefighters going up the stairs. It took 45 minutes to evacuate.”
When he went outside, he said, “I saw both on fire.”
He went to find a pay phone so he could call his loved ones and tell them he was OK. Then the towers started to collapse.
“I heard a rumble,” he said. “It was 57 minutes since the plane hit. I saw the dust cloud. I turned and ran.”
Danni said he learned the security man, Rescorla, after escorting employees outside, went back up to make sure all had been evacuated from the office. The security man and 343 firefighters perished trying to help others.
“I got to see so many acts of heroism,” Danni said.
He was dating his future wife, Helena, at the time. They eventually married and their son, Luke, was born. This week he’ll be having fun watching Luke play quarterback for St. Francis on Friday night against Muir.
“Every 9/11, he says, ‘Dad, I’m glad you’re here,’” Kevin said.
This is a daily look at the positive happenings in high school sports. To submit any news, please email [email protected].
Noise has launched the NoiseFit Endeavour Pro in India for under Rs 10,000. This smartwatch features dual-band GPS with 5-satellite support, 9-axis motion sensor, 1.5-inch AMOLED display and more. The company claims that it remains safe even after more than 2,000 drops.
Commenting on the launch, Amit Khatri, Co founder, Noise said “At Noise, our vision is to build technology that empowers people to live, move, and explore with freedom and confidence. The NoiseFit Endeavour Pro embodies this vision, a smartwatch born from real customer insights and designed with purpose. By combining rugged durability with intelligent features, we’re making advanced, adventure-ready technology accessible to adventurers, enabling them to push boundaries and unlock new possibilities in their journeys.”
NoiseFit Endeavour Pro – Key Features
According to the company, these are the key features of the smartwatch:
Add Zee Business as a Preferred Source
NoiseFit Endeavour Pro: Tracking & Navigation
Dual-band GPS with 5-satellite support for accurate location tracking, even in areas with poor signal
9-axis motion sensor for terrain-adaptive movement tracking
Preloaded training courses for guided workouts anywhere
NoiseFit Endeavour Pro: Durability
Titanium alloy bezel for strength with a premium look
Built to withstand 2,000+ drops
Water-resistant up to 164 feet (50 meters)
Operates in extreme temperatures from -5°C to 50°C
NoiseFit Endeavour Pro: Utility & Display
Built-in 2W flashlight — ideal for low-light conditions like night hikes or early runs
1.5-inch AMOLED display with 1000 nits brightness for visibility in direct sunlight
Touch-friendly UI synced with the NoiseFit App for easy performance tracking
NoiseFit Endeavour Pro: Battery Life
Up to 28 days of standby battery life
Built for long outdoor usage without frequent charging
NoiseFit Endeavour Pro: Compatibility & Sync
Compatible with fitness apps like Strava, Apple Health, and NoiseFit App
Helps track, analyze, and improve fitness performance
NoiseFit Endeavour Pro: Designed for All Explorers
Tailored for urban runners, adventurers, cyclists, and outdoor enthusiasts
Combines rugged design with intelligent features for a versatile lifestyle
NoiseFit Endeavour Pro: Colour
The smartwatch is available in two colour options: Carbon Black and Driftstone Beige.
NoiseFit Endeavour Pro: Price and Availability
The NoiseFit Endeavour Pro is available for purchase starting September 11, at a special launch price of Rs 9,999 on Noise’s official website, Amazon, Flipkart, and select offline retail partners, including Croma.
Disney Cruise is coming to Asia in March 2026, and if you, like me, cannot wait to put on your Minnie headbands and sing Elsa’s ‘Let It Go’ loudly enough for the neighbours to hear, then here is the research I have already done. Think of this as your starter kit before you decide to set sail with Mickey and friends.
Disney Cruise Asia promises magical experiences, themed dining, and family fun, making it one of the most unique vacation ideas to book now.(AI generated)
Why Singapore?
The first Asian Disney cruise will sail from Singapore. The city is clean, efficient and already a favourite stopover for travellers. Hong Kong and Japan may have Disneyland, but this cruise brings something different to the region. It is not about roller coasters on land but about Disney magic floating on water.
Booking made easy
You don’t need a travel agent. Booking is simple if you do it directly.
Browse the Disney Cruise Line website, or make it easy with the app.
Pay a deposit to hold your spot.
Pay the rest in as many instalments as you need to until three months before sailing.
This way, you spread out the cost and avoid inflated agent fees. I triple checked the numbers with my calculator because I did not trust my own excitement, and it really does save money. Plus, when you call their customer service, you feel like royalty. I have tested this theory in panic mode and teary mode, and they were calm every time. Fairy godmother energy at its best!
Insider tip: If there is a change in their schedule, or a glitch at any point, a direct booking will get you instant help and a refund!
The visa puzzle(for Indians)
Here is where things get confusing. Singapore visas are easy in theory, but the current system means different regions in India are linked to different authorised agents. Because of the way the system is divided, my paperwork in Bhopal still needs to go through Mumbai. Agencies like Thomas Cook are safe bets, but do not leave this for the last moment. Visas are issued only within 30 days of travel, which gives you a narrow window. If paperwork stresses you out and budget is not your worry, this might be the moment you say yes to a travel agent.
What makes a Disney cruise special
This is where Disney sets itself apart. It is not just a ship, it is a floating theme park mixed with a Broadway stage and a five-star hotel. Based on what has been announced, here is what you can expect.
Entertainment everywhere: Broadway-style musicals, character meet and greets, themed deck parties and fireworks at sea. Yes, actual fireworks.
Thrills on board: Roller coasters at sea, splash zones, water slides and even mini water parks. Kids can go wild while you enjoy some quiet time.
Clubs for kids and teens: Drop them off and let them join supervised activities, art sessions or even Marvel and Star Wars themed games. All of this is included in your fare, no extra charges.
Spaces for adults: While the kids are busy with Mickey, grown-ups get bars, lounges, spas and even adult-only pools. Think quiet cocktails while the little ones are off building lightsabers.
Food with no fine print: Room service is complimentary, dining is included, and you can even have breakfast in bed at no extra cost. On most cruises, that level of service comes with a bill. On Disney, it comes with a smile.
Themed staterooms: Cabins designed to bring Disney stories alive, complete with details that will keep fans happy. You can wake up feeling like a royal without leaving your bed.
The cruise is designed so families can have fun together but also find their own moments apart. That balance is what makes it feel special.
Extend your trip in Singapore
Since you are flying in, give yourself a couple of days to enjoy Singapore before boarding. A short three-day plan could look like this.
Day 1: Stroll through Gardens by the Bay to see the Supertree Grove light up at night, snap photos with the Merlion and walk the Marina Bay Sands promenade. It is touristy, but it feels like the city is showing off its best.
Day 2: For those chasing thrills, Universal Studios on Sentosa Island is the obvious pick. If you prefer something calmer, book tickets for the SEA Aquarium. You can also catch the “Wings of Time” outdoor night show by the beach.
Day 3: Visit the Oceanarium, have dim sum at Din Tai Fung and spend a few hours shopping at VivoCity. It has everything from Sephora to Charles and Keith, and it is where the Sentosa line starts, so the location is perfect.
Food in Singapore deserves its own plan. Hawker centres are the city’s beating heart. Head to Lau Pa Sat for satay skewers grilled on the street, try laksa for a spicy coconut noodle soup and do not miss chicken rice, which is practically a national dish. Carrot cake here is not the sweet cake we know, but a savoury dish made with radish and eggs that is oddly addictive.
For a more polished meal, there is Din Tai Fung for dumplings or Jumbo Seafood for the famous chilli crab. For retail therapy and food in the same stretch, Orchard Road delivers both with ease. And for a desi fix, Little India is full of familiar comfort food, while Annalakshmi offers a wholesome buffet near Clarke Quay. The city is also very vegan and vegetarian-friendly, so you will never be short of choices.
Check the website before you get too comfortable because sailings are already almost fully booked till August 2026. So yes, panic, hurry and start researching before you miss the boat, literally.
Disney cruise in Asia is still six months away, but it is worth planning now. Book directly, sort out the visa puzzle and make time to enjoy Singapore. The cruise promises something no other holiday really offers – a mix of childhood fantasy and adult indulgence. March 2026 might feel far away, but I already have my Minnie headbands ready!
Similar articles for you
Andaman’s untouched charms: A guide to your mindful island escape
Forget safaris: At Kolkata’s hidden zoo gem, watch exotic wildlife up close!
Tropic of Cancer, one of Bhopal’s underrated gems: Scenic drive you cannot miss
₹2500″>Travel smarter, not harder: Your guide to affordable trolley bags under ₹2500
Saoirse Ronan,31, is hailed as one of the finest actresses of her generation. She first made waves in the film industry as a child star in iconic films such as Atonement and The Lovely Bones.
After receiving her first Oscar nomination at the tender age of 13 for Atonement, she has since been nominated three more times for her roles in Brooklyn, Lady Bird and Little Women.
Despite starring in some of the most talked-about films of the past decade, Ronan prefers to keep her personal life private and seldom uses social media.
However, it’s well-known that she’s in a relationship with a fellow actor who currently stars in one of the most-watched streaming shows of the 2020s.
The couple have reportedly reached a significant milestone in their relationship, so let’s delve into what we know about Ronan’s current life, reports the Mirror.
Inside Saoirse Ronan’s life from ‘dark’ new role to baby with famous husband (Image: GETTY)
Read more: Andy Murray’s brother Jamie ‘splits from wife’ and signs up to celeb dating app
Read more: Molly-Mae’s NTA sparks fury fans fume ‘what on Earth’ over controversial win
Who is Saoirse Ronan’s husband Jack Lowden?
Jack Lowden, aged 35, is a Scottish actor best known for his role as MI5 agent River Cartwright in the Apple TV+ drama Slow Horses.
He has been romantically linked with Ronan since 2018 after they starred together in the historical drama Mary Queen of Scots, which also featured Barbie star Margot Robbie.
Lowden’s acting credits also include the BBC drama series The Gold, the role of war poet Siegfried Sassoon in Benediction and a recent appearance in the action film Tornado.
Saoirse Ronan is married to Slow Horses star Jack Lowden (Image: GETTY)
The Slow Horses star is next set to portray Mr Darcy in the Dolly Alderton-penned adaptation of Pride and Prejudice for Netflix, opposite Emma Corrin as Elizabeth Bennet.
In July 2024, The Irish Independent reported that Ronan and Lowden had tied the knot in Edinburgh.
Has Saoirse Ronan given birth?
Reports emerged in May 2025 that Ronan and Lowden were expecting their first child together after the actress was spotted with a baby bump in London.
The actors did not comment to confirm the news at the time, but Ronan later stepped out at Paris Fashion Week with her bump on full display in a loose emerald-black gown.
The famous couple have reportedly welcomed their first child together (Image: GETTY)
Since then, the couple are now believed to have quietly welcomed their first child recently after photos of the pair pushing a buggy were obtained by the Sun.
The Daily Mail has reported that production on Pride and Prejudice has slowed following Lowden becoming a father for the first time.
“But the show must go on, and that means the producers have had to keep on filming and that has meant they have had to have some stand-ins for Mr Darcy,” a source said.
“So it has been a case of lookalikes for Jack so that there is no disruption.”
At this time the name and sex of Ronan and Lowden’s first child has not been made public.
The Irish star displayed her baby bump at this year’s Paris Fashion Week (Image: GETTY)
What is Saoirse Ronan’s new film Bad Apples about?
Ronan’s film career is showing no signs of slowing down amidst her exciting baby news. Her upcoming feature, Bad Apples, has just had its premiere at the Toronto International Film Festival (TIFF), although a broader release date remains unconfirmed.
Adapted from writer Rasmus Andersson’s Swedish-language novel De Oönskade, The Little Women actress plays a British teacher called Maria who resorts to extreme measures during a clash with one of her pupils.
The official synopsis states: “Maria is a teacher finding her class of ten year-olds disrupted by one unruly pupil.”
Ronan feuds with a disruptive pupil in her dark new film coming soon (Image: PULSE FILMS)
Limited details about the production are available currently as no trailer has been released, but it has garnered positive critiques from TIFF.
IndieWire described it as a “deliciously dark comedy about the pressures of a broken school system” in their glowing assessment.
Meanwhile, The Wrap notes: “[Director Jonatan] Etzler wields the film’s urgent satire like a scalpel, precisely cutting away at all the lies we so easily find ourselves telling that mask the darker truths about who we are.”
Following Bad Apples, Ronan is set to appear alongside Austin Butler in the 2000s-era romantic drama Deep Cuts, which A24 is producing under the direction of The Iron Claw’s Sean Durkin.
A critical survey conducted across all income groups highlighted India’s household struggles with monthly and annual expenses amidst rising inflation.
Indian household expenses are soaring every month. (representative image)
Rising inflation threatens to break the back of the Indian middle class. According to Worldpanel India’s Kharcha 3.0 report, average household expenses in India have jumped significantly in the last three years. From about Rs 42,000 in June 2022 to over Rs 56,000 in March, there has been a 33 per cent rise in monthly expenses.
Around 6,000 households were surveyed as part of a syndicated study, which revealed that around 45 per cent of families in India today are struggling to manage their expenses and only 17 per cent feel they are living comfortably.
Inflation and increasing expenses have swelled most drastically in urban cities, where average quarterly spending has gone from Rs 52,711 in June 2022 to Rs 73,579 in March 2025. Over the same period, rural households that spent Rs 36,104 are now paying Rs 46,623 every quarter to make ends meet.
Increasing Expenses Hurt All Income Groups
A multifold jump in expenses has resulted in major budget constraints and financial stress on Indian citizens across income categories. The urban NCCS AB households, who are considered the most affluent, have recorded a 15 per cent increase in their yearly expenses. The rural NCCS CDE households have undergone an 18 per cent jump in annual expenses.
“With rising expenses across both urban and rural segments and most families prioritising essentials, savings, and debt repayment, consumers are becoming increasingly cautious in their choices,” said K Ramakrishnan, Managing Director – South Asia, Worldpanel by Numerator.
Rising expenses have weakened an Indian citizen’s buying capacity and consumer sentiment. The Reserve Bank of India’s Consumer Confidence Index reflects the same, enduring a drop from 98.5 in March 2024 to 95.4 in May 2025. During the survey, a whopping 59 per cent of households expected no improvement in their financial condition for the coming quarter, while 30 per cent worried it could get worse.
Indians are now exercising great caution with their monthly or annual budgets and prioritising needs above wants, including essentials, education and debt repayment. In a hypothetical scenario, 54 per cent of households confirmed that if provided extra income, they would prefer to keep it in savings. Only 7 per cent said they would buy a luxury item with it.
Business Desk
A team of writers and reporters decodes vast terms of personal finance and making money matters simpler for you. From latest initial public offerings (IPOs) in the market to best investment options, we cover al…Read More
A team of writers and reporters decodes vast terms of personal finance and making money matters simpler for you. From latest initial public offerings (IPOs) in the market to best investment options, we cover al… Read More
First Published:
September 11, 2025, 18:11 IST
News business Household Spending Up 33% In India Since 2022, Nearly Half Face Budget Stress
Disclaimer: Comments reflect users’ views, not News18’s. Please keep discussions respectful and constructive. Abusive, defamatory, or illegal comments will be removed. News18 may disable any comment at its discretion. By posting, you agree to our Terms of Use and Privacy Policy.
The crypto cycle is heating up for September, but not all projects are coming along for the ride. Solana remains steady, dominant, and institutionally favoured, but its recent price action is putting traders to sleep. As a result, new wallet addresses are favouring Layer Brett over the crypto. Layer Brett, a new meme coin, has now gathered more than 5,000 holders, who have pulled in more than $3.3 million in presale funding.
Layer Brett: The new meme coin investors aren’t joking with
At this point, the native Layer Brett token (LBRETT) isn’t just being accumulated; it’s now being hunted. The frenzy feels almost surreal. Within weeks of its launch, Layer Brett is already trending on social platforms, drawing in both retail traders and analysts looking for big returns.
The rush towards the Layer Brett project is based on technological superiority and advantage. It’s built as a full Layer 2 blockchain on Ethereum, designed to fix real issues like high gas fees and slow transaction times.
With the ability to process up to 10,000 transactions per second and fees dropping to as little as $0.0001, it positions itself as a low-gas-fee crypto with practical utility. This makes it stand out from traditional meme coins and even from some established Layer 1 networks.
DeFi staking is another arsenal under Layer Brett’s belt. Early buyers can lock in their tokens for staking rewards of more than 777% APY. For new crypto investors, this passive income opportunity could set them ahead in a market where volatility runs amok.
Layer Brett’s deflationary token model is another draw for new crypto investors. With a hard cap of just 10 billion tokens, scarcity is built in from its foundation. That’s an edge that makes it avoid the regular dilution problem that plagues meme coins in the cryptocurrency industry.
Solana consolidates as investors set sights on Alpenglow
The current Solana price action is backed by an enormous daily trading volume of $9.47 billion. That kind of liquidity and daily turnover shows Solana’s dominant position in Web 3 despite being a well-established Layer-1. Yet the Solana price keeps consolidating, displaying steady momentum even in a volatile market.
Eyes are now turning towards the Alpenglow upgrade, whose mainnet activation is targeted for early 2026. The goal is to improve how fast the network confirms transactions and make it easier to build on. It’s also expected to help the chain run more efficiently overall.
This comes at a time when other Layer 1 platforms are stepping up. Speed and ease of use are more important than ever in the evolving cryptocurrency universe. Solana already has strong support from developers and investors. If the upgrade delivers, it could bring new momentum to the chain in the months ahead.
Developers are optimistic that this update will also reduce congestion during high-volume periods. If successful, it could make Solana a more attractive base layer for DeFi and gaming projects moving forward.
Conclusion
Solana keeps tearing when it comes to new rollouts. However, the question for new crypto investors isn’t whether Solana works or runs fast; it already does. The challenge is whether there’s still room for exponential ROI compared to early-stage crypto presales. That’s where Layer Brett changes the equation. The new crypto is still at a low entry point of $0.0055, while possessing a sturdier foundation than Solana.
Suresh Kalpathi, ED and Chairman of Veranda Learning
| Photo Credit:
BIJOY GHOSH/businessline
The Board of listed education enterprise Veranda Learning Solutions have approved the formal demerger of its commerce vertical as part of the company’s ‘Veranda 2.0’ vision. The newly-created entity, J.K. Shah Commerce Education, will serve as the platform for all future operations of the commerce vertical. It will integrate Veranda’s commerce education brands—J.K. Shah classes, BB Virtuals, Navkar Digital Institute, Tapasya College of Commerce, and Logic School of Management.
As part of this vision, the commerce vertical is being positioned as a gateway to international career opportunities in finance, in addition to a platform for finance and accounting aspirants. It already provides globally recognised courses such as CPA (Certified Public Accountant) and CFA (Chartered Financial Analyst). The vertical is targeting significant revenue growth to surpass ₹1,000 crore revenue by FY30, Veranda said in a statement.
Vertical to focus on global finance careers with CPA, CFA
As a first step, Veranda Learning acquired the remaining 24% equity stake held by Prof. J.K. Shah in Veranda XL Learning Solutions, the principal company within the commerce portfolio. With this acquisition, Veranda XL has now become a wholly-owned subsidiary, simplifying the group structure.
Shareholders to get 1:1 shares in J.K. Shah Commerce Education
Upon completion of the demerger, each shareholder of Veranda Learning Solutions will receive one share in J.K. Shah Commerce Education, subject to regulatory and statutory clearances. The timeline for completion of the demerger and listing is approximately 12 months.
Move to unlock long-term value
Suresh Kalpathi, Executive Director and Chairman, Veranda Learning Solutions, said: “By creating J.K. Shah Commerce Education as an independent entity, we are unlocking long-term value for our shareholders, while empowering the vertical to pursue accelerated growth. The move will provide sharper focus, greater agility, and independent access to capital markets, thereby enhancing opportunities for students and stakeholders alike.”
“Importantly, Prof. J.K. Shah will continue to have an economic interest in the new entity, underscoring his long-term commitment to the business,” Veranda Learning said in a statement.
Tired of the same old Netflix recommendations? There’s a much larger world of content lurking just beneath the surface of your homepage, accessible through a series of secret codes. Most viewers are unaware that this hidden catalog even exists.
Think of these codes as a master key to Netflix’s entire library. They unlock hundreds of hyper-specific micro-genres, allowing you to bypass the algorithm and browse exactly what you’re in the mood for. Whether you’re searching for cult ’80s horror films, heartwarming teen romances, or even the platform’s collection of “short-ass movies,” these codes take you there instantly.
Using this system feels like stepping behind the velvet rope of the service. It transforms the often frustrating experience of endless scrolling into a fun and efficient treasure hunt. If you want to break free from the recommendation loop, these codes are your ticket to discovering hidden gems you would never have found otherwise.
For more, check out our favorite sci-fi movies on Netflix and learn how to share your favorite Netflix clips via text message or social media.
Netflix codes are a set of unique numerical identifiers that can help you find specific genres or sub-genres in the Netflix library on the streamer’s website (not the app).
Typically, you’re constrained to the genres available via the main Netflix menu. There’s no way to choose by specific category other than what’s been chosen for you when you log on. Using these codes opens up an entire library of options for you to choose from that can help you better settle on what to watch for the night. It can even help you discover shows and movies.
Adding these codes to the ends of Netflix URLs lets you directly access collections of movies and TV shows that fall under your chosen category. For example, if you’re short on time and want to queue up a shorter movie, you could check the 90-Minute Movies category with the code 81466194. Looking for something for your entire brood to enjoy? The “Family Movie Night” collection, accessed with code 2013975, is chock-full of favorites even Grandma can get into.
There are more than 36,000 codes to choose from so don’t worry about memorizing them or trying random sequences. Resources like Netflix-Codes.com have an entire directory to sift through so you can search for what you’d like to watch there and find corresponding codes in no time.
The Netflix-Codes site has a full directory of all the available categories on Netflix.
Netflix-Codes.com/Screenshot by CNET
How do I find Netflix’s secret menus of movies and shows?
There isn’t an all-encompassing Netflix secret menu per se. Instead, you will use URLs with special codes to display certain curated collections of movies and shows.
Netflix-Codes.com has a good list of the streaming platform’s hidden genre categories and subcategories. In total, there are about 20 top-level categories covering genres like animation, foreign films and classic movies. Within those main genres are many more hyper-specific subgenres denoted by numeric codes.
All you need to do is find the category you want, copy the related code and append it to the end of a Netflix URL.
What kinds of categories does Netflix offer?
There’s much more to Netflix than what you’ve been scrolling through. At last count, there were more than 36,000 unique categories to explore.
The entirety of the categories available on Netflix starts with broad main genres like Action, Comedy and Drama, but they get more specific as you dive even deeper. There are straight-to-the-point collections like Movies Directed by Women (code 2974953), or more specifically targeted curated lists, like Supernatural Soaps (code 81238162), just in case you like your werewolves with a side of angst and romance.
Rather than relying solely on the standard homepage categories or Netflix’s algorithm, you can use these secret codes to pinpoint and explore different nooks and crannies of the catalog to find hidden gems.
Netflix codes for award-winning movies and shows
Netflix secret codes are exactly that — secret. There’s no official directory, and it’s hard to get a full list, as categories will go empty as movies and shows move on and off Netflix. The names of categories will also change often as well so you’ll want to be vigilant when you go searching for what you want to watch.
To make it easier for you, there are even categories that you can use to find all the award-winning movies and shows to be discovered on the streamer.
If you’re not comfortable with editing Netflix URLs, you can use a browser extension to access the secret menus. The Better Browse for Netflix extension for Chrome is a great choice. Here’s how to use it:
1. Go to the Chrome Web Store and search for “Better Browse for Netflix.” (Note that this extension is unavailable for Firefox users.)
2. Click Add to Chrome.
3. Click Add Extension.
4. Log into your Netflix account in a new tab.
If the extension is installed, you’ll see a Browse All option at the top of your Netflix home screen next to My List. Click it to scroll through the subgenres or to search through specific categories.
Adding the Better Browse for Netflix extension to Chrome gives you a drop-down menu with Netflix categories.
Screenshot by CNET
Alternatively, you can use the FindFlix: Netflix Secret Category Finder browser extension for Chrome or Firefox. This add-on will create a drop-down menu complete with Netflix categories for your browser that you can scroll through by clicking on the FF icon that will appear on the top right of your screen. There’s no need to scroll Netflix natively with this add-on and it features 7,500 categories alphabetized for your convenience.
A third way is through the Netflix Codes website. Here’s how:
2. Find the genre or subgenre you want to explore.
3. Tap the code next to the genre or subgenre you want.
4. If you’re on a device that has the Netflix app installed, the app should open and take you directly to the genre or subgenre you chose. If you don’t have the app installed, it’ll open Netflix through the browser and you can view the specific movies and shows available.
5. Tap the title you want to watch and it’ll start playing.
Finally, if you’re comfortable with creating custom URLs, you can use Netflix codes manually in your browser. Here’s how:
1. Visit Netflix-codes.com on any PC or mobile browser.
2. Find the genre or subgenre you want to explore.
3. In another tab, type in http://www.netflix.com/browse/genre/INSERTNUMBER, but replace INSERTNUMBER with the specific genre or subgenre code. For instance, http://www.netflix.com/browse/genre/81466194 will take you to “90-Minute Movies.”
4. If done correctly, you’ll be taken to Netflix to peruse the titles available in that section.
Simply repeat this process the next time you find a code for a Netflix category you’d like to explore. You can do this as many times as you’d like.
For more Netflix tips, learn how to get the most out of Netflix on your phone or mobile device and how to improve picture quality on streaming services.
For older adults, minor falls can pose major threats, as their risk of death after a fall has tripled in the U.S. over the last 30 years.
Some experts believe that certain medications — a category called fall risk-increasing drugs (FRIDs) — could be to blame.
Dr. Thomas A. Farley, a Washington, D.C.–based public health expert, writes in the medical publication JAMA that lifestyle changes alone can’t explain the spike.
COMMON PAINKILLERS MAY FUEL DEADLY SUPERBUGS THAT RESIST ANTIBIOTICS, STUDY WARNS
“There is plenty of reason to believe that the surge in fall deaths may be tied to the soaring use of certain prescription drugs,” he writes.
Farley noted that these drugs are widely used among older adults, and their use has grown over the past few decades.
The risk of death after falling among older adults has tripled in the U.S. over the last 30 years.(iStock)
“Cutting back on unnecessary FRIDs could be a simple but powerful way to reduce fall rates and help seniors remain safe, independent and active as they age,” the researchers wrote in the study, published in BMC Geriatrics.
What to know about FRIDs
FRIDs could make people more likely to fall because they can cause drowsiness, dizziness, slower reaction times or problems with balance and coordination, according to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.
POPULAR BACK PAIN MEDICATION LINKED TO BRAIN HEALTH RISKS IN SOME PATIENTS
This category of medications includes common drugs such as beta-blockers (often used for heart conditions), anticholinergics (used for allergies, bladder issues or depression), and even proton pump inhibitors (for acid reflux), which may not directly cause falls, but can make injuries worse if a fall happens.
The most concerning FRIDs are those that act on the brain and nervous system — particularly opioids, benzodiazepines, gabapentinoids and antidepressants, one doctor stated.(iStock)
The most concerning FRIDs, according to Farley, are those that act on the brain and nervous system, including the following.
Opioids (painkillers)
Benzodiazepines (tranquilizers and sleep aids)
Gabapentinoids (like gabapentin, often prescribed for nerve pain)
Antidepressants
“The discussion of risk versus benefit is best to be had with a primary care physician who truly knows the patient and their specific risk factors.”
“The easiest way to think of medications that increase the risk of falls is any medication that changes a person’s ability to clearly perceive and navigate the world,” Dr. Kenneth J. Perry, a physician based in South Carolina, told Fox News Digital. “Standing or walking without falling takes a great deal of coordination between different parts of a person’s body.”
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
Previous studies of FRIDs suggest a link to an increased risk of falling.
In one Swiss study last year, a group of seniors 74 and older were tracked over three years. Those taking any FRID at all were 13% more likely to fall, 15% more likely to suffer an injurious fall and 12% more likely to fall multiple times.
In one study that tracked seniors for three years, those taking any fall risk-increasing drug faced a 15% higher chance of an injurious fall.(iStock)
For those taking multiple FRIDs, the risks were even higher, with 22% more total falls and 33% more injurious falls.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
There are some limitations to these studies, according to Perry.
“Many times, there are obvious associations between the two items, but that does not mean that there is a specific causation,” he told Fox News Digital. “Although what appears to be a logical conclusion of FRIDs being the cause of the increased falls, it is difficult to truly make such a statement without further study.”
MORE IN HEALTH NEWS
Perry emphasized that seniors shouldn’t necessarily avoid the medications altogether.
“There is always a risk associated with taking any medication, but the intent is to make sure that the benefits outweigh the risks,” he said. “The discussion of risk versus benefit is best to be had with a primary care physician who truly knows the patient and their specific risk factors.”
Khloe Quill is a lifestyle production assistant with Fox News Digital. She and the lifestyle team cover a range of story topics including food and drink, travel, and health.
You don’t have permission to access “http://food.ndtv.com/news/hyderabad-raids-absolute-barbeque-outlets-under-scrutiny-over-hygiene-concerns-9256270” on this server.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-09-10/Mainland-History-of-Taiwan-s-return-to-China-will-never-be-forgotten-1GypoiQVSyQ/img/06e8349a3d9a4fb08b522d639527ec9c/06e8349a3d9a4fb08b522d639527ec9c.jpeg' alt='Chen Binhua, spokesperson for the State Council Taiwan Affairs Office, speaks during a press conference, September 10, 2025. /CMG'
A Chinese mainland spokesperson emphasized that history will never be forgotten, commenting on a CGTN global poll which found that the majority of respondents recognize Taiwan’s return to China as an outcome of China’s victory in World War II.
Chen Binhua, spokesperson for the State Council Taiwan Affairs Office, made the remarks during a press conference on Wednesday.
The poll, conducted by CGTN among 12,000 respondents from 40 countries, showed that 66.7 percent of the respondents are aware of the history of Taiwan’s recovery. Most respondents said that Taiwan’s return to China was an outcome of China’s victory in World War II, and any secessionist actions constitute a denial of the war’s outcome.
Chen said that the results demonstrated that history will never be forgotten, let alone tampered with. He reiterated that the Cairo Declaration and the Potsdam Proclamation provided crucial international legal foundations for Taiwan’s restoration to China.
He stressed that although the two sides of the Taiwan Straits have not yet been reunified, China’s sovereignty and territorial integrity have never been divided. The fact that the Chinese mainland and Taiwan belong to one China has never changed, he added.
Chen criticized Taiwan region’s Democratic Progressive Party (DPP) authorities for engaging in what he called provocative moves aimed at secession. He said that their actions are attempts to alter the status quo in the Taiwan Straits, deny China’s sovereignty, and challenge the post-war international order.
“We hope the international community will stand on the side of human progress and more broadly understand and support the Chinese people’s just cause of opposing ‘Taiwan independence’ separatist activities and striving to achieve national reunification,” Chen said.
The Trump World Center Pune promises two 27-storey office towers, expansive retail spaces
| Photo Credit:
Radheshyam Jadhav
Pune
At Mundhwa chowk — rebranded as Koregaon Park Annexe, like a designer label stitched onto an old kurta — life still hums to the rhythm of pan stalls, welding sparks, garage hammers, and the steady rumble of water tankers.
Yet, towering over this everyday grind, a massive banner announces: “Trump — Coming Soon.”
Another proclaims with grandiosity: “Trump — The World’s Most Powerful Address.”
Inside a modest roadside shop, the local fabricator glances up at the billboard and chuckles: “So, this is the ‘dead economy’ Trump spoke of? Strange corpse — we’re still walking, sweating, welding.”
The Arrival
The Trump Organization formally entered India’s office property market in March this year, tying up with Tribeca Developers for a commercial project in Pune. The Trump World Center Pune promises two 27-storey office towers, expansive retail spaces, and a projected revenue of ₹2,500 crore on an investment of ₹1,700 crore.
The company has history here — it partnered with Panchshil Realty a few years ago to build a luxury residential project.
For locals, once dismissed as villagers on the city’s fringes, the shift feels like resurrection.
Land once undervalued is now coveted gold. Homes mocked as “too far” from the city suddenly sit at the heart of frenzied speculation.
Property rates have soared; even modest flats fetch no less than ₹1.5 crore.
The fabricator, who has spent three decades in Mundhwa, shrugs at the irony: “Big people say big things. One day India is dead, the next day they’re lining up to invest here.”
He also requested not to be named in the story, saying, “We are ordinary people; we prefer to focus on our work rather than get drawn into rhetoric.”
When the Dust Settles
Across the road from the Trump Tower construction site, tin sheds and scrappy shops hold their ground, their rusted shutters staring down convoys of trucks and tractors on the construction site. Steel and glass may rise into the sky, but corrugated iron refuses to flinch.
The garage worker, his face lit with a broad smile, watches the bustle and says: “Trump may tower, but we’re not small. We’ll still be here when the dust settles.”
His words, casually spoken, weigh more than the cement sacks being unloaded nearby.
The workers are equally animated about Trump’s latest remark on resuming negotiations over “trade barriers” with India. The garage hand, the fabricator and a chaiwala insist with quiet certainty: “This was bound to happen”. For them, the resilience of India’s economy is beyond doubt.
Return to Normal
Old Puneite C V Patwardhan delivers his judgment in a tone as sharp as a chili and twice as dry: “Where there is affluence and money, Trump will be there. India cannot be ignored. Just make sure this wealth is not swelling like a boil, but growth rooted in reality.”
The construction site is just a short walk from Pune’s Passport Office, where a bunch of agents observe that ever since Trump came to power, the number of students seeking US visas has declined.
Still, they believe this dip is temporary. India and Indians have played a crucial role in America’s development, and the flow will soon return to normal, they say unanimously.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
UOČI predstavljanja koje se očekuje u listopadu, tvrtka Honor podijelila je nove detalje o svojoj nadolazećoj seriji pametnih telefona Magic8. Novi flagship imat će moćan hardver koji će koristiti umjetnu inteligenciju za postizanje optimalnih performansi.
James Li, izvršni direktor Honora, u objavi na društvenoj mreži Weibo pojasnio je kako će serija Magic8 raditi na sustavu MagicOS 10, koji uključuje napredni jezični model MagicGUI.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Misterij nove tipke
Novi operativni sustav donosi dublju integraciju umjetne inteligencije, koja će moći automatizirati širok spektar zadataka, a obećana je i poboljšana povezanost unutar Honorovog ekosustava uređaja.
Istovremeno, jedan kineski leaker podijelio je na svojem Weibo profilu sliku koja navodno prikazuje novi telefon iz serije Magic8, a na kojoj je vidljiva nova tipka. Nagađa se da je riječ o tipki namijenjenoj isključivo funkcijama umjetne inteligencije.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
At some point, the Dodgers hope, they will be able to field a fully healthy lineup.
A late scratch on Wednesday to catcher Will Smith, however, meant it would have to wait at least a couple more days.
Despite activating Tommy Edman from the injured list pregame, and proceeding to sweep the Colorado Rockies with a 9-0 win that stretched their National League West lead to three games, the Dodgers were left dealing with another injury headache Wednesday, removing Smith from the starting lineup minutes before first pitch because of lingering issues with the bone bruise on his right hand.
Smith’s absence hardly hampered the Dodgers in their fourth straight win.
Their lineup exploded for four runs in the second inning and five in the eighth behind a huge night from Mookie Betts, who continued his recent tear with a four-for-five, five-RBI performance that included a run-scoring double early and a grand slam to put things away late. Betts is now on a 16-game on-base streak, has multiple RBIs in five-straight contests, and is batting .352 with seven home runs and 26 RBIs over his last 32 games.
Behind the plate, Ben Rortvedt filled in to catch Blake Snell’s scoreless six-inning, 11-strikeout start, which continued a dominant run from a Dodgers’ rotation that now has a 1.18 ERA over the last six games.
And thanks to a loss earlier in the day by the San Diego Padres, the team grew its lead atop the division for a second day in a row, effectively taking a 3-½ game NL West lead (when accounting for its head-to-head tiebreaker over San Diego) with 16 games to play.
Still, after activating Max Muncy off the injured list Monday, and welcoming Edman back into the fold Wednesday afternoon, the Dodgers were finally on the verge of having a full-strength squad for the first time since early July.
Instead, they were reminded of the tenuous reality of their oft-injured roster — and the difficulty of trying to manage Smith’s hand in particular.
It had only been a week since Smith first got hurt, when a foul ball in Pittsburgh ricocheted off his dangling throwing hand behind the plate and left him with a bone bruise that sidelined him until Tuesday — though didn’t require an injured list stint. Smith had looked OK in his return to action that night, lining a double in his first at-bat while helping Emmet Sheehan carry a no-hitter into the sixth. He was back in the original lineup the Dodgers posted Wednesday, as they sought a series sweep over the 106-loss Rockies.
The issue, it appeared, might be behind instead.
Instead, when the Dodgers emerged from the dugout, it was Rortvedt who went to squat behind home plate. Manager Dave Roberts told SportsNet LA that Smith’s hand had flared up pregame. His quote from last week — acknowledging how Smith’s injury could continue to bother him the rest of the season — became resoundingly clear.
The severity of this latest setback wasn’t clear.
Smith’s hand won’t be the only injury the Dodgers (82-64) will have to manage the rest of this season.
While Edman returned from an ankle injury that had plagued him all year, and sidelined him since its own flare-up on Aug. 3, Roberts said pregame he was still curious to see how the utilityman looked.
Edman slotted in center field on Wednesday — where he tracked down a fly ball on the game’s first pitch — and will likely see most of his playing time there for at least the foreseeable future. Roberts noted that, unlike earlier this year when Edman was mainly limited to infield duties, the quick reactions required at second base might be tougher on his ankle now.
“Getting off the ball is something I’m going to be really mindful of watching,” Roberts said of Edman. “Once he gets to full speed, it’s a lot easier [to decide what he can handle].”
With Edman in center, the Dodgers also ran out a new outfield alignment, with Andy Pages moving to left field and Michael Conforto dropping to the bench.
Roberts said Conforto will still see playing time against right-handed pitchers (the Rockies started left-hander Kyle Freeland on Wednesday). He also didn’t close the door on eventually flipping Pages (who had three hits Wednesday, including an RBI double in the second to open the scoring) and Teoscar Hernández (who went deep in the eighth for his third home run in the last two nights) in the corners, though noted he is keeping Hernández in right for now thanks to his improved defensive play in recent weeks.
“Teo played the season last year in left field, so we’ve shown that we can win a championship with him in left field,” Roberts said. “Not quite there yet, but thinking about it.”
Despite the moving pieces, it all brought the Dodgers closer to the lineup they envisioned having at the start of this season, the one they’ve floundered with offensively (entering the night ranked just 26th in the majors in scoring since July 4) while playing without.
“I think that we’ve all been waiting for our guys to come back to health and see what we look like,” Roberts said.
Still, they won’t be at full strength again until Smith is. Wednesday was a reminder that his health remains in doubt.
Next steps for Sasaki
After his much-improved rehab outing with triple-A Oklahoma City on Tuesday, Roki Sasaki was en route back to Los Angeles on Wednesday to meet with club officials about what his next steps will be.
Roberts said that could include finding the rookie right-hander, who finally rediscovered his 100-mph fastball Tuesday after lacking velocity and battling a shoulder injury previously this year, an opportunity to start a big-league game for the first time since April. Or, potentially pitching out of the bullpen, which is how the 23-year-old would likely be used if he were to be included on the postseason roster.
Before that latter scenario could become reality, of course, the Dodgers will need to see Sasaki have some sort of success back in the majors, where he had a 4.72 ERA in eight starts at the beginning of the season before going on the IL.
Nonetheless, Roberts described Sasaki’s rehab outing on Tuesday as “great for the Dodgers, great for Roki’s confidence, great for the organization.
“Mostly it was great for Roki,” Roberts added. “Just to really let it eat, let it fly, have some success and know that he can be the guy that he’s known to be.”
ViewSonic has launched its next-generation, customisable all-in-one direct view LED display — the LDC027G-091C — in India. Powered by chip-on-board (COB) technology, this display is designed to deliver ultra-fine resolution, durability, and energy efficiency, according to the company.
Eric Wei, Asia Pacific General Manager, ViewSonic, said, “The display industry is undergoing a shift where customers are demanding solutions that deliver higher engagement, flexibility, and long-term value. To address this, we are concentrating our innovation on categories that combine advanced visual performance with collaborative and adaptable design.”
“Our focus on diversifying display options and developing compatible software is a response to the increasing demand for user-centric solutions that enable more personalised experiences,” he added.
Add Zee Business as a Preferred Source
Key highlights:
According to the company, these are the key highlights of 4K COB customisable all-in-one LED display:
LDC027G-091C: Next-gen COB direct view LED display with 0.9mm pixel pitch, ultra-fine resolution, high contrast, and 40% lower power consumption.
Durable LDC Series: LDC031G-251 features GOB protection, IP54/IK06 ratings, and flexible video wall setups for high-traffic environments.
Large-scale video walls: 160–168 inch 4K displays showcased exceptional clarity for control rooms, boardrooms, retail, and classrooms.
Future Retail Solution: 4K digital signage with 24/7 reliability, USB-C, wireless casting, and flexible orientation for dynamic retail experiences.
Future Meeting Room Solution: 105-inch ViewBoard with Teams-certified collaboration software for inclusive hybrid conferencing.
Comprehensive ecosystem: ViewSonic demonstrates LED displays, interactive displays, monitors, and software for communication, creativity, and digital transformation.
Assassin’s Creed Shadows is getting a huge new update ahead of the release of the game’s first post-release expansion.
Assassin’s Creed Shadows update 1.1.1 has a September 11 release date and a 3pm BST UK release time. According to the AC Shadows patch notes, the update weighs in at 12.94GB on PS5, 33GB on Xbox Series X|S and 17GB on Steam.
The new update lays the foundation for the upcoming Claws of Awaji DLC, which launches on September 16. The paid expansion sees players head to a new island, which is said to be dominated by a “nefarious faction intent on uncovering the final Regalia”. It features around ten hours of new content, alongside new weapons like the Bo staff.
Ubisoft will also release a free story quest, which includes access to the aforementioned Bo staff.
Elsewhere, fans can expect a raised level cap, hideout upgrades and the ability to advance the time of day. You can check it out in the update 1.1.1 patch notes below.
To support the launch of the Claws of Awaji expansion we’ve raised the level cap to 100, giving players more room to grow and more options to customize their builds.
New Hideout Upgrades
With the new update, each unique building now includes 2 additional upgrade levels, bringing a total of 20 new enhancements, alongside 3 new Hideout levels.
Advance Time of Day
By upgrading the Nando to level 2, the player will gain the ability to meditate and skip time forward to the next 6 o’clock (AM or PM). To activate meditation, find a safe location and hold the up button (L on keyboard). This allows Naoe and Yasuke to prepare for nighttime assault and be ready to strike [#@!%&*] Castle at night.
Improved Scouts
Upgrading the Study to level 4 now allows Scouts to reveal both Viewpoints and Safehouses. Discovering Safehouses is especially valuable, as it enables Naoe and Yasuke to join the action more quickly by reducing their travel time.
Enhanced Gear Quality
By upgrading the Forge to level 6, Naoe and Yasuke gain the ability to enhance their gear to new quality tiers: Mythic and Artifact. Once an item reaches a new quality, it can be further upgraded through eight additional levels to unlock its full potential.
New Project: Sanctuary
We are releasing a new Project available in the Animus HUB, called Sanctuary, in which you can get Ezio themed gear, kusarigama, and much more! Activate the new Project, complete Anomalies and progress through the rewards like previously released ones.
ADDITIONAL HIGHLIGHTS
• Uncapped Cutscenes
– Cutscenes are no longer limited to 30 FPS (PC Only).
LIST OF BUG FIXES
General
• Fixed an issue where the game crashed during the cutscene of the “Chained” rift.
• Fixed various localization issues.
• Fixed an issue where the vertical sliding sound effect continued if you switched characters during a slide.
• Fixed an issue where some tutorials repeated themselves after unlocking Yasuke.
Gameplay
• Fixed an issue where the Naginata Ronin were not vulnerable after using the Vault ability.
• Addressed an issue where the Scale of the Koi and Soaring Tatsu trinkets were not functioning as expected.
• Fixed an issue where the aiming reticle option “Only While Aiming” was missing from the settings.
• Fixed an issue where a persistent “New Item” notification appeared after looting weapons from scout supply chests.
• Fixed an issue where players were unable to start horse archery in Iga because the quest giver had moved locations. Get back in your spot!
• Fixed an issue Ikko Ikki Kamon banner was missing after completing the “Collection of Crests” quest.
• Fixed an issue where the Mount Nukai contract targeted a chest that was already opened.
• Fixed an issue where multiple waypoints were not synchronizing.
Difficulty Options
• Fixed an issue on Nightmare difficulty where Teppo enemies appeared broken.
• Fixed an issue on Nightmare difficulty where the Samurai Spear Guard had a combat glitch.
• Fixed an issue where Canon Mode disabled itself on the second launch of the game.
Hideout
• Fixed an issue in the Hideout when selecting the option to duel with Naoe or Yasuke did nothing.
• Fixed an issue in the Hideout where certain buildings or set pieces could not be rotated.
• Fixed an issue in the Hideout that prevented players from moving the horse stables after changing their original location. Back to your Hideout planning!
• Fixed an issue where Rufino remained stuck in the Hideout after being recruited.
Skills, Abilities & Upgrades
• Addressed an issue where the Shadow Piercer ability was not functioning correctly.
• Addressed an issue where the 33% health recovery on posture attack perk was not functioning as expected.
Visuals & Graphics
• Fixed various visual issues.
• Fixed a visual issue with the architect’s lip sync in the “Seta-Killers” quest.
• Fixed a visual issue affecting Yasuke’s aim with the Teppo when wearing variations of the Samurai Hat.
• Fixed a visual issue with the Ronin Kasa Hat.
• Fixed a visual issue with the Blush of the Earth bow quiver.
• Fixed a visual issue with Oni’s Flesh Armour.
• Fixed a visual issue where Gashadokuro’s mask did not have red eyes on the Memories screen.
The Lexus RZ mid-size electric SUV has been recalled due to a problem that may prevent its windscreen from defrosting.
The related Toyota bZ4X, as well as the smaller Lexus UX300e, have also been recalled for the same issue.
“Due to a software programming issue, the Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning (HVAC) electrical compressor may fail,” the company says in its recall notice.
“If this occurs, the windscreen defrost function may not operate correctly and could lead to poor visibility for the driver.
“Poor visibility will potentially increase the risk of an accident, causing serious injury or death to vehicle occupants and other road users.”
CarExpert can save you thousands on a new car. Click here to get a great deal.
A total of 523 vehicles are affected, produced in 2023
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) list is attached here
Indian equities opened on a muted note on Thursday, tracking mixed global cues
Sensex Today
Sensex Today: Indian equities started Thursday’s session on a subdued note, tracking mixed global signals. The BSE Sensex was down 34 points, or 0.04%, at 81,391, while the Nifty50 slipped 9 points to 24,964.
Infosys shares were trading about 1% lower ahead of the company’s board meeting scheduled today to consider its fifth share buyback programme. Historically, the IT major’s stock has delivered mixed returns in the short to medium term following buyback announcements.
In the broader market, however, sentiment was more positive. The Nifty MidCap index edged up 0.04%, while the Nifty SmallCap index gained 0.22%, both outperforming the frontline benchmarks.
Global Cues
In Asia, markets traded mixed as investors assessed China’s August inflation print. Mainland China’s CSI 300 edged up 0.13%, while Hong Kong’s Hang Seng slipped 1%. Consumer prices in China fell 0.4% year-on-year in August, steeper than the 0.2% drop forecast by economists polled by Reuters. The producer price index also declined 2.9% Y-o-Y, though easing from a 3.6% fall in July.
Elsewhere, South Korea’s KOSPI gained 0.57% after hitting a record high, and Japan’s Nikkei climbed 0.61%.
On Wall Street, the S&P 500 closed at a record high, rising 0.3% on the back of a 36% surge in Oracle shares after strong cloud guidance. The Nasdaq ended marginally higher, while the Dow Jones fell 0.48%.
Investors in the US now await the release of August CPI data and weekly jobless claims, both of which are expected to provide fresh cues on the Federal Reserve’s policy outlook ahead of next week’s rate decision.
Aparna Deb
Aparna Deb is a Subeditor and writes for the business vertical of News18.com. She has a nose for news that matters. She is inquisitive and curious about things. Among other things, financial markets, economy, a…Read More
Aparna Deb is a Subeditor and writes for the business vertical of News18.com. She has a nose for news that matters. She is inquisitive and curious about things. Among other things, financial markets, economy, a… Read More
First Published:
September 11, 2025, 09:12 IST
News business markets Stock Market Updates: Sensex, Nifty In Red; Infosys Slips 1%, Adani Power 2.5%
Disclaimer: Comments reflect users’ views, not News18’s. Please keep discussions respectful and constructive. Abusive, defamatory, or illegal comments will be removed. News18 may disable any comment at its discretion. By posting, you agree to our Terms of Use and Privacy Policy.
The cryptocurrency market has seen steady growth in the last 24 hours, with the total market capitalization climbing to $3.95 trillion, up 1.8%. Bitcoin continues to lead the rally, trading above $113,800 after gaining 2.22% in the last day. Ethereum also followed the upward trend, crossing $4,380 with a 1.55% increase. Among top performers, Solana (up 1.99%) and Cardano (up 1.47%) stood out, showing strong gains over the past week as well. XRP held firm at $2.98, posting a 1.10% rise in the day and over 5% weekly gains.
Meme coins and newer projects also joined the upswing. Dogecoin jumped 2.54% in the last 24 hours and more than 13% over the week, while Hyperliquid surged over 3% daily and nearly 22% weekly. With the Altcoin Season Index at 69/100, smaller tokens are increasingly outpacing Bitcoin.
Why is Crypto Rising Today?
Crypto markets moved higher after fresh U.S. inflation data came in softer than expected. The Producer Price Index (PPI) for August showed a 0.1% decline month-over-month, compared to forecasts of a 0.3% increase. On a yearly basis, PPI grew 2.6%, down from July’s 3.1% and well below estimates of 3.3%. The core PPI, which excludes food and energy, also slipped 0.1% against predictions of a 0.3% rise.
Experts are now betting more heavily on the possibility of a 50 basis point rate cut from the Fed next week, though the consensus still points to a smaller 25-point move. The next big test will be Thursday’s Consumer Price Index (CPI) release, which could further shape market expectations.
Recent weak economic reports and softer inflation are giving the Fed more reason to pivot away from its hawkish stance. However, Bitcoin’s price action remains choppy, often rising on dovish signals but failing to hold gains.
Raghuvir Srinivasan, Editor, businessline, addresses students at PSG Institute of Management’s Foundation Day event in Coimbatore on Wednesday.
| Photo Credit:
Siva Saravanan S / The Hindu.
“Students should focus on entrepreneurship, as it generates employment—a critical need in India, where a large number of graduates leave universities each year with limited job prospects,” said businessline Editor Raghuvir Srinivasan, in Coimbatore on Wednesday.
Addressing students of the PSG Institute of Management at its Foundation Day event, he said, “Every graduate today should consider starting a business, a charity, or a social initiative. Such ventures create substantial value—not just for the nation and its economy, but for the individual as well.”
Coimbatore hailed as India’s start-up capital
Highlighting Coimbatore’s entrepreneurial heritage, he said, “This city is ideally positioned to call itself the start-up capital of India. Every engineering and textile unit here began as a start-up, offering students exemplary models to emulate.”
Drawing parallels with the technological landscape four decades ago—when computers were new, markets were restricted, and opportunities were limited—he said that today’s open and dynamic market, propelled by technologies such as artificial intelligence (AI), offers abundant opportunities that students must capitalise.
Global trade fluctuations seen as chances for student innovation
On global trade concerns, he said, despite volatile policies such as Trump tariffs, commerce cannot come to a halt. Such fluctuations open new avenues for students to innovate and enter markets that were previously untapped.
T. Velsankar, Chairman of The Vikasa Group of Schools; Adka K. Sreesh, CEO of Ideal Stores; T. Rajkumar, Chairman of the CITI Standing Committee on Cotton and Director of Sakthi Group of Companies; and Stany Pothen, former Vice-Chairman of the Spices Board of India, and Chairman of the Cardamom Planters Federation, received the “Distinguished Alumni” award at the event.
On Wednesday, just one day after SpaceX acquired $17 billion of wireless spectrum from telecommunications company EchoStar, Elon Musk made some typically bold claims for how he would put it to use. The second-richest person in the world described a vision where Starlink could be your one-stop-shop for connectivity, whether at home or when you’re away from your Wi-Fi.
On the All-In podcast, Musk said Starlink could eventually combine its home internet service with mobile. But he was careful to note that Starlink wouldn’t be putting AT&T, T-Mobile and Verizon out of business anytime soon – those companies still own far more of the wireless spectrum that’s used to send texts, make calls and stream videos. But the billionaire grinned when it was suggested that one way to acquire more spectrum would be to purchase Verizon outright.
“It’s not out of the question,” Musk said. “I suppose that may happen.”
The SpaceX CEO also outlined a plan to utilize the newly acquired spectrum to use Starlink satellites, which SpaceX calls “cell towers in space,” to send data directly to customers’ phones. Out of SpaceX’s 8,140 total satellites in orbit, 657 are direct-to-cell. The rest are used for Starlink’s internet service.
“This is kind of a long-term thing,” Musk said of the EchoStar spectrum purchase. “It will allow SpaceX to deliver high-bandwidth connectivity directly from the satellites to the phones. But there are hardware changes that need to happen in the phone.”
Watch this: Hands-On with T-Mobile’s T-Satellite Service
In order to use the EchoStar spectrum, cellphones would have to be outfitted with chipsets that work with those frequencies. Musk estimates that would take about two years.
“I think their place in the ecosystem is to support the big carriers by providing satellite connectivity so that they can connect anywhere, anytime,” Jeff Moore, an industry analyst with Wave7 Research, told CNET.
In July, SpaceX launched a partnership with T-Mobile that uses Starlink satellites to fill connectivity gaps in dead zones around the country. Customers enrolled in the T-Satellite service can send SMS texts right now, but the service will expand next month to include data support in third-party apps like AccuWeather, AllTrails, WhatsApp and X.
The new EchoStar spectrum would essentially hypercharge Starlink’s direct-to-cell bandwidth capabilities, but it will take some time to get there.
“It’s out there already, but the more capacity you have, the better, and the more frequencies you have the better,” says Moore. “There’s certainly room for improvement. I think that’s the intention of the spectrum transaction.”
Don’t miss any of our unbiased tech content and lab-based reviews. Add CNET as a preferred Google source.
Nearly half of adults worldwide who are living with diabetes don’t even know they have it, leaving millions vulnerable to dangerous complications.
A sweeping new study, published in the journal The Lancet Diabetes & Endocrinology, examined data from more than 200 countries between 2000 and 2023, tracking how well health systems identify, treat and control the condition.
Researchers analyzed how many people with diabetes are undiagnosed, untreated, receiving suboptimal care or achieving optimal blood sugar control, broken down by age, sex, location and year.
CUTTING OUT ALCOHOL AND MEDICATING SOONER COULD PREVENT ‘SILENT KILLER,’ EXPERTS SAY
The researchers found that about 44% of people aged 15 and older with diabetes remain undiagnosed.
“Many people would not have signs or symptoms until their diabetes is very advanced, and many people are not going to the doctor often or at all for lab work,” Tanya Freirich, a registered dietitian nutritionist in North Carolina, told Fox News Digital. (She was not involved in the study.)
Diabetes has been called a “silent epidemic,” as millions remain unaware that they have the potentially deadly condition.(iStock)
Most diagnosed patients, roughly 91%, receive medication, but less than half manage to get their blood sugar under control. That means only about one in five people worldwide are effectively managing their disease.
Young people are the most likely to go undiagnosed, despite facing serious long-term risks, such as heart disease, kidney failure, blindness and nerve damage, according to the study.
SUGAR IN DRINKS LINKED TO HIGHER DIABETES RISK THAN THAT IN FOOD, NEW RESEARCH FINDS
Geography plays a powerful role in diagnosis rates. In wealthier countries like the United States and Canada, diagnosis rates are higher, though challenges remain in long-term management of the disease.
In lower-income regions, particularly in parts of sub-Saharan Africa, fewer than one in five people with diabetes are aware they have the condition.
1.3 billion people are expected to be living with diabetes by 2050, and experts say medication alone may not be enough.(iStock)
Lead author Lauryn Stafford, a researcher at the Institute for Health Metrics and Evaluation at the University of Washington, said these numbers should set off alarms for governments and health systems worldwide.
“By 2050, 1.3 billion people are expected to be living with diabetes, and if nearly half don’t know they have a serious and potentially deadly health condition, it could easily become a silent epidemic,” she said in a press release.
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
The study also suggests that treatment itself often falls short. Prescriptions alone don’t control blood sugar, as researchers warn that health systems must also focus on monitoring, education and lifestyle support.
For some people with prediabetes, early treatment as well as moderate lifestyle changes can return blood glucose (blood sugar) levels to a normal range, effectively preventing or delaying type 2 diabetes, according to the American Diabetes Association.
Previous research shows that lifestyle changes like the Mediterranean diet could help prevent diabetes.(iStock)
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
It is difficult to be exact about the number of people who are undiagnosed, experts say.
“Those are data points that are unable to be confirmed until diagnosed,” Frierich said. “While I do not doubt the accuracy of the tool [used in the study], there may be unknown factors that are not included in the model.”
MORE IN HEALTH NEWS
The dietitian recommends that everyone has a semi-regular health check.
She also noted that increasing fiber intake with whole, unprocessed, plant-based foods like vegetables and nuts — as well as staying consistently active — can reduce the risk of diabetes and help to regulate blood sugar.
Khloe Quill is a lifestyle production assistant with Fox News Digital. She and the lifestyle team cover a range of story topics including food and drink, travel, and health.
You don’t have permission to access “http://food.ndtv.com/restaurants/karan-johar-opens-his-first-delhi-ncr-restaurant-oju-in-gurugram-9251141” on this server.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-09-10/China-urges-U-S-to-respect-core-interests-in-defense-chiefs-call-1GyGfQ3t4Pe/img/4aba4170b298485d8cff36477916d1ec/4aba4170b298485d8cff36477916d1ec.png' alt='A file photo of national flags of China and the United States. /VCG'
Chinese Defense Minister Dong Jun stated on Tuesday that China and the United States should respect each other’s core interests during a video call with U.S. Secretary of Defense Pete Hegseth.
Dong told Hegseth during the call, which the latter requested, that both sides should adopt an open attitude, keep communication and engagement active, and develop a military-to-military relationship grounded in equality, respect, peaceful coexistence, and steady, positive growth.
Dong warned that any efforts to support “Taiwan independence” through force or to use the Taiwan question to contain China, as well as any interference, will be firmly thwarted.
China is committed to working with regional countries to safeguard peace and stability in the South China Sea and firmly opposes infringements and provocations by certain countries or deliberate attempts by external forces to stir up trouble, he said.
Dong said that China remains committed to its own development and strongly defends its legitimate rights and interests. “Containing, deterring, or interfering with China will absolutely lead nowhere.”
While developers are offering high shares of floor space index (FSI) to societies, Knight Frank cautions that if free-sale revenues cannot cover costs, projects could become unviable
| Photo Credit:
iStockphoto
The surge in redevelopment projects in Mumbai could be a cause for alarm if the current buoyancy in the real estate cycle subsides or fails to sustain in the medium term, according to property consultant Knight Frank, which released a comprehensive report on the segment on Wednesday.
The financial capital is currently reverberating to the sounds of intense construction activity as old and ageing housing societies are making way for new buildings, with upgraded amenities and better facilities.
Redevelopment is often necessary when buildings are over 30 years old and at risk of structural damage. The process involves demolishing existing buildings and constructing new ones. The developer is assured of extra space or a free sale portion in the same premises, which can be sold to new customers.
High FSI allocation may threaten project cash flows
The expectations of a rise in prices and consistent demand from customers are fuelling the redevelopment boom. Developers, in their desire to get hold of land in a city like Mumbai, often allocate a higher threshold of the total permissible floor space index to members, and this is where the danger lies if demand does not sustain, according to Gulam Zia, Senior Executive Director – Research, Advisory, Infrastructure and Valuation at KFI.
Developers often tend to allocate more than 50 per cent of the total area to the society, which has the potential to threaten cash flows. Anything from 30-35 per cent is a safe range.
“If revenues from free sale cannot cover the stack, the project is unviable,” the report notes. The free-sale portion of FSI carries the entire financial load of the project.
900 plus societies signed deals, unlocking 327 acres since 2020
As per the report, over 900 housing societies have signed redevelopment agreements since 2020, unlocking nearly 327 acres of potential land area. By 2030, the current society redevelopment projects in the Mumbai region would add a total of 44,277 new homes with a value of over Rs 13000 crore, it said.
Typically, a redevelopment project timeline spans 8-10 years, beginning with the housing society’s initiation of the process.
Zia pointed out that so long as the current upswing in the real estate cycle continues, redevelopments can go as planned, with the developers involved in it able to generate profits and keep the projects viable.
However, the real estate sector is notoriously fickle and operates in cycles, with customer demand dependent on robust economic fundamentals, a sustained low-interest rate environment and the capacity to spend.
The current boom in the cycle dates from pandemic years, and while the numbers suggest that housing registrations are still going strong, there are signs of an incipient plateauing in sales.
“The economics of society redevelopment must be viewed through the lens of sustainability. With overheated market conditions and sharply rising prices, we are at a stage where excessive demand and aggressive offers threaten long-term viability,” said Zia.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
DOK smo listali kataloge i pretraživali ponudu za Indexovu prehrambenu šoping-listu, primijetili smo odlična sniženja proizvoda za čišćenje, njegu i higijenu, kao i kućanskih artikala i aparata, ili smo ih pronašli po povoljnim cijenama.
Izdvojili smo najpovoljnije ponude i proizvode s odličnim cijenama u svakoj trgovini. Lidl, Kaufland, Konzum, Plodine, Eurospin, Spar i Interspar dostupni su u svim većim mjestima diljem Hrvatske, a ispod možete vidjeti našu šoping-listu za ovaj tjedan.
Kaufland
Katalog Kauflanda vrijedi od srijede, 10.9., do utorka, 16.9., ili do isteka zaliha, a pojedini popusti vrijede samo na odabrane datume u tom periodu. Aktualni glavni katalog možete prolistati ovdje, a za ostvarenje pojedinih dodatnih popusta potrebna vam je Kauflandova kartica.
Spar i Interspar
Katalozi Spara i Interspara vrijede od srijede, 10.9., do utorka, 16.9., ili do isteka zaliha. Popusti vrijede za prehranu, kozmetiku, higijenu i sredstva za čišćenje, a ovise o dostupnosti u pojedinim trgovinama. Za neke je potreban Moj Spar App. Aktualne kataloge prolistajte ovdje.
Plodine
Katalog Plodina vrijedi od srijede, 10.9., do utorka, 16.9., ili do isteka zaliha, a pojedini popusti vrijede samo na odabrane datume u tom periodu. Za pojedine popuste potreban je Plodine Card. Aktualni katalog možete prolistati ovdje.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Lidl
Katalog Lidla vrijedi od ponedjeljka, 8.9., do nedjelje, 14.9. ili do isteka zaliha, a pojedini popusti vrijede samo na odabrane datume u tom periodu. Katalog možete prolistati ovdje, a za ostvarenje pojedinih popusta potrebna vam je mobilna aplikacija Lidl Plus.
Eurospin
Katalog Eurospina vrijedi od srijede, 10.9., do utorka, 16.9., ili do isteka zaliha. Aktualni katalog možete prolistati ovdje.
Konzum
Konzumov katalog vrijedi od srijede, 10.9., do utorka, 16.9., ili do isteka zaliha. Za pojedine popuste potrebna je MultiPlus kartica. Aktualni katalog možete prolistati ovdje.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
RENO, Nevada — The history of Mexican boxing features names that transcend generations. From Julio César Chávez, recognized as the pinnacle of Mexican boxing, to legendary figures such as Juan Manuel Márquez, Rubén ‘Púas’ Olivares, Salvador Sánchez, Ricardo ‘Finito’ López and Carlos ‘Cañas’ Zárate — all have proudly carried the name of Mexican flag to the peak of the boxing world.
The tradition of Aztec dominance has been continued in a big way by Saúl “Canelo” Álvarez, who on Oct. 29 will celebrate a historic 20-year professional career that began when he was just 15 years old, when he made his professional debut against Abraham González. Two decades later, with a legacy built on titles and big stages, Álvarez paused to reflect on his development from red-headed teenager who dreamed of being the best in the world to the current king of Mexican boxing with 63 victories.
Canelo Álvarez, left; UFC CEO Dana White, center; and Terence Crawford, right, speak during a news conference at at T-Mobile Arena on June 27.
(David Becker / Getty Images for Netflix)
“I’ve achieved everything in boxing, imagine how satisfying that is for me,” Álvarez told L.A. Times en Español during his training camp in Reno, Nev.
The celebration has already been planned and, like everything else involving Álvarez, it will be private but “on a grand scale.” The magnitude will likely depend on whether he emerges victorious when he defends his four belts against the undefeated Terence Crawford (41-0, 31 KOs) Saturday (6 p.m., Netflix), at Allegiant Stadium in Las Vegas.
“I think I’ve done some really good things in boxing and I’m very proud of that kid who started out with the dream of being the best in the world,” said the 35-year-old from Jalisco.
That kid, as his brother, Ricardo, recalls, was no different from any other teen in Guadalajara, except for an unusual obsession: to succeed in a brutal and demanding sport. His journey began in local gyms, under the tutelage of Chepo Reynoso and his son, Eddy, who saw extraordinary potential. It was there that Canelo Álvarez heard the words that would forever mark his destiny.
Boxer Canelo Álvarez, center, poses alongside his trainers Chepo Reynoso, left, and Eddy Reynoso, right, at MGM Grand in Las Vegas in 2018.
(Ethan Miller / Getty Images)
“‘With the talent you have, you’ll get wherever you want to go,’ is what they always told me, and it stuck in my mind,” Canelo said, recalling his early days with Chepo, his trainer since he was 14 years old.
Two decades later, Canelo says that advice is still the message he would repeat to himself if he could travel back in time. Because those words not only fueled his hunger, they gave him conviction.
“I would just tell that kid what he already knows, that ‘you’re going to get wherever you want to go,’” Canelo said.
Two decades later, that kid not only fulfilled his promise, but exceeded it. He became a champion in multiple divisions, a global icon and, above all, a man who continues to look ahead.
The story of Canelo Álvarez is not just that of a boxer, but of a dream fulfilled through discipline, sacrifice and faith. And yet, as Ricardo often says, “he still has a long way to go.”
Canelo’s journey has not been improvised or meteoric, but rather a project shaped by patience and discipline. Eddy, who has also been Canelo’s trainer since adolescence, recalls constantly learning alongside Canelo.
“In 2000, I started training boxers with my dad — first amateurs and then professionals. We formed a group of kids and teenagers, and that’s where Saúl came from,” Eddy said.
That connection, forged in the gyms of Jalisco, was the beginning of one of the most successful partnerships in boxing history. Eddy was inspired by figures such as Julián Magdaleno and Rafael Mendoza, coaches who instilled in him the ambition to be someone great in the sport.
Canelo Alvarez celebrates with his family after defeating John Ryder at Akron Stadium in 2023 in Zapopan, Mexico.
(Hector Vivas / Getty Images)
“I always imagined myself being someone important in boxing,” Eddy said. “And with Saúl, we’ve achieved that.”
In his two-decade career, Canelo has moved up in weight class, stage and demand. He has done so by facing Miguel Cotto, Floyd Mayweather Jr. and Gennady Golovkin, against whom he fought a memorable trilogy.
Although he suffered his first career defeat in 2013 against Mayweather, it was the fight that paved the way for his success not only as a champion, but also as an entrepreneur and businessman.
However, it is the second fight against Golovkin in September 2018 that holds a special place in Canelo’s heart.
“It was very emotional for me because of many things surrounding the fight,” Canelo said. “Confirming that I was better than him, everything that had been said. [It] was a very special moment.”
Eddy agrees that that night was a high point.
“I saw him very happy when he beat Golovkin in the second round. Also, when he beat Miguel Cotto, or even in his early four-round fights. Every win has had meaning, but that victory over ‘GGG’ was special.”
Little by little, Canelo learned from his mistakes and cleared his path to become the economic and sporting powerhouse he is today. Along the way, he fell out with Golden Boy Promotions and Oscar De La Hoya in 2020, with whom he first became a superstar, and made a miscalculation by moving up to light heavyweight and losing for the second time in his career, this time to Dmitry Bivol in 2022.
The darkest moment of his career came in 2018 when he was suspended for six months by the Nevada Athletic Commission for testing positive for the banned substance clenbuterol. According to Canelo’s team, this was because of contaminated meat he ate during a visit to Mexico. Clenbuterol is sometimes used in cattle feed to increase muscle mass.
Beyond the belts, the million-dollar purses and the fame, Canelo’s career has been supported by his unwavering family, particularly during the difficult times.
“It’s been a long 20-year career,” said Ricardo, one of Canelo’s six older brothers. “We’ve always been united in supporting him. He’s become the star of boxing, the face of boxing. We’re very proud of him, and he’s very proud of what he’s achieved and what he still has to achieve. He was born for this, I’ve always told him, he was born for this.”
The family has celebrated every victory and accompanied him through every obstacle. For them, the fight against Crawford is not just a sporting challenge, it’s also a family reunion.
“We are going to celebrate with great happiness, with the family, more than anything else united, with friends and team. All together, as always,” said Ricardo.
Canelo Alvarez hits Jaime Munguia during a super middleweight title fight on May 4, 2024, in Las Vegas.
(John Locher / Associated Press)
In the Álvarez family’s memory, there are moments that define their history, anecdotes that serve as symbols of everything that was to come. Ricardo remembered one of them with particular clarity: the night they went to the movies to see “Cinderella Man,” the 2005 film about James J. Braddock, the boxer who persevered during the Great Depression and fought for a world title.
As they left the room, Ricardo asked his younger brother, “Can you imagine fighting on a stage like that one day?”
Canelo recalled telling his brother: “I wanted to succeed like that boxer, but with a different ending, fighting in world championships on the biggest stages.”
With a career that has taken Canelo to Madison Square Garden, the MGM Grand and T-Mobile Arena in Las Vegas, Canelo recognizes he made the goal come true.
“Now that we’ve talked about it after all these years, he says to me, ‘And what do you think? I’ve already fought on the best stages.’ And yes, he’s achieved everything,” Ricardo said.
Canelo Álvarez, left, with brother, Ricardo.
(HANDOUT / INSTAGRAM)
Saturday’s setting will once again be monumental: Allegiant Stadium in Las Vegas. Awaiting him there will be Crawford, who is considered by many to be the best pound-for-pound fighter today.
For Eddy, this fight represents a clash of styles and power.
“A huge fight is coming between two of the world’s greatest powerhouses, Mexico and the United States. We’re going to show that the Mexican school is the best,” Eddy said.
Ricardo also recognizes the magnitude of the challenge: “[Canelo] has had big fights, with Cotto, Golovkin, Mayweather. But you can feel what this fight means in the atmosphere. It’s the biggest fight today, and I’m sure it’s going to surprise people.”
Canelo, for his part, takes it in stride.
“It means a lot to me to continue fighting in big fights, in a stadium as important as Allegiant,” he said. “I’m happy and excited to be there.”
It’s still unclear how exactly Canelo will celebrate Oct. 29 and his two decades of boxing.
Eddy envisions joining the celebration with a resounding victory.
“We’re going to win this fight by knockout,” Eddy promises, “and then we’re going to have a big party in Mexico.”
This article first appeared in Spanish via L.A. Times en Español.
VE Commercial Vehicles (VECV), the joint venture between Volvo Group and Eicher Motors, has announced price cuts of up to Rs 6 lakh across its truck and bus portfolio. The move follows the GST Council’s decision to reduce the goods and services tax on diesel, CNG and LNG commercial vehicles from 28 per cent to 18 per cent. The revised prices will come into effect from 22 September, just ahead of the festive season.
The reduction means lower acquisition costs for buyers of Eicher’s light, medium and heavy-duty trucks, as well as its bus range. According to VECV, customers will now save between Rs 1 lakh and Rs 6 lakh depending on the vehicle type.
Light and Medium Duty Trucks – Price benefit of Rs 1-2 lakh Heavy Duty Trucks – Price benefit of Rs 1.5-6 lakh Buses – Price benefit of Rs 1.1-3.4 lakh
Add Zee Business as a Preferred Source
‘Landmark decision’, says Eicher chief
Vinod Aggarwal, Managing Director and CEO of VECV, described the GST rate cut as a “landmark decision” that provides timely relief to the commercial vehicle sector. “We sincerely thank the Hon’ble Prime Minister, the Hon’ble Finance Minister and the GST Council for reducing GST on trucks and buses from 28 per cent to 18 per cent. This reform is in line with the Prime Minister’s vision for lower logistics costs under the PM Gati Shakti programme. It offers immediate benefits to customers, strengthens demand, and will also help boost GDP by driving activity in logistics and allied industries,” Aggarwal said.
Boost for logistics and public transport
Industry experts believe the tax cut will ease cost pressures for freight operators, encourage faster fleet modernisation by state transport corporations and private bus operators, and make road-based public transport more affordable.
The decision is also expected to improve profitability for small businesses and owner-drivers by reducing their total cost of ownership. This could accelerate the shift towards safer, fuel-efficient and modern vehicles, supporting India’s goals during the Amrit Kaal.
The announcement comes in the backdrop of the GST Council’s sweeping GST 2.0 reforms, which cut tax rates on several categories of automobiles. For commercial vehicles, the uniform 18 per cent slab now applies to diesel, CNG and LNG models, while electric and hydrogen fuel cell vehicles remain taxed at 5 per cent.
The government expects the reform to reduce logistics costs nationwide, strengthen supply chain efficiency and revive demand in the auto sector, which had been under pressure from rising input costs and sluggish sales.
Elvis Presley had some eccentric eating habits during his lifetime, with his appetite for peanut butter and banana sandwiches being best known.
The King loved fast food, and one of his family members shared his favourite Memphis takeaway chains while living at Graceland from 1957 to 1977.
His cousin Danny Smith, who grew up at the mansion, was previously asked on his YouTube channel if Elvis ever ordered out fast food.
The Memphis Mafia Kid said: “Yes he did. A lot of the times Krystal hamburgers was probably one of the main ones. And he had ordered, oh gobs and gobs of them. And everybody up in Graceland would eat on them.” The fast-food chain was founded in 1932 and has locations to this day in the Southeastern United States. The restaurant is well known for its square hamburgers called sliders with steamed-in onions.
On Elvis’ other favourites, Danny said: “He ordered McDonald’s, Pancho’s Mexican [Buffet] and so many others. The answer to that is yes he did order from fast foods. Not all the time, but y’know a good portion of the time.” Pancho’s was first founded in West Memphis in 1956 and is Tex-Mex all-you-can-eat joint. Sadly, according to Commercial Appeal, the chain’s last two Memphis restaurants are set to close with the company focusing on Pancho’s cheese dip instead, which is sold in over 1200 stores.
Have you ever wondered whether a road car (albeit a highly modified one) can keep up with a GT3 race car across a quarter-mile drag race and rolling race?
Well, wonder no more. We’ve lined up a beastly 1200hp RAM 1500 TRX, which is both twin-turbocharged and supercharged, alongside a Ferrari 296 GT3 race car, which is currently doing duty in the GT World Challenge.
Whether you’re chasing performance upgrades, replacement parts, or gear to personalise your ride, eBay has one of the biggest ranges of car parts and accessories in Australia — all from trusted sellers and delivered straight to your door.
From everyday maintenance to serious mods, there’s something for every kind of car enthusiast. Check out what’s available at ebay.com.au and get stuck into your next project.
The cars
1200hp Ram TRX
Tuned by Dontex Performance, this RAM TRX is not only supercharged, but twin-turbocharged.
It makes around 1200hp (over 880kW of power) and we’ve fitted the full-size pickup with drag radials to ensure it gets some form of traction. But while it makes around 1200hp, it’s both heavy and not very aerodynamic. So this will be a close one!
Without the Dontex mods, the standard RAM TRX packs a supercharged 6.2-litre V8 producing 523kW of power and 882Nm of torque.
Ferrari 296 GT3 race car
Unlike the 296 GTB road car, the GT3 racer doesn’t use hybrid technology for an acceleration boost. Instead, it employs a twin-turbo 3.0-litre V6 and sends torque to the rear wheels.
It pumps out 447kW of power and 712Nm of torque, and weighs just 1250kg — compared to around 3000kg for the RAM.
The results
There’s no prize for guessing how the standing-start drag race went. The RAM comprehensively demolished the Ferrari.
Car
0-100km/h
80-120km/h
0-200km/h
0-400m (quarter-mile)
1200hp RAM TRX
3.1s
1.69s
9.77s
10.71s @ 208.18km/h
Ferrari 296 GT3 race car
4.46s
1.77s
10.86s
11.75s @ 209.81km/h
In fact, the race series this particular car competes in only has rolling starts, so the team needed time to finetune the car to get its launch performance sorted. Even then there wasn’t enough traction to get it off the line cleanly.
It didn’t help that the surface of our runway has some very loose gravel and that the car was running wets…
That all changed with the rolling start, though. That’s when the Ferrari came into its own and ended with a finish that saw it just nose ahead of the mighty RAM.
Apple assembles iPhone 17 series in Tamil Nadu and Karnataka, but Indian buyers pay far more than US consumers due to taxes, import duties, and Apple’s premium pricing strategy
Apple’s market share in India is about 6% overall but surges to nearly 60% in the premium smartphone category.
The Apple iPhone, once considered a niche luxury product, has steadily gained popularity among Indian consumers. The company is now assembling its latest iPhone 17 series at factories in Tamil Nadu, Karnataka. Yet, the price tag continues to puzzle buyers. In India, the flagship iPhone 17 Pro Max retails at Rs 1,49,900, whereas in the United States it is priced at $1,199 (roughly Rs 1,00,812). Prices in Dubai and Singapore are lower still.
What makes this more striking is that India levies no import duty on iPhones assembled domestically, while the US imposes a 25% tariff on imported devices. Nevertheless, the American consumer still pays less. Industry analysts say the answer lies in India’s tax regime, supply chain realities and Apple’s own pricing strategy.
Heavy Taxes and Import Duties
According to market experts, as much as 40% of the iPhone’s final retail price in India is accounted for by taxes and duties. More than 70% of the components including OLED panels, A-series processors, camera modules, are sourced from Taiwan, South Korea, Japan and the US. These imports attract duties of 10-22%, along with a 2% Social Welfare Surcharge. On top of this, an 18% GST is levied on smartphones. Thus, an iPhone with a base cost of Rs 1,00,000 becomes Rs 1,18,000 after GST alone.
In contrast, sales tax in the US varies between 0–10% depending on the state, making the effective tax burden far lighter even after tariffs.
Assembly Is Not Manufacturing
Though Apple partners Foxconn, Pegatron and Tata Electronics assemble iPhones in India, the distinction between assembly and full-fledged manufacturing is significant. The bulk of high-value components are still imported, limiting cost reductions. The Global Trade Research Initiative (GTRI) notes that while assembly costs in India average just $30 (Rs 2,520), in the US they would be $390 (Rs 32,760). Labour costs further tilt the scale as Indian workers earn about $230 a month, compared with $2,900 in the US.
This cost differential enables Apple to absorb US tariffs without passing the burden on to consumers.
Apple’s Premium Strategy in India
Apple’s market share in India is about 6% overall but surges to nearly 60% in the premium smartphone category. Industry watchers say the company deliberately positions the iPhone as a luxury product, preferring to protect margins rather than expand volumes through lower prices.
Dealer margins further inflate costs. With only two official Apple stores, in Mumbai and Delhi, the company relies heavily on third-party retailers, who take a margin of 10–12%. In contrast, Apple operates 247 company-owned outlets across the US, where direct sales reduce distribution costs.
Why US Prices Stay Lower
Despite tariffs, US prices remain competitive thanks to Apple’s vast market size, around 60 million units annually, and a robust supply chain. Reports suggest that Apple even shipped large consignments of iPhones to the US ahead of tariff deadlines, minimising cost escalation.
Will Prices Ever Fall in India?
There are some signs of relief. Under the government’s Production-Linked Incentive (PLI) scheme, Apple reportedly saves $35–50 million annually through tax breaks and subsidies. The Rs 15,000 price cut on the iPhone 16 Pro earlier this year was seen as a result of these incentives.
Analysts believe that if India begins large-scale domestic production of key components such as batteries and chips, prices could drop by 5–10% over the next few years. Until then, Indian consumers are likely to keep paying a “luxury premium” for Apple’s most sought-after device.
Get latest technology updates, including phone launches, gadget reviews, AI advancements. Stay informed with breaking tech news, expert insights, and trends from India and around the world. Also Download the News18 App to stay updated.
First Published:
September 10, 2025, 20:54 IST
News tech Why iPhones Cost More In India Despite Being Assembled Here
Disclaimer: Comments reflect users’ views, not News18’s. Please keep discussions respectful and constructive. Abusive, defamatory, or illegal comments will be removed. News18 may disable any comment at its discretion. By posting, you agree to our Terms of Use and Privacy Policy.
The crypto market thrives on bold predictions, but when AI weighs in, investors listen. Deepseek AI recently spotlighted an altcoin it says could deliver 1,000x returns, echoing Dogecoin and Pepe’s 2022 glory days, when memes and momentum turned tiny bets into life-changing gains.
But this time, the story feels different. Instead of hype alone, the altcoin flagged by Deepseek AI brings real utility alongside meme-level excitement, blending fun with function in a way the market hasn’t seen before. For traders who missed DOGE or PEPE’s once-in-a-cycle rallies, the question now is whether this next contender can live up to the AI’s bold forecast.
Dogecoin’s wild ride: A legend, not a blueprint
Dogecoin captures crypto’s paradox: big upside with plenty of chaos. With a $36 billion market cap and weekly gains of +14%, DOGE remains a cultural force in 2025. While hype has cooled, volatility lingers—its recent 30% monthly dip proved just how quickly sentiment can turn.
Still, Dogecoin’s power play doesn’t end there. The launch of the Grayscale Dogecoin Trust brought fresh institutional energy and a dash of legitimacy to the meme coin scene. Looking ahead, technical models draw a cautious yet hopeful picture: some forecasts see DOGE trading between $0.23 and $0.34 by year-end, offering potential gains of +20–40% if the broader market cooperates.
But for investors craving the explosive returns of 2022’s Dogecoin or Pepe boom, the big question remains: where do you look next?
Pepe’s encore, or just a warm-up?
Remember 2022, when Pepe exploded from zero to legend status faster than you could say “ribbit”? Well, 2025 is offering a more nuanced sequel, and it’s just as interesting.
Right now, PEPE is trading near $0.0000107, showing that while the fireworks of old aren’t back, the spark remains alive. Momentum seems cautiously optimistic, with analysts eyeing a short-term move beyond this level, supported by a bullish inverse head-and-shoulders pattern forming in the charts.
And it’s not just price tags moving, PEPE has quietly been burning tokens, trimming supply and keeping scarcity on its side.
Layer Brett: The next big leap?
Every cycle has its underdog, and if Deepseek AI is right, Layer Brett ($LBRETT) could be this cycle’s breakout star. On the surface, it looks like another meme coin, but dig a little deeper and you’ll see why analysts are buzzing.
Layer Brett takes the playful energy of meme culture and straps it onto the serious horsepower of Ethereum Layer 2 tech. We’re talking 10,000 transactions per second and fees so tiny they feel like a joke ($0.0001 per trade). Compare that to Ethereum’s infamous $10–$20 gas spikes, and you get why early adopters are grinning.
Then comes the sweet spot: staking. Instead of idle tokens gathering dust, Layer Brett’s presale buyers can lock in sky-high rewards (APY tipping over 800%), making it one of the most lucrative ecosystems for early believers. Add in a $1 million giveaway and a gamified staking model, and suddenly it feels less like a coin and more like a movement.
Conclusion
The crypto world never runs short of surprises, and every cycle crowns a new star. Dogecoin showed how far community and culture can take a coin, while Pepe reminded everyone how fast momentum can build in the meme space.
Now, attention is shifting to the next big thing. If DOGE proved memes can go mainstream and Pepe showed lightning can strike twice, Layer Brett is setting up to combine both lessons, meme charm plus real utility. No wonder Deepseek AI is tipping it as the altcoin with 1,000x potential in 2025.
Wish You Secured 100x Gains With PEPE? Secure Your LBRETT Tokens Today! Tokens are currently just $0.0055.
Edtech firm Coursera, Inc. has launched Skill Tracks, a data-backed learning solution that guides learners from foundational knowledge to expert proficiency through verified skill paths.
“Backed by Career Graph, a Coursera tool that uses millions of labour market data points, third-party competency frameworks, and a proprietary skills taxonomy, Skill Tracks map the relationships between jobs, skills, and learning content, ensuring organisations can close skill gaps quickly,” a company statement said here on Wednesday.
The application is currently available for Software and Product, IT, Data, and GenAI courses, with more to follow.
“Each Skills Track offers a structured learning experience that clearly defines the critical skills and courses employees need at each role and experience level. The solution integrates expert content, hands-on practice, and skills verification, enabling employees to apply new skills immediately and drive measurable business outcomes faster,” it said.
The NFL season is back, and so are new ways to watch without cable. Last year, fans who cut the cord often had to lean on live TV streaming services like YouTube TV, which cost about $83 a month. This season looks different. With new standalone apps and updated skinny bundles, it’s possible to put together a package that delivers the games you want for less.
Both ESPN and Fox have launched direct-to-consumer streaming services that give fans new options outside of the usual bundles. On top of that, platforms like Fubo and Sling are offering slimmer packages that cover most — though not all — of the channels needed to catch every matchup week after week.
I broke down the channel lineups, compared prices, and tested combinations to see which setup works best. If you want to follow the season without overspending, here’s how to stream NFL games in 2025 and the best service combo for football fans.
Don’t miss any of our unbiased tech content and lab-based reviews. Add CNET as a preferred Google source on Chrome.
The winning combination is the new Fubo Sports skinny bundle paired with Peacock. Keep reading to find out why this is the best option for NFL fans this season and why YouTube TV is still a good choice, especially if you aren’t already a subscriber.
NFL fans looking to save some money can use Fubo’s new skinny bundle and Peacock to watch the vast majority of NFL games this season, including those featuring America’s Team, the Dallas Cowboys.
Terence Lewis/Icon Sportswire via Getty Images
NFL channel lineup
The NFL season is split across six channels:
CBS: Sunday afternoon games
Fox: Sunday afternoon games
NBC: Sunday Night Football
ABC/ESPN: Monday Night Football
NFL Network: seven international games played in Europe
Not included in the above are Thursday Night Football, which streams on Prime Video, and the two Christmas Day games on Netflix. For the purposes of this exercise, I’m going to assume you have an Amazon Prime account that lets you watch the TNF games on Prime Video and that you have a Netflix account or will be spending Christmas with someone who has Netflix for the two Christmas Day games.
Streaming a la carte option
I first investigated using the new ESPN DTC and Fox One streaming services, along with Paramount Plus and Peacock, to watch the NFL this season. The coverage works out like this:
Paramount Plus: Sunday afternoon CBS games
Fox One: Sunday afternoon Fox games
Peacock: Sunday Night Football on NBC
ESPN DTC: Monday Night Football on ESPN/ABC
Pricing is as follows:
Paramount Plus: $8 per month
Fox One: $20 per month
Peacock: $11 per month
ESPN DTC $30 per month
That works out to a total of $69 per month or $276 for the four-month season. And it’ll soon be even less because ESPN and Fox announced a bundle for a combined $40 a month starting Oct. 2. So, if we subtract $10 per month for the last three months of the season, you’ll pay $246 for this quartet for the NFL season that runs from early September to early January.
There are two reasons why I don’t like this plan. First, it doesn’t save you all that much money compared to the other options, as you’ll see below. Second, switching between the CBS and Fox games on Sunday afternoons would be a lot slower and clumsier because you’d have to close Paramount Plus and then open Fox One and vice versa just to change channels. I’d much rather be able to toggle between CBS and Fox on the same service.
So, that led to my skinny bundle research.
Sports-focused skinny bundles from Fubo and Sling
Fubo and Sling TV each released skinny bundles geared toward sports fans, but neither offers all the channels you need to watch the NFL.
Sling’s new skinny bundle costs $20 a month and includes NBC along with ABC and Fox stations in select markets and NFL Network. It does not, however, offer CBS or ESPN. So, if you go with the $20-a-month Sling Select plan, you would then need to get Paramount Plus for $8 a month for Sunday afternoon CBS games and the DTC ESPN app at $30 a month for Monday Night Football. That’s a total of $58 a month or $232 for the four-month season.
Fubo’s new skinny bundle costs $56 per month and includes ABC, CBS and Fox as well as ESPN and NFL Network. The missing piece is NBC for Sunday Night Football, so you’d need to pair it with the $11-a-month Peacock Premium for a total of $67 a month. And right now, Fubo Sports is $10 off for the first month. So, for the season, Fubo Sports would cost $214 and Peacock would cost $44 for a total of $258.
CNET
Of the two skinny bundle combinations, the Fubo-and-Peacock plan is the better option. Even though it costs more than my Sling/Paramount Plus/ESPN plan, I like the idea of watching the CBS and Fox games on Sunday afternoons on Fubo and using Peacock only for the Sunday night game when it’s the only game on. Plus, keeping track of which games are on which service is easier with two streaming services than the trio required if you go the Sling route.
In both cases, you would spend less than with YouTube TV. YouTube TV currently has a deal, however, that keeps the costs pretty close if you aren’t already a subscriber. Right now, new customers can get the first two months of YouTube TV for $50 a month, which means for the NFL season, you would pay $266. But the price for current subscribers is $332.
The two best NFL streaming options
YouTube TV
Fubo Sports and Peacock Premium
Cost per month
$83
$56 + $11 = $67
Current discounts for new subscribers
$50/month for first two months
Fubo Sports for $46/month for first month
Cost for 4-month NFL season for new subscribers
$266
$258
Cost for season for current subscribers
$332
N/A
Add RedZone?
$11/month add-on
$10/month add-on
Cost for season with RedZone for new subscribers
$310
$298
Cost for season with RedZone for current subscribers
$376
N/A
Fubo
Fubo’s main package costs $85 per month but it has a new skinny bundle that includes most of the channels you need for the NFL and multi-view to watch up to four channels at once. This new Fubo Sports plan costs $56 per month ($46 for the first month) and includes Fox along with ABC and CBS (but not NBC) in addition to ESPN and NFL Network. It also includes access to ESPN’s new streaming app. You can add RedZone to Fubo’s skinny bundle for an extra $10 a month.
Fubo Sports is currently available in 50 markets and expanding daily, according to Fubo. You can plug in your zip code on Fubo’s welcome page to see if it’s available in your area.
Read our Fubo review.
CNET
YouTube TV/CNET
Priced at $83 per month, YouTube TV checks all the NFL boxes and is the best sports streaming service for NFL fans. Local channels ABC, CBS, Fox and NBC are included in most markets, as are ESPN and the NFL Network so you can watch Sundays and Monday nights. Its multi-view feature is great on Sunday afternoons where there are games on CBS and Fox at the same time (plus you can add up to two more sporting events like the US Open final or the MLB postseason games in October). You can get RedZone with the Sports Plus add-on for $11 a month.
Plug in your ZIP code on YouTube TV’s welcome page to see which local networks are available in your area.
Read our YouTube TV review.
Fubo Sports availability by NFL city
Fubo Sports?
AFC East
Buffalo Bills
No
Miami Dolphins
Yes
New England Patriots
Yes
New York Jets
Yes
AFC North
Baltimore Ravens
Yes
Cincinnati Bengals
No
Cleveland Browns
No
Pittsburgh Steelers
Yes
AFC South
Houston Texans
No
Indianapolis Colts
No
Jacksonville Jaguars
Yes
Tennessee Titans
No
AFC West
Denver Broncos
Yes
Kansas City Chiefs
No
Las Vegas Raiders
No
Los Angeles Chargers
Yes
NFC East
Dallas Cowboys
Yes
New York Giants
Yes
Philadelphia Eagles
Yes
Washington Commanders
No
NFC North
Chicago Bears
Yes
Detroit Lions
Yes
Green Bay Packers
No
Minnesota Vikings
Yes
NFC South
Atlanta Falcons
No
Carolina Panthers
No
New Orleans Saints
No
Tampa Bay Buccaneers
No
NFC West
Arizona Cardinals
No
Los Angeles Rams
Yes
San Francisco 49ers
Yes
Seattle Seahawks
No
Of the 50 metro markets where Fubo Sports is currently available, it’s available in 14 NFL cities, but with New York and Los Angeles having two teams each, that’s half of the league’s 32 teams.
It pays for existing YouTube TV subscribers to switch
When you factor in the current YouTube TV and Fubo Sports discounts for new subscribers, you’d save only $8 by going with my recommended pairing of Peacock and Fubo ($12 if you include RedZone.) In this case, I recommend YouTube TV because of the ease of having one streaming service for watching NFL football instead of two.
YouTube TV is the best single streaming service for football fans. It’s the cheapest live TV streaming service that has all the NFL channels and multi-view that lets you watch up to four games at once. Fubo’s standard plan is a close second; it costs only $2 more per month than YouTube TV, includes all the channels you need for NFL games and offers multi-view.
The math is different for existing YouTube TV subscribers. If you don’t want to watch RedZone with its new commercials, you’ll save $74 over the course of the season if you unsubscribe and switch to Fubo Sports and Peacock. And if you include RedZone in the equation, existing YouTube TV subscribers would save $78 this season by switching to the duo of Fubo Sports and Peacock.
They may have gained popularity for diabetes and weight loss, but GLP-1 medications like Ozempic and Wegovy have been linked to ever-expanding health benefits.
In fact, some doctors — including Dr. Terry Dubrow, a plastic surgeon and TV personality based in Newport Beach, California — recommend that everyone takes a low daily dose, even if they don’t need to lose weight.
Dubrow spoke on camera with Fox News Digital about the benefits of “microdosing” these medications. (See the video at the top of this article.)
How GLP-1s work
GLP-1 receptor agonists work by mimicking a hormone called glucagon-like peptide-1, which is released from the gut after eating.
The drugs help to regulate blood sugar, slow down emptying of the stomach and diminish appetite, and have also been shown to reduce the risk of heart disease.
Dr. Terry Dubrow, a plastic surgeon and TV personality based in Newport Beach, California, recommends that everyone takes a low daily dose of a GLP-1, even if they don’t need to lose weight.(Terry Dubrow)
“Sugar’s the enemy, and these drugs affect sugar in your blood,” Dubrow told Fox News Digital. “They affect the way insulin reacts.”
GLP-1s help insulin move the glucose (sugar) out of the bloodstream and into the body’s cells, where it can be used for energy or stored, the doctor said. The drugs also help to prevent the inflammation and damage sugar can cause in the blood vessels, nerves and organs.
‘NEXT OZEMPIC’ AIMS TO DELIVER 30% WEIGHT LOSS WITH FEWER SIDE EFFECTS
“I don’t think anyone would argue that if there was a way to manipulate the amount of sugar and inflammation your body’s exposed to, that is something we want to lean into. And that’s exactly what these drugs do,” Dubrow added.
In addition to regulating blood sugar and triggering weight loss, GLP-1s have also been approved to reduce the risk of cardiovascular events and kidney disease in certain patients.
“I have never seen a drug in the history of medicine be on such a rapid path to approval.”
“Even if you’re not overweight, being on these GLP-1 drugs … helps to minimize and prevent a repeat recurrent heart attack,” Dubrow said.
Semaglutide was also recently approved for MASH (metabolic dysfunction-associated steatohepatitis), an inflammatory form of fatty liver disease.
Dubrow spoke on camera with Fox News Digital about the benefits of GLP-1 medications.(Fox News Digital)
GLP-1s are also being studied for potential cognitive benefits in Parkinson’s patients.
“I have never seen a drug in the history of medicine be on such a rapid path to approval,” Dubrow said.
The case for microdosing
Along with other experts, Dubrow is an advocate for microdosing, which is where people take low, steady doses of GLP-1s every day, even if they don’t need them for diabetes or obesity.
While patients with diabetes take doses that increase every four weeks, microdosing entails using a low-level dose that doesn’t go up.
WEIGHT LOSS TOUGHER WITH ULTRA-PROCESSED FOODS LURKING IN NEARLY EVERY MEAL, SAY EXPERTS
A younger population on TikTok has zeroed in on microdosing, Dubrow pointed out — and he thinks everyone should be doing it.
“I am obsessed with the concept of microdosing,” he said. “I think maybe half the starting dose for diabetes is the way to go — and you probably don’t need it every seven days, it’s probably every 10 days, just to sort of modulate the amount of sugar in the blood.”
“Even if you’re not overweight, being on these GLP-1 drugs … helps to minimize and prevent a repeat recurrent heart attack,” Dubrow said.(iStock)
The doctor noted that there are still a lot of unknowns with GLP-1 medications.
“We are just figuring out now how to use these drugs for different indications, for different reasons,” he said. “We’re learning as we’re using it.”
“I am obsessed with the concept of microdosing.”
As with other drugs, like Botox, Dubrow said there is a bit of “human experimentation” at play.
“We’re figuring it out, and we’re teaching the medical profession how to do it. The patients are telling us how to use these drugs.”
Potential risks
GLP-1 medications have been linked to several potential risks. The most prevalent is gastrointestinal issues, such as nausea and vomiting.
Others have reported an increased risk of pancreatitis, muscle loss and thyroid tumors.
“I read every study that comes out on these drugs, and I can tell you, it’s very clear they don’t cause pancreatitas,” Dubrow said.
OZEMPIC PUSH FOR SENIORS? SOME DOCTORS SAY MORE PEOPLE AGE 65 AND OVER SHOULD BE ON IT
“In fact, if you really look at the populations who have been using it, pancreatitis is less in those populations.”
Dubrow confirmed, however, that the drug has been linked to an increased risk of the very rare medullary cancer of the thyroid.
Those who experience severe side effects from GLP-1s should talk to a doctor, Dubrow advised. (iStock)
“If you have a family history of that, that’s a contraindication to you using these drugs,” he said.
Regarding the digestive side effects, the doctor said the medications do slow down the GI tract, but it’s been shown that the body adjusts to that over time.
“These particular drugs are natural hormones that occur in our small intestine, and you get used to the side effects. They go away.”
CLICK HERE TO GET THE FOX NEWS APP
The severity of side effects is linked to the dose amount, Dubrow noted.
“The low dose, particularly the microdose, really has a low propensity toward the constipation, the nausea, the potential diarrhea, the GERD (reflux),” he said. “I think those side effects are less significant for people who microdose.”
To counteract the risk of muscle loss, Dubrow recommends increasing protein intake and incorporating resistance training as a core component of an exercise routine.
Those who do experience severe side effects should talk to a doctor, he advised.
Off-label use of GLP-1s, such as for microdosing, is common, Dubrow said — “but finding a doctor willing to prescribe can be difficult.”(iStock)
Drugmakers weigh in
When contacted by Fox News Digital, manufacturers of GLP-1 medications warned against microdosing the products.
“Lilly does not have any data on the benefits or risks of microdosing of Zepbound and Mounjaro,” said a spokesperson for Eli Lilly, maker of the GLP-1 drugs Mounjaro and Zepbounda. “Both autoinjectors and Zepbound vials are approved for single-use only — dose-splitting or ‘microdosing’ is not contemplated by the FDA label. As such, off-label use of Zepbound and Mounjaro may pose patient safety risks.”
“Off-label use of Zepbound and Mounjaro may pose patient safety risks.”
Novo Nordisk, maker of Ozempic and Wegovy, said it does not condone “misuse” of its products.
“It’s important to understand that for Wegovy, only the marked doses on the single-use, fixed-dose pens (0.25, 0.5, 1.0, 1.7 and 2.4 mg) are approved for use and represent an authentic FDA-approved medicine,” a spokesperson told Fox News Digital. “The starting dose of Wegovy® is 0.25 mg once a week, and the dose will gradually increase every four weeks. Patients should work with their healthcare professional to select either 1.7 mg or 2.4 mg for the maintenance dose.”
CHEAP OZEMPIC KNOCK-OFFS HAVE RISEN IN POPULARITY
“It is also important to note that the authentic Wegovy injectable pen is designed as a single-use pen, the dose is already set, and should not be altered or tampered with, and the pen must be disposed after one use.”
“Ozempic is a multi-use pen with one pen and multiple needles,” the spokesperson added.
Accessing GLP-1s
Dubrow said he’s not concerned about supply issues amid the growing popularity of GLP-1s, as major drug companies have the resources to “scale up” to meet the demand.
Off-label use of GLP-1s, such as for microdosing, is common, Dubrow said — “but finding a doctor willing to prescribe can be difficult.”
CLICK HERE TO SIGN UP FOR OUR HEALTH NEWSLETTER
The doctor cautioned against buying these drugs from online marketplaces, which he referred to as the “wild wild west.”
“It’s hard to find these drugs online from compounding pharmacies, because essentially they’re going rogue — it’s illegal. They’re not allow to do it,” he warned.
“These drugs are natural hormones that occur in our small intestine, and you get used to the side effects.”
“So if you’re getting it from rogue pharmacies that aren’t allowed to do it or are willing to bend the rules, what is it? You don’t know what you’re getting.”
“It may be an adulterated, weird version that has side effects or that’s not effective.”
Looking ahead
There are several next-generation drugs in development that combine multiple hormone pathways, Dubrow said.
“I predict within five years, we’ll have a pill … designed to manipulate hunger and insulin resistance,” he predicted.
For more Health articles, visit www.foxnews.com/health
Overall, Dubrow said, GLP-1s are “here to stay.”
“They’re just going to get better, and we’re going to learn how to use them in a more appropriate and clinically effective way,” he said. “So fasten your seatbelt. If you’re not on them now, you will be later.”
Melissa Rudy is senior health editor and a member of the lifestyle team at Fox News Digital. Story tips can be sent to [email protected].
You don’t have permission to access “http://food.ndtv.com/food-drinks/onam-feasting-explained-how-kerala-keeps-its-culinary-traditions-alive-through-community-meals-9245122” on this server.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-09-09/Expert-on-why-China-proposed-the-Global-Governance-Initiative–1GwH5MJNvTG/img/c3abdfc0fab94e1190565646acc42bd0/c3abdfc0fab94e1190565646acc42bd0.jpeg' alt='A view of the central business district in Beijing, China. /VCG'
The Global Governance Initiative (GGI) reflects China’s clear assessment and policy response to the current international situation at the political and security level, and it contributes Chinese wisdom and a stabilizing force to resolving international security dilemmas, an expert has said.
During an exclusive interview with CGTN, Cui Zheng, director of the Research Center for Russia, Eastern Europe, and Central Asian Countries at Liaoning University, said the original aim of the proposal is to advocate for a new vision of security centered on cooperation rather than confrontation.
China proposed the GGI during the recently held Shanghai Cooperation Organization Summit 2025, marking another important public good that China has shared with the world to promote building a more just and reasonable global governance system.
It is the fourth landmark global initiative proposed by China, following the Global Development Initiative, the Global Security Initiative and the Global Civilization Initiative.
Why China proposed the GGI
Cui said that with the Cold War mentality and bloc confrontation reemerging, some countries are keen to establish closed and exclusive “small circles,” leading to a resurgence of zero-sum games.
Meanwhile, some major countries apply double standards and use or discard international rules whenever they see fit. Unilateralism and power politics are impacting the international system with the UN at its core, resulting in a clear trend of weakening global security mechanisms, Cui noted.
Faced with a growing “security deficit,” China has recognized the importance of collective security and cooperative governance, he said. “Against this political and security backdrop, China has proposed the GGI, which encompasses five key principles of adhering to sovereign equality, abiding by international rule of law, practicing multilateralism, advocating the people-centered approach, and focusing on taking real actions.”
The proposal reflects China’s clear assessment and policy response to the current international situation at the political and security level, with the original aspiration being to advocate for a new vision of security centered on cooperation rather than confrontation, Cui said.
Meanwhile, from the economic sphere, global governance also faces severe challenges, he said, noting that economic globalization is encountering headwinds, with the world economy experiencing a weak and unbalanced recovery, marked by prominent structural difficulties such as low growth, high debt and high inflation, as well as the widening North-South development gap.
Cui said the original intention of the GGI in the context of economic development is to rectify governance imbalances, resist protectionism, and promote the establishment of a more inclusive and balanced economic governance system, thereby creating favorable conditions for both its own and global development.
<img src='https://news.cgtn.com/news/2025-09-09/Expert-on-why-China-proposed-the-Global-Governance-Initiative–1GwH5MJNvTG/img/af2ba21c7a94404d89f34bbaaecd5ed6/af2ba21c7a94404d89f34bbaaecd5ed6.jpeg' alt='An exterior view of the main venue of the Shanghai Cooperation Organization Summit 2025 in north China's Tianjin, September 1, 2025. /VCG'
How to decifer the five key principles?
Elaborating on the five key principles of the GGI, Cui said upholding sovereign equality is the cornerstone of modern international law. Meanwhile, safeguarding the international rule of law, with the UN Charter at its core, is the fundamental guarantee for global governance, and practicing multilateralism is the essential pathway to addressing global challenges.
He added that advocating for a people-centered approach emphasizes that global governance should take the well-being of all peoples as its starting point and ultimate goal. He said focusing on action-oriented implementation means that global governance must prioritize execution and tackle global issues with concrete results rather than mere diplomatic rhetoric.
Notably, “abiding by international rule of law” and “practicing multilateralism” can be regarded as the most lacking yet crucial principles of the current global governance system.
“Together, they point to one direction: building a just and collaborative international order,” he said.
The expert said it is not only a general trend globally but also the common expectation of the vast majority of countries.
Without sovereign equality, there can be no true multilateralism and exclusivity, he said, adding that without a people-centered approach and action-oriented implementation, global governance loses its value and purpose, and that cooperative commitments cannot be translated into tangible outcomes.
“Only through coordinated advancement can a durable and effective governance system be built,” Cui said.
These principles serve as a key step in overcoming the difficulties of global governance and moving toward a community with a shared future for humanity, he added.
Métier, an independent brand founded by Melissa Morris, opens its first U.S. store, having amassed an influential following with an eye toward elegant functionality.
Pri kreiranju rubrike Index Shopping nastojimo izdvajati odlične proizvode koji se i nama sviđaju te odlične akcije i popuste. Ne objavljujemo proizvode koje i sami ne bismo kupili ili smatramo da njihova promocija nije u skladu s profesionalnim standardima. Neki proizvodi u rubrici Index Shopping mogu biti sponzorirani.
APPLE je danas održao svoj Awe Dropping event na kojem je, između ostalog, predstavljena nova serija iPhonea 17. Stigli su iPhone Air, iPhone 17, iPhone 17 Pro i iPhone 17 Pro Max. Appleov događaj mogli ste pratiti uživo na Indexu.
Ukratko, poplava glasina koje su krenule još prošle godine donekle je “pokvarila” event jer se dosta toga već znalo. No, za one koji nisu pratili baš svaku sitnicu – evo sažetka.
Novi ultratanki iPhone je konačno stigao
Svojevrsna zvijezda eventa bio je novi ultratanki iPhone Air s debljinom od samo 5.6 milimetara i težinom od 165 grama. Ima zaslon od 6.5 inča, A19 Pro čip i dolazi u četiri boje: svemirski crna, oblak bijela, svijetlo zlatna i nebesko plava. Straga ima glavnu kameru od 48 MP, a sprijeda kameru od 18 MP. Podržava snimanje 4K videa pri 60 fps.
iPhone 17 uglavnom ostaje dizajnerski isti
iPhone 17 ostaje dizajnerski uglavnom nepromijenjen. Dolazi u pet boja: lavanda, svijetloplava, crna, bijela i maslinastozelena. Zaslon mu je 6.3 inča, nešto veći od prethodnika koji je imao 6.1 inča.
Straga ima dvije kamere – glavnu od 48 MP i ultraširoku od 48 MP. Prednja kamera ima 18 MP. Apple ističe da može snimati fotografije visoke kvalitete od 24 MP i 48 MP te 4K video pri 60 fps. Pokreće ga A19 čip.
iPhone 17 Pro i Pro Max donose novi izgled
iPhone 17 Pro i Pro Max bile su druge zvijezde eventa. Dolaze s novim dizajnom o kojem se već naveliko govorilo prije samog predstavljanja, pa je današnja potvrda bila očekivana. Imaju izdužen i blago povišen modul s kamerama na stražnjoj strani, iako kamere ostaju u gornjem lijevom kutu.
Tekst se nastavlja ispod oglasa
Kao što se i nagađalo, telefoni dolaze u tri boje – srebrnoj, tamnoplavoj i jarko narančastoj. Upravo se narančasta istaknula kao favorit kad su procurili prvi neslužbeni renderi. iPhone 17 Pro ima zaslon od 6.3 inča, dok Pro Max donosi 6.9 inča. Oba modela pokreće A19 Pro čip, a sprijeda imaju selfie kameru od 18 MP.
Straga oba imaju tri kamere – glavnu od 48 MP, ultraširoku od 48 MP i telefoto kameru od 48 MP. Mogu snimati fotografije vrlo visoke rezolucije – 24 MP i 48 MP – te Dolby Vision video od 4K pri 120 fps.
Cijene u SAD-u, Njemačkoj, Austriji i Italiji
To je ukratko sve o novim iPhoneima, a sada ono najvažnije – cijene. U SAD-u kreću ovako: iPhone 17 od 799 dolara, iPhone Air od 999 dolara, iPhone 17 Pro od 1099 dolara, a iPhone 17 Pro Max od 1199 dolara. Cijene za Hrvatsku još nisu poznate, no dostupne su za Njemačku, Austriju i Italiju – možete ih vidjeti u tablici niže.
Cijene u tablici preuzete su iz Apple Storea za Njemačku, Austriju i Italiju. U Njemačkoj i Austriji one su iste, dok su u Italiji nešto više. Najjeftiniji model je osnovni iPhone 17 s 256 GB, koji u Njemačkoj i Austriji stoji 949 eura, a u Italiji 979 eura.
Najskuplji je, očekivano, iPhone 17 Pro Max. U Njemačkoj i Austriji cijene se kreću od 1449 do 2449 eura, ovisno o odabranoj pohrani, dok je u Italiji raspon od 1489 do 2489 eura.
Svi uređaji bit će dostupni od 19. rujna.
Znate li nešto više o temi ili želite prijaviti grešku u tekstu? Kliknite ovdje.
Ovo je .
Homepage nacije.
Imate važnu priču? Javite se na [email protected] ili klikom ovdje. Atraktivne fotografije i videe plaćamo.
